Full text of "The ancient secret of the Flower of Life Volume 1 : an edited transcript of the Flower of Life Workshop presented live to Mother Earth from 1985 to 1994"

See other formats

lNCIENT sec

, OF THE

FLOWER OF L

HMHHi VOLUME 1

by yrunvalo Melchb

The Ancient Secret

THE FLOWER OF LIFE

An edited transcript of
the Flower of Life Workshop
presented live to Mother Earth
from I 985 to I 994

Written and Updated by
Drunvalo Melchizedek

No part of this book may be used
or reproduced in any manner without
prior written permission from the publisher,
except in the case of brief quotations
embodied in critical reviews
and articles.

Transcribed, first edit by
Livea Cherish

Book editor, Margaret Pinyan

Computer graphics originated by
Tim Stouse and Michael Tyree

ISBN 1-891824' 17-1

Published by

Light Technology Publishing
P.O. Box 3540
Flagstaff, AZ 86003
1-800-450-0985

(v/f

Vitruvius’s canon

with Flower of Life sacred geometries.

Acknowledgments

There are so many beings — in the hundreds — who have helped bring
this work to completion. I can’t name them all, but I feel a need to recog'
nize a few.

First of all, the two angels who entered my life long ago and who have
lovingly guided my life, you are most honored. Thoth, the ascended master
from Atlantis, Egypt and Greece, has given me a great deal of the informa-
tion in this book. My family, my wife Claudette and my children, who have
been my greatest love and inspiration in life. The 200 facilitators teaching
this work of the Flower of Life in 33 countries, who have given me invalu-
able feedback, support and love that has kept me strong. The thousands of
students who have written loving letters telling how this work has changed
their lives; this has given me strength to continue. Livea Cherish, who put
this work into book form from the video format, and Margaret Pinyan,
whose fine editing ability allows this book to read so smoothly. Tim Stouse,
who created about half the computer graphics, and Michael Tyree, who
created the other half; they have made it possible to understand what was
being said. And O’Ryin Swanson, the owner of Light Technology Pub-
lishing, who had the faith in me to publish this work.

To the rest of you who are too numerous to name, I thank you all from
my heart with the prayer that this work will actually help people under-
stand who they really are so that together we can create a more loving
world — and perhaps even a more loving universe. Thank you, dear ones.

PREFACE

Only one Spirit.

Long before Sumeria existed, before Egypt had built Saqqara, before the
Indus Valley flourished, Spirit lived in human bodies, dancing in high cul-
ture. The Sphinx knows the truth. We are much more than we know. We
have forgotten.

The Flower of Life was and is known by all life. All life, not only here but
everywhere, knew it was the creation pattern — the way in, the way out.
Spirit created us in this image. You know this is true; it is written in your
body, in all your bodies.

Long ago we fell from a very high state of consciousness, and the memo-
ries are just now beginning to emerge. The birth of our new/old conscious-
ness here on Earth will change us forever and return us to the awareness
that there is truly only one Spirit.

What you’re about to read is a journey of my life through this reality,
how I learned about Great Spirit and about the relationships that each of us
have with all life everywhere. I see Great Spirit in the eyes of everyone, and
I know that He/She is within you. You already hold within your deepest be-
ing all the information I will be sharing with you. When you first read it, it
may seem like something you’ve never heard before, but it isn’t. This is an-
cient information. You can remember things that are deep inside you, and
it’s my hope that this book will trigger these things so you can remember
who you are, why you came here, and what your purpose is for being here on
Earth.

It is my prayer that this book will become a blessing in your life and give
you a new awakening about yourself and something about you that is very,
very old. Thank you for sharing this journey with me. I love you deeply, for
in truth we are old friends. We are One.

Drunvalo

CONTENTS

Note to the Reader xi

Introduction xii

ONE Remembering Our Ancient Past I

How the Fall of Mantis Changed Our Reality 1

The Mer-Ka-Ba 4

Returning to Our Original State 5

A Higher, Inclusive Reality 6

Left- and Right-Brain Realities 8

Where We’re Going with This Information 8

Challenging the Belief Patterns of Our Parents 9

(fathering the Anomalies 10

The Dogon Tribe, Sirius B and Dolphin Beings 10

A Trip to Peru and More Dogon Evidence 14

A Sanskrit Poem and Pi 16

Deciphering the Hebrew Bible Code 16

How Old Is the Sphinx? 17

Edgar Cayce, the Sphinx and the Hall of Records 19

Introducing Thoth 20

My Story 23

Berkeley Beginnings 23

Dropping Out to Canada 23

The Two Angels and Where They Led Me 24

Alchemy and the First Appearance of Thoth 25

Thoth the Atlantean 27

Thoth, Geometries and the Flower of Life 28

TWO The Secret of the Flower Unfolds 3 1

The Three Osirian Temples in Abydos 31

Carved Bands of Time 32

The Seti I Temple 32

The “Third” Temple 33

The “Second” Temple’s Sacred Geometry and Flower of Life 33

Carvings of the Copts 37

The Early Church Changes Christian Symbolism 39

The Flower of Life: Sacred Qeometry 40

The Seed of Life 40

The Tree of Life Connection 40

The Vesica Piscis 41

Egyptian Wheels and Dimensional Travel 42

Dimensions, Harmonics and the Waveform Universe 43

Wavelength Determines Dimension 44

Dimensions and the Musical Scale 45

The Wall between Octaves 47

Changing Dimensions 47

The Star Tetrahedron 48

Threeness in Duality: The Holy Trinity 49

An Avalanche of Knowledge 50

Earth’s Relation to the Cosmos 52

Spirals in Space 53

Our Sirius Connection 53

A Galaxy’s Spiral Arms, Surrounding Sphere and Heat Envelope 55

Precession of the Equinoxes and Other Wobbles 55

Yugas 57

Modern Views on Pole Shifts 58

Iron Pilings and Core Samples 59

Pole-Shift Triggers 60

Magnetic Flow Changes 62

Harmonic and Disharmonic Levels of Consciousness 63

THREE The Darker Side of Our Present and Past 67

Our Endangered Earth 67

Dying Oceans 69

Ozone 70

The Greenhouse Ice Age 73

Ice Age to Warmth, a Quick Switch 74

Underground Atomic Bombs and CFCs 75

The Strecker Memorandum on AIDS 76

A Perspective on Earthly Problems 78

The History of the World 78

Sitchin and Sumeria 79

Tiamat and Nibiru 81

Nibiru’s Atmosphere Problem 82

The Nefilim Rebellion and the Origin of Our Race 84

Did Eve Come from the Gold Mines? 85

Thoth’s Version of the Origin of Our Race 85

Conceiving the Human Race: The Sirian Role 86

Enlil’s Arrival 87

Nefilim Mothers 88

Adam and Eve 89

The Rising of Lemuria 90

Explorations of Lemuria in 1910 91

Ay and Tiya and the Beginning of Tantra 92

Lemuria Sinks and Atlantis Rises 93

FOUR The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness

and the Creation of the Christ Grid 95

How the Lemurians Evolved Human Consciousness 95

The Structure of the Human Brain 95

The Attempt to Birth a New Consciousness on Atlantis 96

The Children of Lemuria Are Called Forth 97

The Aborted Evolution 98

Two Empty Vortexes Drew Extraterrestrial Races 98

Mars after the Lucifer Rebellion 98

Martians Rape the Efuman Child Consciousness and Take Over 100

Minor Pole Shift and the Subsequent Debate 100

The Martians’ Fateful Decision 102

Failure of the Martian Mer-Ka-Ba Attempt 102

A Disruptive Heritage: The Bermuda Triangle 103

The Solution: A Christ Consciousness Qrid 104

Ascended Masters Assist the Earth 104

A Planetary Grid 105

The Hundredth-Monkey Concept 106

The Hundredth Human 107

The Government’s Discovery of the Grid and the Race for Control ... 107

How the Grid Was Constructed, and Where 108

Sacred Sites 110

The Pyramid’s Landing Platform and the Ship beneath the Sphinx ... Ill
The V ulnerability of This Period and the Appearance of the Heroine . 112

Awaiting the Atlantean Catastrophe 113

The Three and a Half Days of the Void 114

Memory, Magnetic Fields and Mer-Ka-Bas 115

What the Thoth Group Did after Light Returned 116

Sacred Sites on the Grid 116

The Five Levels of Human Consciousness

and Their Chromosomal Differences 118

The Evidence in Egypt for a New Look at History 119

Giants in the Land 120

Stair-Step Evolution 122

The Tat Brotherhood 123

The Parallel Evolution in Sumer 124

Well-Kept Secrets in Egypt, Key to a New View of History 125

FIVE Egypt’s Role in the Evolution of Consciousness 127

Introduction to Some Basic Concepts 127

Egyptian Tools and Symbols of Resurrection 127

The Difference between Dying, Resurrection and Ascension 128

When the Sun Rose in the West 130

Osiris, the First Immortal 131

The Transpersonal Holographic Memory of the First Level

of Consciousness 132

The Introduction of Writing, Which Created the Second Level

of Consciousness 132

The Roadblock of Polytheism: Chromosomes and Neters 133

The Rescue of Human Consciousness 134

Akhenaten’s Life: A Brilliant Flash of Light 134

Creating the Bodies of Akhenaten, then Nefertiti 135

The New Rulership and the One God 136

The Reign of Truth, Which Depicts a Different Genetics 137

King Tut — and Other Elongated Skulls 142

Memory: The Key to Immortality 143

What Really Happened to Akhenaten? 144

Akhenaten’s Mystery School 145

The Essene Brotherhood and Jesus, Mary and Joseph 146

The Two Mystery Schools and the 48 Chromosomal Images 146

Qenesis, the Creation Story 147

Egyptian and Christian Versions 147

How God and the Mystery Schools Did It 148

First Create a Space 149

Next, Enclose the Space 149

Then Spin the Shape to Create a Sphere 150

The First Motion in Genesis 150

The Vesica Piscis, through Which Light Is Created 151

The Second Motion Creates the Star Tetrahedron 152

“Move to That Which is Newly Created” until Completion 152

SIX The Significance of Shape and Structure 1 55

Developing the Qenesis Pattern 155

The Torus, the First Shape 155

The Labyrinth as a Movement of Life-Force Energy 156

The Egg of Life, the Second Shape beyond Genesis 158

The Third Rotation/Shape: The Fruit of Life 159

Combining Male and Female to Create Metatron’s Cube,

the First Informational System 160

The Platonic Solids 161

Their Source: Metatron’s Cube 161

The Missing Lines 164

Quasi Crystals 165

The Platonic Solids and the Elements 166

The Sacred 72 168

Using Bombs, and Understanding the Basic Pattern of Creation 169

Crystals 170

Grounding Our Learning 170

Electron Clouds and Molecules 172

The Six Categories of Crystals 174

Truncating Polyhedrons 175

Buckminster Fuller’s Cube Equilibrium 177

Deep inside a Sesame Seed 177

The 26 Shapes 178

The Periodic Table 179

The Key: The Cube and the Sphere 180

Crystals Are Alive! 181

The Future Silicon/Carbon Evolutionary Leap 182

SEVEN The Measuring Stick of the Universe:

The Human Body and Its Geometries 185

Geometry within the Human Body 185

In the Beginning Is the Sphere, the Ovum 186

The Number Twelve 186

The Sperm Becomes a Sphere 187

The First Human Cell 188

Forming a Central Tube 188

The First Four Cells Form a Tetrahedron 189

Our True Nature Is in Our Original Eight Cells 190

The Star Tetrahedron/Cube of 16 Cells Becomes

a Hollow Sphere/Torus 191

Progression of Life Forms through the Platonic Solids 193

Underwater Birthing and Dolphin Midwives 193

Geometries That Surround the Body 195

The Masonic Key to Squaring the Circle 195

The Phi Ratio 197

Applying the Key to Metatron’s Cube 197

The Two Concentric Circles/Spheres 198

Studying da Vinci’s Canon 198

Phi Ratios in the Human Body 199

The Phi Ratio in All Known Organic Structures 202

Golden Mean Rectangles and Spirals around the Body 204

Male and Female Spirals 205

EIGHT Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity 207

The Fibonacci Sequence and Spiral 207

Life’s Solution to the Infinite Golden Mean (Phi) Spiral 208

Spirals in Nature 210

Fibonacci Spirals around Humans 211

The Human Grid and Zero-Point Technology 211

Male- and Female-Originating Spirals 212

Binary Sequencing in Cell Division and Computers 214

Searching for the Form behind Polarity 216

The Polar-Graph Solution 216

A Sixth-Grade Math Book 216

Spirals on a Polar Graph 217

Keith Critchlow’s Triangles and Their Musical Significance 219

Black- and White-Light Spirals 221

Maps for the Left Brain and Their Emotional Component 222

Arriving Back at the Fruit of Life through

the Second Informational System 222

Afterword 225

References 227

Note to the Reader

The Flower of Life Workshop was presented internationally by
Drunvalo from 1985 until 1994- This book is based on a transcript of the
third official videotaped version of the Flower of Life Workshop, which was
presented in Fairfield, Iowa, in October 1993. Each chapter of this book
corresponds more or less to the same-numbered videotape of that work-
shop. However, we have changed this written format where necessary to
make the meaning as clear as possible. Hence, we’ve shuffled paragraphs
and sentences and occasionally even whole sections to their ideal locations
so that you, the reader, can glide through this with the greatest of ease.

Please note that we have added current updates throughout the book,
which are in boldface. These updates will usually begin in a new paragraph
directly below the old information. Since so much information was pre-
sented in the workshop, we have divided the subjects into two parts, each
with its own table of contents. Volume 2 will follow later.

INTRODUCTION

Part of my purpose in presenting this work is to assist people to be aware
of certain events that have happened on this planet or are presently hap-
pening or are about to happen, events that are radically affecting our con-
sciousness and the way we’re living today. By understanding our present
situation, we can open to the possibility of a new consciousness, a new hu-
manity emerging on Earth. In addition, perhaps, my dearest purpose is to
inspire you to remember who you really are and give you the courage to
bring your gift to this world. For God has given each one of us a unique tal-
ent which, when truly lived, changes the physical world into a world of pure
light.

I’ll also be giving mathematical and scientific evidence to show how we
got here, as spiritual beings in a physical world, in order to convince the
left-brain analytical part of us that there is only one consciousness and one
God, and that we are all part of that Oneness. This is important, for it
brings both sides of the brain into balance. This balance opens the pineal
gland and allows the prana, the life-force energy, to enter the innermost
part of our physical being. Then and only then is the body of light called the
Mer-Ka-Ba possible.

However, please understand that the evidence I originally learned this
information from is in itself not important. The information could in most
cases be completely changed to different information without affecting the
outcome. In addition, I made many mistakes because I am now human.
What is most interesting to me is that every time I made a mistake, it led
into a deeper understanding of the Reality and a higher truth. So I say to
you, if you find an error, look deeper. If you get hung up on the information
by overestimating its value, you will totally miss the point of the work.
What I have just said is paramount to understanding this work.

I’ll also be giving my personal experiences, many of which are, I admit,
outrageous by the ordinary world’s standards. Perhaps they are not so out-
rageous by the old world’s standards, but it is you who must decide if they
are true or are just stories — or if it even matters. Listen deeply with your
heart, for your heart always knows the truth. Then I intend to share with
you, as much as I can in the second volume, a specific breathing technique
that will help you return to the vastly higher state of consciousness from
which we all came. It is the remembrance of the breath connected to the
lightbody of the Mer-Ka-Ba. This is one of the primary purposes of this
work.

At this point a short story of how this book came about is in order. You
will read about the angels, so I will not begin there, but rather with the later

events. In 1985 the angels asked me to begin teaching the meditation of
the Mer-Ka-Ba. I first learned it in 1971 and had been practicing it ever
since, but I did not want to become a teacher. My life was easy and fulfilled.
Basically, I was comfortable and didn’t want to work so hard. The angels
said that when someone is given spiritual knowledge, they must share it.
They said it was a law of creation.

Knowing they were right, I opened my first class to the public in the
spring of 1985. By 1991 my workshops were filled and overflowing, with
hundreds of people on the waiting list. I didn’t know how to reach everyone
who wanted this information. In fact, I could not. So in 1992 I made a de-
cision to release a video of one of my workshops and let it go out to the
world.

Within less than a year it was exploding in sales, but there was one big
problem. Most of the people who were watching the videos could not really
understand what was presented because it was outside the context and
content of their spiritual understanding. I gave a lecture to ninety people in
Washington State, all of whom had seen the video tapes but had never
been to one of my live workshops. It was there that I realized that only
about 1 5 percent of the people actually knew how to live the meditation by
using only the instructions on the video tapes. It was not working. Eighty-
five percent were confused and unclear about the instructions.

Immediately I took the video tapes off the market. This, however, did
not stop the video from continuing to be sold. People wanted the informa-
tion, so they began to copy the existing tapes and give, sell or lease them to
people worldwide. By 1993, it has been estimated that there were approxi-
mately 100,000 sets of these tapes in the world.

A decision was made. It was determined that the only way we could be
responsible with this information was to have a trained person in the room
when someone watched the video tapes. Trained means that we had care-
fully instructed a person to know and live the Mer-Ka-Ba. That person
could then orally teach another. This is how the Flower of Life facilitator
program was born. There are now over 200 trained facilitators in at least 33
countries. And the system has worked very well.

Now things are changing again. People are beginning to understand
higher consciousness and its value and concepts. It is now time to release
this book to the general public, which is now ready, we feel. A book has the
advantage that people can take more time to study the drawings and photos
carefully at leisure. And it will also have current updated information such
as follows:

Update: The times they are a-changing for sure! According to
Dow Jones Company, Inc. in their magazine American Demo-
graphics, February 1997, a ten-year scientific study has revealed
that a brand-new culture is emerging in America and the West-
ern world at this moment. Some have called this new culture the
New Age, but it has had other names, depending on the country.

From our experience, we believe it is a worldwide emerging cul-
ture. It is a culture that deeply believes in God, family, children,
spirit, Mother Earth and a healthy environment, femininity, hon-
esty, meditation, life on other planets and the unity of all life ev-
erywhere. The members of this new culture believe, according to
the study, that they are few and scattered. The survey revealed,
however, to everyone’s complete surprise, that “they” are one in
every four adults in America — an amazing 44 million adults
strong! Something huge is happening here. Now that the money
movers are aware of this enormous new market, you bet things
will change. Everything from movie and TV content to the use of
energy to the foods we eat and much more will be affected. Our
very interpretation of the Reality may even eventually change.

You are not alone, and it will not take long now for this fact to be
apparent to everyone.

Ever since the angels first appeared in 1971, 1 have been following their
guidance. This is still true today. It was the angels who gave me the medi-
tation of the Mer-Ka-Ba, and it is the meditation that is important here, not
the information that is presented. The information is used just to bring us
to a point of clarity so we can enter into a particular state ot consciousness.

Understand that as I received the scientific information in the early
years from 1971 to about 1985, I thought it was for my own personal
growth. When I would read a scientific paper or magazine, I would discard
it, not realizing that in the future I would have to prove what I was saying.
Most of the articles have been located, but not all. Yet this information
needs to go out. You, the reader, have strongly requested it. Therefore,
wherever I can I will document my statements, but some proofs are lost, at
least for the moment.

Also, part of the information is from nonscientific sources such as angels
or interdimensional communications. We understand that “straight sci-
ence” needs to be separated from a source who is considered psychic. Sci-
entists are concerned about their credibility. As a side note, I would like to
comment that this is similar to a male saying to a female that her feelings
are not valid and that only logic is true or valid, that logic must be followed.
Naturally, she knows another way; it is the way of life itself. It flows. It has
no “male logic,” but it is equally true. I believe in both, in balance.

If you can conceive of a person using both science and psychic abilities
together to explore the Reality, you have come to the right place. When-
ever possible I will differentiate between the two types of sources so that
you are clear. This means that you must go within yourself to see if this in-
formation is true within your world. If something does not feel right, then
discard it and go on. If it feels right, then live it and see if it is really true.
But it is my understanding that the mind will never really know the Reality
until it has joined with the heart. Male and female complete each other.
When you read this work you have two choices: You can come from

your left brain, your male side, and take notes and carefully see the logic in
each step, or you can come from your right brain, your female side, just let
go and don’t think — feel, watch it like a movie, expanded, not contracted.
Either way will work. It is your choice.

Finally, as I prepared this book, I had to make another decision. Should
the final stages of the meditation, the Mer-Ka-Ba itself, be released? I still
feel that an oral teacher is best. Would you jump to the final stages of Ti-
betan Buddhism after reading one book? What has been decided is that ev-
erything will be given here up to the time of the 1993 video, with the pre-
caution that you carefully enter the Mer-Ka-Ba and still seek out a Flower
of Fife facilitator. That information will be given at the end of the second
volume. Much has been learned after and beyond these writings that can
only be given orally and experientially.

The reason I am giving out the full information is that there are now at
least seven other authors who have reprinted this work in one form or an-
other. Some have taken it word for word, some have paraphrased me, and
some have used my artwork and sacred geometry drawings. Some have
asked and some have not. But the end result is that the information is out.
Much of it has been distorted and sometimes it is just plain not true. Please
know that it is not to protect myself, but to be responsible for the integrity
of the work. This information belongs to the universe, not me. It is only the
purity of the information that I am concerned with, and your clear under-
standing of it.

The exact instructions for the meditation are on the Internet
[www.floweroflife.com], but of course not the hidden knowledge. That is
experiential. You must live it. There is other information on the Net that
states it is coming from me when it is not. There is also information out
about the Flower of Fife that is simply wrong or out of date. Hopefully, this
work will make clear what has been veiled or distorted. I understand that
these people were coming from their hearts, looking for the truth, but it is
still my responsibility to you.

Therefore, in order to be clear and set the record straight, I am writing
this book for all of you who wish to truly understand and know the truth.

In love and service,

Drunvalo Melchizedek

O N E

Remembering Our Ancient Past

How the Fall of Atlantis Changed Our Reality

A little less than 13,000 years ago, something very dramatic hap-
pened in the history of our planet that we’re going to explore in
great detail, because what happened in the past is now affecting
every aspect of our life today. Everything we experience in our daily living,
including the particular technologies we use, the wars that erupt, the foods
we eat and even the way we perceive our lives, is the direct result of a cer-
tain sequence of events that happened during the end of Atlantean times.
The consequences of these ancient events have entirely changed the way
we live and interpret reality.

Everything is connected! There is only one Reality and one God, but
there are many, many ways that the one Reality can be interpreted. In fact,
the number of ways to interpret the Reality are just about infinite. There
are certain realities that many people have agreed on, and these realities are
called levels of consciousness. For reasons we’ll get into, there are specific
realities that extremely large numbers of beings are focusing on, which in-
clude the one you and I are experiencing right now.

At one time we existed on Earth in a very high level of awareness that
was far beyond anything we can even imagine right now. We hardly have
even the capability to imagine where we once were, because who we were
then is so out of context with who we are now. Because of the particular
events that happened between 16,000 and 13,000 years ago, humanity fell
from that very high place through many dimensions and overtones, ever in-
creasing in density, until we reached this particular place, which we call the
third dimension on planet Earth, the modern world.

When we fell — and it was like a fall — we were in an uncontrolled spiral
of consciousness moving down through the dimensions of consciousness.
We were out of control, and it was very much like falling through space.
When we arrived here in the third dimension, certain specific changes took
place, both physiologically and in the way we functioned in the Reality.
The most important change was in the way we breathed prana, a Hindu

one— $ I

word for the life-force energy of this universe. Prana is more critical to our
survival than air, water, food or any other substance, and the manner in
which we take this energy into our bodies radically affects how we perceive
the Reality.

In Atlantean times and earlier, the way we breathed prana was directly
related to the electromagnetic energy fields that surround our bodies. All
the energy forms in our fields are geometric, and the one we will be working
with is a star tetrahedron, which consists of two interlocked tetrahedrons
[Fig. 1-1]. Another way of thinking of it is as a three-dimensional Star of
David.

The apex of the upward-pointing tetrahedron terminates one hand’s
length above the head, and the apex of the downward-pointing tetrahe-
dron terminates one hand’s length below the feet. A connecting tube runs
from the upper apex to the lower point through the body’s main energy cen-
ters, or chakras. This tube, for your body, has the diameter of the circle you
make when you touch your longest finger to your thumb. It looks like a
glass fluorescent tube, except it has a crystalline structure at the ends that
fit into the two apexes of the star tetrahedron.

Before the fall of Atlantis, we used to bring prana simultaneously up and
down this tube, and the two prana flows would meet inside one of our chak-
ras. Specifically how and where the prana meets has always been an impor-
tant aspect of this ancient science, which today is still being studied
throughout the universe.

Another major point in the human body is the pineal gland, located al-
most in the center of the head, which is a huge factor in consciousness.
This gland has degenerated from its original size, comparable to a ping-
pong ball, to its present size, that of a dried pea, because we forgot how to
use it a long time ago — and if you don’t use it, you lose it.

Pranic energy used to flow through the center of the pineal gland. This
gland, according to Jacob Liberman, author of Light, the Medicine of the Fu-
ture, looks like an eye, and in some respects it is literally an eyeball. It’s
round and has an opening on one portion; in that opening is a lens for fo-
cusing light. It’s hollow and has color receptors inside. Its primary field of
view — though this has not been determined scientifically — is upward, to-
ward the heavens. Just as our eyes can look up to 90 degrees to the side
from the direction they face, the pineal gland can also “look” as much as 90
degrees away from its set direction. Just as we cannot look out the back of
our heads, the pineal gland cannot look down toward the Earth.

Held inside the pineal gland — even in its shrunken size — are all the sa-
cred geometries and understandings of exactly how the Reality was created.
It’s all there, in every single person. But these understandings are not acces-
sible to us now because we lost our memories during the Fall, and without our
memories we started to breathe differently. Instead of taking in prana
through the pineal gland and circulating it up and down our central tube, we
started breathing it in through the nose and mouth. This caused the prana to

ONE

Remembering Our Ancient Past $ 3

bypass the pineal gland, which resulted in our seeing things in a totally differ-
ent way, through a different interpretation (called good and evil or polarity
consciousness) of the One Reality. The result of this polarity consciousness
has us thinking that we’re inside a body looking out, somehow separated from
what’s “out there.” This is pure illusion. It feels real, but there is no truth at all
to this perception. It’s merely the view of reality we have from this fallen
state.

For example, there is nothing wrong with anything that happens, for
God is in control of the creation. But from one point of view, a polarity
view, looking at the planet and how it evolves, we should not have fallen
down here. In a normal curve of evolution, we should not be here. Some-
thing happened to us that was not supposed to happen. We went through a
mutation — we had a chromosome breakage, you might say. So the Earth
has been on red alert for almost 13,000 years, and many beings and levels of
consciousness have been working together to figure out how to get us back
onto the path (DNA) where we were before.

The effect of this “mistaken” fall in consciousness and the ensuing ef-
forts to get us back on track is that something really good — something unex-
pected, something amazing — has resulted. Beings from all over the uni-
verse who have been trying to help us with our problem have initiated vari-
ous experiments on us in an effort to assist, some legally and some without
license. One particular experiment is resulting in a scenario that no one
anywhere had ever dreamed would become a reality, except one person in a
single culture from a long-distant past.

The Mer-Ka-Ba

There’s another major factor that we’re going to focus on in this story.
Thirteen thousand years ago we were aware of something about ourselves
that we’ve since completely forgotten: The geometric energy fields around
our bodies can be turned on in a particular way, which is also connected to
our breath. These fields used to spin at close to the speed of light around
our bodies, but they slowed down and stopped spinning after the Fall.
When this field is turned back on and spins, it’s called a Mer-Ka-Ba, and its
usefulness in this Reality is unparalleled. It gives us an expanded awareness
of who we are, connects us with higher levels of consciousness and restores
the memory of the infinite possibilities of our being.

A healthy spinning Mer-Ka-Ba is fifty to sixty feet in diameter, propor-
tionate to one’s height. The rotation of a spinning Mer-Ka-Ba can be dis-
played on a computer monitor using the appropriate instruments, and its
appearance is identical with the infrared heat envelope of the galaxy [Fig.
1-2] — the same basic shape as the traditional flying saucer.

The word Mer-Ka-Ba is made up of three smaller words, Mer, Ka and
Ba, which, as we are using them, came from ancient Egyptian. It is seen in
other cultures as merkabah, merkaba and merkavah. There are several pro-
nunciations, but generally you pronounce it as if the three syllables are sep-

arate, with equal accents on each. Mer refers to a specific kind of light that
was understood in Egypt only during the Eighteenth Dynasty. It was seen
as two counterrotating fields of light spinning in the same space, which are
generated by certain breathing patterns. Ka refers to the individual spirit
and Ba refers to the spirit’s interpretation of its particular reality. In our
particular reality, Ba is usually defined as the body or physical reality. In
other realities where spirits don’t have bodies, it refers to their concepts or
interpretation of the reality they bring with them.

So the Mer-Ka-Ba is a counterrotating field of light that affects spirit
and body simultaneously. It is a vehicle that can take spirit and body (or
one’s interpretation of reality) from one world or dimension into another.
In fact, the Mer-Ka-Ba is much more than this, because it can create reality
as well as move through realities. For our purposes here, however, we will
focus mainly on its aspect as an interdimensional vehicle (Mer-Ka-Vah
means chariot in Hebrew) that will help us return to our original higher
state of consciousness.

Returning to Our Original State

To be clear, returning to our original state is a natural process that can
be easy or difficult according to our belief patterns. However, simply be-
coming involved with the technical relationships of the Mer-Ka-Ba, such as
correcting our breathing patterns or mentally realizing the infinite connec-
tions to all patterns of life, for example, is not enough. At least one other
factor is even more important than the Mer-Ka-Ba itself, and that is the un-
derstanding, realization and living of divine love. For it is divine love,
sometimes referred to as unconditional love, that is the primary factor that
allows the Mer-Ka-Ba to become a living field of light. Without divine

ONE — Remembering Our Ancient Past O 5

love, the Mer-Ka-Ba is just a machine, and this machine will have limita-
tions that will never allow the spirit that created it to return home and
reach the highest levels of consciousness — the place where there are no
levels.

We must be experiencing and expressing unconditional love in order to
move beyond a certain dimension, and the world is fast heading toward that
higher place. We are heading away from the place of separatism where we
see ourselves inside the body looking out. That view will be gone soon, to
be replaced with a different view of reality where we’ll have the sense and
knowledge of absolute unity with all life; and that sense will grow more and
more as we continue to move upward through each level on our journey
home.

Later we will explore special ways of opening the heart — to kindle com-
passionate, unconditional love so that you can have a direct experience. If
you can just let this happen, you may discover things about yourself that
you didn’t know before.

Dear reader: There are procedures in the workshops that can-
not be reproduced on the tapes or in this book because they are
totally experiential. They are just as important as the knowl-
edge, for without them the knowledge is worthless. The only
way we can give these experiences now is through oral tradition
through a living workshop. But that may change in the future.

A Higher, Inclusive Reality

Another component we’re going to focus on has many names, but in
present-day terms it’s usually referred to as the higher self. In the higher-
self reality, we literally exist in other worlds besides this one. There are so
many dimensions and worlds that it almost surpasses human capability to
conceive of it. These levels are very specific and mathematical, and the
spacing and the wavelengths in and between these levels are identical to
the relationships within musical octaves and other aspects of life. But right
now your third-dimensional consciousness has probably been severed from
your higher aspect, so you’re aware only of what’s going on here on Earth.
This is not the norm for beings existing in a natural unfallen state. The
norm is that beings first become aware of several levels at once, like chords
in music, until finally, as they grow, they become aware of everything every-
where at once. The following example is unusual, but it demonstrates what
is being talked about.

I’m in communication with someone right now who is aware of many
levels at once. The scientists who are studying her are speechless; they can-
not understand how she does what she’s doing. She might be sitting in a
room, yet she claims to be watching from outer space. NASA checked her
out by asking her to “see” a specific satellite and give specific information
that could be known only if someone were actually there. She gave them
readings off their instruments, which I’m sure seemed impossible to the sci-

entists. She said she was flying alongside the satellite and simply read them.
Her name is Mary Ann Schinfield. She is legally blind, yet she can walk
around a room and no one would know that she cannot see. How does she
do it?

Recently she called me, and while we were talking she asked if I would
like to see through her eyes. Of course I said yes. Within a few breaths, my
field of vision opened up, and I was looking at or through what looked like a
huge television screen that filled my field of vision. What I saw was as-
tounding. It seemed that I was moving very fast through space without a
body. I could see the stars, and at that moment Mary Ann and I, seeing
through her eyes, were moving alongside a string of comets. She was very
close to one of them.

It was one of the most real out-of-body experiences I have ever had.
Around the perimeter of this “TV screen” there were about twelve or four-
teen smaller TV screens, each one giving extremely fast images. One of
them up in the upper right-hand corner was flashing rapidly moving images
such as triangles, light bulbs, circles, wavy lines, trees, squares etc. It was
this screen that told her what was in the immediate space where her body
was located. She could “see” through these seemingly unrelated images.
There was another screen in the bottom left-hand corner where she com-
municated with other extraterrestrial life that was within this solar system.

Here is a person who is in a three-dimensional body on Earth, but has full
memory and experience of living in other dimensions. This manner of interrupt-
ing the Reality is unusual. People do not normally see inner TV screens, but we
do exist in many other worlds even though most of us are not aware of it.

You presently exist on probably five or more levels. Though there is a
break between this dimension and others, when you connect with your
higher self you mend that break, after which you start becoming aware of
the higher levels and the higher levels start paying more attention to you —
communication begins! This connection to the higher self is probably the
most important thing that could happen in your life — more important than
understanding any of the information I’ll be giving. Connecting with the
higher self is more important than learning to activate the Mer-Ka-Ba, be-
cause if you connect yourself to your Self, you will get absolutely clear infor-
mation on how to proceed step by step through any reality and how to lead
yourself back home into the full consciousness of God. When you connect
with your higher self, the rest will happen automatically. You will still have
to live your life, but everything you do will have great power and wisdom
within your actions, thoughts and emotions.

Exactly haw to connect with one’s higher self is what many people, in-
cluding myself, have been trying to understand. Many people who have
somehow made this connection often don’t know how it happened. In this
course I’ll attempt to explain exactly how to connect with your higher self.
I’ll do my best.

Left- and Right-Brain Realities

There’s one more component to this picture. I’ll be spending perhaps half
of our time on left-brain information like geometries and facts and all kinds of
information that to many spiritual people would seem totally unimportant.
I’m doing this because when we fell, we divided ourselves into two — really
three, but primarily into two — main components, which we call male and fe-
male. The right brain, which controls the left side of our body, is our feminine
component, though it’s truly neither male nor female. This is where our psy-
chic and emotional aspect lives. This component knows that there’s only one
God and that oneness is all there is. Though it can’t really explain it, it just
knows the truth. So there are not a lot of problems with the female compo-
nent.

The problem is on the left side of the brain — the male component. Be-
cause of the nature of how the male brain is oriented — a mirror image of the
female — it has its logical component forward (more dominant), while the
female has its logical component toward the back (less dominant). The left
brain does not experience oneness when it looks out into the Reality; all it
sees is division and separation. For that reason, the male aspect of us is hav-
ing a difficult time down here on Earth. Even our major sacred books such
as the Koran, the Hebrew Bible and the Christian Bible have divided every-
thing into opposites. The left brain experiences that there is God, but then
there’s also the devil — perhaps not quite as strong as God, but a huge influ-
ence. So even God is seen in terms of duality, as one pole of the opposing
forces of dark and light. (This is not true in all sects of these religions. A
few of them see that there is only God.)

Until the left brain is able to see the unity running through everything, to
know that there is truly one spirit, one force, one consciousness moving through
absolutely everything in existence — until it knows that unity beyond any
doubt — then the mind is going to stay separated from itself, from its wholeness
and from the fullness of its potential. Even if there’s the slightest doubt at all
about unity, the left-brain aspect will hold us back, and we can no longer walk on
water. Remember, even Thomas walked on water for a short moment when Je-
sus asked him to, but one little cell in his big toe said, “Wait a minute, I can’t do
this,” and Thomas sank into the cold water of polarity reality.

Where We’re Going with This Information

I’m dedicating a lot of our time to showing you beyond any shadow of a
doubt that there is only one image in everything. There is one and only one
image that created all that exists, and that image is the same image that has
formed the electromagnetic field around your body. The same geometries
that are in your field can be found around everything — planets and galaxies
and atoms and everything else. We will examine this image in great detail.

We’re also going to go into the history of the Earth, because it is very im-
portant to our present situation. We cannot really understand how we got
here if we don’t know the process that led us to this point. So we’ll spend a

considerable length of time talking about what happened a long time ago;
then slowly we’ll come forward until we get to what’s going on today. It’s all
tied together. The same old thing has been going on all along, and it’s still
going on — in fact, it has never stopped.

Those of you who are predominantly right-brained may feel inclined to
skip this left-brained material, yet it is most important for you to hang in
there. It is through balance that spiritual health returns.

When the left brain sees absolute unity, it begins to relax and the corpus
callosum (the band of fibers joining the two hemispheres) opens in a new
way, allowing an integration between the two sides. The link between the
left and right brain widens, a flow starts, information is passed back and
forth, and the opposing sides of the brain begin to integrate and synchronize
with each other. If you’re hooked up for biofeedback, you can actually see
this happening. This action turns on the pineal gland in a different manner
and makes it possible for your meditation to activate the lightbody of the
Mer-Ka-Ba. Then the whole process of regeneration and recovery of our
previous higher levels of consciousness can proceed. It is a growth process.

If you are studying any other spiritual practice, you do not need to stop
in order to begin the work with the Mer-Ka-Ba — unless, of course, your
teacher does not want to mix traditions. Other meditations that are based
on truth can be extremely useful once the Mer-Ka-Ba is spinning, because
then noticeable results can evolve very, very quickly. I will repeat myself
just so you know for sure: The lightbody of the Mer-Ka-Ba does not contra-
dict or inhibit any other meditation or religion that upholds the belief that
there is only one God.

So far we’ve talked only about the ABCs of spirituality. These are just
the beginning steps. But these first steps are the most important ones I
know.

Your left brain may love all this information and file it away in neatly la-
beled pigeonholes; this is fine. Or you can just relax and read this like an
adventure story, a mind-stretcher, a fantasy. However you read it, the fact
that you are reading this book is what matters, and you will receive what-
ever you’re meant to receive.

In the spirit of oneness, then, let us embark upon this journey of explo-
ration together.

Challenging the Belief Patterns of Our Parents

Many ideas we believe today and “facts” we’ve been taught in school are
just not true, and people are now beginning to realize this worldwide. Of
course, usually these patterns were believed to be true at the time they were
taught, but then concepts and ideas changed, and the next generation was
taught different truths.

For example, the concept of the atom has changed dramatically so many
times over the last ninety years that at this point they don’t really adhere to
a concept. They use one, but with the understanding that it may be wrong.

ONE — Remembering Our Ancient Past $ 9

At one time the atom was thought to he like a watermelon and the elec-
trons were like seeds inside the watermelon. We really know very little
about the Reality that exists around us. Quantum physics has now shown
us that the person performing the experiment influences the outcome. In
other words, consciousness can change the outcome of an experiment, de-
pending on its belief patterns.

There are other aspects of ourselves we hold true that may not be true at
all. One idea that has been held for a long time is that we’re the only planet
in existence with life on it. In our heart of hearts we know this is not true,
but this planet will not admit this truth in modern times even though there
is powerful evidence of UFO sightings that have been coming from all over
the world nonstop for over fifty years. Any subject other than UFOs would
have been believed and accepted by the world had this subject not been so
threatening. Therefore, we’re going to look at evidence that suggests there
is a higher consciousness in the universe, not only in the stars, but perhaps
right here on the Earth.

As a side note, I suggest that you see t<wo videos aired on NBC
Television as a special, hosted by Charlton Heston: “The Mys-
terious Origins of Man” and “The Mystery of the Sphinx. ”

Both are distributed by BC Video at l -800-508-0558.

10 # The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Gathering the Anomalies

The Dogon Tribe, Sirius B and Dolphin Beings

This drawing [Fig. 1-3] is truly remarkable. The information in it came
from a book about Sirius, The Sirius Mystery by Robert Temple. He had, 1
was told, between ten and twelve different subjects to choose from, each
one of which would lead to the same conclusion but from a totally different
point of view. I’m glad he chose the one he did, because it happens to relate
to another aspect of what we will be talking about.

Robert Temple was one of the first people to reveal certain facts —
though scientists have known for a long time — about an African tribe near
Timbuktu called the Dogons. This tribe holds information that is simply
impossible for them to have by any standards in our view of the world today.
Their information destroys everything we think we know about ourselves in
regard to being alone.

You see, the Dogons have a cave on their land that stretches way back
into a mountain, and in this cave are wall drawings over 700 years old. One
particular man, the holy man of their tribe, sits at the front of this cave to
protect it. This is his lifetime job. They feed him and take care of him, but
no one can touch him or get close to him. When he dies, another holy man
takes his place. In this cave are amazing drawings and bits of information.

Fig. 1-3. Dogon draw-
ing of Nommo, the
great culture hero who
brought civilization to
Earth. Because both
eyes are shown in the
drawings, they are pre-
sumed to be plan
views, which means
the tail is opposed (like
a dolphin) rather than
lateral, as it is with a
fish. The waterline is
clearly indicated, im-
plying that the Nommo
is air-breathing. This
drawing came out of
the Australian maga-
zine Simply Living.

I’m going to tell you about two of these bits — and these are only two of
many.

First of all, we’re referring to the brightest star in the sky (with an appar-
ent magnitude of -1.4) — Sirius, now called Sirius A. If you look at Orion’s
Belt, those three stars in a row, and follow the line downward to your left,
you see a very bright star, which is Sirius A. If you follow them upward
about twice the distance, you see the Pleiades. The information in the
Dogon cave specifically showed another star rotating around Sirius. The
Dogons are very specific about this star. They say it’s very, very old and
very small, and that it’s made out of what they called the “heaviest matter
in the universe” (which is close, but not actually correct). And they say
that it takes “close to fifty years” for this small star to rotate around Sirius.
This is detailed stuff. Astronomers were able to validate the existence of
Sirius B, a white dwarf, in 1862, and only about fifteen or twenty years ago
could they validate the other information.

Now, stars are very much like people, as you will begin to see. They're
alive, and they have personalities and many qualities like we have. On a
scientific level, they have growth stages. They start out as hydrogen suns,
like ours, where two hydrogen atoms come together in a fusion reaction to
form helium. This process creates all the life and light that’s on this planet.

ONE — Remembering Our Ancient Past I I

Update: A magnetar (magnet
+ star) has been discovered
only recently; it is a neutron
star that rotates about 200
times per second, generating
an enormous magnetic field.
Scientists detected on August
27, 1998, what they described
as a starquake. Their instru-
ments picked up radio waves
from SGR 1900+14. The ra-
diation overwhelmed gamma-
ray detectors on seven space-
craft, causing two to shut
down, including the Near
Earth Asteroid Rendezvous
(NEAR) spacecraft.

As a star further matures, another fusion process begins — the helium pro-
cess — where three helium atoms come together to form carbon. This
growth process continues through various stages until it gets all the way up
through a particular level of the atomic table, at which point the star has
reached the length of its life span. At the end of its life, as far as we know,
there are two primary things a star can do. New data on pulsars and
magnetars give other options. One, it can explode and become a super-
nova, a huge hydrogen cloud that becomes the womb for hundreds of new
baby stars. Two, it can rapidly expand into what’s called a red giant, a huge
explosion that engulfs all its planets — burns them up and destroys the
whole system, then stays expanded for a long time. Then slowly it will col-
lapse into a tiny old star called a white dwarf.

What the scientists found rotating around Sirius was a white dwarf,
which corresponded exactly to what the Dogons say. Then science
checked to see how much it weighed, to see if it really was the “heaviest
matter in the universe.” The original computations — made about twenty
years ago — determined that it weighed about 2000 pounds per cubic inch.
That would certainly qualify for heavy matter, but science now knows that
this was an extremely conservative estimate. The newest estimate is ap-
proximately 1.5 million tons per cubic inch! Black holes aside, that would
surely seem to be the heaviest matter in the universe. This means that if
you had a cubic inch of this white dwarf, which is now called Sirius B, it
would weigh about one and a half million tons, which would go right
through anything you set it on. It would head toward the center of the
Earth and actually oscillate back and forth across the core for a long time
until friction finally stopped it in the very center.

In addition, when they checked the rotational pattern of Sirius B
around the larger Sirius A, they found it to be 50.1 years. Now, that abso-
lutely could not be a coincidence! It’s just too close, too factual. Yet how
did an ancient primitive tribe know such detailed information about a star
that could be measured only in this century?

But that is only part of their information. They also knew about all the
other planets in our solar system, including Neptune, Pluto and Uranus,
which we have discovered more recently. They knew exactly what these
planets look like when you approach them from space, which we have also
only recently learned. They also knew about red and white blood cells, and
had all kinds of physiological information about the human body that we’ve
recently learned. All this from a “primitive” tribe!

Naturally, a scientific team was sent over to ask the Dogons how they
knew all this. Well, that was probably a big mistake for these researchers,
because if they accepted that the Dogons really have this information, then
by default they must accept how they got it. When they asked, “How did
you learn this?” the Dogons replied that the drawings on the walls of their
cave showed them. These drawings show a flying saucer — it looks just like
that very familiar shape — coming out of the sky and landing on three legs;

12 O THE ANCIENT SECRET OF THE FLOWER OF LIFE

then it shows the beings in the ship making a big hole in the ground, filling
it with water, jumping out of the ship into the water, and coming up to the
edge of the water. These beings look very much like dolphins; in fact,
maybe they were dolphins, but we don’t know for certain. Then they
started communicating to the Dogons. They described where they came
from and gave the Dogon tribe all this information.

That’s what the Dogons said. The scientists just sat there. Eventually
they said, “Nooo, we didn’t hear that.” Because it didn’t fit into anything
they thought they knew, they just kind of hid the information somewhere
under a carpet in their minds. Most people, scientists included, just do not
know what to do with these kinds of facts. There has been a lot of informa-
tion like this that we just don’t know what to do with. Since we can’t find a
way to integrate this unusual information with what we already think we
know, we just stick it away somewhere — because the theories don’t work,
you know, if we keep it.

Here’s another thing the Dogons knew. This little drawing was on the
walls [Fig. 1-4], but the scientists didn’t know what the heck it was . . . until

Fig. 1-4- Two linear exten-
sions, representing the rev-
olution of Sirius B around
Sirius A. The diagram on
the left is based on Dogon
drawings; the projection of
the right was calculated by
Robert Temple.

computers calculated the orbits of Sirius A and Sirius B. As seen from
Earth, this pattern shown in the Dogon cave is identical to the pattern
made by Sirius B moving around Sirius A — in a specific time frame, which
happens to be from the year 1912 to the year 1990. The dolphins, or who-
ever those beings were, gave this present-day diagram/time pattern to the
Dogons at least 700 years ago!

Now, as this has unfolded in my life, I’ve discovered that both 1912 and

ONE — Remembering Our Ancient Past O I 3

1990 were very important years. In fact, the period between these two years
was probably one of the most important periods ever in the history of the
Earth. I’ll explain more about this as we go on, but briefly, in 1912 time-
travel experiments began, as did experiments between the extraterrestrial
Grays and humans. (We will explain later.) And 1990 was the first year
that the ascension grid for our planet was completed. And many other
events happened during this period. The fact that the Dogon wall drawings
pinpointed this period could be considered clearly prophetic.

14 O The ancient Secret of the Flower of life

A Trip to Peru and More Dogon Evidence

I first came upon this Dogon information in 1982 or ’83. I found myself
around a group of people who were working with the Dogon tribe, who
were actually going there and communicating with them. Then in 1985 I
took a group of people to Peru, including one of these Dogon researchers.
We checked into a plush hotel in Cuzco called the Hotel San Agustin, in-
tending to go walking the following day on the Inca Trail, about forty miles
over the mountaintops. You walk up to about 14,000 feet, then drop down
to Machu Picchu about 5000 feet below. It’s beautiful.

Our hotel was a Spanish adobe palace hidden behind high walls in the
center of town. We were paired off so we could get cheaper rates. I was
with the Dogon researcher, and he was constantly telling me about what
they were learning, including a lot more than we’re discussing here. We got
a room, and the room number was 23. He got all excited and exclaimed,
“Room 23! — a very auspicious number!” From Africa, where the Dogons
live, the star Sirius disappears below the horizon and is out of sight for a
couple of months; then it appears again on the morning of July 23, when it
rises about one minute before the Sun. It appears, bright ruby-red, just
above the horizon, almost exactly due east. Sixty seconds later the Sun
emerges. So you can see Sirius for just a moment, then it’s gone. This is
called the heliacal rising of Sirius, which was a very important moment for
most of the ancient world, not just for the Dogons and Egypt.

This is the moment when Sirius and the Sun and the Earth are in a
straight line across space. In Egypt, almost all the temples were aligned
with this line, including the gaze of the Sphinx. Many of the temples had a
tiny hole in the wall somewhere; then there would be another tiny hole
through another wall, then through another wall and another, going into
some dim inner chamber. In that chamber there would be something like a
cube or Golden Mean rectangle of granite sitting in the middle of the room
with a little mark on it. At the moment of the heliacal rising of Sirius, a
ruby-red light would strike the altar for a few seconds, which would begin
their new year and the first day of the ancient Sothic calendar of Egypt.

Anyway, here we were in Peru, getting the room and remarking about
the number 23. We walked into the room and set our things down; then we
both looked at the bed, and on the bedspread we saw this image [Fig. 1-5].

We just stood there in amazement, looking at it for about five minutes

before we could even speak, because the wheels in our heads were going
around so fast, trying to figure out how this could be.

If you look again at the image of the beings who got out of the flying sau-
cer, they looked very similar. They were half in and half out of water — air-
breathing mammals — and their tail fins were horizontal, not vertical like
fish. The only sea creatures with such fins are cetaceans such as dolphins
and whales.

But the Dogon image is from Africa . . . and here we were in Peru, staring
at a very similar-looking mammal. This just didn’t compute. So we asked
the hotel personnel, “What do you know about this emblem?” They didn’t
know much. They were mostly of Spanish descent and weren’t tied much
into Indian legends. They didn’t know the old stories of creation, so they
had no idea what it meant. Here’s a picture of the whole insignia [Fig. 1 -6] :

In order to find out more, we rented a little car and drove around the
area asking other people. We finally ended up at Lake Titicaca, talking to
some Uros Indians. At one point I asked, “What do you know about this?”
They said, “Oh, yeah,” and proceeded to tell me a story that sounded very
much like what the Dogons had told! This is their creation story: A flying
saucer came out of the sky and landed in Lake Titicaca on the Island of the
Sun. These dolphinlike creatures jumped into the water, came up to the
people, told them where they came from, and in the beginning, began an in-
timate relationship with the pre-Inca peoples. It was this connection with

the Sky People, according to
the story, that launched the
Incan empire.

I just sat there with my
mouth open. Afterward,
Simply Living magazine out of
Australia published a whole
series of articles on this sub-
ject. When people started
investigating, they found
that cultures all over the
world have similar stories.
There are twelve different cul-
tures in the Mediterranean
alone that tell a similar story.

We’ll come back to the
dolphins a lot in this work be-
cause it seems they played a
huge role in the unfoldment
of consciousness on this
planet.

Fig. 1-6. Logo of Hotel San Agustin, Cuzco.

w s

• •. 5. *|l

IwSSI

HOTIL

san agustin

INTERNATIONAL

CUZCO- PERU

ONE — Remembering Our Ancient Past O 1 5

Deciphering the
Hebrew Bible Code

Update: There is a book called
the The Bible Code by Michael
Drosnin. This book, once it is
known by the public, will have
a tremendous effect on con-
sciousness and will greatly
break down the sense of sepa-
ration from God.

Dr. Eli Rips, an Israeli mathe-
matician, has discovered that
there is a sophisticated com-
puter code in the Hebrew Bible.
It has been checked by Yale and
Harvard and even the Pentagon,
all of whom have further proved
it is true. This is a scientific dis-
covery, not just someone’s fan-
tasy. What they have found is
that (probably) all persons and
events that occur in time and
space have been written in the
Bible thousands of years ago,
which clearly shows that the fu-
ture is known. Detailed infor-
mation such as the date and
place you were bom and the
date and place that you will die
(in the future) as well as the pri-
mary achievements of your life
are already written in the Bible.
This may sound outrageous, but
it is true. The odds have been
calculated to be at least one in a
million. Read the book for
yourself. Is this the “secret
book” that the Bible says is hid-
den and will not be opened until
the “end of time”? According to
the Mayan calendar, we are en-
tering “the end of time.”

A Sanskrit Poem and Pi

Let’s look at something totally different now to suggest that the ancient
beings of this world were perhaps more evolved than we give them credit
for. Figure 1-7 is a phonetic translation of a Sanskrit poem. It was shown in
an article published in Clarion Call magazine, in the early eighties, 1 believe.
The English translation is shown below the Sanskrit.

gopi bhagya madhuvrata
srngiso dadhi sandhiga
khala jivita khatava
gala hala rasandhara

‘O Lord [Krishna], anointed with the yogurt of the
milkmaids’ worship, O savior of the fallen,

O master of Shiva, please protect me.”

Fig. 1-7. From Clarion Call magazine: “Mathematics and the Spiritual Dimension” by
David Osborn.

Over many years researchers have discovered that each one of these
Sanskrit sounds corresponds to a numerical value. It took them a long time
to figure this out. Figure 1-8 shows all the various sounds that are possible
in Sanskrit. Each sound has a numerical value from zero to nine, and some
syllables have two number values. For instance, ka, a primary sound, trans-
lates as spirit and corresponds to either zero or one, depending on its usage, I
assume.

When researchers took these different sound values and applied them to
this particular poem, a mathematical figure came up that is extremely signifi-
cant: 0.3141592653589 . . . continuing out to thirty-two digits. This is the
exact number of pi divided by ten carried to thirty-two digits! No one has
ever figured out how to calculate for the decimal point, which is why this is pi
over ten. If you move the decimal point one digit to the right, then it would
be 3.1415 etc., the diameter of a circle divided into its circumference. Well,
they might have

known about the di-

ameter of a circle di-

ya =

vided into its cir-

kha

tha

pha

ra =

cumference, but in

la =

our culture’s under-

gha

dha

bha

va -

standing of who

gna

sa =

these ancients were,

there is no possibility

cha

tha

that they could have

calculated it with

jha

dha

that kind of accu-
racy. Yet here is un-
deniable evidence.

pi/10 = 0.3141592653589793238462643383279

Fig. 1-8. All Sanskrit sounds, with their numerical values.

16 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

There are many, many of these poems and many, many other writings in
Sanskrit. I don’t know how far they've come in deciphering all of it, but I
think that when all is said and done, it’s going to be pretty remarkable.

How did they do that? Who were these people, really? Is it possible that
our understanding of them is not exactly correct? Were they maybe a little
more advanced than we thought? This poem definitely suggests this.

How Old Is the Sphinx?

The following is also probably one of the most important discoveries on
the planet ever. It’s happening right now at this moment. However, it be-
gan about forty years ago with R.A. Schwaller de Lubicz. He’s a famous
self-educated Egyptian archaeologist who has written many books. He and
his stepdaughter, Lucie Lamy, have demonstrated a profound understand-
ing of sacred geometry and the Egyptian culture.

While observing the Sphinx, Schwaller de Lubicz became especially in-
terested in the tremendous wear on its surface. Toward the back of the
Sphinx there are wear patterns that cut twelve feet deep into its surface, and
this type of wear pattern is totally different from the patterns on other build-

built at the same time, are textured by sand and wind, which is consistent if
the buildings are, as believed, around 4000 years old. But the wear patterns
on the Sphinx look like they’ve been smoothed with water. According to
mainstream thought, the Sphinx, the Great Pyramid and other associated
buildings were built about 4500 years ago in the Fourth Dynasty under
Cheops.

When this discrepancy was brought up to Egyptian archaeologists, they
refused to listen. This went on for about forty years. Other people noticed
it, but the Egyptians simply would not admit the obvious. Then a man
named John Anthony West became interested. He has written many books
on Egypt, including Serpent in the Sky and a fine Egyptian guidebook. When
he heard about the Sphinx dispute, he went to look for himself. He could
see that the wear was incredibly excessive and that it did look like water
had caused the wear. He also found, like Schwaller de Lubicz, that he could
not get the accredited archaeologists to listen to his beliefs about the
Sphinx.

There’s a reason for this denial, 1 believe. Please understand, 1 am not
trying to discredit a major religion. I am merely reporting. You see, there
are around 5000 Egyptian archaeologists in the world, and they all pretty
much agree with each other in most ways. This agreement has become a
tradition. They make little changes, but not too many (and not too fast, ei-
ther), and most agree on the age of the pyramids. All of these archaeolo-
gists are Muslim, with a few exceptions, and their holy book is the Koran.
The Koran, in its traditional interpretation, says that creation began about
6000 years ago. So if a Muslim were to say that a building is 8000 years old,
he would be disputing their bible. They cannot do that, they simply cannot,
so they won’t even talk about it, won’t even discuss it.

If you say that anything is more than 6000 years old, they will not agree.
They will do anything to protect their belief, making sure that no one
knows about any man-made objects that might be more than 6000 years
old. For instance, they’ve enclosed the pyramids of the First Dynasty,
which are older than Saqqara, and built military fortifications around and
within the walls so nobody can get to them. Why? Because they are older
than or close to 6000 years. So John Anthony West stepped outside the
Egyptian archaeology world and brought in an American geologist named
Robert Schoch, who did a computer analysis that gave a totally different,
scientific point of view. Lo and behold, beyond any doubt at all, the Sphinx
does have water wear patterns — and in a desert that’s at least 7000 years
old, it puts it well over the age of 6000 years.

On top of that, computers have calculated that it would take a mini-
mum of 1000 years of continuous, torrential rains dumped on the Sphinx —
nonstop for twenty-four hours a day — to cause that kind wear. This means
the Sphinx has to be at least 8000 years old minimum. Because it’s not
likely that it bucketed rain nonstop for 1000 years, they figured that it’s got
tobeatleast 10- to 15,000 years old, maybe a lot older. When this evidence

gets out to the world, it will be one of the most powerful revelations on this
planet in a very, very long time. It’s going to have a bigger effect on the
world’s view of itself than probably any other discovery. This evidence has
not entered the schools or general knowledge yet, though it has gone all
around the planet. It has been looked at and checked out and thought
about and argued over, and in the end most scientists have agreed that it
cannot be doubted.

So the age of the Sphinx has now been put back to at least 10,000 years,
maybe 15,000 or a lot more, and it’s already changing the entire worldview
of the people on the cutting edge of archaeology. You see, judging by every-
thing we presently think we know, the oldest civilized people in the world
were the Sumerians, and they go back to approximately 3800 B.C. Before
that, conventional knowledge says there was nothing but hairy barbari-
ans — no civilization at all anywhere on the whole planet. But now we have
something man-made and civilized that’s 10,000 to 15,000 years old. That
changes everything!

In the past, when something new like this is discovered that has a major
influence on the viewpoint of the world, it takes about a hundred years for
it to get to the people, for the average person to say, “Oh, yes, that is true!”
But this time it’ll happen a lot quicker because of television, computers, the
Internet and the way things are today. Now scientific circles, for the first
time ever, are actually beginning to look at the words of Plato in a new light
when he talked about another culture, another continent, from a dim past
called Atlantis.

The Sphinx is the largest sculpture on the planet. It was not done by
hairy barbarians, but by a very sophisticated culture. And it was not done by
anybody we now know here on Earth. From a scientific point of view, this is
the first solid evidence to be accepted about the true age of civilization.
There has been lots of other evidence, but people just kept putting it under
the table. This information on the Sphinx has made a crack in our
worldview. This took place about 1990, and the crack is now widening.
We now have the accepted evidence that there absolutely had to have been
someone on Earth who was highly civilized as early as 10,000 years ago.
You can see how that’s going to completely change our view of who we
think we are.

Edgar Cayce, the Sphinx and the Hall of Records

I find it extremely interesting that the Sphinx is causing this change, es-
pecially in view of what the A.R.E. [Association for Research and Enlight-
enment] has been saying. The A.R.E., a foundation based on teachings of
“the sleeping prophet,” Edgar Cayce, says that the Sphinx contains the
opening to the Hall of Records. The Hall of Records is an alleged under-
ground chamber containing physical proof of superior ancient civilizations
on Earth.

Cayce is a very interesting prophet. He made about 14,000 predictions

Fig. 1- 10. Hieroglyphs for Thoth.

Introducing Thoth

Who is Thoth? What you’re seeing in this illustra-
tion [Fig. 1-10] is Egyptian hieroglyphics. Everything
in the picture is hieroglyph, not just the images at the
top. “Hieroglyph” means holy writings. These hiero-
glyphs are drawn on papyrus, which was supposedly the
first paper in the world. The person depicted here is a
man named Thoth, pronounced with a long o. (Some

in his lifetime, and by 1970, 12,000 of those predictions had come true and
2,000 were still in the future. And in all those predictions, he made only
one tiny mistake. Out of 12,000 predictions, that’s incredible. You can al-
most forgive him for that one mistake: He received a letter from a man in
France asking for a health reading, but Cayce mistakenly gave a reading on
the inquirer’s twin brother. That was his only mistake.
Every other thing came true exactly as Cayce had pre-
dicted — up until 1972. However, after 1972 mistakes
began to happen, and I’ll explain why at the right time.
(For those who think Cayce’s prediction that Atlantis
would rise to the surface before 1970 did not come true,
check out the January 1970 issue of Life magazine. Is-
lands did come to the surface in the area where Cayce
said Atlantis was located; some sank again and some are
still above water today.)

According to Cayce, the right paw of the Sphinx is
the opening to the Hall of Records. Both Thoth and
Cayce have said that there are physical objects hidden in
a room underground near the Sphinx that absolutely
prove that there were advanced cultures on this planet
long before us. Thoth says that these objects will prove
the existence of these advanced cultures as far back as
five and a half million years. In comparison, our level of
culture is but a child to these ancient cultures.

In fact, according to Thoth, civilization on this planet
actually extends back 500 million years, and our very first
culture originally came from the stars. But something
colossal happened five and a half million years ago that
affected the akashic records. I cannot understand how
that could even take place, because of what I understand
the akashic records to be. According to what I know,
anything that occurs, occurs forever in vibrational form.
So 1 don’t understand how the akashic records can be de-
stroyed; yet I’m told this is true.

20 The Ancient Secret oe the Flower of Life

people say Thawth, but he pronounces it Thoth.)

The hieroglyph shows his head as an ibis, a bird.

So whenever you see this man with wide shoulders
and a strange-looking bird head, it’s a hieroglyph
depicting this particular being, Thoth. He’s hold-
ing papyrus reeds because he was the person who
introduced writing to the world. The introduc-
tion of writing was a profoundly important event,
probably the most influential act that has ever oc-
curred on this planet in this cycle. It made more
changes in our evolution and consciousness than
any other single act in our known history.

Thoth is also holding in his left hand some-
thing called the ankh, which is the symbol for
eternal life. The ankh is an extremely significant
symbol in this work, just as it was one of the pri-
mary symbols in Egyptian times. There is an electro-
magnetic energy field surrounding our bodies shaped
like the ankh. The remembrance of it, according to the
Egyptian point of view, is the beginning of our return-
ing home to eternal life and true freedom, so the ankh
is a primary key.

All these things are an introduction. I’ll be skipping
all over the place, talking about many different subjects
that won’t seemingly be tied together; then slowly, as
we proceed, I’ll bring them all together in one coherent
picture.

On my second trip to Egypt, I went everywhere
looking for this little bird called an ibis. They suppos-
edly lived in the reeds, so I looked through the reeds
with my camera. I kept looking for one the whole time
I was there. I looked from one end of Egypt to the other
but never saw a single ibis. I had to wait until I got back
to the Albuquerque Zoo to take this picture [Fig. 1-
11]. They look kind of like short-legged storks with
bright pink feathers.

Here is Thoth writing [Fig. 1-12). This is a copy off
a wall, and this next photo [Fig. 1-13] is an actual wall
sculpture. He’s kneeling here, holding the pen and
writing. This was a revolutionary act that had never
been attempted before in this cycle. According to the

Fig. 1-12. As Thoth is said to have
invented writing, he is often depicted
with a papyrus roll and stylus. Copy
of a wall sculpture.

Fig. 1-11. Ibises in the Albuquerque Zoo.

ONE — Remembering Our Ancient Past $ 21

Fig. 1-13. Thoth writing (figure on
right), an original wall carving.

conventional version of history, this act took place in Egypt during the time
of Saqqara, but I have my doubts. I personally believe that it took place
about 500 years earlier. Saqqara was built during the First Dynasty, approx-
imately 3300 B.C. When we talk about the pyramids older than Saqqara,
you will understand why I believe this.

22 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

My Story

Berkeley Beginnings

Some of you may not accept the possibility of communication with be-
ings on other dimensional levels, but this is what took place in my life. I
didn’t ask for it, it just happened. As it turned out, I had almost daily com-
munication on interdimensional levels for a number of years with this man
Thoth. Now that I understand it more, my personal relationship with
Thoth really began when I was in college at Berkeley.

I majored in physics and minored in mathematics until I was just about
to receive my diploma. I needed only one more quarter to graduate. I de-
cided I didn’t want the degree, because I had discovered something about
physicists that turned me off to the idea of becoming involved in a science
that I believed was no science at all. This is all changing now. This in itself
could be a book, but the why of it is related to the same thing I said about ar-
chaeologists. Physicists, just like archaeologists, will turn their heads away
from the truth if it means too much of a change too fast. Perhaps the real
truth is that this is human nature. So I switched to the other side of my
brain and started majoring in fine arts. My counselors thought I was nuts.
“You’re going to give up a physics degree?” they asked. But I didn’t need it,
didn’t want it. Then to graduate I had to go for two more years majoring in
fine arts and art history.

Changing majors makes sense now, because when you study the ancient
writings, you find out that the ancients perceived art, science and religion
as interwoven, interconnected. So the programming I was putting myself
through was appropriate for what I’m doing now.

Dropping Out to Canada

I got my degree in 1970. After going through Vietnam and looking at
what was happening in our country at that time, I finally said, “I’ve had it!
This is it! I don’t know how long I’m going to live or what’s going to hap-
pen, but I’m just going to be happy and do what I’ve always wanted to do.” I
decided to get away from everything and go live in the mountains like I had
always wanted. So I left the United States and went to Canada, not know-
ing there would be thousands of Vietnam War protesters following me a
year later. I married a woman named Renee, and the two of us went into
the middle of nowhere and found a little house on Kootenay Lake. We
were a long way away from anything. You had to walk four miles from the
nearest road to get to my house, so we were really isolated.

I began to live my life exactly like I had always wanted to live. I had al-
ways wanted to see if I could live on nothing, so I gave it a try. It was a little
scary at first, but it got easier as time went on, and pretty soon I became ad-
ept at natural living. I lived a wonderful and full life on basically no money.
After a while I realized, Hey, this is a lot easier than holding a job in a city! I
had to work hard for only about three hours a day, then I had the rest of the

day off. It was great. I could play music and run around and have a good old
time. And that’s exactly what I did. I had fun. I played music about ten
hours a day, with lots of friends who came from miles around. Our place
had gained quite a reputation by then. We just had fun. In doing this,
which is very important to my understanding now, I discovered something
about myself. It was from this — “returning to my inner child” is how I
phrase it these days — that my inner child was released, and in that releas-
ing, something happened to me that was the catalyst that led into my life as
it is today.

The Two Angels and Where They Led Me

While in Vancouver, Canada, we decided that we wanted, to know
about meditation, so we started studying with a Hindu teacher who lived in
the area. My wife and I were very serious about wanting to understand
what meditation was about. We had made hooded white silk robes to show
respect. Then one day, after practicing meditation for about four or five
months, two tall angels about ten feet high appeared in our room! They
were right there — one was green and one was purple. We could see
through their transparent bodies, but they were definitely there. We did
not expect this to take place, nor did we ask for it. We were just following
the instructions that our Hindu teacher was giving us. I don’t believe he
fully understood either, as he kept asking us many questions. From that
moment on my life was never the same. It wasn’t even close.

The first words the angels said were, “We are you.” I had no idea what
they meant. I said, “You’re me?” Then slowly they began to teach me vari-
ous things about myself and the world and about the nature of conscious-
ness. Finally my heart completely opened to them. I could feel tremendous
love from them, which totally changed my life. Over a period of many years
they led me to about seventy different teachers. They would actually tell
me in meditation the address and the phone number of the teacher I was to
go see. They would tell me either to call first or just show up at his or her
house. So I would do this — and it would always be the right person! Then I
would be instructed to stay with that person for a certain length of time.
Sometimes, right in the middle of a particular teaching, the angels would
say, “Okay, you’re done. Leave.”

I remember when they sent me to Ram Dass. I hung out in his house for
about three days, wondering what the heck I was doing there; then one day
I went to touch him on the shoulder to say something, and I got a zap that
practically knocked me to the floor. The angels said, “That’s it. You can
leave now.” And I said, “Okay.” Ram Dass and I became friends, but what-
ever I was supposed to learn from him was over within that one second.

The teachings of Neem Karoli Baba, Ram Dass’s teacher, are very im-
portant to me. It was his belief that “the best form to see God is in every
form.” I’ve also been exposed to Yogananda’s work and cherish who he
was. Later we’ll be talking about Sri Yukteswar and some of his work. I’ve

24 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of life

been intensely involved in almost all the major religions. I’ve resisted the
Sikhs because I do not believe that military preparation is necessary, but
I’ve studied and practiced almost all the rest of them — Muslim, Jewish,
Christian, Taoist, Sufi, Hindu, Tibetan Buddhist. I‘ve deeply studied Tao-
ism and Sufism — I spent eleven years with Sufism. However, through all
this study, the most powerful teachers for me have been the Native Ameri-
cans. It was the Indians who opened the doorway for all my spiritual
growth to take place. They’ve been a very powerful influence in my life.
But that’s another story, some of which I’ll give in time.

All the world’s religions are speaking of the same Reality. They have
different words, different concepts and ideas, but there’s really only one Re-
ality, and there’s only one Spirit moving through all life. There might be
different techniques to get to different states of consciousness, but there’s
only what is real, and when you’re there you know it. Whatever you want
to call it — you can give it different names — it’s all the same thing.

Alchemy and the First Appearance ofThoth

At one point the angels led me to a Canadian man who was an alche-
mist and who, amongst other things, was actually turning mercury into gold
(though it can also be done from lead, which is more difficult). I studied al-
chemy for two years with him and watched this process with my own eyes.
He had a sphere of glass about 18" in diameter filled with a liquid, and little
bubbles of mercury would rise into it. They would go through a series of flu-
orescent colors and changes, rise to the top, turn into little balls of solid
gold, then sink down to the bottom. Then he would collect all these little
balls of gold to use for his spiritual work. He owned an ordinary-looking lit-
tle house in Burnaby, British Columbia, on an ordinary-looking street. If
you drove down the street, his house would look like any of the others. But
under his house was a hidden laboratory. He had taken the millions of dol-
lars in gold and dug straight down, building a huge complex filled with ev-
erything from electron balances to you-name-it so that he could further his
work. He didn’t care about money at all. And of course the purpose in al-
chemy is not to make gold or money, but to understand the process of how
mercury or lead changes into gold.

It’s the process that’s important. Because the process of going from mer-
cury to gold is identical to the process that a human follows going from this
level of consciousness into Christ consciousness; there is an exact correla-
tion. As a matter of fact, if you were to study all of alchemy, you would have
to study every single chemical reaction in existence, because every reaction
has a corresponding experiential aspect to something in life. It’s the old “as
above, so below” saying. (By the way, Thoth is the man who originally
spoke those words when he was known as Hermes in Greece.)

At one point I was sitting in front of this alchemist teacher, and we were
doing a particular kind of open-eyed meditation where we were locking
breaths and breathing a certain way. He was sitting about three feet away

Update: In light of the new
findings around white-powder
gold discovered by David Hud-
son, it may be that there is a
physical correspondence with
gold as well as a spiritual one.

ONE — Remembering Our Ancient Past O 25

from me, and we had been in this meditation for maybe an hour or two, a
pretty fair length of time. Then something happened — something I had
never seen before, ever! He kind of went fuzzy, then disappeared right be-
fore my eyes! He was just gone. I’ll never forget it. I sat there for a moment
and didn’t know what to do. Then I hesitantly reached over and felt for
him. There was nobody there. I thought, Wow! I was totally in astonish-
ment. It blew my mind (as we would say in the ’60s and 70s), it definitely
did! I didn’t know what to do, so I just continued to sit there. Then pretty
soon a different person appeared in front of me, somebody completely and
absolutely different! It wasn’t even close. My alchemist teacher was about
thirty-five years old and this guy was maybe sixty or seventy, and a lot
shorter — maybe five feet three or four.

He was a little guy, and he looked Egyptian. He had dark skin and his hair
was kind of long, but pulled back. He had a clean-shaven face except for a
thick beard growing from his chin that was perhaps six inches long and tied in
five places. He was dressed in simple tan-colored cotton clothing with long
sleeves and pants and sat cross-legged facing me. After my shock wore off, I
just looked into this person’s eyes. There I saw something I hadn’t seen be-
fore except in babies’ eyes. When you look into a little baby’s eyes, you know
how easy it is because there’s nothing going on, no judgment, no nothing.
You can just fall into their eyes, and they’ll fall into yours. Well, that’s what it
was like to look at this man. There were just these big baby eyes in this old
body. He didn’t have anything going on. I had an instant connection with
this person, and there were no barriers. He touched my heart like no one had
ever done before.

Then he asked me a question. He said there were three missing atoms in
the universe, and did I know where they were? I had no idea what he
meant, so I said, “Well, no.” Then he gave me an experience, which I’m
not going to describe, that sent me way back in time to the beginning of cre-
ation and brought me forward again. It was a very interesting out-of-body
experience. When I came back, I understood what he meant about the
three missing atoms — at least I thought I did. And I said, “Well, I think
what you mean is this,” and proceeded to tell him what I thought. When I
finished, he just smiled, bowed and disappeared. A little later my alchemist
teacher reappeared. My teacher didn’t know the change had taken place.
Everything that happened seemed to be only in my experience.

I went away from that totally preoccupied with the experience. At the
time, the angels had me working with four other teachers, so I was going
from one to the next to the next, and my life was really full. But I couldn’t
think about anything except this little man who had appeared to me. I
never asked him who he was, and he didn’t return. Time went on, and fi-
nally the experience started to fade away. But I always carried the question,
who was that guy? Why did he have me go look for those three atoms, and
what was this all about? I had a longing to see him again, because he was
the purest person I had ever met — ever. Twelve years later I found out who

he was. It was Thoth. On November 1, 1984, he reappeared in my life . . .
and taught me so much. But again, that’s another story for later.

Thoth the Atlantean

This man, Thoth of Egypt, goes almost all the way back to the beginning
of Atlantis. He figured out, 52,000 years ago, how to stay conscious in one
body continuously without dying, and he has remained in his original body
since then until 1991, when he moved into a new way of being far beyond
our understanding. He lived through most of the period of Atlantis and
even became king of Atlantis for a period of 16,000 years. During those
times he was called Chiquetet Arlich Vomalites. His name was actually
Arlich Vomalites, and Chiquetet was a title that meant “the seeker of wis-
dom,” because he really wanted to be what wisdom was. After Atlantis sank
(we will discuss this subject in great detail soon), Arlich Vomalites and
other advanced beings had to wait for about 6000 years before they could
begin to reestablish civilization.

When Egypt began to come to life, he stepped forward and called him-
self Thoth, keeping that name all through the time of Egypt. When Egypt
died, it was Thoth who started the next major culture, which was Greece.
Our history books say that Pythagoras was the father of Greece and that it
was from and through the Pythagorean school that Greece unfolded and
from Greece that our present civilization emerged. Pythagoras says in his
own writings that Thoth took him by the hand, led him under the Great
Pyramid and taught him all the geometries and the nature of the Reality.
Once Greece was born through Pythagoras, Thoth then stepped into that
culture in the same body he had during the time of Atlantis and called him-
self Hermes. So it is written, Arlich Vomalites, Thoth and Hermes are the
same person. True story? Read The Emerald Tablets, written 2000 years ago
by Hermes.

Since that time he’s had many other names, but I still call him Thoth.
He came back into my life in 1984 and worked with me just about every day
until 1991. He d come in and spend maybe four to eight hours a day teach-
ing me about so many things. This is where the largest body of the informa-
tion 1 11 be sharing with you came from, though it correlates with other in-
formation and has been substantiated by many other teachers.

The history of the world, especially, came from him. You see, while in
Egypt, where he was called the Scribe, he wrote down everything that took
place. He was the perfect person for it, right? He was constantly alive, so as
a scribe he would just sit there and watch life go by. He was a good impartial
witness, as that was a major part of his understanding of wisdom. He sel-
dom talked or acted except when he knew that it was in divine order.
Eventually Thoth discovered how to leave Earth. He would go to another
planet where there was life and just sit there and watch. He would never in-
terfere, wouldn t say a single word. He’d be absolutely silent and just watch
just to see how they lived their lives, to get wisdom, to understand — for

Fig. 1-14. Shesat, Thoth's wife.

maybe a hundred years on each planet. Then he would go
somewhere else and watch.

Altogether, Thoth was gone from Earth for about 2000
years studying other life forms. But he considers himself an
Earth person. Of course, we have all come from somewhere
else at one point or another in the game of life, because the
Earth is not that old. It’s only about five billion years old,
and spirit is forever, always has been and always will be. You
always have been and always will be. Spirit cannot die, and
any other understanding is just an illusion. But Thoth con-
siders himself from here because it was here that he made
the first step that led him into immortality.

This is Thoth’s wife, Shesat [Fig. 1-14). She’s a most ex-
traordinary person — in some ways at least as extraordinary
as Thoth, if not more so. She was the first person to bring me
consciously to Earth, which was in, roughly, 1500 B.C. I was
not physically here, but we had made a conscious link across
the dimensions. She connected with me because of prob-
lems the Egyptians were having within their country that,
from her point of view, would eventually affect the whole
world and the outcome of humanity. We worked very
closely together. I still have a very deep love for her and a re-
ally close connection, though she’s no longer here. Neither
is Thoth. In 1991, together they left this entire octave of
universes and stepped over into a completely different kind
of experience of life. Their actions are important to us, as

you will see.

In 1984, Thoth came back into my life, twelve years after my first experi-
ence with him while meditating with my alchemy teacher. The first thing
he did was to lead me through an initiation in Egypt. He had me travel all
over Egypt and perform ceremonies and accept initiations at certain tem-
ples. I was asked to enter a particular space under the Great Pyramid, re-
peat long phrases in the original Atlantean language and enter a state of
consciousness where my body was only light. I’ll tell that story when it’s
time, I promise.

Thoth, Geometries and the Flower of Life

After I had been back from Egypt for three or four months, Thoth came
in and said, “I want to see the geometries that were given to you by the an-
gels.” The angels had given me the basic information/geometries of how re-
ality is related to spirit, and the angels had taught me the meditation I’m go-
ing to give to you. This meditation was one of the first things Thoth wanted
from me. That was the exchange: I received all of his memories and he re-
ceived the meditation. He wanted the meditation because it was a lot eas-
ier than the method he was using. His way of staying alive for 52,000 years
was very tenuous — it was like hanging on by a thread. It required him to

28 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

to spend two hours every day in meditation or he would die. He had to
spend one hour with his head to the north and his feet to the south, in a
very specific meditation; then he had to spend another hour in the reverse
position doing a different meditation. Then once every fifty years, in order
to keep his body regenerated, he had to go into what’s called the Halls of
Amenti and sit for ten years or so before the Flower of Life. (This is a pure
flame of consciousness that resides deep in the womb of the Earth and to
which humanity’s level of consciousness is completely dependent for its
very existence. More later on this subject.)

Thoth was very interested in this new meditation because what took
him two hours to accomplish takes only six breaths with the Mer-Ka-Ba
meditation. It’s quick, efficient and far more accurate; and its potential is
much greater, as it leads into a permanent form of awareness. So Thoth be-
gan to give me vast amounts of what he knew. When he would appear in
my room, we would not speak with words like we’re doing now. We would
speak using a combination of telepathy and holographic images. His
thoughts to me were holographic, I guess you would say. But there was
even more going on than that. If he wanted to describe something to me, I
would taste, feel, smell, hear and see his thoughts.

He said he wanted to see what the angels had given me in terms of ge-
ometries, so I gave it to him telepathically, with a little ball of light, third eye
to third eye. Then he looked at the whole thing, and about five seconds
later said that I was missing many levels of interconnected information. So
for many hours of every day I would sit there making drawings and figuring
out what all this stuff was that we now call sacred geometry.

At that time I had no words for this way of seeing. I didn’t know what it
was, and in the beginning I had no idea what it really meant. And I
didn’t know anybody else who was aware of it except
past. I thought I was the only one in the whole world. 1
the more I became involved, the more I realized that it’s
been going on forever and it’s everywhere throughout
the Earth’s history and throughout the universe. He
taught me in this way for a long time. Finally we
came up with a single drawing [Fig. 1-15], which
he said contains everything — all knowledge, both
male and female, no exceptions. This is the one:

I know this is an outrageous statement to
make this early in this writing, but this one draw-
ing, according to Thoth, contains within its pro-
portions every single aspect of life there is. It con-
tains every single mathematical formula, every law
of physics, every harmony in music, every biological
life form right down to your specific body. It contains
every atom, every dimensional level, absolutely every-
thing that’s within waveform universes. (I’ll explain in just
a moment about waveform universes.) After he taught me, I

Fig. 1-15. Flower of Life.

ONE — Remembering Our Ancient Past $ 29

Fig. 1-16. Flower of Life on wall in
Abydos, photo by Katrina Raphaell.

understood the above statement; but to just throw out
that statement right now sounds incredible. God will-
ing, I will prove what I’m saying. Obviously, I cannot
prove that this drawing contains every single aspect of
creation, because there are too many things that exist
to do that in one book. But I can show you enough
proofs so that you’ll be able to see that you can carry it
over to everything.

Thoth then told me that I would find this image of
the Flower of Life in Egypt. There were two times that
I doubted him in all the years I worked with him, and
this was one of those times. My little mind went, “No
way!” because I had by now read almost every book
there was on Egypt, and I had never seen this any-
where. In my mind I scanned through everything I
could think of. No, I thought, that symbol is not any-
where in Egypt. But he said I would find it, and then
he left. I didn’t even know where to begin to look for
it.

About two weeks later, I saw my friend Katrina
Raphaell, who has written, I believe, three books on
crystals. She had just returned from Egypt and was in a
grocery store in Taos, New Mexico, when I walked in.
She was standing at the film counter and had just got-
ten back the photographs from her most recent trip to
Egypt. She had a stack about ten inches high sitting
on the counter and was taking them out, thirty-six at a
time, and stacking them. We started talking, and at
one point she said to me, “Oh, by the way, my guiding
angel told me that I’m supposed to give you a photograph as soon as I see
you.” I said, “Okay, what is it?” She said, “I don’t know.” She turned away
from the pile and went through it behind her back, pulled one out at ran-
dom, handed it to me and said, “This is the one I’m supposed to give you.”

Now, Katrina had no idea of the work I was doing, though we had been
friends for a couple years, because I didn’t talk to many people in those days
about my work — and I definitely had not talked to her. The picture she
pulled outwas this one — the Flower ofLife on a wall in Egypt [Fig. 1-16]!

That particular wall is probably one of the oldest walls in Egypt, in a tem-
ple that’s almost 6000 years old, one of the oldest temples on the planet.
When I saw the Flower of Life in that photo, I couldn’t say anything but
“wooooowww.” Katrina asked, “What is that thing, anyway?” All I could say
was, “You don’t understand, but wooooowww!”

30 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

The Secret of the Flower Unfolds

The Three Osirian Temples in Abydos

T his temple is in Abydos [Fig. 2-1]. It was built by Seti the First and
dedicated to Osiris. Behind it is another very old temple called the
Osirian Temple, where the wall carving of the Flower of Life was found
by Katrina Raphaell. There is still a third temple, also dedicated to Osiris and
also called the Osirian Temple. Figure 2-2 is what the plan looks like.
Evidently, when they

were digging back into
the mountain to build
the Seti I temple, with
full knowledge that the
third Osirian temple was
there, they found the
older, second Osirian
temple between the two.

Seti I changed the plan
for the newer temple into
an L shape to avoid de-
stroying the more an-
cient temple. It’s the
only L-shaped temple in
all of Egypt, which
strengthens this idea.

Some people say that
Seti I built the older temple, too. However, the older one is a completely
different construction design and has much larger stone blocks. Most
Egyptian archaeologists agree that it is a much older temple. It is also lower
in elevation than the Seti temple, which gives credence to its age. When
Seti I began construction of his new temple, the second one looked like a
hill. The third temple, the long, rectangular one in the back, is also dedi-
cated to Osiris, and it is one of the oldest temples in Egypt. Seti I was build-
ing his temple on this site because the other (third) temple was very old and
he wanted to dedicate a new temple to Osiris. We’ll look at the Seti I tem-
ple, then the third one, then the second and oldest one.

Fig. 2-1. Temple of Seti the First.

This view is of the small projection at
far right of the L-shaped building in Fig.
2 - 2 .

Fig. 2-2. Plan of the three adjacent
Osirian temples at Abydos.

TWO— 31

Fig. 2-3. Front of the Seti I temple at
Abydos, looking down the length of
the temple facade in Fig. 2-1.

Carved Bands of Time

In recent times archaeologists have discovered some-
thing very interesting about the wall carvings in Egyptian
temples. Tourists usually notice that there appears to be a
great deal of vandalism on the walls, where a lot of the
hieroglyphs, especially ones of the immortals, had been
chipped off and destroyed. What they might not notice is
that the chipping is in a specific horizontal band, from about
eye height up to about twelve to fifteen feet. There is no
chipping above or below that. I didn’t even notice that
when I was there; it just didn’t click. It didn’t click for a lot of
Egyptian archaeologists either for hundreds of years, until
somebody finally said, “Hey, the destruction is always in this
very specific region.” From that realization, they began to
understand that there was a difference between the region
below the destruction and the one above.

They finally figured out that there are time bands on
the walls. The band from about eye height down to floor
level would represent the past; the band from eye height
up to about fifteen feet or so would represent the present
(the time the temple was built); and higher than that
(these temples sometimes go up forty feet and more)
would tell about what will occur in the future.

The archaeologists then realized that the only people
who could have understood this relationship and actually
chipped the hieroglyphs was the priesthood of the temple.
The priests were the only ones who would have known that they were chip-
ping out only the present. An ordinary vandal would not have been so pre-
cise in selecting only the band representing the present. Besides, the de-
stroyers did not come in with a sledgehammer; they actually chipped cer-
tain things out very carefully. It has taken all these centuries to figure this

out.

The Seti I Temple

This is the front of the Seti I temple at Abydos [Fig. 2-3] . This is a small
portion of a huge, huge temple.

I know now of at least two proofs that the Egyptians could see into the
future. I have a picture of one of these: Way up high on one of the beams in
this portion of the first temple at Abydos is something that, if you’ve never
seen it before, is hard to believe, but it’s there. I’m going to get a picture of
the other one the next time I visit Egypt, because I know exactly where it is.

I think these two pictures are absolute proof, beyond any doubt at all,
that they were able to see the future. How they did it I don’t know; that’s up
to you to figure out. But the fact is, they did. At the very end I’ll show the
picture that proves this.

32 O - The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

The “Third” Temple

This is the third temple of the three — a long, open
temple [Fig. 2-4]. This temple was considered the
most sacred spot in all of Egypt by the ancient kings
and pharaohs, because they believed that this was
where Osiris had experienced resurrection and be-
come immortal. King Zoser, who built the beautiful
funerary complex at Saqqara with its famous Step Pyr-
amid, supposedly for his burial, did not bury himself
there. Instead, he buried himself at this little unpre-
tentious back temple.

They don’t allow anyone into this third temple.

But I couldn’t stand to just look down into it. There
was nobody around that I could see, so I dropped
down over the wall into a courtyard. I managed to get about five minutes of
space before the Egyptians began yelling at me to get out. I thought they
were going to arrest me, but they didn’t. The hieroglyphics in there are ex-
traordinary — nothing like you would see anywhere else. The simplicity and
perfection of the drawings is remarkable.

Fig. 2-4. The Osirian “third” temple at
Abydos. Top of the wall is at ground level.

The “Second” Temple’s Sacred Geometry and Flower of Life

This is the second temple of the three [Fig. 2-5], which is lower than
the other two. It was buried under the earth before they dug it out. (The
ramp, seen at the right edge, was built to allow access from the higher
ground level.) I took this picture from the third temple, looking toward the
Seti I temple, whose back wall can be seen in the background. The second
temple is where the Flower of Life drawings in Katrina’s photo were found.

Fig. 2-5. Second (middle) temple
at Abydos. Reeds are growing in
the water covering its floor. The
arrow at right indicates the wall
where the Flower of Life is in-
scribed.

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds x> 33

Fig. 2-6. Steps inside the second temple,
before it became partly filled with water.
[From Robert Lawlor’s Sacred Geometry.]

They allow you to go into only one
place in the second temple, which
happened to be the perfect place.
The second temple is mostly filled
with water now because the Nile
has risen, but when it was first
found, it was open and dry.

Here are two inside views [Fig.
2-6] of the center of the temple be-
fore it filled with water. There are
three distinct areas: (1) the steps
that come in from below to the
center of the temple, where there is
an altarlike stone; (2) the altarlike
stone itself; and (3) the steps that
go back down on the other side of
the altar, which can’t be seen here.
You will see these three levels rep-
resented in the three phases of the
Osiris religion. You can see the two
sets of steps in the plan of the Osirian
“second” temple on the next page
[Fig. 2-7].

34 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of life

Fig. 2-7. Plan of the Osirian second
temple (from Sacred Geometry — Philoso-
phy and Practice by Robert Lawlor).

Lucie Lamy shows here what the original plan of the temple looked
like. The two back-to-back pentagons show the sacred geometry that was
hidden in its plan. Now I need to give you some background on this geom-
etry.

The shape shown at A [Fig. 2-8] is an icosahedron. The surface of an
icosahedron is made up of equilateral triangles arranged into five-sided
pentagonal shapes, shown at B, which are called icosahedral caps in sacred
geometry. Here the triangles are equilateral. If you were to take the
icosahedral caps off the icosahedron and fit them onto each surface of a do-
decahedron (twelve pentagons put together as at C) , the resulting shape
happens to be the stellated dodecahedron D, of
the specific proportions of the Christ con-
sciousness grid around the Earth. Without this
grid there would not be a new consciousness
emerging on this planet. You will understand
before the end of this work.

Two of these icosahedral caps hinged to-
gether are like clamshells, indicated at E. These
caps are the key, as they demonstrate the geom-
etry used in the Christ-consciousness grid. And
that’s what, I feel, they’re depicting in the geom-
etry and plan of this ancient temple. I find it
very appropriate that they used back-to-back
pentagons in the plan for a temple dedicated to
Osiris and resurrection. Resurrection and as-
cension lead into Christ consciousness.

icosahedron

Fig. 2-8. Shapes. D is the Christ con-
sciousness grid.

icosahedral

cap

dodecahedron

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds 0 3 5

Figure 2-9 is down in the sec-
ond temple. The arrow indicates
the place where Katrina unknow-
ingly took a photograph of the
Flower of Life. Flere’s the same
picture taken with my camera
[Fig. 2-10]. My photo came out
better than hers, and you can see
in the shade that there’s another
Flower of Life pattern on the same
stone, side by side. To the left of
these two Flower of Life patterns,
on the same stone, are other re-
lated figures. The stones that

Fig. 2-9. Looking through the second
temple. Arrow shows wall where Ka-
trina took photo.

Fig. 2-10. The same Flower of Life
that was in Katrina’s photo
[Fig. 1-16].

Fig. 2-11. Seed of Life on left. This is
the same stone wall as above, but far-
ther to the left.

were used to build this temple, including
the one in these figures, are huge. I would
say they weigh at least 70 to 100 tons. It
makes you wonder how those hairy barbari-
ans moved all those hundred- ton stones
around.

There are many related patterns on
these walls. The left one in this photo [Fig.
2-11] is called the Seed of Life, which co-
mes directly out of the Flower of Life pat-
tern, as shown in Figure 2-12.

36 O The ancient Secret of the Flower of life

There was water at the bottom of this wall, so I couldn’t get in there.
But I was wondering what was on the other side of the stone, so I leaned
around, put the camera on automatic and took a picture to see what would
come out. This is what I got [Fig. 2-13]. You can barely see it in this photo-
graph, but it shows many of the components that are aspects of what we’re
going to be studying in this course.

It was an amazing feeling to
look at these drawings because
they were so familiar to me, and I
knew what they meant. And
here they were, arranged on an
Egyptian wall thousands of years
old. The drawings were ancient,
yet I knew exactly what they
were.

Carvings of the Copts

This next shot shows a wall in
the second temple taken from a
long way away using an 80mm
lens. On this wall is a drawing, which you can barely see in this photo [Fig.
2-14], though we could see it clearly when we were there. It looks like Fig-
ure 2-15.

It’s a symbol for Christianity, but it originated with a group of Egyptians
called Copts, who lived at the time when the Egyptian empire was dying.
They later became the very first Christians, if we include two other
Egyptian groups who were connected with them — the Essenes and the
Druids. You might not think that these two other groups had Egyptian
roots, but we believe they did.

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds 0 37

Fig. 2-16. Coptic design #1.

Fig. 2-17. Coptic design #2.

This is a Coptic symbol, and when I saw it, I real-
ized it was probably the Copts who made these draw-
ings related to the Flower of Life, not the original
builders. The Copts came much later, but they
probably knew this was a place for resurrection and
used it for the same purpose. The building would
have been several thousand years old when they
made these drawings. In this case the drawings
would have been no older than 500 B.C., which is
when the Copts began.

This is the actual Coptic symbol, a cross and the
circle [Fig. 2- 16] , sometimes found inside a triangle.

This is another one, in which you see the cross
and the circle, though it’s very worn [Fig. 2-17]. At
the top you see the six loops of the center of the
Flower of Life. In Egyptian drawings, whenever you
see a sphere over a head, it means that the focus is
whatever is inside the sphere. That’s what they’re
thinking about or what the purpose is at that mo-
ment.

Fig. 2-18. Another
Coptic design.

Fig. 2-19. Fish breathing air.

Figure 2-18 is another way this symbol is sometimes used — four inter-
secting arcs with an outer circle around them.

I find this photo very interesting [Fig. 2-19]. You see the fish breathing
air. This was done before Christ. It’s Coptic. It has
thirteen little notches, or scales, if you want to call
them that, and it’s breathing air. We’ve seen a fish
breathing air before, with the Dogons and in Peru.

Now here it is in Egypt — and it is seen in other
places around the world as well.

The Early Church Changes Christian Symbolism

When you go back and really study some of the
older writings, you find that there was a big change in
the Christian religion about 200 years after Christ
died. In fact, he wasn’t very well known for about 200
years, at which time the Greek Orthodox Church,
which was the most influential church of the day,
made many changes in the Christian religion. They
discarded many beliefs, added others, and changed
things around to fit their needs. One thing they
changed was an important symbol. All the way back
to the time of Christ, from everything we’ve been able
to read, Christ was not known as the fish, but as the
dolphin. It was changed from the dolphin to the fish
during the Greek Orthodox editing. Today Jesus is
referred to as the fish, and even modem Christians
use the fish to represent Christianity. What this
means exactly, I don’t know. I can only speculate
when we talk about dolphins. In addition, the Greek
Orthodox Church also removed from the Bible all
references to reincarnation, which previously had
been fully accepted as part of the Christian religion.

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds 39

Fig. 2-20. Flower of Life.

Update: In recent times we
have found the Flower of Life
image in eighteen more places,
including Sweden, Lapland,
Iceland and the Yucatan.

The Flower of Life: Sacred Geometry

This image of the Flower of Life [Fig. 2-20] is not only found in
Egypt, but all over the world. I’ll show you photographs of it
worldwide in volume 2. It’s found in Ireland, Turkey, England,
Israel, Egypt, China, Tibet, Greece and Japan — it’s found ev-
erywhere.

Almost everywhere around the world it has the same name,
which is the Flower of Life, though elsewhere around the cos-
mos it has other names. Two of the main names would be
translated as the Language of Silence and the Language of
Light. It’s the source of all language. It’s the primal language of
the universe, pure shape and proportion.

It’s called a flower, not just because it looks like a flower, but
because it represents the cycle of a fruit tree. The fruit tree makes a
little flower, which goes through a metamorphosis and turns into a fruit —
a cherry or an apple or something. The fruit contains within it the seed,
which falls to the ground, then grows into another tree. So there’s a cycle of
tree to flower to fruit to seed and back to a tree again, in these five steps.
This is an absolute miracle. But you know, it just goes right over our heads.
It’s so normal that we simply accept it and don’t think much about it. The
five simple, miraculous steps in this cycle of life actually parallel the geome-
tries of life, which we’ll continue to see all through this work.

The Seed of Life

Fig. 2-21. Seed of Life, extracted from
flower.

Fig. 2

As I was showing earlier [Fig. 2-12], in the middle of the Flower of
Life are seven interconnected circles which, if you take them out and
draw a circle around them, would create the image called the Seed of Life
[Fig. 2-21],

The Tree of Life Connection

Another image in this pattern,
which you’re probably more familiar
with, is called the Tree of Life [Fig.
2-22]. Many people have thought
that the Tree of Life originated with
the Jews or Hebrews, but it did not.
The kabbalah did not originate the
Tree of Life, and there is proof. The
Tree of Life does not belong to any
culture — not even the Egyptians,
who carved the Tree of Life on two
sets of three pillars in Egypt at both
Karnak and Luxor around 5000 years
ago. It’s outside any race or religion.
It is a pattern that is intimately part of

40 $ The Ancient Secret of the flower of life

nature. If you go to distant planets where there is consciousness,

I’m sure you’ll find the same image.

So if we have a tree, then a flower, then a seed, and if these
geometries do in fact parallel the five cycles of a fruit tree that
we see on Earth, then the source of the tree would have to be
perfectly contained within the seed. If we take the images of
the Seed of Life and the Tree of Life and superimpose them, we
can see this relationship [Fig. 2-23].

See how perfectly they fit? They become like a key, one fit-
ting directly over the other. In addition, if you look at the Tree
of Life that was found on Egyptian pillars, you’ll see one more
circle above and one below [Fig. 2-24] . This means there were
originally twelve components, and the twelve -component ver-
sion also fits perfectly over the whole Flower of Life image.

(There is a thirteenth circle to the Tree that can either be there
or not.)

I’m approaching sacred geometry as though you never heard
the words in your life. We’re starting from the very bottom, and
we’ll slowly build on this until we get to the place where it makes sense.
First you can see the synchronicity of the way sacred geometry forms move
together and fit perfectly into each other. This is a right-brain way of un-
derstanding the special nature of this geometry. As we study more and
more complex patterns, you’ll keep seeing the same kind of amazing rela-
tionships moving through everything. The odds of some of these geometri-
cal relationships happening at all is probably a zillion to one, yet you will
consistently see these mind-boggling relationships unfold.

The Vesica Piscis

In sacred geometry there’s a pattern that looks like this [Fig. 2-25] . It’s
formed when the centers of two equal-radius circles are placed on each
other’s circumferences. The area where the two circles intersect forms
what’s called a vesica piscis. This configuration is one of the most predomi-
nant and important of all relationships in sacred geometry, as you’ll begin to
see.

Fig. 2-23. Superimposed Tree and Seed of Life.

Fig. 2-24- Tree of Life with two extra
circles.

There are two measurements in the vesica piscis — one that runs
through the center across the narrow width, and one that connects one
point to the opposite point through the center — that are keys to a great
knowledge within this information. What many people don’t know is that
every line in the Tree of Life, whether it has 10 or 12 circles, measures out
to either the length or the width of a vesica piscis in the Flower of Life. And
they all have Golden Mean proportions. If you look carefully at the super-
imposed Tree of Life, you’ll see that every line corresponds exactly to either
the length or the width of a vesica piscis. This is the first relationship that
became visible as we came out of the Great Void. (The Great Void is an-
other key that will be discussed soon.)

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds O 4 I

Fig. 2-26. Wheels on an Egyptian wall.

Egyptian Wheels and Dimensional Travel

These wheels [Fig. 2-26] are some of the oldest
symbols known. So far they’ve been found only on
the ceilings of certain very old Egyptian tombs.
They’re always found in sets of four or eight, and
nobody knows what they are. The world’s most fa-
mous Egyptian archaeologists don’t have the vagu-
est idea what they mean. But to me they’re proof
that the Egyptians knew that the Flower of Life
was more than just a pretty design and that they
knew most, perhaps even more, of the information
that will be shared here. In order to understand
where the wheels are in the Flower of Life, you
have to study the tremendous levels of knowledge
contained within it. You would never get there by
just looking at designs. It’s nothing that you could
just happen on — you’d have to know the ancient
secret of the Flower of Life.

This photo shows most of a set of eight of these
wheels [Fig. 2-27]. The next picture [Fig. 2-28]
is very dark and hard to see details. This is a ceil-

42 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Fig. 2-27. Wheels; not
all eight are visible here.

ing, and it was pitch black where I
took the picture. Walking toward
the right along the bottom of the
drawing are seven people with
animal heads. They’re called neters,
or gods, and each of them has an
orangish red oval above its head,
which Thoth called the egg of meta-
morphosis. The neters are concen-
trated on the time when we go
through a certain stage of resurrec-
tion, which is a rapid biological
change into a different life form.

They’re holding an image of that
transition as they’re walking along
the line, then suddenly the line co-
mes to an end and there’s a 90-
degree shift upward, and they’re walking perpendicular to their first direc-
tion.

This 90 degrees is a very important part of this work. The 90-degree
turn is crucial to understanding how to make resurrection or ascension real.
The dimensional levels are separated by 90 degrees; musical notes are sepa-
rated by 90 degrees; the chakras are separated by 90 degrees — 90 degrees
keeps coming up over and over again. In fact, in order for us to enter into
the fourth dimension (or any dimension, for that matter) , we must make a
90-degree turn.

Probably at this point I need to make sure we have a common under-
standing about what dimensions are — like third dimension, fourth dimen-
sion, fifth dimension and so forth. What are we talking about? I’m not talk-
ingjibout dimensions in a normal mathematical sense, as in the three axes
or so-called dimensions of space: the x, y and z axes — front to back, left to
right and up and down. Some people call these three axes the third dimen-
sion and say that time becomes the fourth dimension. This is not what I’m
talking about.

Fig. 2-28. Wheels, neters and 90-
degree turn at right. The dark circles
are above the heads of figures, the
seven at the bottom having animal
heads.

Dimensions, Harmonics and the Waveform Universe

What I’m seeing as the various dimensional levels has to do more with
music and harmonics than anything else. There are probably different con-
notations of what I’m talking about too, though most people who study this
pretty much agree. A piano has eight white keys from C to C, which is the
familiar octave, and in between those are the five black keys. The eight
white keys and the five black keys produce all the sharps and flats in what’s
called the chromatic scale, which is thirteen notes (actually twelve notes,
with the thirteenth beginning the next octave) . So from one C to the next

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds O 43

is really thirteen steps, not just eight.

Keeping that in mind, I want to show you the concept of a sine wave.
Sine waves correspond to light (and the electromagnetic spectrum) and the
vibration of sound. Figure 2-29 shows some samples. We’re all probably fa-
miliar with this. In the entire Reality we’re in, every single thing is based on
sine waves. There are no exceptions I know of except the Void itself and
perhaps spirit.

Everything in this Reality is sine wave, or cosine, if you want to look at it
like that. What makes one thing different from another is wavelength and
pattern. A wavelength extends from any point on the curve to the point
where the entire curve starts over, as from A to B on the longer wavelength,
or from C to D on the shorter wavelengths. If you get into a really long
wavelength, they look almost like straight lines. For example, your brain
waves are about ten to the tenth power centimeters, and they’re almost like
straight lines coming out of your head. Quantum physics or quantum me-
chanics looks at everything in the Reality in one of two ways. They don’t
know why they can’t look at it in both ways at once, though the geometries
tell why if you study them very carefully. You can consider any object, such
as this book, as being made up of tiny particles like atoms; or you can forget
that idea and just look at it as a vibration, a waveform, such as electromag-
netic fields or even sound, if you like. If you look at it as atoms, the laws can
be seen to fit that model; if you look at it as waveforms, the laws can be seen
to fit that model.

Everything in our world is a waveform (sometimes called pattern, or
sine-wave signature) or could even be seen as sound. All things — your bod-
ies, planets, absolutely everything — are waveforms. If you choose this par-
ticular way of looking at Reality and superimpose that view over the reality
of the harmonics of music (an aspect of sound) , we can begin to talk about
different dimensions.

Wavelength Determines Dimension

The dimensional levels are nothing but differing base-rate wavelengths.
The only difference between this dimension and any other is the length of
its basic waveform. It’s just like a television or radio set. When you turn the
dial, you pick up a different wavelength. Then you get a different image on
your TV screen or a different station on your radio. It’s exactly the same for
dimensional levels. If you were to change the wavelength of your con-
sciousness, and in so doing change all your body patterns to a wavelength
different from this universe, you would literally disappear out of this world
and reappear in the one to which you were tuned.

This is exactly what the UFOs do when you see them shooting across
the sky, if you’ve ever seen one. They shoot across at unbelievable speeds,
then make a 90-degree turn and disappear. The people onboard those ships
are not being carried through space like we are on airplanes. Spaceship pas-
sengers are consciously connected psychically to the vehicle itself, and

44 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

when they get ready to go into another world, they go into meditation and
link all aspects of themselves into oneness. Then they make either a 90-
degree shift or two 45 -degree shifts all at once in their minds, actually tak-
ing the whole ship, along with its passengers, into another dimension.

This universe — and by that I mean all the stars and atoms going infi-
nitely out and infinitely in forever — has a base wavelength of about 7.23
centimeters. You can pick any spot in this room and go infinitely in or infi-
nitely out forever within this particular universe. In a spiritual sense this
7.23-cm wavelength is Om, the Hindu sound of the universe. Every object
in this universe produces a sound according to its construction. Each ob-
ject makes a unique sound. If you average the sounds of all the objects in
this universe, this third dimension, you would get this 7.23-cm wavelength,
and it would be the true sound of Om for this dimension.

This wavelength is also the exact average distance between our eyes,
from the center of one pupil to the other — that is, if you take a hundred
people and average them. It’s also the exact average distance from the tip
of our chins to the tip of our noses, the distance across our palms and the
distance between our chakras, to give a few more examples. This 7.23-cm
length is located throughout our bodies in various ways because we are
emerged within this particular universe, and it is embedded within us.

It was Bell Laboratories that discovered this wavelength, not some spiri-
tual person sitting in a cave somewhere. When they first put up the micro-
wave system that went around the United States and pulled the on switch,
they found static in their system. You see, Bell Labs just happened to pick
for the system’s sending frequency one slightly longer than seven centime-
ters. Why they chose that wavelength, I don’t know. They tried to find the
static, looked through their equipment, tried everything they could. First
they thought it was coming from inside the Earth. Eventually they looked
into the heavens and found it, and said, “Oh, no, it’s coming from every-
where!" In order to get rid of the static, they did something that we as a na-
tion and a planet are still suffering from: They upped the power 50,000
times over what they would normally need, which created a very powerful
field, so that the 7.23-cm wavelength coming from everywhere would not
interfere.

Dimensions and the Musical Scale

For reasons such as the above, I believe that 7.23 centimeters is the
wavelength of our universe, this third dimension. As you go up into dimen-
sional levels, the wavelength gets shorter and shorter, with higher and
higher energy. As you go down in dimensional levels, the wavelength gets
longer and longer, with lower and lower energy, more and more dense. Just
as with a piano, there’s a space between the notes, so that when you hit one
note, there’s a very definite place where the next note is. In this waveform
universe we exist in, there is a very definite place where the next dimen-
sional level exists. It’s a specific wavelength relative to this one. Most cul-

tures in the cosmos have this basic understanding of the universe, and they
know how to move between dimensions. We’ve forgotten it all. God will-
ing, we will remember.

Musicians, music theorists and physicists discovered long ago that there
are places between the notes called overtones. Between each step of the
chromatic scale there are twelve major overtones. (A group in California
has discovered over 200 minor overtones between each note.)

If we show each note in the chromatic scale as a circle, we have thirteen
circles [Fig. 2-30]. Each circle represents a white or black key and the
shaded circle at the end would be the thirteenth note that begins the next
octave. The black circle on this illustration represents the third dimension,
our known universe, and the fourth circle, the fourth dimension. The
twelve major overtones between any two notes, or dimensions, are a replica
of the larger pattern. It’s holographic. If you carry it further, between each
overtone you’ll find another twelve overtones that replicate the whole pat-
tern. It goes down and up literally forever. This is called a geometrical pro-
gression, only in harmonics. If you continue to study it, you’ll find that each
of the unique musical scales that have been discovered produces a different
octave of experience — more universes to explore! (This is another subject
we will come back to.)

You’ve probably heard people talk about the 144 dimensions and how
the number 144 relates to other spiritual subjects. This is because there are
twelve notes in an octave and twelve overtones between each note; and
12 x 12 = 144 dimensional levels between each octave. To be specific,
there are 12 major dimensions and 132 minor dimensions within each oc-
tave (though in truth the progression goes on forever) . This diagram repre-
sents one octave. The thirteenth note repeats, then there’s another octave
above that one. There’s an octave of universes below this and an octave
above, and it stretches on theoretically forever. So as big and as infinite as
this universe seems (which is just an illusion anyway), there are still an infi-
nite number of other ways to express the one Reality, and each dimension is
experientially completely different from any other.

That’s what much of this teaching is about — reminding us that we here

Fig. 2-30. An octave between the
walls. The black circle represents the
third dimension; the shaded circle ends
one octave and begins the next.

46 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of life

on Earth are sitting in the third dimension on a planet that is in the process
right now of becoming fourth-dimensional and beyond. The third-dime-
nsional component of this planet is about to be nonexistent for us after a
while — we’re going to be aware of this dimension for only a short time lon-
ger. First we’ll go into certain overtones of the fourth dimension. Most
people in the higher dimensions who are watching and helping with this
process now believe that we’re going to keep moving on up through higher
dimensions quite rapidly.

The Wall between Octaves

Between each whole-note universe and between each subspace or over-
tone universe, there is nothing— no thing, absolutely zip. Each of these
spaces is called a void. The void between each dimension is called the duat
by Egyptians or the bardo by Tibetans. Each time you pass from one dimen-
sion or overtone into the next, you pass through a void or blackness that’s
in between. But certain voids are “blacker” than others, and the blackest of
these exist between the octaves. They’re more powerful than the voids that
exist within an octave. Please understand that we are using words that can-
not fully explain this concept. This void that exists between octaves can be
called the Great V oid or the W all. It’s like a wall you have to pass through
to get to a higher octave. God put these voids there in a particular way for
certain reasons that will soon become apparent.

All of these dimensions are superimposed over each other, and every
point in space/time contains them all. The doorway to any of them is any-
where. That makes it convenient — you don’t have to go looking for it, you
just have to know how to access it. Although there are certain sacred
places in the geometries of our reality here on Earth where it’s easier to be-
come aware of the various dimensions and overtones — sacred sites, which
are nodal points connected to the Earth and the heavens (we’ll also talk
about them later) — there are also specific places in space that are tied to
the geometries of space. These places are sometimes referred to by explorers
as stargates, openings to other dimensional levels where it’s easier to get
through. But in truth, you can be anywhere to go anywhere. It really doesn’t
matter where you are if you truly understand the dimensions and, of course,
are capable of divine love.

Changing Dimensions

Going back to those guys on the temple ceiling (a few pages ago) , they’re
changing dimensions. They’re making a 90-degree turn and changing their
wavelength. And those wheels, as you’re going to see later, are connected
to the harmonics of music — and you now know that the harmonics of mu-
sic are connected to the dimensional levels. Since the people on the ceiling
are making this change while thinking about metamorphosis and resurrec-
tion, I believe these wheels are actually telling us exactly where they went,
into which dimension. By the time we finish, you’ll understand what I’m

talking about.

The Star Tetrahedron

Fig. 2-31. Leonardo’s canon, with star
tetrahedron symbolizing the Mer-Ka-
Ba, and a central prana tube.

This star tetrahedron with Leonardo’s image behind it [Fig. 2-3 1 ] is go-
ing to become one of the most important drawings for this work. What
you’re looking at is two-dimensional, but think of it in three dimensions. A
star tetrahedron, just as shown here, happens to exist around each human
body. We’re going to spend a great deal of time to get you to the point
where you can see that you do have this image around your body. Notice
especially that there’s a tube running down the center of the body through
which we can breathe life -force energy, and the two apexes at the top and
bottom of this tube connect the third dimension to the fourth dimension.
You can inhale fourth-dimensional prana directly through the tube. You

could be in a vacuum, a total
void, with no air to breathe,
and completely survive if you
could live the principles of
this understanding.

As Richard Hoagland has
shown the United Nations
and NASA, we are now be-
ginning to scientifically re-
discover this field. Just as it is
shown around Leonardo, it is
also around planets, suns and
even larger bodies. This
could become the standard
explanation of how some of
these outer planets survive.
Why? The planets are radi-
ating off the surface far more
energy than they’re receiving
from the Sun, a lot more.
Where is it coming from?
With this new understand-
ing, if Leonardo were a
planet instead of a person,
the points at the north and
south poles would be bring-
ing in huge amounts of en-
ergy from another dimension
(or dimensions) . Planets lit-
erally exist in more than one
dimension, and if you could

48 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

see the whole Earth in all its glory — the various fields and energies around a
planet — you’d be astounded. Mother Earth is far more intricate and com-
plex than we at this dense level can perceive. This channeling of energy is
actually how it works for people, too. And the particular dimension (or di-
mensions) that this energy comes from depends on how we breathe.

On Leonardo’s drawing, the tetrahedron pointing up to the Sun is male.
The one pointing down toward the Earth is female. We’re going to call the
male one a Sun tetrahedron and the female one an Earth tetrahedron.
There are only two symmetrical ways that a human being can look out of
this star-tetrahedral form with one point of the star above the head and one
point below the feet and with the alignment of the human body looking to-
ward the horizon: For a male body looking out of his form, his Sun tetrahe-
dron has a point facing forward, and the opposite flat face is behind him; his
Earth tetrahedron has a point facing out the back, and the opposite flat face
is in front [Fig. 2-32a] .

For a female body looking out of her form, her Sun tetrahedron has a flat
face forward, and a point facing out the back; and her Earth tetrahedron
has a point facing forward, and the opposite flat face is behind her [Fig. 2-
32b]. We’ll explain the Mer-Ka-Ba meditation through the fourteenth
breath in volume 2. First I would like to introduce other aspects so that you

can begin to remember and prepare
yourself for the eventual reactivation of
your lightbody, the Mer-Ka-Ba. Begin-
ning soon, we’ll start talking about yogic
breathing, which probably many of you
are already familiar with. Then we’ll
learn about mudras after that. We’re
going to keep going step by step until we
are ready to experience spherical
breathing, the state of being from which
your Mer-Ka-Ba can come to life.

Threeness in Duality: The Holy
Trinity

To understand the situation here on
Earth, we will offer another piece of in-
formation to refer to as we proceed. In
nature, the law of opposites appears to
be manifesting throughout our reality,
such as male and female or hot and cold.
In truth, this is incomplete. Actually,
every manifestation in our reality has
three components. You hear people talk
about male and female polarity and
about polarity consciousness; that isn’t

star tetrahe-

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds $ 49

the full truth. There has never been a polarity in this reality without a third
component, with one rare exception we will talk about in a moment.

There is a trinity in almost every situation. Let’s think of some exam-
ples of what we usually call polarity. How about black and white, hot and
cold, up and down, male and female and Sun and Earth? For black and
white, there’s gray; for hot and cold, there’s warm; for up and down,
there’s the middle; for male and female, there’s a child, for the Sun and
the Earth (male and female), there’s the Moon (child). Time is also in
three components: past, present and future. The mental relationship of
how we see space is with the x, y, z axes — front and back, left and right, up
and down. Even in each of these three directions there’s a middle or neu-
tral point, creating three parts.

Probably the best example is the fabric of matter itself in this third dimen-
sion. Matter is made of three basic particles: protons, electrons and neu-
trons. On the next higher level of organization from the three basic particles
you will find atoms, and on the next lower level, finer particle divisions. In a
similar manner, consciousness perceives itself in the middle between the
macrocosm and the microcosm. If you look closely into either level, you will
always find threeness.

There is a special exception, as there almost always is. It relates to the
beginning of things. Primal aspects usually do have twoness, but they are
extremely rare. An example is found in number sequences. Sequences
such as 123456789 .... or 2-4-8-16-32 . . . , or 1-1-2-3-5-8-13-21 . . . —and
in fact all sequences known — strangely enough need a minimum of three
successive numbers of the sequence in order to calculate the entire se-
quence, with one exception: the Golden Mean logarithmic spiral, which
needs only two. This is because that spiral is the source of all other se-
quences. In the same manner, atoms all have three parts, as mentioned be-
fore, with the single exception of the first atom: hydrogen. Hydrogen has
only one proton and one electron; it has no neutron. If it has a neutron,
which is the next step up, it is called heavy hydrogen, but the very begin-
ning of matter has only two components.

Since we mentioned numbers exhibiting threeness, we might as well
bring up color. There are three primary colors from which the three sec-
ondary colors are created. This means that the universe as we now know
it — all created things — is composed of three primary parts except in its rare
primal areas. In addition, the very nature of how the universe is perceived
by human consciousness is through the three major ways we just spoke of:
time, space and matter, all of which are reflections of the sacred holy trinity.

An Avalanche of Knowledge

Most people by now are aware that something unusual is going on here
on Earth. We are in extremely accelerated time, and many events are hap-
pening that have never been seen before. There are more people on the
planet than have ever been known before, and if we continue at the same

50 $ The ancient Secret of the Flower of life

rate, in a few more years we will double our population to about eleven or
twelve billion people.

Regarding our human evolutionary learning curve, the supply of infor-
mation on the planet is growing far faster than the population. Here’s a fact
according to the Encyclopedia Britannica. From the time of our oldest
known human civilization, the ancient Sumerians (circa 3800 B.C.), con-
tinuing for almost 5800 years until about A.D. 1900, a certain number of
bits of information had been collected, a certain number of so-called facts
that were added up to determine precisely how many things we knew. Fifty
years later, from 1900 to 1950, our knowledge had doubled. That means it
took 5800 years to learn a certain amount, then it took fifty years to double
it — amazing! But then in the next twenty years, by about 1970, we doubled
it again. It took only ten more years, to about 1980, to double that! Now it’s
doubling every few years.

Knowledge is coming in like an avalanche. The information was com-
ing so fast in the mid-eighties that NASA couldn’t put it into their comput-
ers fast enough. I heard that in approximately 1988 they were eight or nine
years behind in simply entering the incoming data. At the same time this
avalanche of knowledge is building up, the computers themselves, which
are boosting the acceleration, are about to make a huge change. Approxi-
mately every eighteen months computers are doubling both speed and
memory. First we came out with the 286, then the 386; then we had the
486, and now the 586 is out [this was 1993], which makes the 486 obsolete.
We didn’t even know how to use the 486 yet, and here’s the 586. And
we’ve already got the 686 planned. By the turn of the century or soon after-
ward, a home computer will be so powerful and fast that it will surpass all of
the present (1993) computers of NASA and the Pentagon combined.

A single computer will be so fast and powerful that it can actually watch
the whole Earth and give constant weather data for every square inch of the
planet. It will do things that now seem absolutely impossible. And we’re
beginning to speed up our ability to enter the data: Now huge amounts of
information are entered directly from other computers and scanners and di-
rect voice. So with this incredible amount of knowledge entering into hu-
man consciousness, it becomes obvious that a major change for humankind
is being birthed.

For thousands of years spiritual information was kept secret. Priests and
priestesses of various religions or cults would give their lives to keep the rest
of the world from knowing about one of their secret documents or piece of
spiritual knowledge, making sure it remained secret. All the various spiri-
tual groups and religions around the world had their secret information.
Then suddenly, in the mid-sixties, the veil of secrecy was lifted. In unison,
almost all the spiritual groups of the world opened their archives at the
same moment in history. You can browse through books in your neighbor-
hood bookstore and see information that has been sealed and guarded for
thousands of years. Why? Why now?

Update: The Pentagon has
just announced in the spring
of 1997 that they have a com-
puter that requires only one
second to compute what would
take a 250-MH, 3-GB PC
30,000 years. In one day it
can compute what would take
the PC 2.6 billion years! I
would call this something
more than a quantum leap.

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds $ 5 I

Life on this planet is accelerating faster and faster and faster, obviously
culminating in something new and different, perhaps just out of the reach
of our normal imagination. We are always changing. What does this mean
for the world? Why is it happening? Better yet, why is it happening now?
Why didn’t it happen a thousand years ago? Or why didn’t it wait to hap-
pen 100, 1000 or 10,000 years from now? It’s really important to under-
stand the answer to this question, because if you don’t know why this is
happening now, then you probably will not understand what’s happening to
you in your life or be prepared for the coming changes.

Though I don’t want to get into the real meaning of what this is about right
now, one of the answers lies in the fact that the computer is made out of silicon
and we’re made out of carbon. It’s tied into the relationship of silicon and car-
bon, but I’ll leave that for a while and continue with the unusual nature of

Fig. 2-33. Earth’s location in the solar what’s happening here on Earth,

system.

Fig. 2-34. Quasar (quasi-stellar radio
source) believed to be the most dis-
tant and luminous objects in the uni-
verse.

Earth’s Relation
to the Cosmos

Let’s talk about
Sirius and the Earth
again. You are here
[Fig. 2-33], and this
is where we begin in
the big picture. From
where we are on this
third planet out from
the Sun, Earth’s inti-
mate connection to
Sirius cannot be un-
derstood very easily.
You have to go out into deep
space to things like this [Fig.
2-34], which you might not
recognize — at least most peo-
ple don’t. This is a quasar, and
it’s enormous. It defies all the
laws of physics, and we don’t
know what the heck it’s doing.
But that’s not really what I
want you to notice.

52 the Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

.f* •*' «*. $■

X • • T

Spirals in Space

This next photo is a little closer and
more familiar to us [Fig. 2-35] . This is a
galaxy, obviously not us, because it’s
pretty hard to take a picture of yourself
from within yourself. (The cluster at the
bottom right is a nebula, and it is almost
certainly much, much closer than the
galaxy; they are not connected.) Notice
the stars coming out of the galaxy in a
white spiral. At exactly 180 degrees op-
posite one of the spirals is another
emerging spiral. I believe there are eight
known forms of galaxies — though all of
them are functions of each other — and
this is the primary model.

For a long time astronomers pretty much thought that what you saw out
there was it; if you could see it, it was there. They were either totally oblivi-
ous to the invisible side of Reality, or they didn’t feel it was that important.
But the invisible side of our Reality is actually much greater than the visible
side, and probably more important. In fact, if the full electromagnetic spec-
trum were a line about two yards long, then visible light, with which we see
objects, would be a band about 1/32 of an inch wide. In other words, the
visible part of the Reality is far less than one percent of the total — almost
nothing. The invisible universe is really our true home.

There’s much more. There are things even beyond the electromagnetic
spectrum that we’re just beginning to understand. For example, they’ve
discovered that when an old sun explodes and dies, like the one in the bot-
tom right of the picture, it seems to occur only in the dark area of the spiral
(shown by arrow A), indicating that there is a difference between deep
space (arrow B) and the inner space between the light spirals. So they’re
beginning to realize there’s a distinct difference between the two areas of
space as well as between the dark and the light areas of the galaxy. There’s
something different about the dark areas of the spiral that seems to be re-
lated to the light areas.

■0

Fig. 2-35. Spiral galaxy.

Our Sirius Connection

Observing these characteristics of a galactic spiral led to another discov-
ery. Other scientists noticed that as our solar system moves through space,
it’s not moving in a straight line, but in a helical pattern, a spiral. Well,
such a spiral is not possible unless we are gravitationally connected to an-
other large body, such as another solar system or something larger. For ex-
ample, many people think the Moon rotates around the Earth, right? It
does not. It never has. The Earth and the Moon rotate around each other,
and there’s a third component between them approximately one-third of

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds 0 53

Update: This update will not
make complete sense until you
fully understand the Mer-Ka-
Ba, but this is the most appro-
priate place to put it. Astro-
physicist William Purcell has
just discovered (reported May
12, 1997, in Time magazine)
that “a colossus of antimatter,”
a tube at 90 degrees to the
plane of the galaxy, “is spew-
ing out from the center of our
galaxy and reaching trillions of
kilometers into space.” This
resembles the same geometries
of the Mer-Ka-Ba on a galactic
level.

At the same time, Cornell as-
tronomers have discovered
that about 80 percent of the
stars in the galaxy NGC 4138
(mostly older stars) are rotat-
ing in one direction, whereas
about 20 percent of the stars
(mostly younger stars) are ro-
tating in the opposite direction
along with a huge cloud of hy-
drogen gas. Their findings

were presented on January 18,
1997, at the American Astro-
nomical Society. This is a

Fig. 2-36. Spiral galaxy, overhead view
(top) and on edge (bottom).

the distance from the Earth to the Moon, which is the pivotal point, and
the Earth and Moon rotate around this point in a helical pattern as they
also move around the Sun. This happens because the Earth is connected
with a very large body, which is the Moon. Our moon is huge, and it’s caus-
ing the Earth to move in a particular pattern. And since the entire solar sys-
tem is spiraling in the same manner through space, then the whole solar sys-
tem must be gravitationally connected with some other very large body.

So astronomers started searching for this body that was pulling on our
solar system. They first narrowed it down to a certain area of the sky that
we were linked with, then they narrowed it down further and further, until
just a few years ago they finally pinned it down to a specific solar system.
We are linked with the star Sirius — with Sirius A and Sirius B. Our solar
system and the Sirius system are intimately connected through gravitation.
We move through space together, spiraling around a common center. Our
fate and the fate of Sirius are intimately connected. We are one system!

Ever since scientists have known about the dark area inside a spiraling
galaxy being different, they have discovered that stars don’t just move out
along the curved arm of a spiral. If someone spun a water hose over his
head and you viewed the scene from above, you would see droplets that ap-
peared to move in spirals. Can you envision that? Each individual drop,
though, is not moving in a spiral, but is moving radially away in a straight
line from the center; it only appears to be moving in spirals. It’s the same
way in a galaxy. Each of these stars is actually moving radially away.

At the same time the stars are moving radially away from the center,
they are also moving, independent of the system as a whole, from one arm
through the dark light into the white light, orbiting the whole galactic sys-
tem. It probably takes billions of years — I don’t know — for one cycle to
complete itself.

Imagine that Figure 2-36 is a galaxy viewed from above and that the
dark color represents the black-light spirals and the light color represents
the white-light spirals. From the edge it looks like a flying saucer. The orbit
we make around the center of the galaxy has within it a spiral motion simi-
lar to a coiled spring. In addition to our solar system, the same spiral motion
is seen between Sirius A and Sirius B [see Fig. 1 -4 in chapter 1 ] . The spiral
of the Earth and the Moon, I believe, is different. This spiraling motion of
the two Sirian stars just happens to be identical to the geometries of the
DNA molecule, according to an Australian scientist. This makes you sus-
pect that perhaps there’s a relationship in the unfoldment of things, that
events happen according to some kind of larger plan, similar to the
unfoldment of a human body guided by the information within the DNA.
Of course, it’s only speculation, but because of the principle “as above, so
below,” this is highly probable.

So we have two related questions to answer. One is why Sirius is so im-
portant, which has been explained by our gravitational connection to it.
Another is, why is this extremely rapid pattern of evolution we are experi-

54 O The ancient Secret of the flower of life

encing on Earth today taking place at this moment in history? Let’s keep
looking in the heavens. First, here are two incidental pieces of information
to share.

A Galaxy’s Spiral Arms, Surrounding Sphere and Heat Envelope

Figure 2-37 is out of National Geographic, showing what they’ve now dis-
covered. They’ve found that spheres of energy surround galaxies. Notice
the tiny galaxy with its spiraling arms, along with a bunch of loose stars, all
enveloped in the sphere of energy. Then outside that sphere is another
enormous sphere of energy, shown here as a hexagonal grid. So there’s a
huge sphere inside a smaller sphere, with a tiny galaxy inside it. As we prog-
ress, you’re going to see that you have exactly the same field around you.

Figure 2-38 is a picture of the heat envelope of a galaxy, slightly tilted,

Fig. 2-37. Galactic energy spheres.

taken with an infrared camera. It looks like a flying saucer. It has a big
circle around the outer edge, which is dark because the outer edge is mov-
ing very, very fast. This heat envelope is in exactly the same proportions as
the Mer-Ka-Ba around your body when it’s activated through breathing
and meditation. When you follow a certain breathing procedure, you’ll
find that a field about 55 feet wide will form around your body that looks
like this heat envelope. With the proper equipment, you could see it on a
computer screen, since it does have an electromagnetic component in the
microwave range. This is very real stuff. It is the same shape of the Mer-
Ka-Ba that, if you so choose, you will activate around your body.

Precession of the Equinoxes and Other Wobbles

Going on to why this change is happening at this moment: Our Earth
currently tilts approximately 23 degrees to the plane of its orbit around the

counterrotating field. Not
only do galaxies look like Mer-
Ka-ba fields, but they appear
to have the same internal dy-
namics! (Of course, I person-
ally believe that galaxies are
living beings, and that they are
really nothing but a huge living
Mer-Ka-Ba field.) In addition,
physicists at the University of
Rochester and the University
of Kansas have found evidence
that changes the long-held be-
lief that space is the same in all
directions. Researcher John
Ralston reported that “there
seems to be an absolute axis, a
kind of cosmological North
Star that orients the universe.”
This work is published in the
April 21, 1997, issue of Physi-
cal Review Letters.

They have also discovered that
light travels differently along
this axis than anywhere else.
There are now two known dif-
ferent speeds of light! The
axis is the key to the living
Mer-Ka-Ba field, and this find-
ing may eventually prove that
the entire universe is really
just a giant living Mer-Ka-Ba
field. After you are aware of
your own Mer-Ka-Ba field, re-
read this section and you will
understand.

Fig. 2-38. Galactic heat envelope.

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds O 55

Sun, and as the Earth orbits the Sun, the angle that the light hits the surface
of the Earth changes, depending on where it is in its orbit. This is why we
have four seasons.

Within this yearly rotation there’s another very slow wobble, which most
people know as the precession of the equinoxes, which takes almost 26,000
years to complete. To be more accurate, it’s about 25,920 years— it de--
pends on who you read, because everybody comes up with a few years’ dif-
ference. There are other wobbles, too. For example, that + 23-degree angle
to the Sun is not fixed; there s a wobble of about 40,000 years where it
changes about three degrees— from about 23 to about 26 degrees. Then
there’s another wobble inside the little three-degree wobble that completes
a cycle about every fourteen months. And they’ve discovered another one
that completes about every fourteen years. Now they say they’ve discov-
ered yet another one. If you read the ancient Sanskrit writings, all these
wobbles are profoundly important for consciousness on the planet. They’re
tied directly to specific events and to the time these events happen on the
planet — just as our DNA is tied to the various phases in the growth of the
human body.

For now I just want to look at the main wobble, which is called the pre-
cession of the equinoxes [Fig. 2-39]. This wobble moves in an oval pattern,
and the large oval in Figure 2-40 is the wobble itself. The right end, on the
long axis of the oval, is called the apogee, which points toward the center of
the galaxy. The bottom half of the oval shows when the planet is heading
toward the center of the galaxy, and the top half shows when the planet has
come back around and is heading away from the center. This movement
away from the center of the galaxy is also called going with the galactic wind.
The Sanskrit writings say that the ancient beings — who somehow knew
about the precession — say that it’s not at the far ends of this oval when

¥ <ll 2 ™L P mT f c he u? Uin , 0XeS , great change takes P lace - but sU g htl V afax these extreme points are

(the point at which the Earth s celestial , , . . . , , „ F

equator intersects its ecliptic) is due to passed at the points indicated by the two small ovals at A and C. Great

the slow rotation of the Earth’s axis

around a perpendicular to the ecliptic.

Fig. 2-40. Traveling through the time
period marked by the cycle of the pre-
cession of the equinoxes. The large oval
is the path of the Earth’s axis.

56 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of life

change takes place at those two points.

There are two other points sitting halfway
between the small ovals, shown at B and
D, which are also very important places,
though change is not as likely as at A and
C. Right now in the 1990s we are posi-
tioned at A, the lower small oval, which
indicates that this is a time of tremendous
change.

According to the ancient writings,
when we reach the upper small oval at C
[Fig. 2-41], moving away from the center
of the galaxy, we begin to fall asleep and
keep losing consciousness and falling through the dimensional levels until we cending and descending,

come to the place at the lower small oval, when we start to wake up and begin
to move up through the dimensional levels. We wake up in definite stages
until we get to the upper oval again, when we fall asleep again. But this is not
a closed pattern, because we’re moving through space. It’s a helical, open-
ended pattern like a spring, not a repeating cycle as within a circle. Because
of that, each time around we fall asleep a little less than the time before and
wake up a little more. A similar cycle occurs on Earth each day. If you look at
the Earth from space, it is half dark and half light at any moment, and the
people on the dark side are pretty much asleep and the people on the light
side are pretty much awake. Even though we have day and night, we don’t
repeat the same things over and over, but hopefully we wake up and become
more conscious each day. Even though we fall asleep and wake up, we keep
going further each time. This precession of the equinoxes is just the same,
only it’s a much longer cycle.

Center

Galaxy

yugas

The Tibetans and the Hindus called these particular time periods yugas,
which are simply ages. Each yuga has both a descending and ascending
phase, so if you use the Hindu system, the age around the top oval at C is
called the descending satya yuga. Then comes the descending treta yuga,
dwapara yuga, and kali yuga at the other end. In the kali yuga you have
both descending and ascending. Then you enter the ascending dwapara
and so on. We’re now in the ascending dwapara yuga. We’re out of the kali
yuga by about 900 years, and right now is the time when amazing things are
predicted to happen. The world is now rediscovering for itself that these
are periods of enormous changes on Earth.

This diagram [Fig. 2-42] was made by Sri Yukteswar, Yogananda’s
guru. He did this in the late 1800s. Though he did not know the true time
duration of the precession of the equinoxes, he put it at 24,000 years. That
was very close, because most Hindus had no idea of what they were doing
when working with the yugas. (I don’t mean to put them down, but they

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds 57

USA** ST Joey,.

Fig. 2-42. Sri
Yukteswar’s yuga
diagram.

didn’t.) You see, when we were coming through the kali yuga, we
were in the darkest most-asleep times. Most of the books
written in the last 2000 years were written by people who
were asleep, relatively speaking, and were trying to in-
terpret books written by people who were much
more awake. They didn’t understand what the
older books were saying. So, as with any book
written in the last 2000 years, you’ve got to be a
little bit careful because of the time it was writ-
ten in. Many Hindu scholars were putting the
precession of the equinoxes at hundreds of
thousands of years, and some said one yuga is
around 150,000 years. They were wrong and
just did not understand.

Yukteswar knew better, but he wasn’t quite
right either. What he did in this diagram was to
put the different yugas around the outer edge, and
on the inside he put the twelve signs of the zodiac,
thus showing which yugas corresponded with what sign.
When he made this chart we were in Virgo, shown in the
bottom left quadrant. At the moment we’re between Virgo and
Leo. Depending on what astrologer you talk to, we’re close to the
third eye of the virgin right now and passing into Leo— that’s physically.
That means the planet physically is between Virgo and Leo. But if you look
180 degrees across the heavens, you see the sky moving from Pisces into

Aquarius. At this moment we’re right on the line between Pisces and
Aquarius, about to head into the Age of Aquarius. But physically it’s a
whole different point of view. You need to understand that, because when
we look at the works in Egypt, some of their writings don’t make sense with-
out knowing this perspective.

Modern Views on Pole Shifts

In the 1930s, Edgar Cayce was channeling answers for a geologist when,
in the middle of a question, Cayce stopped and said something like, “You
know, there’s something a little more important going on with the Earth
that maybe you should know about,” and started talking about how the
poles of the Earth are going to shift soon. He said the year it would happen
would be the winter of 1998, but things have changed since then in a psy-
chically unpredictable manner. The poles still may shift, but then again,
they may do it in a way slightly different from Cayce’s prediction. We do
have free will, and we can change the fate of the world simply through our
being.

Edgar Cayce was an extraordinary human. He was a man people lis-
tened to when he spoke. The statement by Cayce that the poles were going

58 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

to shift in the near future was almost unbelievable by most of the world.
But because it was Edgar Cayce predicting this outrageous event, scientists
and other interested persons began to study the possibility. Geologists
would not believe his statement because they thought it would probably be
millions or hundreds of millions of years between pole shifts, that this kind
of change took a very long time. But because of Cayce’s prediction, certain
scientists began to search anyway. A string of major pieces of evidence
came forth that lent tremendous weight to what Cayce was saying, and they
have now changed the world’s view on this subject. The scientists sus-
pected that if there were a change in the physical poles, then there would
also be a change in the magnetic poles. One of the ways they decided to
study this possibility was to examine the ancient lava beds of the world.
This started taking place, I believe, in the 1950s or early ’60s. They wanted
to study lava beds because (1) they figured there would be tremendous vol-
canic action if such a shift took place, and (2) lava has a characteristic that
could verify and date previous magnetic pole shifts.

Iron Pilings and Core Samples

Iron pilings are found in most lava, and these pilings have a different melt-
ing point than the lava itself. The pilings harden while the lava is still flowing
and, being iron, line up with the magnetic poles. Through this observation,
geologists can see exactly where the magnetic poles were at the time the lava
hardened. They needed to get samples from only three locations to be able to
triangulate and know exactly where the magnetic north pole was at the time
the pilings hardened. Then, of course, they could radiocarbon-date it, which
was the best they could do back in those days. There were other approaches
to this problem, which we will look at in a moment.

So they discovered an earlier magnetic north pole that was not where it
is now but a long way away, centered in Hawaii. That last shift took place
right at the upper oval — a little less than 13,000 years ago. They then did
another test and found that the poles had shifted before that at the lower
oval. This opened up a whole new area of investigation into the Earth’s
magnetics.

The Geological Society of America published a summary of findings
gathered from ocean-floor core samples ( Geology 11:9, September 1983).
The samples were six inches in diameter and eleven feet long, and the re-
searchers analyzed the sediment. They discovered that sometimes the
poles simply reverse themselves. The north becomes the south and the
south becomes the north. This was another thing Edgar Cayce talked
about that people had a hard time believing. But when they analyzed these
core samples, they found it was true.

Going back hundreds of millions of years, they discovered a cycle where
the magnetic north pole would remain in place for a long time — then in a
single day, less than 24 hours, magnetic north switched to the south. It
stayed that way for a long time, then switched again. But toward the ends

of these long cycles were shorter periods where the magnetic poles would
reverse themselves again. This flip happened every once in a while. And as
we come closer into present times, the flips are starting to happen closer to-
gether — from north to south, south to north, and at the same time moving
to new locations. This has happened hundreds of times over the last several
hundred million years. A whole new viewpoint of the Earth’s magnetics,
called geomagnetics, is beginning to be understood. From space, would this
not appear as a pulse?

Pole-Shift Triggers

By now there have been many people trying to figure out what could
cause a pole shift. What are the dynamics? What’s the trigger that makes it
happen? There’s a book by John White — who’s also an Edgar Cayce advo-
cate — who has compiled almost all the information in the world on this
subject, though he does not mention, I believe, the particular information
on the last magnetic shift being in Hawaii. His book is called Pole Shift, of
course. It’s a very scientific and interesting book. If you read it, you’ll get
an excellent understanding of this subject, which is vast and amazing.

There are two main theories right now about what the trigger could be
that would cause the poles to move. One of them is obvious and the other
more subtle. The obvious one is called the Brown theory, named after
Hugh Auchincloss Brown, who conceived this idea. His theory is that for
some reason the south pole begins to form off-center (which is exactly
what’s happening now) , then it builds up quite rapidly toward the end of
the cycle (which is also exactly what’s happening now) , until one day it
breaks free from the centrifugal force of the Earth’s rotation. It’s just like
any spinning object: When something is off-center, it throws the whole
object off-center and forces it to find a new equilibrium. If the weight of
the ice keeps building and building, eventually something’s going to hap-
pen. The Earth can’t keep spinning in the same rotational position. It
will find a new pole that is centered. Yet there are some scientists who be-
lieve that the mass of ice at the South Pole is not enough to trigger a pole
shift.

As a matter of fact, the ice at the South Pole in some places is over three
miles deep and building, especially rapidly over the last 20 years, faster than
ever expected, probably because of the greenhouse effect. And today there
are three enormous volcanoes underneath the icecap that can be seen from
our satellites. It’s melting the underside of the icecap, and huge rivers are
flowing out from beneath it at this very moment. Perhaps this fact was not
entered into the equation by the doubting scientists. If that icecap, which is
twice the size of the United States, were to break free, it’s been calculated
that it would move toward the equator at 1700 miles an hour to find bal-
ance, according to John White. That would obviously cause some prob-
lems here and there. Brown’s theory appears to be happening, but it is not a
certainty.

However, someone has offered another theory, one which even Albert
Einstein considered seriously, that holds a possible answer to the equations
that unbelieving scientists have used. His name is Charles Hapgood. He,
and other scientists who worked with him, discovered at least two layers of
unusual rock underneath the Earth’s crust which liquefy under certain con-
ditions. Other scientists have demonstrated this in laboratories where
they’ve put the same kind of rock into a miniature Earth and duplicated the
conditions of the inner earth. From this experiment, they found that the
surface or crust of the Earth can slip over the main mass of the Earth, which
continues its rotation as if nothing had happened. It’s a fact. It can happen,
but of course we do not know if it will actually happen in real time. They
don’t know the specifics of how this would work — such as what trigger
could cause this slippage. Charles Hapgood wrote two books, Earth’s
Shifting Crust and The Path of the Pole, that will probably eventually change
our view of our world dramatically.

Albert Einstein wrote the foreword to Charles Hapgood’s first book,
Earth’s Shifting Crust. I feel it is important enough to reprint here directly:

1 frequently receive communications from people who wish to consult me
concerning their unpublished ideas. It goes without saying that these ideas
are very seldom possessed of scientific validity. The very first communica-
tion, however, that I received from Mr. Hapgood electrified me. His idea is
original, of great simplicity, and — if it continues to prove itself — of great
importance to everything that is related to the history of the earth’s surface.

The author has not confined himself to a simple presentation of this idea.

He has also set forth, cautiously and comprehensively, the extraordinarily
rich material that supports his displacement theory. I think that this rather
astonishing, even fascinating, idea deserves the serious attention of anyone
who concerns himself with the theory of the earth’s development.

It is a given that Albert Einstein was one of the most brilliant humans who
has ever lived, yet few geologists even yet believe such an outrageous theory.
Only in more recent times has proof begun to accumulate that such things
could be true. The same scientific world didn’t believe Mr. Einstein either
when he said how much energy was contained within a very small amount of
matter.

It is my belief that the trigger to the pole shift is connected with the geo-
magnetism of the Earth. This would take a long time to explain, which I am
not prepared to do here at this time. What is known is that for the last 500
years the Earth’s magnetic field has been continually weakening, and in the
last few years it has been doing absolutely bizarre things. According to
Gregg Braden in Awakening to Zero Point: The Collective Initiation, the
Earth’s magnetic field actually began to weaken about 2000 years ago.
Then around 500 years ago, the weakening really began to accelerate.
(Could it be 520 years? This would match the Mayan Calendar, which pre-
dicted a huge change at that time.) In recent times the magnetic field is
making unheard-of changes.

Earth.

Magnetic Flow Changes

The idealized lines of magnetic flow [Fig. 2-43] you see coming out in a
torus around the Earth are not what geologists have found. The reality is
that the magnetic lines look rather like straight weaving patterns [Fig. 2-
44]. They’re fixed, but they’re not precise in that idealized kind of way.
And there are certain areas where they’re stronger and other areas where
they’re weaker. These lines normally do not move, but because the field is
getting so weak, they are beginning to move and change. The birds,
animals and fish, and the dolphins and whales and other creatures use these
magnetic lines for their migration patterns. So if the magnetic lines change,
their migration patterns go off, which is what we’re seeing all over the world
right now. Birds are flying to places they’re not supposed to be, and whales
are beaching themselves on land, where it’s supposed to be water as far as
they’re concerned. They’re simply following the magnetic line they’ve fol-
lowed for centuries, and they’re running into land that wasn’t on that line
before.

When these magnetic fields pass through zero point and completely
change — which they may do very soon — we’ll have another subject to talk
about, about what happens then. You see, we believe your very memory is
tied to those fields. You can’t remember anything without these magnetic
fields. In addition, your emotional body is tied powerfully to the magnetic
fields, and if they change, your emotional body is radically affected. It’s easy
to understand that the Moon affects the tides of the world through the pull
of gravity. We also know that the magnetic fields of the Earth are slightly
affected by the phases of the Moon. When the Moon is full and passes
overhead, we get a slight bulge and change in the magnetic field of the
Earth. Just look at what happens in big cities during a full moon. The day
before, the day of, and the day after the full moon, we have more rapes and
murders and killings and weirdness of this nature than we do for the rest of
the entire month. The police blotter of any major city will verify that.
Why? Because these fields especially affect people who are right on the
edge of emotional instability, who are barely able to cope during normal
times. They’re right on the edge, then the Moon comes along and moves
the magnetic field just a little bit, and the person experiences an emotional
dip and does things he or she normally wouldn’t do.

So imagine what would happen if the geomagnetic field of the Earth
starts destabilizing. I heard in October 1993 from someone who’s involved
in aviation that in the last two weeks of September, major landing strips
had to recalibrate their guidance systems because the magnetic fields made
a unilateral shift all over the planet. It seemed to be temporary, lasting
about two weeks. At that time you might have remembered an incredible
emotional outburst within yourself and people around you. In my world I’m
on the phone with people from all over the world. People were freaking out
everywhere. That’s why I suspected that maybe what I heard might really
be true. If it is true, then we are beginning to proceed almost certainly into

Flower of life

the next phase of
this work. These
breakdowns in the
magnetic field of the
Earth will begin to
come closer and
closer together until
there is a total col-
lapse of the field and
a shifting of the
poles. This is one of
the signs of the very
end times.

There’s no reason
to get into fear about
any of this. Even
though what’s hap-
pening is unusual,
we’ve all been
through these kinds
of things many, many

times before. This is not unusual for you, though most of you have very little
memory of it. When you actually start going through the dimensional shift
and get into the feel of it, you’ll say, “Oh, yeah, I remember this now. Here
we are, going through this birthing again.” So it’s not a big deal, yet it is.

You came from somewhere else when you were bom as a baby, right?
You came from some other dimension and you passed through a void and
came out through the womb to Earth. You traveled this path before, and
we’re about to do a similar kind of thing, only it’s a really unusual one this
time. There’s no reason to fear it when you know all of it and remember
who you are. In fact, what’s occurring is extremely positive. It’s very, very
beautiful.

Fig. 2-44. Sample of complex model of
Earth’s main magnetic field, generated
by the USGS for the year 1995.

Harmonic and Disharmonic Levels of Consciousness

The Sanskrit literature talks about how when we approach the lower
oval at A [in Fig. 2-40] in the precession, we become aware of electrical
energies. We can fly in the sky. We can do many unusual things. The
world becomes extremely unstable, and in a single day we get rid of the old
way of viewing the world and make a huge transformation in consciousness.
But as we approach this transformation, given the particular level of con-
sciousness we have, we tend to destroy everything we touch. It’s a natural
part of who we are. We’re not doing anything wrong; it’s just the way we
are. We’re doing it exactly right. We destroy everything, we cause every-
thing to go into disharmony. I’ll be talking about this later, but I think it
would be appropriate to tell you this much now:

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds 0 63

On Earth, according to Thoth, there are five totally different steps or
levels of life that each human is going to pass through. When we reach the
fifth level, we will make a transformation that transcends known life itself.
That’s the normal pattern. Each one of these levels of consciousness has
many aspects that are different from the other levels. First, they have dif-
ferent chromosome levels. The first level of human consciousness has 42 +
2 chromosomes; the second level has 44 + 2 chromosomes; the third one
has 46 + 2; the fourth, 48 + 2; and finally 50 + 2. Each level of human
consciousness has a different body height associated with it. (This might
sound kind of funny if you’ve never heard it before.)

The first level of 42 + 2 has a range of height somewhere between four
and maybe six feet. The people who fall into that category specifically are
the Aborigines in Australia, and I believe that certain tribes in Africa and
South America also do.

The second level of consciousness has 44 + 2 chromosomes, and that’s
us. Our band of height is about five to seven feet. We’re a little taller than
the first group. The third level’s height goes up considerably. The 46 + 2
chromosome level interrupts the Reality through what you could term
unity or Christ consciousness. That range of height is from about ten to six-
teen feet tall.

Then there’s another range for the fourth level of consciousness — the
48 + 2s — who have a height of about 30 to 35 feet.

The final band, the perfected human, is between 50 and 60 feet tall.
They have 52 chromosomes. I suspect that the reason there are 52 cards in
a deck is related to those 52 chromosomes of the potential of man. For
those of you who are Hebrew, you might remember that Metatron, the per-
fect man — that which we will become — was blue and 55 feet tall. (We’ll
talk about this again when we get into the subject of Egypt.)

There are states between the consciousness levels, like Down syndrome,
for example. Down syndrome happens when a person transitions from this
second level of consciousness, which we are on, into the third level, but
didn’t quite make it. The person didn’t get all the instructions right, and
where he almost always fails is in the left-brain instructional aspect of the
chromosomes. A Down syndrome person has 45 + 2 chromosomes — he
got one of them, but not the other. He or she got the emotional one — the
heart one — all right. If you know any Down syndrome children, they are
pure love, but they don’t understand how to make the transition into the
third level of human consciousness. They are still learning.

The second and fourth levels of consciousness are disharmonic, and the
first, third and fifth levels are harmonic. You’ll understand this when we
see it in the geometries. When you look at human consciousness from a
geometrical point of view, you can see the harmonic levels, and you can see
that the disharmonic levels are simply out of balance. That’s where we are
right now — out of balance. These disharmonic levels are absolutely neces-
sary. You can’t get from level one to level three without passing through

level two. But two is a totally disharmonic consciousness. Does not chaos
bring change?

Whenever a consciousness gets into the second or fourth level, it knows
it can be there for only a short time. These levels are used as stepping
stones — like a stone in the middle of a river, one you jump on and get off of
as soon as you can to get to the other side. You don’t hang out there, be-
cause if you do, you fall in. If we were to hang out here on Earth even just a
little bit longer, we would destroy our planet. We would destroy it by just
being who we are. Yet we are a sacred and necessary step in evolution. We
are a bridge to another world. And we are living this bridge by just being
alive in this incredible time.

TWO — The Secret of the Flower Unfolds O 65

66 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

T H

R E E

The Darker Side of Our
Present and Past

W e are about to enter negative subjects for a bit. You could say,
“There he goes getting into that fear stuff just after he said not
to get into fear,” but I want us to observe all the facets, both
positive and negative, of life here on planet Earth. I don’t want to look at
only the positive ones; I want you to see the whole picture. And when you
look at the whole picture, both the good and the bad, you’ll see that the
chaos is just part of the truth and part of the birth. A phenomenal change
in human consciousness is occurring at this moment, though if you take any
tiny segment of what’s happening or look out in the world and see all the
wars, famines and human emotional garbage that’s filling our newspapers,
the future does not look good. But when you get the whole image of life,
you’ll see that beyond all the negative, there’s something much greater and
vast and sacred and holy occurring at this moment in history. It becomes
clear: Life is whole, complete and perfect now!

Our Endangered Earth

However, the most conservative scientists in the world that I can find
don’t give our planet more than 50 years — 50! The most conservative sen
entists on the planet say there will be no life or almost none on this planet
within 50 years if we continue the way we’re going. Many scientists give us
only three or more years; some of them give us ten. Most don’t give us more
than fifteen years. It depends on who you read. Even if it were a hundred or
a thousand years, would that be acceptable?

You would not be hearing any of this information today if it were not for
some changes in our government that have taken place in the last eight
years that have allowed this information to be presented. Although they’re
not allowing you to know everything, there has been a change in the powers
that be where they’re beginning to cooperate with life. They simply can’t

In 1992 the world nations met
at an “Earth Summit” in Rio
de Janeiro to discuss Earth’s
environmental problems. The
largest gathering of heads of
state in the history of the
world was called because of
the danger of losing our
planet. Most of the world
came, but the United States,
the largest polluter in the
world, didn’t even want to par-
ticipate. It was obvious that
the political administration felt
that money, jobs and the econ-
omy were more important than
whether the Earth survived.

Five months later, on Novem-
ber 18, 1992, a document ti-
tled “World Scientists’
Warning to Humanity” was re-
leased. More than 1600 senior
scientists from 7 1 countries,

THREE— $ 67

Planet of the Year

Endangered Earth

Fig. 3-1. Allowing the truth
to be known.

including over half of all living
Nobel Prize winners, signed
this document. It was the
most alarming warning the
world has ever received from
such a powerful body of re-
searchers. You would think
that this document would hold
great credibility and that the
world would carefully listen.

It began:

“Human beings and the natu-
ral world are on a collision
course. Human activities in-
flict harsh and often irrevers-
ible damage on the
environment and on critical
resources. If not checked,
many of our current practices
put at serious risk the future
that we wish for human soci-
ety and the plant and animal
kingdoms, and may so alter the
living world that it will be un-
able to sustain life in the man-
ner that we know.

let you know the full extent of the situation, because they believe that most
of the world would just quit their jobs and say, the heck with everything,
leading to complete chaos. Instead of quitting, is not this the time to focus?
Human consciousness is powerful. We will know what to do. We are more
than the ordinary world knows. Do you remember?

Okay, now let’s talk about the dark side. This is a January 2, 1989, issue
of Time magazine [Fig. 3-1]. In 1988 the secret government of the world
decided to allow us to know some of what was going on around environ-
mental problems. This was the first major publication on the subject in the
world. Time magazine declared the Earth to be the “planet of the year.” In-
stead of featuring a man or woman of the year, they broke away from their
tradition. The entire magazine was devoted to our endangered Earth and
its problems. If you were to read the problems as they were presented in
1989 and then read the problems as they’re being presented in articles to-
day, you’ll realize that what they gave us in 1989 was a ultra-watered-down
version of the truth. It wasn’t even close. But at least it was a beginning for
our world to see the truth about what we have done to Mother Earth.

We’re going to discuss only four or five different problems the Earth has,
though there are multiple different scenarios going on. If any one of these
scenarios were to break down, all life on the planet would eventually die.
And at the moment they’re all about to break down — it’s just a matter of
which one breaks down first. And whenever one system goes, then all the
rest of them will go eventually, and that’s it, there won’t be any more hu-
man life. It will be over with, and we’ll end up just like Mars or the dino-
saurs.

A few years ago, around the turn of this century, there were 30 million
species of life forms on Earth — 30 million different species of life. In 1993
there were about 15 million. It took billions of years to create these life
forms, and in less than a blink of an eye, a mere hundred years, half of the
life on this dear Earth is dead. Around thirty species a minute are now be-
coming extinct somewhere. If you were to watch this planet from space, it
would appear to be dying very, very rapidly. Yet we’re going on as though
nothing’s happening and everything’s great. We’re sticking money in the
bank and driving our cars and just wiggling right on. Yet from an honest
point of view, we have a real life-and-death problem going on here on
Earth, and few people seem to be really serious about it.

When they tried to get the entire world to come together in Rio in the
early ’90s to discuss the worldwide environmental problem, our president
didn’t even want to go. Why not? Because the problems are so serious that
if we were to fix them, another problem would happen that would be an
even more serious problem, from the president’s point of view: We would
be plunged into a worldwide financial breakdown, after which a large por-
tion of the Earth’s population would die from starvation and other prob-
lems. In essence, we cannot afford to repair the environment. On the
other side of the coin, can we afford not to?

68 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Dying Oceans

It was in the August 1, 1988, issue [Fig. 3-2] that Time magazine fo-
cused its attention on the oceans and what was happening there. Jacques
Cousteau wrote a book about this around 1978. He was a very respected
person, but when he wrote this book, he lost credibility in scientific circles
because he made a statement that nobody could believe. He founded his
statements on pure science, but people simply could not or would not ac-
cept the truth. Specifically, he said that the Mediterranean Sea would be a
dead body of water by the end of 1990 and that the Atlantic Ocean would
also be dead by the turn of the century. People thought, “This guy’s nuts.
It’s never going to happen.”

Well, it is happening. The Mediterranean Sea is now somewhere
around 95 percent dead. It’s not 100 percent, so he was not exactly right.
Nevertheless, it’s still going to be a dead sea if people continue to live the
way they do. And the Atlantic Ocean is rapidly doing the same. Maybe it
won’t happen in the year 2000, but it will happen very soon after that. Un-
less something changes dramatically, it will die — no fish, no dolphins, no
life in the Atlantic.

We can’t live without the oceans. The bottom of the food chain, the
plankton, will be gone, and if they go, we go. When we don’t take this seri-
ously, it’s like saying, “Well, I don’t really need my heart.” This is a major
component in the ecosystem on Earth, and it’s going fast. This is not debat-
able, this is scientific fact. The only part that is debatable is when. It is re-
ally happening. Nobody believed it would happen because they just couldn’t
accept this truth.

New York City, for instance, has pipes that go twenty miles out and
dump all their human feces into the oceans. They figured, Well, the oceans
will take care of it. But for the last 60 years or so it’s been building up into a
huge mountain. Now, there’s a mountain range of shit out in the ocean
that is moving toward New York City. It’s now up against and actually
coming into the harbor, and they don’t know what to do about it. It would
take more money than New York has to fix it. This is the kind of foresight
that we as humans have demonstrated.

The human manure approaching New York is an Atlantic Ocean problem.
However, the problem is not limited to the Atlantic or the Mediterranean.
The Pacific Ocean is Earth’s largest body of water, and it will probably take lon-
ger, but it is also having tremendous problems, especially in certain areas.

The red tide [Fig. 3-3] is the first deadly sign of the pollution. It’s an al-
gae that destroys everything that lives underneath it — it kills everything.
And these red tides are beginning to-sweep all over, especially around Japan
where there’s so much pollution. We’ve made lots of mistakes all over the
Earth because we don’t have the consciousness to know how to live in har-
mony with our own body, Mother Earth. This is like a symptom of cancer or
some other dreaded disease.

Fig. 3-2. Divulging the status
of our seas.

Fundamental changes are ur-
gent if we are to avoid the col-
lision our present course will
bring about.”

The warning document then
began to list the crises: pol-
luted water, oceans, soil, atmo-
sphere, diminishing plant and
animal species and human
overpopulation. (More than
half of the life on this planet is
now extinct and continuing to
die.) The words became stem:

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past O 69

Ozone

SOUTH POLAR PLOT

Fig. 3-4. Ozone hole above
the South Pole.

“No more than one or a few
decades remain before the
chance to avert the threats we
now confront will be lost and
the prospects for humanity im-
measurably diminished. We
the undersigned, senior mem-

Here’s another problem. Figure 3-4 shows the ozone hole
above the South Pole. Ozone forms a thin layer about six feet
thick. It’s a really thin, fragile layer, a living layer that’s con-
stantly being rebuilt. We know very little about it, though we
know more than we would if it weren’t for the UVC light (ul-
traviolet light, band C) that’s coming through the holes right
now. When they began to detect huge amounts of UVC, espe-
cially as shown here coming into the South Pole, they couldn’t
understand how there got to be so much, because their com-
puters didn’t show it. Then they found out that their software
programming was set up in such a way as to override this sort of
thing. After they reprogrammed their software, they found out
the hole was really there. This was some years ago.

What they actually were looking for was chlorine monox-
ide, the molecule shown in the far right of Figure 3-5. They fig-
ured that the ozone hole is caused by various chemicals, one of
which are CFCs. CFCs react with the ozone in such a way that
when the chlorine connects with the ozone, the ozone mole-
cule breaks apart, thus forming oxygen and chlorine monoxide.

Scientists figured, given the speed they thought the CFCs were
moving toward the ozone, that the chlorine monoxide up there would be
about 30 times over normal, and they were very worried about it. So the
world governments tried to get the companies that were producing the
CFCs — Freon and various other chemicals that cause this problem — to
stop producing those products and find other answers. In reply, the compa-
nies all said in unison, “We’re not doing it. That’s a natural phenomenon.
We have nothing to do with it.”

So the world governments had to prove in court that the companies
were at fault, which they did. To get the proof they needed, for the first
time in the history of the Earth every single country on the planet cooper-
ated in a single venture. This had never happened before. They flew high-
altitude planes over the South Pole for about two years collecting data, and

Fig. 3-5. Ozone reaction in molecules.

70 tf The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

they finally came up with something that really scared them. The destruc-
tive ingredient, chlorine monoxide, wasn’t 30 times over normal — it was
500 times over normal and moving much faster than they had believed.

This article came out in 1992, 1 believe [Fig. 3-6]. It first says that the
EPA predicts 200,000 more skin cancer deaths from the ozone hole. But up
in the right column they have a tiny section reporting that the EPA says
that the fatality estimates they had originally given were incorrect, and are
2 1 times worse than they had estimated. Twenty-one times — now, that’s a
lot. It’s not like saying, “Well, it’s a little bit more.”

This is what the government has been doing; they give out little bits of
information in little articles that don’t tell you much. They don’t make it a
big deal. By law they have to announce it, so they announce it in little arti-
cles and then let it go. Then they up the ante in another insignificant arti-
cle— as in this article here, for example, where they said the danger was 2 1
times higher than their first estimate; then two weeks later the same paper
comes back and says, “Oh, by the way, we were off two weeks ago, it’s actu-
ally double that.” Well, double doesn’t sound like much — except that
means it went from 2 1 times to 42 times worse than their first report, which
is an incredible amount. If the truth had been told in the first place, it
would have sounded terrible and created fear.

This is what’s been going on all over the world for a long time. The only
way the world governments know how to deal with the situation is by let-
ting it out little by little, admitting to more and more and more. They know

bers of the world’s scientific
community, hereby warn all
humanity of what lies agead.

A great change in our steward-
ship of the Earth and life on it
is required if vast human mis-
ery is to be avoided and our
global home on this planet is
not to be irretrievably muti-
lated.”

Yet most of the world rejected
this statement even though it
was created by one of the most
respected scientific bodies ever
assembled on Earth. You
would think we would pause
and say, “If this is true, what
can we do? Let’s drop every-
thing and do whatever is nec-
essary.” But the governments

ENVIRONMENT

EPA predicts 200,000 more skin-cancer deaths

■Every t percent drop In <

mum eaAAwi

80m to reach Eeflfa'teurlai

S ■Every 1 percent redacts
m own* raisfc# the incidence
tanaw by S to 7 pereenb

■ Itoe 3 pevoeal lose nf oat
(be US. to expected to cm

VBBfe* nation* of (toe world here never

■ agwwi on how to halt the dswtrurt»or.

■ afrni«for»#m<weara endangered *p«e
das. But when It came to raving the oeone
layer, which aerwens out the »un ’* harmful
ultraviolet ray*. they knew ,u*t what to do
Or«o It seemed to 1967. 24 natron* inert

in Montreal pledgee that, by the rear
2000. they would halve their production
of chlorofluorocarbon* iCFCs chemical*
that de atroy oaoae. Thai was a her, the only
atom hole that had been noticed wa* over
Antarctica But moor, after, satellite deu
shewed that oaone above the United Stats*
had dropped IS percent. That persuaded
more than 90 oeonenea last J une to agree to
ben CPCe entirely by 2000 Developing na.
turn* w ere given until 201 0 to wop produc
mg oronwdemaging chemical*: wealthier
oountna* promised them upto *240 million
f AUtfi* tfa§

tfm it mm* pnablem a fwr

graver than anyooatbought, last-week Kr
Ytroameetai Protaction Agency chief Wil*
tram Reilly announced that ottno* kas over
the United States erne* 1978 ha* amounted
toa "etunning” * to 5 percent The preuilu-
nary satellite data, which scientist* have i

been analyzing once last autumn, show
that Europe, the Soviet Union and northern '
A*!* experienced timtlar losses, while an i
ea* at the latitude of Sweden and Hudeon i
Bay saw iosaes of 8 percent "Fiat studies '
had shown about half that
Reilly "As a remit, there could be XOfiOO
death* from akin cancer in the United
ba.rad.eegWkdMa

the 400.000 otherwise expected over that
period. The fatality untunes*

what the EPA h*dtere«aet«e»&w,lStolv>

oh* radiation cm aims omr eaSaumm,
weaken the immune sy»um, damags crops
and disrupt the raiwdbGtta of plankton
that anchor the mans* feed chafe
And the morse ioasi* at most certain beget
won#. CPU stay in the atraoaptoere far
decades The EPA * Eiieen C lat ira en told

k’ l i nt w tif fktof r hr wniCY*

oooae tone of 10 to 12 percent over the Mtt
SOyaera— "and we've airradi thrown out
(hoe* eetimatea because they are far too
conservative."

Radiy vowed that the EPA * .S
sifyita effort* to And aataitutes :x as»
eating (uhttanoea Th»ra«rih>» havr made
p ro g yeo in firuflty that

the Job tf rhtnn.Txi frjucri '

thoy b§w bo(Bi Icni w
the CFOs used tor ‘
ditkmen, If subetitott ch«i*ic*lt e$m bf
found, d«**foptag i
tlUfifri tO pfcdWMS out (
than 2010. Right new, waatne* such at

CFCt too quickly would cripple lheirt*?sn«f
mate, Eliminating CPC* before 2000,
though, would not make much dSiere nee
because ea many of the cbemicato are al-
ready on their w«y to the s

edeet, regulators are running o

Fig. 3-6. Upping
the ante.

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past O 7 I

know that if we are to avert
this crisis, we must change the
way we live, and that would
not be politically comfortable.
No politician wants to be the
one to introduce this unpopu-
lar change. To the govern-
ments, the economy would
suffer and perhaps even col-
lapse if we were to stop pollut-
ing. So it has become a war of
money against life — terrible
but true.

The New York Times and the
Washington Post, two of our
most respected leaders in re-
porting the news, rejected this
document as not newsworthy.
This gives you a good idea of
the importance we place on
the planet itself. (You can
read about all this and much
more in The Sacred Balance ,
Rediscovering Our Place in Na-
ture by David Suzuki.

Think for a moment: This
warning document gives us
“one or a few more decades”
to avert this crisis — and it was
written seven years ago. This
Earth is billions of years old.

It has taken millions of years
for mankind to reach this level
of awareness, yet in a mere 10
to 30 years, a geological blink
of an eye, if we do not act in a
positive manner, we may be-
come “irretrievably mutilated.”
The word “extinct” was
avoided, but we all know
it is a possibility.

they have to tell you the truth (for reasons you’ll learn later) , but they’re
afraid to say we’re in real trouble. They just say, “Well, it’s not so bad, but
it’s getting worse,” and statements like this.

Well, not only is there an ozone hole at the South Pole, but there’s one at
the North Pole now, and the rest of the ozone is swiss cheese. In 1991 or
1992 there was a major television production on the ozone hole. It brought
together all the major people who were involved in studying this, and they
discussed all the pros and cons. They interviewed a particular husband- .
and-wife team — I don’t have their names, but they also wrote a book on
this very subject several years ago, predicting that the ozone hole was going
to happen. Before we even knew about it, they had studied it all, according
to this program. And the ozone is now undergoing changes exactly like
they said it would and at exactly the rate they predicted.

This couple was brought on TV as the experts, and the interviewer
asked, “Well, what do you think?” This interviewer was kind of puppylike,
asking, “What are we going to do? You guys know everything about it, so
what are we going to do about the ozone?” The husband said, “There’s
nothing we can do.” I don’t believe they like to hear statements like that
on major channels. The interviewer asked, “What do you mean, there’s
nothing we can do?” The authors said, “Well, suppose we get the entire
world to cooperate?” — which is the first thing that would have to happen,
and we can’t even do that now, some fifteen years later! “Suppose we do get
the entire planet to say, ‘Okay, we’ll stop it all today. No more of these
chemicals that are destroying the ozone will ever be used again.’”

The author said, “Okay, suppose we did it. Suppose we got the whole
world to stop. That still doesn’t solve the problem.” And the interviewer
said, “What do you mean? Wouldn’t it just heal itself?” The author an-
swered, “No, because the spray can that you sprayed yesterday sits on the
surface of the ground and the CFCs take 15 to 20 years to rise to the ozone
layer. This layer that’s slowly rising and eating the ozone will continue for
15 to 20 years even if we stop everything today. And it will continue to eat
it faster and faster, because we’ve used more and more of these chemicals in
recent years.” He said, “There won’t even be an ozone layer” — I think he
said in ten years. “I see no solution at all.”

If we lose our ozone, we’re in big trouble. All the animals of the world
will go blind. You won’t be able to go out during daytime without a space-
suit on, meaning every square inch of your body will have to be covered —
special UVC goggles and everything. In a short time the UVC light would
eventually kill you. And we’re rapidly approaching that. If you don’t think
so, read what the Wall Street Journal reported in January 1993.

The Journal was reporting what’s happening in southern Chile, which is
close to the ozone hole at the South Pole. The animals are starting to go
blind. The people who live there have thick, dark skin, and they’ve spent
all their lives outside, but now they’re getting burned in the course of every-
day living. And it’s spreading north from Chile and starting to happen ev-

72 O The Ancient secret of the Flower of Life

erywhere. Because of the swiss cheese aspect of the entire ozone layer,
places all over the Earth are becoming unsafe. You never know where these
spots are going to be because they move over the face of the Earth from year
to year. This ozone problem is happening now, not tomorrow or later or
maybe someday. It’s occurring at this very minute. Given another few
years, we’re going to be in really serious trouble.

They knew about the ozone problem at least as far back as when Reagan
was president. When the environmental agencies asked him, “What will
we do about this ozone problem?”, Reagan was really flippant about it. He
said something like, “Aw, we’ll just issue raincoats and dark sunglasses to
solve the problem.” Just like that, what the heck? We’re talking about our
very lives here, our very existence, and the governments are continuing as
though it doesn’t even matter.

The Greenhouse Ice Age

In the first seven days in office, President Bush was approached by 700
environmental groups — 700 of them in unity and agreement. They said to
Bush, “We have an even bigger problem than the ozone and the oceans; the
biggest problem that we know of is the greenhouse effect. If the greenhouse
effect is not checked very soon, it’s going to destroy the planet.” This is
what they had agreed on and what they
believed was the truth. For a while
Gorbachev and the world’s governments
were talking about how they were going
to put space stations up there to monitor
the environment and move with respon-
sible action. Gorbachev was gung ho on
the whole thing. Then I guess they gave
up on it, just quit, though they’re still
watching these things very carefully. It’s
a pretty hopeless situation.

Figure 3-7 is a satellite photograph of
the oceans taken from above Australia.

That dark blotch above Australia and
New Guinea reached the hottest ocean
temperature in recorded history in 1992.

It was 86 degrees Fahrenheit in that spot.

That’s 86-degree ocean water. If that
continues to spread across the equator,
it’s going to do exactly what John
Hamaker has predicted. If you’re familiar
with Hamaker and his theories, he has
powerful evidence that as this water
heats up, something very different from a
hot planet will happen: it’s going to be a

Update: Since June 1996 a
new possibility has been given
to us. Perhaps we have found
a way to heal the Earth of her
environmental problems. This
is the work of the new work-
shop we call the Earth-Sky.

As much as I would love to tell
you where the work of the
Flower of Life has taken us,
this is not the time. A new
book will have to be written
because this new information
is too vast to discuss in a sim-
ple update. All I can say is
that I am very optimistic for
the 3D survival of Mother
Earth at this time.

Fig. 3-7. Hottest ocean in history.

The Heat Is On

A hot spot in the sea could mean
global warming is finally here

iin: ton blotch usm i: a t si r a i i\ am* mav oum a

tli tins satellite image, released last week, represents
the ocean's hottest water, at 30 C (NtiT). That's unusu-
ally steamy, anti it nitty tw* partly a result of tin* global
warming that scientists think is on its wav The good
news: nasa reports that the ozone hole feared over
northern latitudes this spring never showed up. hut
only because the winter was warmer than usual. A
cooler season next year, which is quite possible, and
goodbye ozone *

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past *>73

cold one— very, very cold. Dr. Hamaker predicts an ice age descending
upon us within a few short years.

I won’t go fully into the dynamics of the so-called greenhouse effect, but
an intimate part of it is tied to rocks, minerals and trees. One average acre
of trees holds within it 50,000 tons of carbon dioxide. When trees are cut
down, burned or just die, all that carbon dioxide gets released into the at-
mosphere, and when the atmosphere contains a certain level of carbon di-
oxide, it activates the beginning of an ice age. Hamaker found proof that
this is what triggered the last few ice ages on this planet. He found his evi-
dence primarily from studying core samples taken from ancient lake beds.
The core samples show, by simply looking at the pollen count, that the
Earth for millions of years had a cycle of 90,000 years of ice followed by a
temperate period of 10,000 years, followed by 90,000 years of ice, followed
by 10,000 temperate years. That particular cycle has been going on for a
long, long time.

In addition, Hamaker has discovered — and other people have verified it
— that the length of time it takes to go from a warm age into an ice age is a
mere 20 years! People who have been studying this for a long time believe
that we’re possibly now around 16 or 1 7 years into that 20-year cycle, but of
course no one really knows. And they say that when the end of the 20 years
or so is reached, [snaps fingers] in a single day, less than 24 hours, it’ll all be
over. The clouds will back up over the Earth, the average temperature will
drop to about 50 below zero, and most areas of the world won’t see the Sun
again for 90,000 years. If those guys are right, we’ve got only a few more
years of sunshine. It’ll keep getting warmer and warmer and hotter and
hotter until that day hits, then snap! it’ll be all over. I’m not going to give
all the details of Hamaker’s work, but I suggest you do the research yourself
if you want to know about it. He has powerful evidence. Study what he has
to say. His book is called The Survival of Civilization.

Ice Age to Warmth, a Quick Switch

Scientists have just discovered another surprise, which has some of
them shocked and barely able to believe it. They thought that when an ice
age recedes, it would take thousands of years to warm back up again. But
they now have evidence that it takes only three days, says an article written
in Time magazine. It takes 20 years to go from warm to cold and three days
to go from cold to warm. So the greenhouse effect is a major and serious
problem. No one knows the answer, but what’s scary is that they’re trying
to instigate supposed answers that are totally untested. They’re all fighting
about whose answer is the best and who wants to do what — but nobody
knows. It’s like the ozone — they’ve got maybe 15 different ideas about what
to do to fix the ozone, and any one of them might make it better — or worse.
No one knows what these things are going to do, because we have never
done them before. We seem to be willing to experiment on ourselves to
find out if we’re going to make it or not.

Underground Atomic Bombs and CFCs

On top of that, all kinds of other problems are occurring. Some things
are so scary that governments are afraid to tell you anything at all. They
won’t tell you about one thing that I simply have to talk about, because it’s
so important that somebody has to say something! 1 know they don’t want
me to talk about this, but I don’t think they’ll stop me.

We’re finding CFCs in the upper atmosphere. Now, “authorities” in the
government have been saying that CFC products like Freon will float up
there because they’re lighter than air. But guess what — and you scientist
types can check this out: CFCs are not lighter than air, they’re four times
heavier than air. They sink, they don’t rise! So how did they get up there? It
might have been the 212 aboveground atomic bombs that our governments
have blown off in the world. Many people suspect that’s how all those
CFCs got up there in the first place, and that it really wasn’t us who caused
most of the problem with our air conditioners. It was the atomic govern-
ments of the world.

At one point they all went underground with their bombs, and we
thought, That’s okay, they’re bombing underground; nothing will happen
now. It’s not okay, folks. It’s probably the most dangerous thing that’s go-
ing on in the world today, even more than HAARP, and they’re still doing
it. I cannot prove what I am about to say, so do not believe it until you can
prove it.

Adam Trombly, a famous scientist who has accomplished important
work in science, has been monitoring the underground atomic bombing
around the world. He probably knows more about this than any other per-
son in the world — even the governments recognize this. Trombly explains
what happens when these atomic bombs are exploded underground. The
energy doesn’t just sit there; it has to go somewhere, so it goes shooting
through the Earth, bouncing off its insides, ripping apart the plates and do-
ing incredible damage as it goes bouncing around like a ping-pong ball.
This bouncing effect inside the Earth continues for about 30 days after the
explosion.

Trombly, much like Jacques Cousteau and others, now has a theory
that predicts all kinds of things that will happen — and they’re all happening
now! Things like the Indian Ocean dropping 23 feet over a very short pe-
riod of time was predicted by Trombly at least ten years ago — just as
Jacques Cousteau had predicted the death of the Mediterranean Sea in
ten years. Many brilliant people are speaking out their truth, but few peo-
ple are listening. If Trombly is correct, we’re only a few more atomic
bombs away from the whole planet literally splitting apart in little pieces.
The governments around the world have been on red alert since about
1991 over the changes happening to the Earth that were predicted by
Trombly. They’re scared to death. Yet I believe China just blew up an-
other one — and the U.S. is talking about blowing one up just because
China did!

Update: Remember that Pro-
fessor Einstein did not know
for sure that when the first
atomic bomb was ignited, the
nuclear chain reaction would
stop when the original fuel
sample was expended. Our
government knew that when
this first bomb exploded, it
might be the end of the
world — all life over in a matter
of minutes. But we did it any-
way! This is spiritual incom-
petence!

We are faced with another
moment in history where our
government has decided to
take another chance with our
lives. When HAARP was
turned on in the spring of
1997, they did not know for
sure if the atmosphere was go-
ing to be destroyed. They still
do not know for sure what the
long-range effects will be, just
as they did not know during
World War II with the
Manhattan Project.

What is HAARP? You need
to know. HAARP stands for
High-Frequency Active
Auroral Research Project. It
is a weapon massively more
powerful than the atomic
bomb. They intend to beam
more than 1.7 gigawatts (bil-
lion watts) of radiated power
into the ionosphere and actu-
ally boil the upper atmosphere
in order to create a mirror and/
or an artificial antenna to
transmit huge amounts of
power to any specific area on

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past 0 75

the Earth. This energy would
be used to manipulate global
weather, hurt or destroy eco-
systems, knock out electronic
communication, and change
our moods and mental states.
Not to mention that it could
be used to try to destroy or
manipulate the new Christ grid
around the world. Read An-
gels Don’t Play This HAARP
by Jeane Manning and Dr.

Nick Begich. You will
learn more.

❖

Update: In 1995 and 1996,
the secret government ex-
ploded six atomic bombs in an
area near Moorea Island, part
of the French Tahitian Islands.
France, along with several
other countries, placed these
bombs into a sacred physical
place of Mother Earth’s body.
If they had done this to your
mom, you would have called it
violent rape. They were neu-
tron bombs, which do not de-
stroy structures, but “merely”
destroy all life in the region.

If the Earth were a woman, the
area where they deliberately
placed the bomb would be her
perineum. Going straight
through the Earth from there
would be Earth’s crown chak-
ra, which just happens to be
the Great Pyramid region in
Egypt. This became the focus
of attention, for the secret gov-
ernment shut down the entire

Anyway, life goes on. It’s a good thing there are other levels to our spirit
than just the physical. If it weren’t for the ascended masters and our higher
aspect, we would be in a hopeless situation. But because of the work of
other great souls, you and humanity are just beginning to live. You will
soon be birthed into another new, clean and beautiful world, thank God,
and there’s no one else to thank but God. We’re going to be okay through
all of this. And yet I will continue . . .

The Strecker Memorandum on AIDS

Here’s one last drama. Actually, there are many other perilous situa-
tions (I could go on for hours), but I’ll just give you this last one about
AIDS. I suggest you try to find the Strecker Memorandum material if you
haven’t read it or watched the video. The governments are really trying to
suppress it. Dr. Strecker made a video memorandum of what he believed
happened around AIDS. He is a brilliant person. He has worked with
retroviruses and is an expert on this subject. He showed the video on tele-
vision, and the governments threatened him. They allegedly killed his
brother and the senator who was sponsoring it. But they didn’t get
Strecker — that would have been too obvious, I guess. Dr. Strecker has dis-
tributed many of his videos. He got them out to the world, though you
don’t hear about it anymore.

Dr. Strecker shows on his film how the United Nations was trying to
solve an environmental problem. They knew that the biggest environmen-
tal problem in the entire world was the human population, and at the rate it
was going, the world would double its population by 2010 or 2012. But be-
cause of what the Chinese did, allowing only one child per couple, and
other strenuous work around the world, they slowed it down. But they be-
lieve that it’s still going to happen. It is now estimated that somewhere
around 2014 the world population will have doubled. If that happens, com-
puter models have shown that all life on Earth will die or wish they were
dead, according to the United Nations, because we can barely keep it to-
gether with almost six billion people. Can you imagine what it would be
like with 1 1 to 12 billion people in the world? There’s just no way, at least
under the present system.

So, if you were in the United Nations and knew this potential disaster
was going to take place and had to make a decision, what would you do?
I’m not judging the people who did this — just put yourself in their posi-
tion of great power. You see that the Earth is coming to a solid wall, that
it’s going to be totally destroyed if something is not changed. So they
made a decision — and Dr. Strecker showed the memorandum right on
television. The United Nations decided that, rather than hit that wall
of 1 1 billion people, right then and there they were going to create a vi-
rus or a disease that would kill specifically three-quarters of the people
on Earth. In other words, instead of increasing to 1 1 billion, they wanted
to reduce the current population by three-quarters. He showed the ac-

76 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

population by three-quarters. He showed the actual U.N. document that
planned to eliminate three-quarters of the world’s population.

Dr. Strecker showed scientifically exactly how the U.N. did it. They
took a virus from a sheep and a virus from a cow and blended them together
in a certain way to make the AIDS virus. But before they ever distributed
it, they also made a cure for it. The governments have the cure right now,
according to Dr. Strecker. The people who were doing this — and history
will verify this — were obviously prejudiced, because they singled out two
groups: the Blacks and the homosexuals.

In Haiti there was an epidemic of hepatitis B moving through the homo-
sexual community, and they all needed to be injected with the hepatitis B
vaccine. So U.N. agents took the AIDS virus, put it in the hepatitis B vac-
cine and injected it into everyone. That’s how the virus started, according
to Dr. Strecker. The other evidence that this is true is that throughout the
rest of the world, the virus was not given exclusively to homosexuals. In Af-
rica, where at least 7 5 million people have AIDS, the ratio of male to female
infection is almost exactly 50-50, from the beginning until now. Only in
Haiti, and eventually in the United States, did it spread almost exclusively
through the homosexual population. If you look at the figures for this
country, females are now getting AIDS faster than anyone else. Soon na-
ture will balance it out, and you’ll see exactly the same thing you see every-
where else around the world, which is that equal numbers of males and fe-
males have AIDS. It isn’t a gay disease at all — it has nothing to do with it.
It has to do with the prejudice of the people who created it.

According to Dr. Strecker, the World Health Organization, which has
been instrumental in creating this disease, has also been concerned about
other diseases — and so have doctors pretty much everywhere. For in-
stance, let’s take cancer: Doctors have been concerned that someday can-
cer will become contagious, not by pollution or foods or things like this, but
that it will become airborne or waterborne, like a cold. You’d just walk by
somebody with cancer and you’d get it. But the number of different kinds of
cancer viruses is so small that the likelihood of that ever happening is pretty
slim. It still could happen, but it’s not likely. But for AIDS, there are 9000 to
the 4th power or 6,56 1 ,000,000,000,000 totally different kinds of AIDS vi-
ruses — that’s a huge number. And every time someone gets AIDS, a brand-
new virus is created, one that has never been seen before, ever. This means
that it’s inevitable, mathematically speaking — it’s just a matter of time —
that AIDS will spread rapidly, just like a cold, throughout the world.

There is a story going around that the World Health Organization be-
lieves that this rapidly spreading form of AIDS may have already begun.
Around 1990 or 1991 the WHO checked an African tribe of 1400 mem-
bers, including everyone from little babies to old people, who obviously had
all different kinds of sexual practices (you know, little babies aren’t into
sexual things) , and they found that every single member, without exception,
had AIDS. That’s when the WHO announced secretly that the virus was

Great Pyramid, not allowing
anyone to come near for three
days so they could test the re-
sults in the consciousness of
the planet. They were trying
to destroy a specific field of en-
ergy that has grown to enclose
the Earth. You could call it
one of Earth’s memory banks.
You and I call it Christ con-
sciousness. They, the secret
government (which is still you
and me), were fearful of this
new consciousness, but I be-
lieve now it has been mostly
resolved.

The polarities of the Earth are
slowly merging. At the time of
this transcript in 1993 we were
living in a period of planetary
insight. Now, in 1997, we are
on the edge of planetary unity
based on understanding. The
great test is still ahead, espe-
cially if the secret government
decides to use HAARP to try
to destroy the Christ grid.

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past $ 77

Update: On the positive side,
doctors at UCLA began about
five years ago examining a
young boy who had been bom
with AIDS. He had been
checked at birth, at six months
and again at one year. He still
had AIDS. He wasn’t checked
again until he was about five.
When they checked him this
time, all traces of the AIDS vi-
rus were gone. It was as
though he had never con-
tracted AIDS. They didn’t
know how his system became
immune; all they knew was
that it did. They checked ev-
erything they could think of,
including his DNA. It was
here where they found a
change. This young boy did
not have human DNA!

We have 64 codons in our
DNA, but in normal humans
only 20 of these codons are
turned on. The rest are inert
or not working, except for
three, which are the stop and
start programs. This young
boy had 24 codons turned
on — he had found a way to
mutate that made him immune
to AIDS. In fact, when they
were testing him, they found
that he was immune to every-
thing. They found that his im-
mune system was 3000 times
stronger than a normal hu-
man’s.

Then they found another child
with the same situation, com-
ing out of AIDS and turning
on the same 24 codons,

probably now airborne or waterborne, and that it might eventually spread
like wildfire, like a common cold. There would be a few years’ lag as with
any other new disease. If this were to happen, would you know that you are
safe? You need to know the truth — you are more than you know!

A Perspective on Earthly Problems

If we were not multidimensional beings, if we were only physical bodies
connected to the Earth and had nowhere to go, we would be in a very seri-
ous situation. But because of who we are, what is about to happen on Earth
could become a vehicle for enormous growth. Remember, life is a school.
Maya is maya!

But still, if we realize the incredibly dangerous situation we’re in, we
might awaken to who we are. The only reason I’m even saying these words
and not keeping it secret is because we’re like a group of people in a sinking
boat. It’s got a big hole in it and the water’s pouring in. It’s not time to sit
there and play games and do business as usual and think along the normal ways of
thinking. If you didn’t know the truth about our environment, you might
just go along with your life and not act.

I’m not suggesting to act environmentally, though that is not wrong.
What I’m much more concerned with is an internal form of acting, a medi-
tation, a meditation that consciously reconnects you to all life everywhere.
It is what the Taoists say: The way to do is to be. There’s nothing wrong with
acting externally, but there’s another kind of acting that’s required here, I
believe. It requires a state of mind where we realize the situation, we begin
to take it seriously and work in a way where we can make some real changes
in our consciousness. This inner thing we need to focus on and understand
will slowly unfold as we continue. Whoever understands the other side of
this coin of life will realize that these environmental issues are not a real
problem when higher consciousness enters into the 3D world, though from
a 3D point of view, it does look like the end of life.

The History of the World

We’re going to open a new subject: the history of the world and how it
relates to the present. Each one of these pieces of the puzzle widens the
view. The situation in which we find ourselves in this world didn’t develop
at random. Events occurred that we need to remember. Many of us were
here in past lives, and we have these memories within us. But that’s beside
the point. We need to know exactly what occurred in order to understand
how it developed into this situation today. This history, of course, will not
be found in history books, because history books of human “civilization” go
back only 6000 years, and we need to go back about 450,000 years to begin.

This information was first given to me by Thoth around 1985. Then af-
ter Thoth left in 1991, 1 became aware of Zecharia Sitchin, read his works,
and found out that Sitchin’s and Thoth’s information were almost perfect

78 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

fits so perfect it just couldn’t be a coincidence. It was amazing bow close
they were. Many things that Thoth had mentioned — such as giants in
Atlantis, which he didn’t explain further — were explained in Sitchin’s
books. And many things that Sitchin appears to have overlooked were
deeply explained by Thoth. So the combination of these two sources gives
a very interesting viewpoint. You don’t have to accept this viewpoint; you
can just listen to it like a legend, think about it and see if it’s workable for
you. If something doesn’t feel true to you, then of course don’t accept it.
But I believe this is as close as I can get to the truth, and I offer it to you. Re-
member, I had to translate the geometrical and hieroglyphic images of
Thoth into English. Something is bound to get lost, but I do feel it is close
enough to trigger your memories.

First you must realize something about written history. Somebody has
to hold the pen and write it down, so written history is always the viewpoint
of the person or people who wrote it. Written history began only in the last
6000 years, but would that history be the same if it had been written by dif-
ferent people? Consider that in most cases it was the winners of the wars
who wrote the history books. Whoever won a war said, “This is what hap-
pened.” The losers didn’t get to put in their two cents. Look at any of the
major wars, especially World War II, which was a very emotional war. If
Hitler had won World War II, our history books would be completely differ-
ent. We’d be examining a totally different set of “facts.” We would be the
bad guys, and they would have shown good reason for doing in the Jews etc.
But we won, so we wrote it from our perspective.

Well, everything’s like that all the way through history. Nobody ever
talks about this subject, yet it’s obvious. Even Thoth was very aware of this;
he said, “I’m giving you my viewpoint. I have watched the centuries go by,
but I m only one person. This is what I believe is true, but you must realize
that other people may hold different viewpoints on history.” So even he was
not saying, “This is it — take it or leave it.” So with that observation, we’ll
proceed.

Sitchin and Sumeria

I’m going to begin first with Zecharia Sitchin’s work. If you haven’t read
his books yet, you have a great treat in store if you want to read about this
firsthand. His primary book is called The 12th Planet, though I recommend
two others, The Lost Realms and Genesis Revisited (in that order) . He writes
about many cities that were described in the Christian Bible, such as Baby-
lon, Akkad and Erech, which for a long time people thought were myths be-
cause nobody could prove their existence. There wasn’t even the slightest
sign that they existed. Then they finally found one city, which led to an-
other, which led to another, which led to another. They eventually fourid
all of the cities mentioned in the Bible.

Realize that all these ancient cities have been discovered in the last 120
years or so, most of them more or less recently. As they’ve dug down into

becoming immune to AIDS
and other diseases. They found
100, then 10,000. UCLA now
believes that 1% of the world
has made this change. They
now believe that 55 million
children and adults are no lon-
ger human, by DNA definition.
There are so many people do-
ing this now that science be-
lieves that a new human race is
being bom at this time and that
it seems to have come out of
AIDS. It is almost impossible
for these people to become
sick.

It is also interesting that in
November 1998, it was
announced that in 1997, AIDS
dropped off by 47%, which is
the biggest drop in history for
any major disease. Could this
be one of the reasons?

Further, in C racking the Bible
Code by Jeffrey Satinover, when
they ran the word “AIDS” into
the code, they found all the
usual associated words. They
saw the words in the blood,
death, annihilation, in the form
of a virus, the immunity, the
HIV, destroyed, and many
more. However, there were
certain other words that did not
make sense to those research-
ers but that only now can be
understood in the light of the
previous information. They
found the words, “the end to all
diseases.”

This is perhaps the single most
important event in the world
today.

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past 79

80 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of life

the layers of these ancient cities, they’ve pulled out thousands of cylindri-
cal clay tablets upon which the history of Sumer and the history of the Earth
is recorded in great detail, going back hundreds of thousands of years.
Their written language is called cuneiform. What I’ll be telling you is not
just Sitchin’s interpretation. Many other scholars now know how to read
cuneiform, and as they translate these works, it’s changing our whole view-
point of the world, of what we think is true — just as John Anthony West’s
work with the Sphinx is also influencing modern thinking about human
history.

We’ll come back around full circle later to explain how the Sumerians
received their information. The Sumerian records are the oldest written re-
cords on the planet, 5800 years old, but they describe things that happened
billions of years ago, and in great detail things that happened after 450,000
years ago. Whether you’re using scientific knowledge or Thoth’s, our race
is about 200,000 years old. Sitchin says that we’re older than that, maybe
300,000 years or so, but the records and Thoth do not say that — and nei-
ther do the Melchizedeks. We’ve been here slightly more than 200,000
years, but there were civilizations on the Earth — long before this cycle and
long before the Nefilim — that were far more advanced than the Nefilim or
anything we’ve seen since. They left without a trace. By the end of this
book you’ll understand why there was nothing left when they departed.
This is the planet’s past. It’s part of who we are, in a way. We have access to
all that information. There’s a component within each one of us that has
all this information recorded. It’s easily accessible, but most of us are just
not aware of it. %

Normally we give greatest credence to the oldest source of an historical
event because it is closer in time than a scribe further removed from the
event. These are the oldest writings we have, with the possible exception of
the geometrical language that predates Egyptian hieroglyphics. The an-
cient Sumerians were telling us a story of history that’s very difficult to ac-
cept because of our certainty that what we now know about the past is cor-
rect. The story is so outrageous on so many levels that scientists are having
a very difficult time accepting it even though they know it must be true. It
is the oldest source! If it weren’t so outrageous, we would have accepted it
at face value long ago because it came from such an ancient source.

On the other hand, if they were crazy, making up stories without any
real knowledge, how do we explain that they knew so many facts about na-
ture that, from our point of view of history, would have been impossible for
them to know? For example, not only did the Dogons know about all the
outer planets, but so did the Sumerians — from the very beginning of their
culture! The oldest known culture in the world, the Sumerians, extending
back to around 3800 B.C., knew exactly what it looked like to approach our
solar system from outer space. They knew about all the outer planets, and
counted them from outer to inner, as though coming in from outside the so-
lar system. Just as the Dogons showed on the cave wall, the Sumerians de-

scribed the relative sizes of different planets and described them in detail, as
if they were actually passing them in space — what they looked like, the wa-
ter on them, the color of the clouds. The whole experience was described
in detail 3800 years B.C.! This is fact. How is this possible? Or is the truth
of our beginning unknown to us?

Before NASA sent our space probe into outer space past the outer plan-
ets, Sitchin sent them a Sumerian description of all the planets viewed from
space. And when the satellite reached them one by one, sure enough, the
Sumerian descriptions were exactly right. Another example: They knew of
the precession of the equinoxes from the very beginning of their existence as a cul-
ture. They knew that the Earth was tilted on its axis at 23 degrees to its or-
bital plane around the Sun and that it rotated in a circle that took approxi-
mately 25,920 years to complete. Now, that’s a tough one for a straight his-
torian to understand, especially a scientific type who knows that it takes
2160 years of continuous observation of the night skies to even know that
the Earth wobbles. The minimum length of time is 2160 years, yet the
Sumerians knew about it on day one of their civilization.

How did they know it? There is so much extraordinary evidence com-
ing out of these clay tablets that it’s not being absorbed into the general
thinking very quickly. As I was taught in school and understood it, Moses
wrote Genesis around 1250 B.C., which is about 3250 years ago. That’s
what I’ve always read. Yet Sumerian tablets exist that were written at least
2000 years before Moses lived, and they have the same account as the first
chapter of the Bible almost word for word. These tablets even have Adam
and Eve and the names of all their sons and daughters, the whole spectrum
of events described in Genesis. It was all written down before Moses ever
received it. This proves that Moses was not the author of Genesis. Obvi-
ously, this truth will be hard to accept by the Christian community, but it is
true. I can understand why this knowledge is taking so long to sink into our
modern culture, because it’s a huge deviation from the accepted history of
the Earth, and this minor/major truth about Moses is only a tiny part of the
whole truth.

Tiamat and Nibiru

Even deeper than any of these exceptional and impossible bits of infor-
mation they knew (and there is much more) is the actual story the Sumer-
ians wrote about the beginnings of the human race before Adam and Eve.
They’re talking about a time that goes way, way, way back. The story begins
several billion years ago when Earth was very young. It was then a large
planet called Tiamat, and it rotated around the Sun between Mars and Ju-
piter. Ancient Earth had a large moon, which their records say was des-
tined to become a planet itself someday in the future.

According to the records, there was one more planet in our solar system
that we are only vaguely aware of in these modern times. The Babylonians
called this planet Marduk, and this name has sort of stuck, but the Sumer-

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past O 8

ian name for it was Nibiru. It was a huge planet that spun retrograde com-
pared to the other planets. The other planets are in a more or less flat plane
moving in one direction, but Nibiru moves in the other direction, and when
it comes close to the other planets, it passes through the orbit of Mars and
Jupiter [Fig. 3-8].

They said that it passes through our solar system every 3600 years, and
when it came, it was usually a big event in our solar system. Then it would
go way out past the outer planets and disappear from our sight. NASA, by
the way, has probably found this planet. At least it is the most probable pos-
sibility. They used two satellites and located it at an enormous distance
from the Sun. It’s definitely there, but the Sumerians knew about it thou-
sands of years ago! Then, according to the records, as fate would have it,
on one orbital pass Nibiru came in so close that one of its moons struck
Tiamat (our Earth) and tore about half of it off — just ripped this planet
right in half. According to the Sumerian records, this big chunk of Tiamat,
along with her major moon, got knocked off course, went into orbit be-
tween Venus and Mars, and became Earth as we now know it. The other

chunk broke into a million pieces and be-
came what the Sumerian records call “the
hammered bracelet,” which we call the
asteroid belt between Mars and Jupiter.
This is another point astronomers have
marveled at. How did they know about
the asteroid belt, because you can’t see it
with the naked eye?

This is how far back the Sumerian re-
cords go. The records continue to talk
about earlier events, until at one point
they tell more about Nibiru. It was inhab-
ited by conscious beings called the
Nefilim. The Nefilim are very tall: the fe-
males are about 10 to 12 feet and the
males are about 14 to 16 feet. They’re not
immortal, but their lifetime is about
360,000 Earth years, according to the
Sumerian records. Then they die.

Nibiru’s Atmosphere Problem

According to the Sumerian records,
approximately 430,000 — perhaps as
much as 450,000 — years ago the Nefilim
started having a problem with their
planet. It was an atmospheric problem
very much like the ozone problem we’re
having right now. And their scientists
decided on a solution similar to what our

82 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of life

Fig. 3-8. Solar system including
Marduk/Nibiru and the remains of
Tiamat (asteroid belt and Earth).

scientists have considered. Our scientists have considered putting dust
particles into the ozone layer to filter out the Sun’s damaging rays. Nibiru’s
orbit takes it so far away from the Sun that they needed to hold in the heat,
so they decided to put gold particles into their higher atmosphere, which
would reflect the light and temperature back like a mirror. They planned to
get large quantities of gold, pulverize it and suspend it in space above their
planet. Yes, it is true that they talked about subjects that seem contempo-
rary — ancient humans talking about ETs and sophisticated science. This is
not Star Trek or science fiction; it is real. What they said is pretty amazing,
and that’s why it’s been so slow coming out into the general public’s knowl-
edge.

The Nefilim had the capability of space travel, though they weren’t at
that time much further advanced than we are right now, it appears. The
Sumerian records show them in their spaceships with flames coming out
the back — rocket ships. This is beginning space travel, not sophisticated.
In fact, they were so primitive that they had to wait until Nibiru got near
enough to Earth before they could even make the trip between the two
planets. They couldn’t just take off any old time, but had to wait until they
were close. I believe that since the Nefilim weren’t able to leave the solar
system, they searched through all the planets that were here and found that
Earth had large quantities of gold. So they sent a team here over 400,000
years ago for one purpose only — to mine
gold. The Nefilim who came to Earth
were headed by twelve members who
were like bosses, about 600 workers who
were to actually dig the gold, and about
300 who stayed in orbit in their
mothership. They first went into the
area of present-day Iraq and began to es-
tablish themselves and build their cities,
but that’s not where they mined the gold
[Fig. 3-9]. For the gold, they went to a
specific valley in southeast Africa.

One of the twelve, whose name was
Enlil, was the leader of the miners. They
went deep into the Earth and dug large
quantities of gold. Then every 3600
years, when Nibiru/Marduk came
around, they would shuttle the gold to
their home planet. Then they’d con-
tinue their digging while Nibiru traveled
its orbit again. According to the Sumer-
ian records, they dug for a very long
time, about 100,000 to 150,000 years,
and then the Nefilim rebellion took
place.

Fig. 3-9. Original Nefilim
settlements and gold mines.

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past 0 83

I don’t quite agree with Sitchin’s dating on when this happened. He
got it, not directly through the Sumerian records, but by calculating how
long he thought it should be. He came up with the time of about 300,000
years ago when the rebellion took place. I believe it was closer to 200,000
years ago.

The Nefilim Rebellion and the Origin of Our Race

Somewhere between 300,000 and 200,000 years ago the Nefilim work-
ers rebelled. The Sumerian records wrote about this rebellion in great de-
tail. The workers rebelled against their bosses; they did not want to keep
digging in the mines. You can imagine the workers saying, “We’ve been
digging this gold for 150,000 years, and we’re tired of it. We’re not going to
do this anymore.” I would probably have lasted about one month.

The rebellion presented a problem for the bosses, so the twelve leaders
came together to decide what to do. They decided to take a certain life
form that already existed on this planet, which was, as I understand it, one
of the primates. Then they would take the blood of the primates, mix it
with clay, then take the sperm of one of the young male Nefilim and mix
these elements together. The tablet actually shows them with what looks
like chemical flasks, pouring something from one flask to another to cre-
ate this new life form. Their plan was to use the DNA of the primates and
their own DNA to create a more advanced race than Earth had at that
time so that the Nefilim could control this new race for the sole purpose of
mining gold.

According to the original Sumerian records, we were created to be
miners, as slaves to mine gold. That was our only purpose. And when
they mined all the gold they needed to save their own planet, their inten-
tion was to destroy our race and leave. They weren’t even going to allow
us to live. Now, most people hearing that would think, That can’t be us;
we’re too noble for something like that. But that is what the oldest writ-
ten records on Earth state to be the truth. Remember, Sumerian is the
oldest known language in the world, older by far than works such as the
Holy Bible and the Koran. It now appears that the Holy Bible was birthed
out of the ashes of Sumer.

What science has discovered is almost as interesting. In the exact
place where the Sumerian records say we mined gold, archaeologists have
found gold mines. These ancient gold mines are dated back as far as
100,000 years. What is really incredible is that Homo sapiens (that’s us)
were mining gold in these mines. Our bones were found there. Those
gold mines had been worked at least 100,000 years ago, and they have
dated humans in these mines as early as 20,000 years ago. Now, what the
heck were we doing mining gold 100,000 years ago? Why did we need
gold? It’s a soft metal, not something you could use like certain other met-
als. It wasn’t found very often in ancient artifacts. So why were we doing
this, and where was it going?

Did Eve Come from the Gold Mines?

Then there’s the so-called Eve theory that people have been trying to
put down for a long time.

Scientists took a certain component in the DNA molecule and over-
lapped it to show which one came first, and they figured out that the first
person of humanity lived somewhere between 150- and 250,000 years ago.

And that first person, whom they called Eve, happened to come from the
exact valley the Sumerians claim that we were mining gold [Fig. 3-10]!

Since then one scientist has discarded this theory because there are many
other ways to look at the DNA origins. But I still find it remarkable that

this theory just happened to point at the same valley where the Sumerian Fig. 3-10. Tracing human descent back

records say it all started. to a S enetic Eve.

Thoth’s Version of the Origin of
Our Race

Now, let’s see how similar Thoth’s
version is. He agrees with the
Melchizedek tradition that our par-
ticular race didn’t start 350,000 years
ago as Sitchin says, but exactly
200,207 years ago (from 1993), or
198,214 years B.C. He said that the
original people of our race were
placed on an island located off the
coast of southern Africa, called
Gondwanaland.

1 don’t know if this is the right
shape for Gondwanaland [Fig. 3-11];
it’s not important, but it was in that
area. They were placed here primarily so that they could be contained and
not leave. When they evolved enough to be useful to the Nefilim, they
were transported to the mining area in Africa and to various other places
where they were used to mine gold and perform other services. So this orig-
inal race, our ancestors, developed and evolved there on the island of
Gondwanaland for about 50- to 70,000 years.

You can see on this map how the various landmasses could have fit to-
gether at one time, and this is what scientists now suspect is true. They call
this one landmass, before it divided, Gondwanaland. They got the name
from the creation stories of the tribes in western Africa. If you read the var-
ious creation stories of these tribes, they all have different ideas about how
creation took place, but one thread runs through all of them exactly the
same. They all say they came from the west, from an island off the western
shore of Africa, and that it was called Gondwana. They all agree on that
one piece of information, with the one known exception of the Zulus, who
claim to have come from space.

Fig. 3-11. Gondwanaland.

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past O 85

The Sumerian records actually picture humans as about one-third the
height of the Nefilim. The Nefilim were definitely giants compared to us.
They were 10 to 16 feet tall, if you believe the records. I don’t see any rea-
son for them to lie. Thoth said that there were giants on the Earth, but he
didn’t say who they were or anything more about them. The Bible says the
same thing. Here it is in chapter six of Genesis:

“And it came to pass, when men began to multiply on the face of the
earth, and daughters were born unto them” — that’s an important state-
ment, “when men began to multiply” (I’ll talk about that in a moment) —
“that the sons of God” (think about that one for a moment; it’s saying the
“sons of God” plural) “saw the daughters of men, that they were fair; and
they” (the sons of God) “took them wives of all which they chose. And the
Lord said, ‘My spirit shall not always strive with man, for that he also is
flesh’ ” (this indicates that “the Lord” is also flesh), “yet his days shall be an
hundred and twenty years. There were giants in the earth in those days and
also after that; when the sons of God came in to the daughters of men and
they bare children to them, the same became mighty men which were of
old, men of renown.”

That part of the Bible has been interpreted in a lot of ways. But when
you see it in the light of what the Sumerian records are saying, it takes on a
completely different aspect, especially when you read the older Bibles that
tell what the giants were called. They were called the “Nephilim” in the
Christian Bible, exactly the same-sounding word as the Sumerian records
give. There are over 900 versions of the Bible in the world, and almost all of
them talk about giants, a large percentage of them specifically calling them
the Nefilim.

Conceiving the Human Race: The Sirian Role

Thoth says there were giants here on Earth. That’s all he said. He did-
n’t say how they got here or where they came from. He said that when our
race was created, these giants became our mother. He said that seven of
them came together, dropped their bodies by consciously dying, and formed
a pattern of seven interlocking spheres of consciousness, exactly like the
Genesis pattern (which you’ll learn about in chapter 5). This merging cre-
ated a white-blue flame, which the ancients called the Flower of Life, and
they placed this flame into the womb of the Earth.

The Egyptians call this womb the Halls of Amenti, which is a fourth-
dimensional space that’s located third-dimensionally about a thousand
miles under the surface of the Earth and is connected to the Great Pyramid
through a fourth-dimensional passageway. One of the primary uses of the
Halls of Amenti is for the creation of new races or species. Inside it is a
room, based on Fibonacci proportions, made from what appears to be stone.
In the middle of the room sits a cube, and on top of the cube is the flame the
Nefilim created. This flame, which is four or five feet tall and about three
feet in diameter, has a whitish blue light. This light is pure prana, pure con-

sciousness, which is the planetary “ovum” created for us to begin this new
evolutionary path that we call human.

Thoth says that if there’s a mother, there’s got to be a father somewhere.
And the nature of the father — the father’s sperm — must come from outside
the system or body. So when the Nefilim were setting up their flasks and
preparing for this new race to develop, another race of beings from a far-
distant star — from the third planet out from Sirius B — were preparing to
travel to Earth. There were 32 members of this race, 16 males and 16 fe-
males who were married into a single family. They were also giants of the
same height as the Nefilim. Though the Nefilim were primarily third-
dimensional beings, the Sirians were primarily fourth-dimensional.

Thirty-two people marrying each other probably sounds strange, too.
On Earth, one male and one female marry because we’re reflecting the light
of our sun. Our sun is a hydrogen sun, which has one proton and one elec-
tron. We duplicate that process of hydrogen, and that’s why we marry the
way we do, one on one. If you were to visit planets that have helium suns,
which have two protons, two electrons and two neutrons, then you would
find two males and two females joining together to make children. When
you go to an old sun like Sirius B, which is a white dwarf and highly evolved,
it has a system of 32 (germanium).

So the Sirians came here and knew exactly what to do. They entered di-
rectly into the womb of the Halls of Amend, right into the pyramid and be-
fore the flame. These beings had the understanding that all things are light.
They understood the connection between thought and feeling. So they
simply created 32 rose-quartz slabs that were about 30 inches high, 3 or 4
feet wide and roughly 18 to 20 feet long. They created them out of noth-
ing — absolutely nothing at all — around the flame. Then they lay down on
these slabs, alternating male and female, facing upward with their heads to-
ward the center around this flame. The Sirians conceived, or merged with
the flame or ovum of the Nefilim. On the third-dimensional level, the
Nefilim scientists placed the laboratory-created human eggs in the wombs
of seven Nefilim women, from which the first human being was eventually
born. Conception in human terms happens in less than 24 hours — the ba-
sic process through the first eight cells. But conception on a planetary level
is very different. According to Thoth, they lay there without moving for ap-
proximately 2000 years, conceiving with the Earth this new race. Finally,
after 2000 years, the first human beings were born in Gondwanaland, off
the western shores of southern Africa.

Enlil’s Arrival

Now, the part of the story where the Sirians are the father doesn’t seem
to completely correlate with what the Sumerian records say, at least ac-
cording to the story given by Zecharia Sitchin, until you look at a sequence
of events that Sitchin didn’t seem to understand. Enlil, who was the first
one to come to Earth and was the boss in southern Africa — did not land on

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past O 87

land when he arrived on Earth. He landed in the waters. Why did he go
into the waters? Because that’s where the dolphins and the whales were.
The dolphins and whales were the highest level of consciousness on this
planet, and still are. In simple galactic terms, Enlil had to go into the
ocean to get permission to live and mine gold on Earth. Why? Because
this planet belonged to the dolphins and whales, and it is galactic law that .
permission must be granted before an off-planet race can enter into a dif-
ferent consciousness system. According to the Sumerian records, Enlil
stayed with them a very long time, and when he finally decided to come
onto land, he was half human and half fish ! At one point Enlil became all
human. This was described in the Sumerian records.

You see, the third planet out from Sirius B that some call Oceana hap-
pens to be the home planet of the dolphins and whales. Peter Shenstone,
leader of the dolphin movement in Australia, has channeled an unusual
book, The Legend of the Golden Dolphin, which came from the dolphins and
describes exactly how they came from another galaxy, how they came to be
on the little star around Sirius B, and how they traveled to Earth. The en-
tire planet there is almost completely water; there’s an island about the size
of Australia and another about the size of California, and that’s all. On
those two landmasses there are human-type beings, but not very many.
The rest of the planet, which is all water, is cetacean. There’s a direct con-
nection between the human-type beings and the cetaceans, so when Enlil
(a Nefilim) came here, he first connected with the dolphins (Sirians) to re-
ceive their blessing. Then he went onto the land and began the process that
led to the creation of our race.

Nefilim Mothers

To recapitulate and clarify: After the rebellion, when it was decided to
create a new race here on Earth, it was the Nefilim who became the mother
aspect. The Sumerian record says seven females stepped forward. Then
the Nefilim took clay from the earth, blood from the primate and sperm
from the young Nefilim male, mixed this together and put it into the wombs
of the young female Nefilim who were chosen for this. They gave birth to
human babies. So seven of us were birthed at once, not just one Adam and
Eve, according to the original stories — and <we were sterile. We could not re-
produce. The Nefilim continued procreating little humans, making an
army of little beings — us — putting them on the island of Gondwanaland. If
you want to believe this story, which is part Sumerian record and part
Thoth, our race’s mother is Nefilim and our father is Sirian. Now, if it were
not for the Sumerian records concerning the Nefilim, this would all seem
absolutely outrageous — and it still does. But there’s a tremendous amount
of scientific evidence that this is true if you read the archaeological re-
cords — not about the Sirian father, but definitely about the Nefilim
mother.

Science doesn’t understand how we got here. You are aware that there’s

88 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

a “missing link” between the last primate and us. We seem to come out of
nowhere. They do know that we’re somewhere between 150- and 250,000
years old, but they have no idea where we came from or how we developed.
We just stepped through some mystical doorway and arrived.

Adam and Eve

Another interesting part of the Sumerian records was that after they
mined gold for a while in Africa, the cities in the north, near modern-day
Iraq, became quite elaborate and extremely beautiful. They were in rain
forests and had huge gardens around them. It was finally decided, accord-
ing to the Sumerian records, to bring some of the slaves from the southern
mines to the cities to have them work the gardens. Evidently we made
great slaves.

One day Enid's younger brother, Enki (whose name means snake), went
to Eve — and the records used that name, Eve — and told her that the rea-
son his brother didn’t want the humans to eat of that tree in the center of
the garden was because it would make them like the Nefilim. Enki was try-
ing to get even with his brother for a dispute they were having. (The whole
story is much more involved than this, but you can read it in the records.)
So Enki convinced Eve to eat of the apple tree, the tree of the knowledge of
good and evil, which, according to the records, included more than just a
dualistic point of view. It gave her the power to procreate, to give birth.

So Eve found Adam and they ate of this tree and had children, each of
which was listed by name on the Sumerian tablets. Now, think about the
Adam and Eve story from here on — both stories: the one in Sumerian re-
cords and the one in the Bible. God walks through the garden — he’s walk-
ing, he’s in a body, in flesh, which was suggested in Genesis. He’s walking
through the garden calling for Adam and Eve. He doesn’t know where they
are. He’s God, but he doesn’t know where Adam and Eve are. He calls for
them and they come. He doesn’t know that they ate of the tree until he
sees them trying to hide themselves because they’re ashamed. Then he re-
alizes what they’ve done.

Here’s another thing: The word for God, elohim, in the original Bible —
in fact, in all the bibles — was not singular but plural. Was the God who cre-
ated humanity a race of beings? When Enlil found out that Adam and Eve
had done this, he was furious. He especially didn’t want them to eat of the
other tree, the tree of life, because then not only would they be able to pro-
create, but they would become immortal. (We don’t know if these are re-
ally trees or not. It might have been symbolic for something bound to con-
sciousness.) Therefore, at that point Enlil removed Adam and Eve from his
garden. He put them somewhere else and monitored them. He had to have
monitored them because he wrote down the names of all the sons and
daughters; he knew everything that was going on in the whole family. It
was all written down over 2000 years before the Bible was ever written.

From the time of Adam and Eve, our race developed in two strains: one

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past O 89

that could procreate and were free (though monitored) , and the other that
could not have children and were slaves. According to modern scientists,
this latter strain continued to mine gold until at least 20,000 years ago. The
bones of this second strain that were found in the mines were identical to
ours; the only difference is that they couldn’t have children. This strain
was completely destroyed at the time of the Great Flood, roughly 12,500
years ago. (There is much more to this subject, which we will give to you at
the right moment.)

We will be talking about four Earth pole shifts in this work — when
Gondwanaland sank, when Lemuria sank, when Atlantis sank (which is
the Great Flood) and the one that is now about to happen. This side note is
important to understand: According to Thoth, the degree of tilt of the
Earth’s axis and the degree of the pole shift — which happens on a pretty
regular basis, according to science — have a direct relationship to the
change in consciousness on the planet. For example, the last time the pole
shifted at the time of the Great Flood, the North Pole was in Hawaii (I real-
ize this is debatable) — at least that’s where the magnetic pole was — and now
it’s practically 90 degrees from there. That’s a big change. It was not a posi-
tive change, but a negative one — we went down in consciousness, not up.

Fig. 3-12. Lemuria.

90 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

The Rising of Lemuria

According to Thoth, after Adam and Eve there was a major shift of the
axis, which submerged Gondwanaland. Thoth says that when Gondwana-
land went down, another landmass came up in the Pacific Ocean, which we
call Lemuria, and the descendants of Adam and Eve were taken from their
homeland and brought to Lemuria.

Figure 3-12 is not exactly what Lemuria looked like, but it’s close in a
certain way. It extended from the Hawaiian Islands all the way down to
Easter Island. It was not a solid mass, but a series of thousands of islands
that were closely linked. Some of them were big, some of them little, and
there were a whole lot more than this picture shows. It was like a continent
that was barely above water — a water continent.

Adam’s race was brought there and allowed to develop on its own with-
out the Nefilim interfering, as far as I know. We remained on Lemuria for
65- to 70,000 years. While we were on Lemuria, we were very happy. We
had few problems. We were accelerating through our evolutionary path
and moving very well. We did lots of experiments on ourselves and imple-
mented many physical changes to our bodies. We were changing our skele-
tal structure, working on the base of our spine a great deal, working on our
skull size and shape. We were mostly right-brained, feminine in nature. An
evolutionary cycle has to choose whether it’s going to be male or female,
just like you did when you came to Earth. You’ve got to make that decision.
So our race was becoming female. By the time Lemuria sank, as a race we
were equivalent to about a 1 2-year-old girl.

Explorations of Lemuria in 1910

The fact that Lemuria probably existed was established in our society as
far back as 1910. We don’t remember much about this knowledge, because
in 1912 something happened to change our course of evolution. In 1912
experiments took place that were similar to the Philadelphia Experiment of
1942 and 43, which we’ll talk about later. They actually did the experi-
ment in 1913, but it turned out to be a huge catastrophe, and I personally
believe that this experiment is what caused World War I in 1914. After
that we were never the same.

Before World War I the spiritual growth pattern of the United States
was similar to what’s happening right now. People were extremely inter-
ested in spiritual and psychic work, in meditation, in understanding the an-
cient past and in everything else of that nature. People like Colonel James
Churchward and Augustus Le Plongeon from France were studying
Atlantis and Lemuria, and there were many similar thought patterns com-
pared to the present. Then when World War I came along, we fell asleep
and didn’t start waking up again until the 1960s. But the proof they had in
1910 about the existence of Lemuria was pretty remarkable, and it had to
do with coral. Coral can grow underneath the surface of water only to a
depth of 150 feet. In 1910 I suspect the Pacific floor was higher than it is
now, because they were able to see coral rings on the surface of the ocean
floor heading away from Easter Island for a great distance.

By the way, the ocean floor does rise and fall. You might not know it, but
the Atlantic Ocean floor rose over two miles in December 1969; you can
look this up in the January 1970 issue of Life magazine. In the Bermuda area
many islands suddenly began to break the surface. Some are still there, but
most of them sank again. The ocean floor had been over two miles deep
prior to that time.

At the time that Plato described Atlantis and the Atlantic Ocean, the
Greeks were having a difficult time navigating their ships into the Atlantic
Ocean outside the Straits of Gibraltar because the water in that area was
only 10 or 15 feet deep, sometimes even less. Now the water is deep again.

The coral rings they discovered in the Pacific were estimated at 1800
feet deep. This meant that the rings originally had islands inside, because
the coral had to be close to the surface in order to grow. If the rings were
1800 feet deep, it meant that since coral cannot grow below 150 feet, the
rings sank very, very slowly. In 1910 people could see these rings going off
into the distance, so they knew there had to be a lot of islands there at one
time. Probably more important, if you follow the fauna and flora from the
Hawaiian Islands, you find the same features on a whole series of islands
moving along an arc from Hawaii all the way to Easter Island. These islands
are separated by long distances, but if you look on a map, you’ll see a long
string. That string used to run along the western shores of Lemuria. All
those islands, including Tahiti and Borea, were part of Lemuria. All the is-
lands in this string have exactly the same fauna and flora — not on any of

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past 0 91

the other islands, just this one string — the same trees, same birds, same
bees, same bugs, same bacteria, same everything. Science can explain this
phenomenon only if there were at one time much closer land bridges be-
tween these islands.

Ay and Tiya and the Beginning of Tantra

This new civilization in Lemuria was developing quite well; everything
was going along just great. But most of Lemuria eventually sank. About a
thousand years before it sank, two people were there whose names were Ay
and Tiya. This couple did something that no one else had ever done before,
at least in our evolutionary cycle. They discovered that if you make love in
a certain way and breathe in a certain way, you get different results when
you have a child. Through the conception of that different kind of birth, all
three of them— the mother, the father and the child — would become im-
mortal. In other words, by having a baby in a certain way, the experience
changes you forever.

Ay and Tiya suspected that they had become immortal, I’m sure, be-
cause of their experience. As time went on and everybody else started dy-
ing but they remained alive, people began to realize that they really did
have something. So they finally set up a school. As far as I know, it was the
first mystery school on the Earth in this cycle. It was called the Naacal, or
Naakal (rhymes with McCall), Mystery School, where they simply tried to
teach how to do this thing we call resurrection or ascension through tantra.
Tantra is a Hindu word for yoga or union with God though sexual practices.
(We have a lot to go over before we can understand exactly what they were
doing.) Anyway, they did this and then they began to teach other people.

Before Lemuria sank, they had instructed approximately a thousand
people, which means that about 333 families of three each were able to un-
derstand what they were doing and demonstrate it. They were able to make
love in this unusual way. They didn’t touch each other, actually. In fact,
they didn’t even need to be in the same room. It was interdimensional love-
making. They taught others how to do it, and it was getting to a place
where in another few thousand years they would probably have translated
the whole race into a new consciousness.

But God evidently said no, it was not the right time. They had just got-
ten started when Lemuria sank. Lemuria, like I said, was female, and the
Lemurians were very psychic. They knew that Lemuria was going to sink a
long time beforehand. They knew with absolute certainty; it wasn’t even a
matter of discussion. So they prepared a long time in advance. They took
all their artifacts to Lake Titicaca, Mount Shasta and other places. Even
the great golden disk of Lemuria was removed. They got everything of
value out of the country and prepared for the end. When Lemuria finally
sank, they were totally off the islands. They had resettled from Lake
Titicaca through Central America and Mexico to as far north as Mount
Shasta.

Lemuria Sinks and Atlantis Rises

According to what Thoth says, the sinking of Lemuria and the rising of
Atlantis occurred at the same time, during another shift of the axis.

Lemuria went down, and what would be called Atlantis rose.

Atlantis was a pretty large continent, as shown here [Fig. 3-13]. The
southeastern part of the United States wasn’t there; Florida, Louisiana, Al-
abama, Georgia, South Carolina, North Carolina and parts of Texas were
under water. I don’t know if Atlantis was quite this big or not, but it was
pretty big. It actually consisted of this continent plus nine islands: one to
the north, one to the east, one to the south and six to the west, which ex-
tended to where the Florida Keys are now.

Fig. 3-13. Atlantis.

Update: On May 23, 1998,
Aaron Du Val, president of
the Egyptology Society in Mi-
ami, Florida, announced that
ancient Atlantis has been
found near Bimini, and that it
can be scientifically proven be-
yond any doubt. They have
found a huge underwater pyra-
mid and have open hermeti-
cally sealed chambers to
expose records that confirm
what Plato said about Atlantis
during the time of ancient
Greece. Mr. Du Val said they
will present their evidence to
the world before the end of
1998 or soon afterward.

THREE — The Darker Side of Our Present and Past <r 93

94 O The ancient Secret of toe Flower of Life

FOUR

The Aborted Evolution of
Consciousness and the Creation
of the Christ Grid

How the Lemurians Evolved Human Consciousness

T he immortal beings of Lemuria “flew” from their homeland to a little
island north of the newly risen continent of Atlantis. They waited for
a long time on the island they named Udal, then they began to re-
create their spiritual science. If you had watched them, you wouldn’t have
known what the heck they were doing; you’d have thought they were nuts.
In order to describe what they were doing, I have to describe something else
first

The Structure of the Human Brain

This circle [Fig. 4-1] represents a human head, looking down from
above. There’s the nose (N). The human brain is divided into two compo-
nents, the left side and the right side.

In Figure 4-2, the left side is male and the right side is female, and they
are linked by the corpus callosum. According to Thoth, this is the nature of
these two hemispheres: The left, male component sees everything abso-
lutely logically — as it is, you might say. The right, female component is
much more concerned with experiencing something than understanding it.
The female and male perceptions are mirror images of each other — as if you
had a mirror between them. If you had the word LOVE written into the
male component, he would see it as shown. But the female sees its mirror
image, also as shown. When the male looks at her way of perceiving, he
says, “There’s no logic here.” She looks at him and says, “Where is the feel-
ing?”

The brain is further divided into four lobes by another thin division.
The male side of the brain has a component behind it that reflects, or mir-

Fig. 4-1. The two hemispheres of the
human brain.

RIGHT

Fig. 4-2. Dynamics of the two hemi-
spheres, reflecting side to side.

FOUR— 0 95

rors the front, as shown in Figure 4-3. There’s another mir-
ror image behind the female side that reflects what’s in front
of it. The male logical component has a totally experiential
component behind it and the female experiential compo-
nent has totally logical component behind it. It’s as if there
are four mirrors reflecting each other in these four possible
ways. When we look at the geometries later, you’ll see that
the forward part in the male brain, the logical component, is
based on the triangle and the square (in two dimensions) or
the tetrahedron and the cube (in three dimensions) . The
forward part in the female brain, the experiential compo-
nent, is based on the triangle and the pentagon (in two di-
mensions) or the tetrahedron, the icosahedron and the
dodecahedron (in three dimensions). There are also diagonal pathways
connecting the left-front logical to the back-right logical, and the right-
front experiential to the back-left experiential. Thus the mirror quality re-
flects side to side, front to back, and diagonal to diagonal. This is the way
we’re made up, according to Thoth.

The Attempt to Birth a New Consciousness on Atlantis

When the time was right, the Naacals from Lemuria created a spiritual
representation of a human brain on the surface of their Atlantean island.
Their purpose was to birth a new consciousness based on what they had
learned during Lemuria. They believed the brain had to come first before
the body of the new consciousness of Atlantis was to emerge. With Thoth’s
image of the human brain in mind, you can begin to make sense of their ac-
tions. First they made a wall down the middle of the island about 40 feet
high and 20 feet wide, which sealed off one side of the island from the other.
Literally, you had to go into the water to get to the other side. Then they
ran a minor wall across at 90 degrees to the first wall, which divided the is-
land into four parts.

Then half of these thousand people, who were of the Naacal Mystery
School, went on one side and half stayed on the other, depending on their
nature. That could mean that all the women stayed on one side and all the
men went to the other side, but as I understand it, where a person went did
not depend on the physical body, but his or her dependency on one side of
the brain or the other. In this way, approximately half became the male
component of the brain and the other half became the female component.

They spent thousands of years in this physical state until they believed
they were ready for the next step. Three people were selected to represent
the corpus callosum, the part of the brain that links the left and right hemi-
spheres together. Thoth’s father, Thome, was one of these. He and two
other people were the only ones allowed to go everywhere on the island.
Otherwise, the two sides had to remain completely separate from each
other. Then the three began to align their energies and thoughts and feel-
ings and all aspects of humanness into an integrated human brain, not with

AD
geometrical
logical

LEFT

male
experiential

female
experiential

RIGHT

geometrical
logical

Fig. 4-3. The reflective areas, front to back.

96 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

human cells, but rather with human bodies.

The next step was to project onto the surface of Atlantis the form of the
Tree of Life. They used the form here [Fig. 4-4] with 12 circles on it instead
of 10, but the 1 1th and 12 th circles were off the mainland; one of the points
was on Udal and one was in the water to the south. So there were ten com-
ponents on the mainland, which is the configuration we’re familiar with.
Even though it extended over hundreds of miles on the surface of this land,
they projected it to the accuracy of a single atom, according to Thoth.
There is an indication that even the spheres of the Tree of Life were used to
designate the size and shape of the cities of Atlantis. Plato says in his book
Critias that the main city of Atlantis was made of three rings of land sepa-
rated by water, as shown in this drawing [Fig. 4-5]. He also says the city was
constructed of red, black and white stones. This last statement will make
sense as soon as we talk about the Great Pyramid.

Fig. 4-4. Tree of Life on Atlantis.

The Children of Lemuria Are Called Forth

Suddenly, in a single day, the brain of Atlantis, the Naacal Mystery
School, breathed life into the Tree of Life on the surface of Atlantis. This
created vortexes of energy rotating out of each of the circles on the Tree of
Life. Once the vortexes were established, then the brain of Atlantis psychi-
cally called forth the children of Lemuria. Millions and millions of
Lemurians, who by then had settled along the west coast of North and
South America and in other places, began to be pulled to Atlantis. A great
migration began, and the ordinary people of the sunken Lemuria started
moving toward Atlantis. Remember, they were feminine right-brained be-
ings and inner communication was easy. However, the Lemurian body of
consciousness had reached only the age of twelve as a planetary conscious-
ness. It was still a child, and some of its centers weren’t functioning yet;
they had worked with those energies and had mastered only eight of the
ten. So each migrating Lemurian was attracted to one of these eight cen-
ters on Atlantis, depending on the nature of the individual. There they set-
tled and began to build cities.

That left two vortexes with nobody using them, not a single person.
These two vortexes were pulling life toward them, and in life you just can’t
have an empty place. Life will find a way to fill it. For instance, if you’re
driving along the freeway following another car and you drop too far behind
it, somebody will fill in the gap, right? If you leave a place empty, life will
step in and fill it. That’s exactly what happened on Atlantis.

Though Lemurians settled into only eight of the vortex areas, Mayan re-
cords state clearly that there were ten cities in Atlantis when it fell. In fact,
you can see those records in the Troano document, which is now located in
the British Museum. This document is estimated to be at least 3500 years
old, and it describes in detail the sinking of Atlantis. It’s Mayan, and it con-
tains an authentic account of the cataclysm, according to Le Plongeon, the
French historian who translated it. Here is what it says:

Fig. 4-5. Atlantean city of Poseidon.

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid *5 97

In the year 6 Kan on the 11th Muluc in the month Zak, there occurred ter-
rible earthquakes which continued without interruption until the 13th
Chin. The country of the hills of Mud, the land of Mu, was sacrificed, being
twice upheaved. It suddenly disappeared during one night, the basin being
continually shaken by volcanic forces. Being confined, these caused the
land to sink and to rise several times and in various places. At last the sur-
face gave way, and ten countries were torn asunder and scattered, unable to
stand the forces of the convulsions. They sank with their 64 million inhab-
itants.

The ten countries mentioned were referring to the ten points on the
Tree of Life. When you see this document, it shows an extremely sophisti-
cated city with volcanoes going off inside and all around it, pyramids and
everything else being destroyed and people getting in boats and trying to es-
cape. It describes the incident in the Mayan language, which uses pictures.

The Aborted Evolution

Two Empty Vortexes Drew Extraterrestrial Races

To fill those two empty vortexes, according to Thoth, two extraterres-
trial races stepped in — not one, but two completely different races. The
first race was the Hebrews, coming from our future. Thoth says they came
from off the planet, but I don’t know specifically where. The Hebrews were
kind of like a kid who went through the fifth grade and didn’t make it and
had to do that grade over again. They hadn’t graduated to the next level of
evolution, so they had to repeat that grade. In other words, they were like a
child who had already been through the math stuff. They knew a lot of
things that we didn’t know yet. They had legal permission from the Galac-
tic Command to step into our evolutionary path at that time. They brought
with them, according to Thoth, many concepts and ideas that we had no
idea about yet because we hadn’t entered into those levels of awareness.
This interaction actually benefited our evolution, I believe. There was no
problem with their coming to Earth and settling. There probably would
have been no problem at all if just this one race had come here.

The other race that stepped in at that time caused big problems. These
beings came from the nearby planet of Mars. (I know this may sound
strange, but it sounded even stranger when I was saying this back in 1985
before people like Richard Hoagland began to speak up.) It has become ev-
ident, because of the situation that has developed in the world, that this
same race is still causing major problems. The secret government and the
trillionaires of the world are of Mars extraction or have mostly Martian
genes and little or no emotional/feeling body.

Mars after the Lucifer Rebellion

According to Thoth, Mars looked much like Earth a little less than a
million years ago. It was beautiful. It had oceans and water and trees and

98 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

was just fantastic. But then something happened to them, and it had to do
with a past “Lucifer rebellion.”

From the very beginning of this experiment we are in — and all of God’s
creation is an experiment — experiments similar to the Lucifer rebellion (if
you want to call them rebellions) have been attempted four times. In other
words, three other beings besides Lucifer attempted to do the same thing,
and each time it resulted in utter chaos throughout the universe.

More than a million years ago, the Martians had joined the third rebel-
lion, the third time that life decided to try this experiment. And the experi-
ment failed dramatically. Planets everywhere were destroyed, and Mars
was one of them. Life attempted to create a separate reality from God,
which is the same thing that’s going on now. In other words, a portion of
life attempted to separate itself from all other life and create its own sepa-
rate reality. Since everyone is God anyway, this is okay — you can do that.
The only thing is, it never has worked so far. Nevertheless, they tried it
again.

When someone tries to separate from God, they sever their love con-
nection with Reality. So when the Martians (and many others) created a
separate reality, they cut the love bond — they disconnected the emotional
body — and in so doing they became pure male, with little or no female
within them. They were purely logical beings with no emotions. Like Mr.
Spock in Star Trek, they were pure logic. What happened in Mars, and in
thousands and thousands of other places, was that they ended up fighting
all the time because there was no compassion, no love. Mars became a bat-
tleground that just kept going on and on and on, until finally it became
clear that Mars was not going to survive. Eventually they blew their atmo-
sphere away and destroyed the surface of their planet.

Before Mars was destroyed, they built huge tetrahedral pyramids, which
you’re going to see in photographs in the second volume. Then they built
three-sided, four-sided, and five-sided pyramids, eventually building a com-
plex that was able to create a synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba. You see, you can have a
space-time vehicle that looks like a spaceship, or you can have certain
other structures that do the same thing. They built a structure from which
they were able to look ahead and behind in time and space to tremendous
distances and time periods.

A small group of Martians tried to get away from Mars before it was de-
stroyed, so they translated themselves into the future and found a perfect
place to resettle before Mars was destroyed. That place was Earth, but it
was about 65,000 years in our past. They saw that little vortex sitting there
on Atlantis with nobody in it. They didn’t ask permission. Being part of the
rebellion, they didn’t go through the normal procedure. They just said, “All
right, let’s do it.” They stepped right into that vortex, and in so doing, they
joined our evolutionary path.

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid 0 99

Martians Rape the Human Child Consciousness and Take Over

There were only a few thousand of these Martians who actually used the
time-space-dimension consciousness machine, or building. The very first
thing they did when they arrived here on Earth was try to take control of
Atlantis. They wanted to declare war and take over. However, they were
vulnerable because of their small numbers and perhaps other reasons, so
they couldn’t do it. They were finally subdued by the Atlanteans/
Lemurians. We were able to stop them from conquering us, but we could
not send them back. By the time this took place in our evolutionary path,
we were about the age of a 1 4-year-old girl. So what you had here was simi-
lar to a 14-year-old girl being taken over by a much older man, a 60- or 70-
year-old man who simply forced himself on her. In other words, it was rape.
We were raped, we had no choice. The Martians just stepped in and said,
“Like it or not, we’re here.” They didn’t care what we thought or felt about
it. It was really no different from what we in America did to the Native
Americans.

Once the initial conflict was over, it was agreed that the Martians would
try to understand this female thing they lacked, this emotional feeling, of
which they had none at all. Things more or less settled down for a long
time. But the Martians slowly began to implement their left-brain technol-
ogy, which the Lemurians didn’t know anything about. All the Lemurians
knew was right-brain technology, which today we know very little about.
Psychotronic machines, dowsing rods and those kinds of things are right-
brain technologies. Many right-brain feminine technologies would astound
you if you saw them in action. You can do absolutely anything that you can
imagine with right-brain technology, just as you can with left-brain tech-
nology, if they are brought to their full potential. But then we really do not
need either one — this is the great secret that we have forgotten!

The Martians kept putting out these left-brain inventions, one after an-
other after another, until finally they changed the polarity of our evolution-
ary path because we began to “see” through the left brain, and we changed
from female to male. We changed the nature of who we were. The Mar-
tians gained control bit by bit, until eventually they controlled everything
without a battle. They had all the money and all the power. The animosity
between the Martians and the Lemurians — and I’m putting the Hebrews in
with the Lemurians — never subsided, not even to the very end of Atlantis.
They hated each other. The Lemurians, the feminine aspect, were basically
shoved down and treated like inferiors. It was not a very loving situation. It
was a marriage that the female component did not like, but I don’t think
the Martian males really cared if she liked it or not. It remained this way for
a very long time, until approximately 26,000 years ago, when the next
phase slowly began.

Minor Pole Shift and the Subsequent Debate

It was about 26,000 years ago when we had another minor pole shift and

Eight 1 200- to 5000-year periods

a small change in consciousness. This
pole shift took place at the same point
on the polar wobble called the preces-
sion of the equinoxes that we have now
returned to (see the lower small oval at A
in Fig. 4-6). It wasn’t much, though it has
been recorded by science. The two small
ovals on the cycle are where these changes
always take place, and right now we’re
back at point A again.

At the time of this pole shift, a piece
of Atlantis, probably about half the size
of Rhode Island, sank into the ocean.

That caused a tremendous amount of fear
in Atlantis, because they thought they were go-
ing to lose the whole continent, like what happened to Lemuria. By this
time they had lost most of their ability to see into the future. They were
shaking in their boots for a long time simply because they didn’t know for
sure what was going to happen. They were still afraid a hundred years later,
then slowly this fear began to subside. It took over 200 years for them to
feel safe again.

Present location
of solar system

SATYA

Center

Galaxy

lln g (Ascending)

Fig. 4-6. The cycle of the precession of
the equinoxes; A is the point of pole
shift.

Atlantis was a little beyond the lower oval at A when they finally re-
laxed their fear about Earth changes. But the memory was still there. They
were going along nicely for a while, then out of the blue approximately
13,000 to 16,000 years ago, a comet approached Earth. When this comet
was still in deep space, the Atlanteans knew about it because they were
more technologically advanced than we are now. They witnessed its ap-
proach.

A great conflict began to occur in Atlantis. The Martians, who were in
the minority even though they were in control, wanted to blow it out of the
sky with their laser technology. But there was a huge movement amongst
the Lemurian population against using the Martian left-brained technol-
ogy. The feminine aspect said, “This comet is in divine order, and we
should allow this to take place naturally. Let it hit the Earth. That is what’s
supposed to take place.”

Of course, the Martians replied, “No! Let’s blow it out of the sky. We
have very little time, or we all will be killed.” After lots of arguing, the Mar-
tians finally and reluctantly agreed to allow the comet to hit the Earth.
When it arrived, it came screaming into the atmosphere, plunging into the
Atlantic Ocean just off the western shore of Atlantis near where
Charleston, South Carolina, is now, only it was on the bottom of the ocean
then. The remnants of that comet are now scattered over four states. Sci-
ence has definitely determined that it did hit there somewhere between
13,000 and 16,000 years ago. They’re still finding pieces. Although most of
the fragments were centered near Charleston, one of the two largest pieces

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid O 101

actually struck the main body of Atlantis in its southwestern area. These
left two huge holes in the floor of the Atlantic Ocean and could have been
the true cause of the sinking of Atlantis. The actual sinking did not happen
at that time, but took place at least several hundred years later.

The Martians’ Fateful Decision

The pieces of the comet that crashed into the southwestern area of
Atlantis happened to be right where the Martians were living, killing a huge
portion of their population. The Martians got hurt the worst by consenting
to allow the comet to come in. Well, that was too humiliating and painful
for them. This was the beginning of a great loss of consciousness for Earth.
What was about to take place was the seed for a bitter tree, the same tree we
live by today. The Martians said, “It’s all over. We are divorcing you.
We’re going to do whatever we want from now on. You can do whatever
you want, but we’re going to lead our own lives and try to control our own
fate. And we’re not going to listen to you ever again.” You know this whole
number. We’ve seen it in divorced families throughout the world. And the
children? Look at our world! We are the children!

The Martians decided to take over the Earth, of course. Control, the
Martian’s primary interface with the Reality, rose to meet their anger. They
began to create a building complex like the one they had constructed on
Mars a long time earlier, in order to create a synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba once
again. The only thing is, around 50,000 Earth years had passed since they
had created one, and they didn’t remember exactly how to do it — but they
thought they did. So they built the buildings and began the experiment.
That experiment is directly tied to a chain of Mer-Ka-Bas that began with
the Mars experiments a little less than a million years before. Later, one
was done here on Earth in 1913, another one in 1943 (called the Philadel-
phia Experiment), another one in 1983 (called the Montauk Experiment),
and another one that, I believe, they’re attempting to do this year (1993)
near Bimini Island. These dates are windows of time that open up and are
tied to the harmonics of the situation. The experiments must be timed to
these windows in order to succeed.

If the Martians had succeeded in setting up a synthetic harmonic Mer-
Ka-Ba, they would have had absolute control of the planet, if that was their
intention. They would have been able to make anybody on the planet do
anything they wanted, though eventually it would have meant their own
demise. No higher-order being would place this kind of control on another
if they truly understood the Reality.

Failure of the Martian Mer-Ka-Ba Attempt

The Martians built the buildings in Atlantis, set up the whole experi-
ment, then threw their switch to begin the energy flow. Almost immedi-
ately they lost control of the experiment, like falling through space and
time. The degree of destruction was more horrible and sinful than I care to

describe. In this Reality, you can hardly make a greater error than to create
an out-of-control synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba. What the experiment did was be-
gin to rip open the lower-dimensional levels of the Earth — not the higher
ones, but the lower ones. To give an analogy, the human body has mem-
branes between different parts, such as in the heart, the stomach, the liver,
the eyes and so on. If you took a knife and slit open your stomach, that’s
would be like ripping open the dimensional levels of the Earth. Various as-
pects are separated from other aspects of spirit by these dimensional mem-
branes, and they’re not meant to mix. You’re not supposed to have blood in
your stomach, but in your arteries. The purpose of a blood cell is different
from that of a stomach cell.

These Martians did something that almost killed the Earth. The envi-
ronmental disaster we are experiencing today is nothing in comparison,
though the problems we are having are a direct result of what we did long
ago. With the right understanding and enough love, the environment
could be repaired in a single day. But had this Martian experiment contin-
ued, it would have destroyed the Earth forever. We would never have been
able to use the Earth as a seed base again.

The Martians made a very, very serious mistake. This out-of-control
Mer-Ka-Ba field, first of all, released a huge number of lower-dimensional
spirits into the Earth’s higher-dimensional planes. These spirits were forced
into a world they did not understand or know, and were in total fear. They
had to live — they had to have bodies— so they went right into people, hun-
dreds of them into each person in Atlantis. The Atlanteans could not stop
them from entering their bodies. Finally, almost every person in the world
was totally possessed by these beings from another dimension. These spirits
were really Earthlings like us, but very different, not coming from this di-
mensional level. It was a total catastrophe — the biggest catastrophe the
Earth has probably ever seen.

A Disruptive Heritage: The Bermuda Triangle

The Martians’ attempt to control the world took place near one of the
Atlantean islands in the area we now call the Bermuda Triangle. There’s
an actual building sitting on the ocean floor down there that contains three
rotating star-tetrahedral electromagnetic fields superimposed on each
other, creating a huge synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba that stretches out over the
ocean and into deep space. This Mer-Ka-Ba is completely out of control.
It’s called the Bermuda Triangle because the apex of one of the tetrahe-
drons — the stationary one — is sticking up out of the water there. The
other two fields are counterrotating — and the faster-rotating field some-
times moves clockwise, which is a very dangerous situation. (When we say
clockwise, we mean the source of the field, not the field itself. The field it-
self would appear to be rotating counterclockwise.) You’ll understand this
when you learn more about the Mer-Ka-Ba. When the faster field rotates
counterclockwise (from its source), everything’s okay; but when the faster

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid $ 1 03

Note: For those of you who
believe that we will be out of
this dimension before 2012,
you are probably right. The
correction to this Atlantean
field, even though the Earth
will probably be in at least the
fourth dimension by then, will
be completed in that third-
dimensional year, according to
Thoth.

one moves clockwise (from its source), that’s when time and space distor-
tions happen. Many of the airplanes and ships that have disappeared in the
Bermuda Triangle have literally gone into other dimensional levels because
of the out-of-control field there.

A primary cause of much of the distortion in the world — the distortion
between humans such as wars, marital problems, emotional disturbances
etc. — is that imbalanced field. That field is not only causing distortions on
Earth, it’s causing distortions way, way, way out in remote areas of space be-
cause of the way Reality is constructed. That’s one of the reasons why this
race of beings called the Grays, and other ET beings we’ll talk about at the
appropriate time, are trying to correct what happened here long ago. This
is a big problem that extends way beyond Earth. What they did back in
Atlantis was against all galactic law. It was illegal, but they did it anyway. It
will be solved, but not until the year 2012. There’s not much the ETs can
do in the meantime, but they’ll probably keep trying. Eventually they’ll
succeed.

The Solution: A Christ Consciousness Grid

Ascended Masters Assist the Earth

At the time of the synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba failure, there were about 1600
ascended masters on Earth, and they did everything they could to try to
heal the situation. They tried to seal the dimensional levels and get as
many of these spirits as they could out of people and back into their own
worlds. They did everything on every level they could. They eventually got
most of the spirits out and healed about 90 to 95 percent or more of the situ-
ation, but people still found many of these unusual beings living in their
bodies.

The situation at that time began to deteriorate extremely rapidly. All
the systems on Atlantis — financial, social and all the concepts of how life
ought to be — degenerated and collapsed. The continent of Atlantis and all
its people became sick. They started getting weird diseases. The entire
continent went into a state of survival just trying to live through each day.
The situation grew continually worse. For a long period of time it was hell
on Earth, horrible. If it had not been slowed down by the ascended masters,
it would truly have been the end of this world.

The ascended masters (the highest levels of our consciousness at that
time) didn’t know what to do to help bring us back into a state of grace. I
mean they really didn’t know what to do. They were children compared to
the events that had been forced upon them, and they had no idea how to
handle it. So they prayed. They called in higher levels of consciousness.
They called in everybody who could hear their plea, including the great Ga-
lactic Command. They prayed and prayed. So the problem was reviewed
on many high levels of life.

1 04 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Similar kinds of events have happened before on other planets; this
wasn t the first time. So before it actually happened, our ascended masters
and galactic friends knew that we were going to fall out of grace, out of the
high level of awareness we were experiencing at the time. They knew that
we were going to fall way down the spectrum of life. Their concern was to
figure out some way to get us back up on track after the fall, and they knew
it had to be done quickly. They were looking for a solution that would heal
the whole Earth, both the dark and the light. They weren’t concerned with
a solution where only the Martians would be healed, or only the Lemurians
or only part of the Earth. They were looking for a situation that would heal
the whole Earth and all of its inhabitants.

Higher levels of consciousness don’t go along with this “us and them”
point of view. There’s only one consciousness moving through all life, and
they were trying to get everybody to come back into a state of love and re-
spect for each other. They knew that the only way they could do it was to
get us back into Christ consciousness, a level of beingness where we can see
the unity, and they knew we would proceed from there with love and com-
passion. They knew that if we were going to get back on track, we would
have to be in Christ consciousness as a planet by the end of the 13,000-year
cycle— which is now. If we were not in Christ consciousness by then, we
wouldn’t make it at all. We would destroy ourselves. Although spirit is
eternal, life interruptions can be temporally lost.

The only problem was that we couldn’t get back to Christ consciousness
by ourselves, at least in a short time. Once we had fallen to this level it
would be a very, very long time before we would be able to come back up
naturally. So the problem was really one of time. We were part of a greater
consciousness that loved us, and out of love it wished to assist us back into
conscious immortality as soon as possible. It would be much like having a
child who hit his head real hard, resulting in a concussion. You would want
him to return to consciousness quickly.

It was finally decided to try a kind of standard operating procedure that
usually works in these situations, though not always. In other words, it was
an experiment. Earth’s people were about to be subjects of a galactic exper-
imental project in the hope of helping us. We would experiment on our-
selves. It wasn’t done by extraterrestrials or anything like that; they simply
showed us how to do it. We were given instructions on how to proceed
with this experiment, and we actually carried it out . . . successfully.

What about the Sirians? Our helpers honestly believed that we would
make it, though they knew it would be close. In fact, they wouldn’t have
gotten permission from the Galactic Command to do the experiment if they
hadn’t honestly believed we would make it. You can’t lie to the Galactic
Command.

A Planetary Grid

At this point, so that you’ll understand the procedure they decided on, I

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid 0 105

need to talk about grids. A planetary grid is an etheric crystalline structure
that envelops the planet and holds the consciousness of any one species of
life. Yes, it does have an electromagnetic component associated with the
third dimension, but it also has an appropriate higher-dimensional compo-
nent for each dimension. Science will eventually discover that there’s a grid
for every single species in the world. There were originally 30 million grids
around the Earth, but now there are about 13 to 15 million, and they’re de-
creasing rapidly. If there are just two bugs on the planet, and they’re just sit-
ting somewhere in Iowa, they have a grid that stretches around the entire
planet, or they couldn’t exist. It’s just the nature of the game.

Each of these grids has its own geometry and is unique; there’s not an-
other one like it. Just as a species’ body is unique, its point of view of inter-
preting the Reality is also unique. The Christ consciousness grid holds the
Christ consciousness for the planet, and if that grid isn’t there, we can’t
reach Christ consciousness. This grid was there during Atlantean times,
though we were very young, and it was beginning to function at certain
times during the precession of the equinoxes. They knew it would be
placed into a passive state by the Martians’ actions, so they decided to syn-
thetically activate the Christ consciousness grid around the Earth. It would
be a living grid, but it would be synthetically made — like creating a syn-
thetic crystal from a living cell of a live crystal. Then at the right time,
hopefully before we killed ourselves off, the new grid would be complete,
and we could ascend to our previous level once again. One example of the
effect of a grid is shown in the hundredth monkey theory.

The Hundredth-Monkey Concept

You have probably read the book, The Hundredth Monkey by Ken Keyes,
Jr., or perhaps the earlier book of Lyall Watson, L ifetide: The Biology of the
Unconscious, who describe a 30-year scientific research project on the Japa-
nese monkey, Macaca fuscata. The island of Koshima, Japan, has a wild col-
ony and the scientists were providing them with sweet potatoes dropped in
the sand. The monkeys liked the sweet potatoes, but not the sand and dirt.
An eighteen-month-old female they named Imo found she could solve the
problem by washing the potatoes. She taught this trick to her mother. Her
playmates also learned this new way, and they taught their mothers, too.
Soon all the young monkeys washed their sweet potatoes, but only the
adults who imitated their children learned this behavior. The scientists re-
corded these events between the years 1952 and 1958.

Then suddenly, in the autumn of 1958, the few monkeys doing this on
the island of Koshima reached a critical mass, which Dr. Watson arbitrarily
placed at 100, and bingo! — almost every monkey on the island started
washing its potatoes without any further influence. If it had happened on
only that one island, they probably would have figured there was some form
of communication and looked for it. But simultaneously the monkeys on
the surrounding islands also started washing their potatoes. Even on the

106 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

mainland of Japan in Takasakiyama the monkeys were washing their pota-
toes. There was no possible way these monkeys could have communicated
by any way we know. It was the first time that scientists had ever observed
anything like this. They postulated that there must have been some kind of
morphogenetic structure or field that stretched across these islands
through which the monkeys were able to communicate.

The Hundredth Human

Many people thought a lot about the hundredth monkey phenomenon.
Then a few years later a scientific team from Australia and Britain won-
dered if human beings possessed a grid similar to the monkeys. They did an
experiment. They made a photograph that had hundreds of human faces in
it, little ones and big ones, faces in the eyes. Everything was made up of
these faces, but when you first looked at it, you could see only about six or
seven. It took training to see the other ones. Usually someone had to first
point out where they were.

These people took their picture to Australia and conducted a study
there. They selected a certain number of people from a spectrum of the
population, then showed each of them the picture, giving them a certain
length of time to look at it. They held the photograph up to someone and
said, “How many faces do you see in this photo?” During the time the sub-
jects were given, they would generally come up with six, seven, eight, nine
or maybe ten faces. Few people saw more. When they had gotten a few
hundred people as their basic sampling and recorded accurately what had
been observed, some of the researchers went to England — on the other side
of the planet — and showed the picture on a closed-cable BBC television
station that broadcasts only to England. They carefully showed where all
the faces were, every single face. Then a few minutes later other researchers
repeated the original experiment with new subjects in Australia. Suddenly
people could easily see most of the faces.

From that moment, they knew for certain that there was something
about humans that had not been known. Now, the Aborigines in Australia
had known about this “unknown” part of us for a long time. They knew
that there was an energy field connecting people. Even in our society,
we’ve observed that somebody on one side of the planet would invent
something very complex at the same moment that someone on the other
side of the Earth invented the same thing, with the same principles and
ideas. Each inventor would say, “You stole it from me. It was mine. I did it
first.” This has happened many, many times, stretching back for a long
time. So after this Australian experiment, they began to realize that some-
thing very definitely connects us all.

The Government’s Discovery of the Grid and the Race for Control

As far back as the early 1960s, the American and Russian governments
had discovered these electromagnetic fields, or grids, that stretched around

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid 0 107

Note: In the movie Stargate,
Ra was not given proper
respect. He was actually one
of the ascended masters and a
being of light, not evil.

the world. Human grids — yes, there are more than one — are high above
the Earth, about 60 miles or more.

Remember, I told you about the five levels of consciousness on Earth
that correspond to different numbers of genes and different heights? Well,
there are only three levels of consciousness that Earth is actually experienc-
ing right now. Two others are way beyond us at this time. The first level is
primal, the second level is our present consciousness, and the third level is
the Christ or unity consciousness, the one we’re about to enter. After the
Fall, about 13,000 years ago, there were only two active human grids
around the Earth, the first and the second levels. The Aborigines in Aus-
tralia were on the first level, for example, and we, the mutants, were on the
second level. (That’s what they call us — mutants — because we mutated to
where we are now.) Science has done very little research on the Australian
Aborigines, so our countries haven’t become aware of their grid. But the
governments did a lot of research on us, and they discovered exactly what
our grid looks like: It’s based on triangles and squares. It’s a very male grid
that stretches around the whole planet. Now, we have a third grid up there,
which we will call the unity-consciousness grid, or simply “the next step.”
It’s been there, completed, since February 4, 1989. Without that grid, it
would be all over for us, folks. But it is there.

The governments became originally aware of our second-level grid
maybe as far back as the 1940s. I realize that this statement is in contradic-
tion to what was said above. But nevertheless I believe that the grid was
discovered even before the hundredth monkey theory came out. Because
of World War II, the governments were beginning to place military bases all
over the world in little out-of-the-way places, on obscure islands like Guam.
Why did they select these particular places for their bases? It probably was-
n’t for the reasons they said. When you lay out the grid and the military
bases all over the world, especially those of Russia and the United States,
well, son-of-a-gun, the bases are almost always located right on the nodal
points of the grid — exactly over the top or on little spirals that come off of
the nodal points. It could not possibly have been a coincidence that they
just happened to spread out their empire of military bases in these precise
places. They were trying to take control of this grid, because if they could
control it, they knew they could control what we think and feel. A subtle
war was going on between these two governments. However, the war
changed its nature considerably in 1970, though I’ll have to explain that
later. Of course, behind both the United States and Russia was the secret
government, which controlled the outer appearance and timing of this con-
flict.

How the Grid Was Constructed, and Where

Now that we have the necessary background, we can continue with the
drama in Atlantis. The project to rebuild the grid was begun by three men:
Thoth, a being named Ra and a being named Araragat. These men flew to

1 08 & the ancient Secret of the flower of life

a place in what is now Egypt, to the area now called the Giza plateau. At
that time it was not a desert, but a tropical rain forest, and it was called the
Land of Khem, which means the land of the hairy barbarians. The three
men went to that particular place because the axis of the old unity-
consciousness grid extended out of the Earth from that point. They were
going to rebuild a new grid on the old axis, according to instructions given
by higher consciousness.

They had to wait until the right moment — until the precession of the
equinoxes passed the low ebb in consciousness — before they could act, and
this low ebb was still far into their future. After that they would have a little
less than half a cycle, about 12,900 years or so, to complete everything by
the end of the twentieth century. We couldn’t go any longer than this or
we would destroy ourselves and our planet.

First they had to complete the grid on the higher dimensions, then they
had to physically build the temples in this dimension before the new unity
grid would manifest. Once manifested and balanced, they were to help us
begin to consciously move into the higher worlds of being and begin anew
our path home to God.

So Thoth and friends went to the very spot where the unity-con-
sciousness vortex exited the Earth. This point was about a mile away from
where the Great Pyramid sits in the desert today, but then it was out in the
middle of nowhere, in the middle of a rain forest. Centered right over the
axis of this vortex on the Earth, they created a hole extending approxi-
mately one mile into the Earth, lining it with bricks. It took only a few min-
utes or so, because they were sixth-dimensional beings, and whatever they
thought always happened. It was that simple.

Once the hole aligned with the unity axis was created, they mapped the
ten Golden Mean spirals that emerged from the hole and located where
they moved above the Earth. They used the hole as the axis, starting far
down, and mapped the spirals of energy as they moved up out of the hole
and extended into space. One of the spirals exited the Earth not far from
the present Great Pyramid. Once they found it, they built a little stone
building in front of the hole; that building is the key to the entire Giza com-
plex. Then they built the Great Pyramid.

According to Thoth, the Great Pyramid was built by himself, not
Cheops. Thoth says that it was completed about 200 years prior to the
shifting of the axis. The apex of the Great Pyramid, if the capstone were in
place, sat exactly on the curve of the spiral. They lined up the center of the
hole with the south face of the stone building and the north face of the
Great Pyramid. It has amazed surveyors who have looked at this. Though
these structures are a mile away from each other, the south face of the stone
building and the north face of the Great Pyramid are in perfect alignment.
They do not believe that we could do it any better today even with our
modern technology.

Later the other two pyramids were also built directly on that spiral. In

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid 0 109

fact, that’s how the hole was discovered, through aerial photography. They
noticed that the three pyramids were laid out on a logarithmic spiral. Then
they traced the spiral back to its source and went to that spot, and there was
the hole and the stone building. That discovery was made, 1 believe, in the
early 1980s. It was recorded in the McCollum survey that was completed in
1984 by Rocky McCollum.

I’ve seen the axis hole and the building with my own eyes. 1 consider it
to be the most important place in all of Egypt and so does the Edgar Cayce
A.R.E. There’s also another hole about a city block away from the first spi-
ral, and this spiral starts out a little differently, but then slowly, asymptoti-
cally, superimposes itself over the first spiral. To be able to build around
this hole in this spiral pattern, the planners had to have a very sophisticated
understanding of life. (I’ll explain this understanding later also.) So these
two completed spirals defined the axis of what would eventually become
the unity-consciousness grid around the Earth.

Sacred Sites

After starting the new grid over the existing collapsed grid and putting
one pyramid on the line of the spiral, Thoth, Ra and Araragat mapped
where these two energy lines curved and crossed each other in over 83,000
places on the surface of the Earth. Fourth-dimensionally, one dimension
higher than this one, they constructed an entire network of buildings and
structures over the whole planet, placing them on the nodes of this energy
matrix. All of these structures were laid out with the proportions of either
the Golden Mean or Fibonacci spirals, and all were mathematically referred
back to that single point in Egypt now called the Solar Cross.

The location of the sacred sites of the world are no accident. It was a
single consciousness that created every single one of them — from Machu
Picchu to Stonehenge to Zaghouan — you name it, to anywhere. Almost
all of them (with a few exceptions) were created by a single awareness.
We’re becoming more aware of this now. Richard Hoagland’s work brings
this forth, though he wasn’t the first one. They show how one sacred site is
extrapolated from another one, then another and still another. These sites
go beyond time, in that they were all built at different times, and they go be-
yond any particular culture or geographical location. They were obviously
done by one consciousness who coordinated the whole enterprise. Even-
tually researchers will see that this spot in Egypt is the point from which all
the other sacred sites were calculated.

This Egyptian area is the north pole of the unity-consciousness grid. On
the other side of the planet, out in the South Pacific in the Tahitian Islands,
is a little island called Moorea, where the south pole of the grid is located.
For those of you who have been on top of Wayna Picchu for a birds-eye
view, Machu Picchu, at about 9000 feet in the Peruvian mountains, seems
to be surrounded in a perfect circle by mountains. It’s like a female circle
surrounding a phallus rising in the middle. Well, the island of Moorea is

I 1 0 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

similar to this, only it’s shaped like a heart. Each house on Moorea has a
heart with the house number on it. The phallic Moorean mountain in the
center of the heart is much bigger than Wayna Picchu in Peru, but you will
still see the same ring of mountains surrounding this earthen pole. This is
the precise south pole of the entire unity-consciousness grid. If you go
straight through the Earth at Moorea, you come out in Egypt. It’s off only
an ever so tiny bit — there’s a very slight curve, which is natural. The
Moorean pole is negative, or female, and the Egyptian pole is positive, or
male. All the sacred sites are connected to the Egyptian pole, and they’re
all interlinked through the central axis leading to Moorea. It’s a torus, of
course.

The Pyramid’s Landing Platform and the Ship beneath the Sphinx

This is the Great Pyramid [Fig. 4-7]. It has a so-called “missing cap-
stone,” and there have been all kinds of speculations about it. According to
Thoth, the actual missing capstone is 5 l A inches high and solid gold; it is a

holographic image of the entire pyramid. In other words, it has all the little

, i • . Fig. 4-7. The Great Pyramid,

rooms in it and everything in pro-
portion, and it’s sitting in the Hall
of Records. The other two pyra-
mids go up to a sharp point; only
the Great Pyramid has a flat sur-
face on top. That missing piece is
not little — it’s about 24 feet square
at the base. If you get on top, it’s a
huge platform. This flat area is ac-
tually a landing platform for a very
special airship that exists on Earth.

The Sphinx is not far away
from the Great Pyramid. Accord-
ing to The Emerald Tablets and
Thoth, the Sphinx is much, much
older than the 10- to 15,000 years
estimated by John Anthony West.

One factor that many present re-
searchers have neglected to con-
sider is that the Sphinx has been under sand during most of its recent exis-
tence. In fact, when Napoleon went to see the Sphinx, he didn’t even
know it was there because all he saw was its head. It was completely buried,
and it has been buried for most of the last few hundred years at least.

Taking that factor into consideration, which could be a major one, the wear
caused by rain and wind would have taken a lot longer than they’re pres-
ently figuring.

According to Thoth, the Sphinx goes back at least five and a half million
years. I guess eventually that will be brought forth, because he hasn’t been

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid 4* I I I

Fig. 4-8. The pattern on the disk be-
neath the Sphinx.

112 $ The ancient Secret of the flower of Life

wrong about anything yet. Even John Anthony West secretly suspects that
it is a great deal older than 10- to 15,000 years. He wasn’t concerned with
making speculations into the millions of years; he just wanted to get it well
past the 6000-year mark, because that will crack our previously accepted
Earth history. He and his team have now done that, and later, 1 believe,
they 11 try to push the date back further as they introduce more evidence.

According to Thoth, approximately one mile under the Sphinx there is
a round room with a flat floor and a flat ceiling. Inside this room is the old-
est synthetic object in the world — older than any other consciously assem-
bled matter on Earth. According to Thoth, though even he can’t prove it,
this object goes back 500 million years when “that which led to human life”
began. The object is about two city blocks in size; it’s round like a disk and
has a flat bottom and top. It s unusual in that its skin is only three to five at-
oms thick. Its top and bottom surfaces have a certain pattern that’s shown
in Figure 4-8.

The pattern itself is five atoms thick; everywhere else it’s only three at-
oms thick. And it’s transparent— you can see right through it— almost like
it’s not there. This is a ship, but it has no motors or visible form of power.
Even though Doreal’s interpretation of T he Emerald Tablets states that this
ship had atomic motors in it, according to Thoth it does not. Doreal trans-
lated The Emerald Tablets in the Yucatan in 1925 and could not understand
the description of how the ship was powered. The idea of atomic motors
was the farthest-out idea he could think of for a power source. But it is ac-
tually propelled by thoughts and feelings, and is designed to connect with
and extend your own living Mer-Ka-Ba. This ship is connected directly to
the spirit of the Earth, and in The Emerald Tablets it’s called a warship. It
was the protector for the Earth.

The Vulnerability of This Period and the Appearance of the Heroine

Every single time we reach that vulnerable point in the precession of the
equinoxes when our poles make these little shifts, extraterrestrials have
tried to take over the planet, according to The Emerald Tablets. This has
been going on for millions and millions of years, and it’s still going on.
When I read that in the Tablets, I didn’t yet know about the Grays or any of
these beings, and I thought, “Someone coming from somewhere else to take
over the Earth? Naw, this is silly!” But even today, this same thing’s going
on. It never stops, it just keeps on. It’s called, simply, the battle of the dark
and the light.

Every single time a takeover seems imminent, there has always been one
very pure person who figures out how to get into the next level of con-
sciousness, then finds the ship and raises it into the air. The Earth and the
Sun connect within that person and give him or her great power, then
whatever that person thinks and feels will happen. That’s how this airship
is a warship: Whatever races are trying to take over Earth, this person just
thinks them away — thinks up a situation that forces them to leave. This

keeps our evolutionary process going without any kind of outside interfer-
ence or influence. At least that’s what is supposed to happen.

By now we have definitely been tampered with. That pure person has
appeared, and that event has already happened here on Earth. This is why
the Grays are leaving. The problems they’re having is because of one single
woman — one 23 -year-old female from Peru (she was 23 in 1989 when she
did this) . She made the first ascension process up to the new grid and con-
nected with it, connected with the Earth, found the ship and raised it into
the air. First she made some basic connections that had to be done with
crystals on the Earth, then performed the programming that had to be re-
calculated. The very next thing she did was to think that the Grays and oth-
ers related to this attempted takeover of Earth were going to become sick if
they remained here, and there would be no cure.

Within one month, all the Grays started getting sick, and the whole pro-
cess she envisioned began to happen. The Grays have been forced to leave
the Earth now. Their bases have been abandoned, and they have been
forced to alter their plans. The presence of this entire army of beings from
space has now been reduced to almost nothing, all because of one small but
holy woman. It’s amazing [chuckles] . We guys know what that’s like — I’ve
been reduced to nothing lots of times by my wife.

Awaiting the Atlantean Catastrophe

Thoth and his partners finished the complex in Egypt to help rebuild the
grid. Then they abandoned it in the middle of the rain forest and went back
to Atlantis to prepare. It sat alone for 200 years, because they knew that at
that critical point in the precession of the equinoxes, the poles would shift.
They knew that Atlantis would sink, so they waited.

One day it finally happened. The catastrophe actually took only one
night. Science has proven that when poles shift, it takes about 20 hours. It
happens just like that [snaps fingers]. You wake up one normal day, and
that evening it’s a totally different world. The whole process is about three
and a half days long, but the pole shift happens in about 20 hours. We’re all
going to experience this enormous change when we see big chunks of the
United States start to drop off into the water — then you’ll know it’s for
sure. There are other early signs that will tip you off that the change is
about to happen. When enough information has been given, I’ll remind
you of what you already hold in your memories.

When they saw the very first signs of the shift coming on, Thoth, Ra
and Araragat returned to the Sphinx and raised the warship into the sky.
All they did was raise the vibration of the molecules only one overtone
higher than the Earth exists on. This allowed them and the ship to pass
right through the Earth into the sky. Then they moved to Atlantis, low-
ered the ship to the surface, and picked up the people of the Naacal Mys-
tery School, which included the original immortals from Lemuria as well
as those who became enlightened during the time of Atlantis (by that

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid 0 113

time about another 600 people had ascended). So the original thousand
from Lemuria and the 600 from Atlantis had increased the number of as-
cended masters to about 1600, the only occupants of the ancient airship.

Now, the people on this ship were not only passengers, they were creat-
ing a living group Mer-Ka-Ba that surrounded the ship with a very large
field in the shape of a flying saucer — the same shape that’s around the gal-
axy and around your body when your Mer-Ka-Ba is spinning. They had a
very powerful protective field around themselves as they headed for Khem,
soon to be the new Egypt. Thoth said that they had risen about a quarter
mile off the planet with the members of the mystery school on board when
they watched the island of Udal sink. This was the last piece of Atlantis to
disappear into the water, with the exception of a few small islands. Then
they flew the ship to Egypt and landed it on top of the Great Pyramid. From
the side it looked like the middle drawing in Figure 4-9.

If you were to extend the Great Pyramid up to where the capstone

would naturally terminate, you
would find that the ship and the
pyramid were built for each other.

If you were to look at this from the
top, it would look like the right-
hand view in the figure. The circle
is the ship and the square is the
Great Pyramid. The perimeter of
the Great Pyramid and the circum-
ference of the ship are the same.

It’s debatable if that’s possible or
not, but they can get very, very close. Whenever that mathematical rela-
tionship happens, life appears. It’s the basic relationship of life throughout
the universe. (We’ll describe this geometrically soon.) If the ascended
masters had not had spinning Mer-Ka-Ba fields around them, they would-
n’t be here today (and probably neither would we), because their Mer-Ka-
Bas protected them from all that happened next.

After they landed on the pyramid, the poles began to shift and the hu-
man consciousness of the Earth began to plummet. Simultaneously, the
electromagnetic and magnetic fields of the Earth collapsed, and all life on
this planet went into the Great Void, the three and a half days of absolute
blackness described by many cultures around the world.

The Three and a Half Days of the Void

The Emerald Tablets say that every single time we go around the preces-
sion of the equinoxes and our poles go through these changes, we go
through a void space for about three and a half days. The Mayas described
the Void in the Troano document. At one point in the story, three and a
half stones are painted black. This refers to the time when we go into what
we now call the electromagnetic null zone. As the poles shift, a phenomenon

114 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Fig. 4-9. Warship atop the Great Pyra-

takes place (we’ll go into great detail about this later) where for about three
and a half days we’re in darkness (it could actually be anywhere from two or
two and a half days to a little over four days) . The last time, it was evidently
three and a half days. It’s more than just blackness; it’s nothing, it’s void.
And, by the way, when you are in the Void, you will realize that you and
God are one, that there is no difference at all. We’ll talk about the Void
again at the right moment.

Memory, Magnetic Fields and Mer-Ka-Bas

If the people on the warship hadn’t been protected by the Mer-Ka-Ba
during that change, they would have completely lost their memories. You
see, our memory is held together primarily by a magnetic field that exists
around the brain — inside the skull and around the head. That field is fur-
ther connected to every cell in the brain by individualized magnetic fields
within each cell. Science first found the internal magnetic particles within
each cell and then found the larger outer field. This was the first new find
in human physiology in the last 300 years. Memory is dependent on a
steady, living magnetic field, very much like a computer. Its connection to
the Earth’s magnetic field is not understood by science at this time. If you
don’t have a means of protecting your memory, it will be erased, gone. It’ll
be like unplugging a computer in the middle of a file. It’s just gone. That’s
exactly what happened to the Atlanteans and others who survived the ca-
tastrophe but who didn’t have spinning Mer-Ka-Bas. Those very sophisti-
cated people, who were more advanced than you and I, suddenly found
themselves in a situation where they didn’t know anything. They had high-
tech bodies and high-tech minds, but it was like having a great PC sitting on
the table with no software, nothing there.

So the population that survived, and there were a few, had to start all
over again. They had to begin at square one to figure out how to stay warm,
how to make fire and so on. This loss of memory was the result of their for-
getting how to breathe, forgetting their Mer-Ka-Bas, forgetting every-
thing — falling down through the dimensions, going into a totally unpro-
tected state and ending up in this very dense world — having to eat food
again, doing all kinds of things that hadn’t been part of our experience for a
very long time. They were slammed into a very dense aspect of the planet
and had to learn to survive all over again. This was all a result of the syn-
thetic Mer-Ka-Ba experiment that had taken place on Atlantis.

Without that small group of ascended masters, we would not have sur-
vived at all — we definitely would all have left human experience. The whole
Earth experiment would have been over forever. But they kept the field
alive, just barely, while everything else crashed around them. Besides the as-
cended masters, there were also two other groups on Earth who had Mer-Ka-
Ba fields intact at the time. The Nefilim and the Sirians, our mother and fa-
ther, kept their fields alive. I don’t know where the Nefilim retreated to
within this planet’s dimensional worlds, but the Sirians remained in the Halls

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid O 115

of Amenti, inside the inner earth. Both of these groups are still here on the
planet, hidden within the dimensional worlds.

What the Thoth Group Did after Light Returned

After the three and a half days of darkness, the Earth reappeared, light
reappeared, the fields stabilized themselves, and we were down in this
third-dimensional world where we are now. Everything was new and differ-
ent — everything. It had totally changed experientially. When we consider
the landmass of Atlantis, the Atlanteans had really been on a much higher
level of interpreting that landmass. They didn’t experience it like we do. It
was experienced in a totally different way that’s pretty hard to explain from
our third-dimensional point of view.

After they landed on top of the Great Pyramid, Ra and about a third of
the people from the ship went down through a tunnel that goes into a room
at the two-thirds level, which will someday be discovered. (They’ve discov-
ered four new rooms in the Great Pyramid in only the last few years.) When
this room is discovered, they’ll find that it’s made with red, black and white
stones, which were the primary architectural colors of Atlantis. This is
what Thoth told me to say. From this room is a channel they used to de-
scend to a city or a temple far below the pyramid, which Thoth and friends
built when they built the pyramid. It was designed to hold approximately
10,000 people because they knew a large number would ascend over the
next 13,000 years, until the Day of Purification.

After the fields stabilized and a third of the people followed Ra into the
room made of red, black and white stones, from there they entered the un-
derground city and began the root of our present civilization. Another part
of the root was being formed at the same time in Sumer (another story) . At
the same moment in time, the remaining 1067 or so ascended masters lifted
the warship off the Great Pyramid and flew to the place now called Lake
Titicaca, where they landed on the Island of the Sun (in Bolivia). Thoth
got off there, along with about a third of the people. Then they took off
again and flew to the Himalayan mountains, where Araragat got off with
the remaining third of the people. Seven people, however, remained with
the ship, flew it back to the Sphinx and lowered it into that room, where it
has remained for the last 13,000 years — until recently when the young
woman from Peru raised it again into the open blue skies of Mother Earth’s
atmosphere.

Sacred Sites on the Grid

Egypt became the male component of the grid. That is where the male
structures were laid out. There’s hardly any femaleness there compared to
female areas of the world. Of course, the polarity to maleness does exist —
Isis is that counterpart — but the overall energy flow is male. South Amer-
ica, especially Peru, Central America and also parts of Mexico became the
female component of the grid. However, ultimately the entire female as-

pect of the grid became centered at the complex in Uxmal, in the Yucatan,
where many survivors from Atlantis had found refuge.

Starting at Uxmal, seven temples are laid out in a spiral, probably a
Fibonacci spiral, and they are the seven primary temples of the female com-
ponent of the grid. These are chakra centers, just like the chakra centers
that are laid out down the length of the Nile. These feminine centers begin
with Uxmal, then go to Labna, then to Kabah, then over to Chichen Itza,
then over to Tulum near the ocean, then way down near Belize to
Kohunlich, curving back inland to Palenque. Those seven places created
the primary spiral of the feminine aspect of the grid being created for our
new Christ consciousness, which we are only now able to access.

From Palenque the feminine aspect of the grid splits north and south.
Here we see another polarization of the energy. The feminine component
of the female spiral of the grid heads south and jumps over to Tikal in Gua-
temala, and that begins a new octave. When we relate it to music, the sev-
enth site bridges to the eighth note, or the beginning of the next octave of
the next spiral. And the spiral keeps going south through the feminine
component of the grid. Eventually it moves through places like Machu
Picchu and Sacsayhuaman near Cuzco, Peru. One of the main spirals ends
in a place called Chavin, in Peru, which was the primary religious center of
the Incan empire. From there it goes to Lake Titicaca to a place about a
half a mile off the Island of the Sun in Bolivia. Then it makes a 90-degree
turn and heads out toward Easter Island and finally to Moorea, where it an-
chors into the Earth.

Pleading north from Palenque is the male component of the female as-
pect of the grid. It goes through the Aztec ruins and up through the Ameri-
can Indian pyramids. (The American Indians made physical pyramids,
some remains of which can be seen in and around Albuquerque, New Mex-
ico.) Then the spiral continues to Blue Lake near Taos, New Mexico,
which is the counterpart of Lake Titicaca. This is one of the most impor-
tant areas in the United States, protected for a long time by the Taos Indi-
ans. Again, there’s a 90-degree turn at Blue Lake. From there the spiral
heads out across the mountains, going through Ute Mountain (on the New
Mexico side of the Colorado border) and through many mountains and
structures that have been built.

In conjunction with the sacred sites, the creators also used mountains
because of their vortex energy. Finally, before the spiral leaves the coast of
California, it passes through Lake Tahoe, Donner Lake and Pyramid Lake.
From there it goes through underwater mountain complexes until it
reaches the Hawaiian Islands, where Haleakala Crater is one of the primary
components, then heads south again. It goes through the Hawaiian Island
chain that connects for thousands of miles all the way back to Moorea.

So it’s a huge open circle that comes around the Earth, starting at
Uxmal and connecting at the south pole of the Christ grid. The feminine
component of the grid is a massive circle of complexes. Understand that in

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid 117

between each of the major sites mentioned above are literally hundreds of
smaller sites — churches and temples of many religions, sacred sites of na-
ture such as mountain peaks and ranges, lakes, canyons and so on. If you
could see the greater plan, you would see how they form perfect spirals, first
moving clockwise, then moving counterclockwise until they reach their
destination, Moorea, in the South Pacific.

The pyramids built in the Himalayan mountains were primarily crystal-
line in nature, meaning they were constructed by using third-dimensional
crystals at the corners, aimed to form a pyramid. They built physical pyra-
mids there, too — lots of them. Most of them are not known, though some
are. The largest known pyramid in the world so far is in the western moun-
tains of Tibet. It’s a solid-white pyramid that’s in almost perfect condition,
with a huge, solid-crystal capstone. At least two teams of scientists have
been there, and it has also been photographed from the air. It’s visible only
three weeks out of the year when its crystal capstone peers out of the deep
snow to view a valley long deserted from human endeavor.

I talked with the leader of the team that went into this pyramid. He said
it looks like a brand-new pyramid and that there’s nothing written on the
walls. It’s white, smooth and hard, like marble. When they entered it, they
went down a long tunnel, where they found a large room in the center.
There’s no writing anywhere, no designs, no nothing — except that in the
middle, high up on a wall, there is one inscription — the Flower of Life!
That’s it. If you want to say everything, all you have to do is put that on a
wall. That says it all. By the end of this book you’ll understand why.

All the sacred sites on Earth, with a few exceptions, were planned on a
fourth-dimensional level by higher consciousness, and by now most have
third-dimensional counterparts connected to them — in other words, real
buildings on real sites. However, there are still some very important sites
that have only fourth-dimensional structures. Those fourth-dimensional
pyramids primarily represent the neutral or child energy of the Christ grid.
Altogether there are three aspects of the Christ grid that surround the
Earth — Mother, Father and Child. The Father is in Egypt, the Mother is in
Peru- Yucatan-South Pacific and the Child is in Tibet.

The Five Levels of Fluman Consciousness and
Their Chromosomal Differences

According to Thoth, there are five different levels of human conscious-
ness possible here on Earth. These are people who have different DNA,
completely different bodies and different ways of perceiving the Reality.
Each level of consciousness grows from the last one, until finally on the fifth
level humanity learns how to translate into a whole new manner of express-
ing life, leaving Earth forever.

The primary visual difference between these types is their height. The
first-level people are about 4 to 6 feet tall. The second-level people are
about 5 to 7 feet tall, where we are at now. Third-level people are about 10

to 16 feet tall, which we are about to translate to. The fourth-level being is
about 30 to 35 feet tall, and the last is about 50 to 60 feet. These last two
levels are for the distant future.

This may seem strange at first, but do we not begin as a microscopic egg
and get larger and larger until we are born? Then we continue to grow taller
and taller until we are adults. According to this theory, the human adult is
not the end of our growth pattern. We continue through DNA steps until
we are 50 to 60 feet tall. Metatron, the Hebrew archangel who is the per-
fection of what humanity is supposed to become, is 55 feet tall! Remember
the giants who lived here on Earth referred to in chapter 6 of Genesis? Ac-
cording to the Sumerian records, they were about 10 to 16 feet tall. When
we look at a three-year-old and a ten-year-old, we know that they have dif-
ferent levels of consciousness, and it is primarily by their height that we
make this judgment.

According to Thoth, each level of consciousness has different DNA;
however, the primary difference is the number of chromosomes. Using this
theory, we are now on the second level and have 44 + 2 chromosomes. An
example of the first level is certain aboriginal tribes in Australia where they
have 42 + 2 chromosomes. On the third level, which we are about to move
to, people have 46 + 2 chromosomes. The next two levels have 48 + 2 and
50 + 2, respectively.

We will discuss this in depth in the second volume of this book and
show the sacred geometry around this understanding, which will make it
clear.

The Evidence in Egypt for a New Look at History

We’re now going to focus on Egypt because Egypt happens to be where
the main mystery school was located and where evidence of the different-
sized humans, and levels of consciousness, still remain, though generally
unrecognized. Egypt was the area they chose where they would ultimately
restore our consciousness, and the primary area where survivors from
Atlantis and the ascended masters were in one place. We could discuss the
history of those other areas, and we will a little, but the focus for this work
will be on the Father, because it is through the Father that the primary in-
formation of the Mer-Ka-Ba must be remembered.

This is an Egyptian statue ofTiya [Fig. 4-10]. Tiya and her husband Ay
were the first two to create a baby by interdimensionally connecting through
the sacred tantra, which led to immortality for all three, the father, the
mother and the child. You can get a pretty good idea what Lemurians looked
like from looking at her. She and her husband are still alive, and they’re still
on the planet today even after tens of thousands of years. They’re two of the
oldest beings in the world and two of the most respected of all the ascended
masters because of all they’ve done for human consciousness.

Fig. 4-10. Bust ofTiya.

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid O 119

Fig. 4-11. Abu Simbel.

Giants in the Land

This is Abu Simbel [Fig. 4-1 1] in Egypt, which is located at the base of
the spine in the chakra system of the masculine aspect of the Christ grid.
Notice how very tall these statues are; this was the actual height of these be-
ings! Compare it to the size of the tourists near the bottom right in the
photo. If these stone folks were to stand up, they would be in that 60-foot
range, which indicates that they were at the fifth level of consciousness.

These beings [Fig. 4-12], on a different wall at Abu Simbel, would be
about 35 feet tall, representing the fourth level of consciousness. They
built rooms for these different heights. This doorway is made for the Venu-
sians — the Hathor race — who are on the third level of consciousness. I’ll
tell you more about the Hathors later.

These third-level beings [Fig. 4-13] are about 16 feet tall, indicating
they are male, as the females of this race are about 10 to 12 feet tall. In
their section of the building the rooms are around 20 feet high, with ceil-
ings and beams in proportion to 10- to 16-foot-tall beings. Next to that
room, through a little doorway (you can’t see it here) that looks like it’s

120 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Fig. 4-12. Abu
Simbel and the
Hathor doorway.

made for us, is a little room with a much lower ceiling. The Egyptians
didn’t make these statues arbitrarily- — they never did anything arbitrarily.
There isn’t a single scratch on a single stone; there is not even one, I be-
lieve, that was done unconsciously. There was a reason and a purpose for
everything. And usually it
was created on many,
many different levels. The
Emerald Tablets, for exam-
ple, are written on one
hundred levels of con-
sciousness. Depending on
who you are, you’ll under-
stand something utterly
and completely different
from other people. If you
should go through a con-
sciousness change, go back
and reread The Emerald
Tablets again. You won’t
believe it’s the same book,
because it’ll talk to you in a
different way, depending
on your understanding.

Fig. 4-13. Inside Abu Simbel; third-
level beings.

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid 4* 121

These are Earth beings [Fig. 4-
14] passing through the various lev-
els of consciousness. In this photo
you see a huge 55-foot-tall being with
a statue our size standing by his leg.
This is the king and queen. Archae-
ologists don’t know how to interpret
this, so they just say that the kings
were more important than the
queens, and that’s why they made her
little. But it didn’t have anything to
do with that. The statues are show-
ing the five levels of consciousness.
Every king and pharaoh who ever
lived in Egypt had five names, repre-
senting the five levels of conscious-
ness.

Fig. 4- 14. King and queen on different gome of the kings and queens were able to translate between the differ-

levels or consciousness. . .

ent levels in order to guide the population into the spiritual realms. One

special example of this still exists. In Egypt there’s an ancient round house.
I didn’t get to see it, but it was described to me by the famous archaeologist,
Ahmed Fayhed, so I know it’s real. This was Ay and Tiya’s house for a long
time (though they’re obviously not using it now). This round house has a
wall down the middle. You can’t get from one side of the house to the other
without going outside, walking around, and coming in the other side. Does
this sound like the island of Udal in Atlantis? On one side of the middle
wall is a picture of Ay, who looks very Egyptian with his angled skirt, beard
and various Egyptian paraphernalia. He appears of normal height. On the
other side of the wall Ay’s image is about 15 feet tall. He looks very differ-
ent, but you can see that his face is the same. He has a huge skull going way
back like the higher-level races do (I’ll show you some soon). These two
pictures of Ay show that he could go back and forth between these two dif-
ferent levels of awareness by changing consciousness.

Stair-Step Evolution

According to Melchizedek knowledge, both the Sumerians and the
Egyptians emerged onto the surface of the Earth at almost the same mo-
ment, complete, whole and perfect, with their language totally intact, with
all their skills and understanding and knowledge, with almost no evolution
prior to that time (at least none that science knows of) . They simply ap-
peared at one moment in history in their most perfect state. The writing
that came out at that moment was extremely sophisticated and clear, and
has never been improved on since. After that initial impulse, these cultures
became less and less clear, until finally these advanced civilizations degen-
erated away. You would think they would get better and more sophisti-
cated as time advanced, but that’s not what happened. This is scientific

122 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

fact. No one in conventional archaeology knows how this happened or can
even explain how it could have happened. It’s a great mystery.

Egypt and Sumer are placed into a special category called stair-step evo-
lution by archaeologists. They were given this classification because of how
they seemed to gain information and knowledge. What happened was, one
day Egypt got its language, full and complete, then that knowledge leveled
off; then a little while later they would know everything you could possibly
imagine about, perhaps, building a certain kind of moat or water system. A
little more time would go by, and then they would suddenly know every-
thing about hydraulics. It would keep going on and on like that. How did
the Egyptians and the Sumerians get this information? How did they sud-
denly, in one day, know everything? I’ll give you Thoth’s answer.

First I need to make this clear on the precession drawing, repeated be-
low [Fig. 4- 15] : Point A is where we are now, and point C is when the fall
of Atlantis happened. Point C is also when the poles shifted; sci-
ence has determined that’s when it happened. That’s also
when the Great Flood of Noah happened, and the melting
of the icecaps because of all the changes that were occur-
ring on Earth. Point C is when the destruction occurred.

Remember, I mentioned earlier that there were two other
points, B and D, when change could also take place and be
assimilated most easily. For a 6000-year time span, from
point C where the destruction happened to point D where
new teachings could be given, the ascended masters had to sit
and wait while the Atlanteans, who were now hairy barbarians in
Egypt, slowly returned to the state where they could accept this Fig - 4 ' 15 - The journey of the preces-

new, yet ancient, knowledge. These approximately 1600 ascended
masters had been living under the Great Pyramid since the Fall, and they
had to wait 6000 years before they could start teaching and building the
new culture.

The Tat Brotherhood

Thoth’ s son Tat remained in Egypt with Ra after the Fall. Later this
group became known as the Tat Brotherhood. Even today there’s an exter-
nal brotherhood in Egypt called the Tat Brotherhood, physical people who
are the protectors and keepers of the sacred temples. Hidden behind the
current Tat Brotherhood are the ascended masters.

So the immortal aspect of the Tat Brotherhood sat there waiting and
waiting, observing and waiting, until the time when the Egyptians could re-
ceive their teachings. When that day finally came, which was the birth of
Sumer and Egypt, the Tat Brotherhood watched until they found either a
person or a group of Egyptians who were ready for the ancient knowledge.
Then one, two or three members of the Brotherhood appeared in bodies
looking just like the people they were about to teach. They would go up to
the surface, approach the person or group and give them the information
outright. They flat-out said, “Hey, look at this. Did you know that if you

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid $ 123

did this and this and this, that this is what will happen?” The Egyptians
would say, “Wow, look at that!” They would use the knowledge, thus ere-
ating a new “step” in their evolution.

Then the men and women from the Brotherhood would go back under
the pyramid, the Egyptians who were given these teachings would give it to
the rest of the culture, and the culture would quickly ascend to the next
step. The Egyptians would assimilate that for a while; then the Brother-
hood would look for another group that was ready for the next subject.
They’d go to the surface again and say, “Look, here’s everything you want
to know about this.” They simply gave it to them. The ascended masters
gave the people this information over a short period of time and their evo-
lution simply shot up and up in stair steps.

The Parallel Evolution in Sumer

This same evolutionary pattern was also occurring in Sumer. Though
the present historical line says that Egypt began in approximately 3300 B.C.
and Sumer began 500 years earlier, in about 3800 B.C., I believe they both
started at almost the same moment. I think that if historians would get
their dates accurate, they’d discover that both Sumer and Egypt started
only a few years apart. However, the evolution in Sumer was led by the
Nefilim, the mother aspect, and the one in Egypt was led by the Sirians, the
father aspect. That’s the primary difference. I think the mother and the fa-
ther agreed, “Now is the time for our children to remember.” I believe it
was a parental decision, and that when researchers look very carefully,
they’ll find that both countries started to blossom at the same moment in
time, which was tied to the point in the precessional orbit (point D) when it
was most likely to be successful.

This is also how the Sumerians knew about the precession of the equi-
noxes. It takes 2160 years to recognize that there is a precession of the
equinoxes, but the reason the Sumerians knew about it was because the
Nefilim said, “Do you know there’s a precession of the equinoxes?” Very
simple. It’s not a complicated thing. They just explained it all and the peo-
ple wrote it down. The Sumerians knew about events that went back
450,000 years because they were given the information. They simply wrote
it down and applied it.

But after these ancient cultures got all this brilliant information, they
degenerated. Why would they degenerate instead of going higher? Be-
cause they were in the sleep cycle, the “falling asleep” portion of the preces-
sion. They were falling more and more asleep with each breath, right into
the kali yuga, the most asleep moment of the cycle. In the middle of the kali
yuga — 2000 years ago— was the time of Jesus, and humans were sound
asleep and snoring. People in the kali yuga who read books and other stud-
ies written in the earlier, more-awake period had a difficult time fully un-
derstanding what was being written about. Why? Because they were rela-
tively unconscious. This is why cultures all over the world, not just in Egypt

and Sumer, degenerated until they ceased. Right now we are about to
awaken fully and know the truth of our beingness.

Well-Kept Secrets in Egypt, Key to
a New View of History

Fig. 4-16. The pyramid at Saqqara.

This is Saqqara [Fig. 4-16). Ac-
cording to the linear archaeological
belief, this is where the Egyptian cul-
ture began. This pyramid was the first
to be built in Egypt, by their way of
thinking. When it was first created, it
was covered with beautiful white
stones. In fact, this whole city
stretches for miles and miles and into
the Earth hundreds of feet, including
buildings and complexes under the
ground. This would have been amaz-
ing if you could have seen it when it
was brand new — especially since only
a short time in history before it was
built, we were supposedly all hairy bar-
barians. There was a jump from hairy
barbarians to this supersophisticated
culture in only a second of archaeo-
logical time.

This is a pyramid [Fig. 4-17] that I
think destroys the belief that Saqqara is
where it all began. This pyramid is at
least 500 years older than Saqqara. If
this is true, the time when the Egyp-
tians emerged on the Earth is identical
to the time the Sumerians emerged —
which I believe is exactly what hap-
pened. This pyramid is called Lehirit (a
phonetic spelling), and it’s one of the
few unguarded pyramids in this cate-
gory. There are quite a few of these
stepped pyramids, called mastabas.

The Egyptians have taken almost all
these pyramids that approach or exceed 6000 years of age and put military
bases and huge electrical fences around them. In some cases they’ve got sol-
diers on guard with machine guns. If you try to approach these pyramids,
they would probably try to kill you. They don’t want anyone to know about
these pyramids, and they especially don’t want you to examine them. If you
try to talk to an Egyptian about them or ask to see them, they play it down.

Fig. 4-17. The pyramid that destroys
the Saqqara theory. One of the two flat
blocks in foreground has a carved Star
of David inside a circle (@).

FOUR — The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness and the Creation of the Christ Grid O 125

I went through this. They would say, “Aw, it’s not important. They’re
just made out of little adobe bricks by primitive people. They’re nothing,
nothing to them.” And I’d say, “Well, can I go see one?” “Nah, it’s just a
waste of time. Don’t do it.” I had to keep pushing and pushing because I
wanted to see one. I was brought in to various governmental offices, and I
kept saying, “Please, can I just go see one?” And they would say, “No, no,
no.” Finally I had to give bribes to get into these places. One government
official wanted $8,000 to sneak me in there at night without any cameras,
just to look at it for fifteen minutes, then get away. This is how closely they
protect these structures.

Finally, after a long ordeal, I found out about one of these pyramids that
was not on a military base because there was a little village around it about a
half an hour from Saqqara. Once I realized that I didn’t have to go through
any government red tape, I finally found a person who was connected with
that village. I had to pay him a lot of money — it wasn’t thousands, but it
was hundreds — to go there. So we drove into the little village; I had to go
to the leader to ask permission and pay him money, too. Then I was allowed
to go there for thirty minutes but not take any pictures. I managed to get
this one photograph, and that was all.

Not only was this pyramid there, but there were pyramids all over the place
everywhere, for what I estimated to be ten miles around! At one time this was
a major complex. They’re not doing anything to take care of it because they
know that this pyramid is probably older than 6000 years. So I found out that
these “unimportant” pyramids were not so unimportant after all. The stones
that covered this pyramid, like the slanting ones shown in Figure 4-17, proba-
bly weigh 60 to 80 tons apiece. They were very sophisticated even though
the internal part of the pyramid was made with adobe bricks.

On top of a block beside the base was a circle with a Star of David — the
key to the Mer-Ka-Ba experience. A ramp goes down maybe 200 feet to the
river below, and the pyramid is still working, still functioning — it’s pumping
water. Pyramids pump water; they’ve demonstrated this in the United
States now. If you build a pyramid right, it’ll pump water with no moving
parts. So this pyramid fills up with water and has to be pumped dry before
anyone can enter.

To top all this off, I just happened to sit next to an American linguistics
team when I was flying back home (pure luck, of course), who happened to
have just entered this pyramid! Very few people can go in there, but this
was a team of 30. He told me about the writing inside that was definitely
older than Saqqara. There is geometrical writing all over the walls. I would
love to see that. This guy was very excited as he told me that this team of 30
linguistics experts who got to see the inside now believe that the key to all
languages in the world is in that pyramid. I believe he’s probably correct. He
understood sacred geometry, and as you will soon discover, sacred geome-
try is the root of all language in the universe.

26 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

FIVE

Egypt’s Role in the Evolution of
Consciousness

Introduction to Some Basic Concepts

Egyptian Tools and Symbols of Resurrection

T he ancients used certain symbols to represent the three aspects of
consciousness we use for our sojourn here on Earth. You’ll see repre-
sentations of these symbols all over the world. These depictions have
one animal that lives underground, one that walks on the Earth, and one
that flies over the Earth. The animal that lives under the ground represents
the microcosm; the one who flies through the air represents the macro-
cosm; and the one who walks the Earth represents the middle level between
the two — like us. The same symbols are everywhere. In Egypt you’ll see a
vulture on the left, the right eye of Horus in the middle, then a cobra on the
right [Fig. 5-1]. In Peru it’s the condor, the puma and the rattlesnake. For
the American Indians it’s the eagle, the mountain lion and the rattlesnake.
In Tibet it’s a chicken, a pig and a snake.

Fig. 5-1. Symbols
representing the three
aspects of consciousness.

FIVE— 0 127

Fig. 5-2. Tools of resurrection.

Fig. 5-3. Geometric images from the
Old Kingdom.

This photo [Fig. 5-2] shows the
tools and symbols of resurrection
the Egyptians used. The object at
point A is a shortened form of a rod
that’s usually about four feet long
and has a little tuning fork on one
end and a 45 -degree angle on the
other end. This was used at the
back of the head to transfer vibra-
tion into the body. Along with that
they used the hook and the flail,
which we’ll see in just a moment.
Arrow B points to the oval, which is
usually a red-orange color, that you
see over the initiates’ heads. This
was the symbol for the metamor-
phosis that happens when we go
through resurrection or ascension, when we literally change the shape and
chemistry of our body.

Arrow C shows a power generator they sometimes use to increase the vi-
bration. Unfortunately, Thoth left before I could fully understand the use
of this object. Arrow D indicates the ankh, which I understand more, and
I’ll give you my understanding. It’s the most important tool of understand-
ing they possessed. From an Egyptian point of view, it’s the key to eternal
life. Arrow E points to a triangle within a triangle, which is the Egyptian hi-
eroglyphic for the star Sirius, the symbol for Sirius A and Sirius B. Point F is
just a name, called a cartouche. The bird at the top right is a vulture, which
is sacred to the Egyptians and associated with the movement from one level
of consciousness to another. I’m not going to go into the other things in the

picture, but these are some of the
tools the early Egyptians used.

The Difference between Dying,
Resurrection and Ascension

These geometric images
[Fig. 5-3] come from the Old King-
dom. The little Flower of Life pat-
terns are associated with
Lehirit — the pyramid that 1 believe
destroys the Saqqara theory.

Figure 5-4 is a picture of Osiris
(on the left). He’s holding a crook
(A); a 45 -degree rod with a tuning
fork on the end (B); and a flail (C),
which are the three primary instru-
ments used for resurrection. These

128 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

tools were connected with resurrection, not ascension. There’s
a difference between the two. What is the difference? First of
all, there’s dying, a process where you go into the void state im-
mediately after death. You’re unconscious, unaware of the dy-
ing process to the degree that you have no control over the im-
ages. This way of dying takes you into the third overtone of the
fourth dimension, which results in your cycling back into this
Earth existence again and again — reincarnation. Because
you’re unconscious in this cycle, you’re not using your
Mer-Ka-Ba except unconsciously, so once you get to the other
side, you don’t have any memories of this side. When you rein-
carnate back to Earth again, you don’t have any memories of
where you just came from, either. So the reincarnating just
keeps going on and on. It’s a lot of energy moving very slowly.

You eventually get through it, but it’s a very slow process.

When you go through resurrection, you’re aware and con-
scious of your Mer-Ka-Ba, though usually you don’t become
fully aware of it until after you die. You die, you drop the body
and then you become aware of your Mer-Ka-Ba. Then you
re-create your body and go through a process that leads you into
either the tenth, eleventh or twelfth overtone of the fourth di-
mension. From there you don’t go through reincarnation any-
more. Your memory is never blocked again and you continue
on into eternal life.

There’s a big difference between dying and resurrection, but there’s an
even greater difference in ascension — which is now possible, since the grid
was completed in 1989. Ascension was highly unlikely until this grid was
complete. In ascension you don’t die at all; there’s no death process in-
volved as we know it. Of course, it is true that you no longer are on Earth,
and from that point of view, you die. What happens is, you simply become
aware of your Mer-Ka-Ba one way or another — either remembering it on
your own, being taught it or however it happens to you. This means you be-
come aware of your body as light. Then you’re able to pass through the
Void totally consciously — from the Earth side through the Void to the
higher dimensions, aware the whole time. In this way you simply walk out
of this life without going through the death process, which involves recon-
structing your human body. When a person ascends, he/she simply disap-
pears from this dimension and reappears in the next, passing through the
Void.

Fig. 5-4. Resurrecting Osiris.

Ascension is now completely possible, and this book is one possible set
of instructions on exactly how to accomplish this process. You personally
might not pass through ascension; you might actually die or go through res-
urrection. It doesn’t make much difference at this point in the game of life
on planet Earth, because if you die in the normal manner, you’ll go into the
third overtone and into a holding pattern for a while. Then when the rest
of the Earth cycles through this coming change, all people on that third

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness 0 129

overtone will also rise to the same dimensional level as those who resur-
reeted or ascended. Even the Bible refers to this, saying that at this time the
dead will rise. There is no such thing as death; there are just different states
of being. It’s a little like water, which can be a liquid, solid (ice) or gas (fog),
but it is still water.

Right now very few human reincarnations are occurring on Earth ex-
cept under certain conditions. This is probably your last life, folks— this is
it! Of course, there are exceptions to almost all rules, so there may be a few
on this Earth who have decided to reincarnate. Time is running out. If we
make it to the end of this century, I’ll be amazed. I seriously doubt if the
third dimension will still be available for human life by that time. Only God
knows for certain. Where are the people coming from who are being born
on Earth today? Not from here! I’ll explain when I talk about the new chil-
dren.

When the Sun Rose in the West

As Egypt began to evolve, it developed into two countries, Upper Egypt
and Lower Egypt. Upper Egypt was south and Lower Egypt was north.
Egyptians named Upper and Lower Egypt in this sort of reverse way of
thinking because in their earlier life as a country during Atlantis, the Earth

Fig. 5-5. The Egyptian zodiac, shown
flowing in the opposite direction even
though this depiction was done in the
present age.

was rotating in the opposite direction and the magnetic poles were
reversed. Our present north was then south and vice versa. Not only did
the poles shift their position after Atlantis, but the Earth actually rotated in
the opposite direction. Thoth said that he’s gone through five pole shifts:
He’s seen the Sun rise in the east and he’s seen it rise in the west, then in
the east, the west and again the east — five times!

On the ceiling of the temple at Dendera, which is
the heart chakra of the male aspect of the Christ grid, is
an astrological zodiac that demonstrates this reversed
polarity. The zodiac rotates in the opposite direction, as
if the Sun rose in the west instead of the east [Fig. 5-5] .
The River Nile flows from south to north, whereas al-
most all the other rivers in the world flow from north to
south. This indicates to me that the Egyptians held
onto the older energy flow even in the Earth.

We are the creators of our universe. People in-
volved in Sufism may remember Sufi Sam, also known
as Murshid Sam Lewis. He was buried — in the early
70s, I believe — at the Lama Foundation in New Mex-
ico. There’s a plaque over his grave that reads: “On
that day the sun will rise in the west, and all men seeing
will believe.” He was referring to the time that’s com-
ing. When the poles shift this next time, there will be a
reversal of the Earth’s rotation, thus the way we move in
relation to the Sun.

1 30 £ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Osiris, the First Immortal

Prior to Egypt, during Atlantis, existed the Naacal Mystery School
headed by Ay and Tiya and a thousand members from Lemuria. It was lo-
cated on the island of Udal, north of the mainland. They were trying to
teach the Atlanteans how to become immortal. The only thing is, either
they weren’t very good teachers then, or the people just couldn’t get it, be-
cause it took 20- to 30,000 years before one person finally achieved the im-
mortal state of being. The first person to make it was Osiris, who was not
Egyptian, but Atlantean. The story of Osiris didn’t happen in Egypt, even
though it talks about the Nile, but in Atlantis. Though most of you know
this story, I’ll tell it anyway, in a condensed form.

There were two brothers and two sisters from the same family. Their
names were Isis, Osiris, Nephthys (or Nefusjand Set. Isis married Osiris
and Nephthys married Set. At the point where this story begins, Set
killed Osiris. He put Osiris’ body in a box and floated it down the Nile,
though it was really another river in Atlantis. This killing disturbed Isis,
and she and her sister, Set’s wife, went out to look for Osiris. They found
his body and brought it back, intending to bring Osiris back to life. When
Set found out, he cut Osiris’ body into fourteen pieces and spread them all
over the world so that his sisters could not bring him back to life. Isis and
Nephthys then went out looking for these pieces to put him back to-
gether. They found thirteen of the fourteen and assembled the pieces, but
they never found the phallus, the fourteenth piece. It was Thoth (who
was in Atlantis as well as Egypt) who, through magic, restored the four-
teenth piece. This restored the creative energy flow, brought Osiris back
to life and, in addition, gave him immortality.

From the Egyptian point of view, it was through sexual energy that im-
mortality was reached. (Remember, it was through sexual energy, tantra,
that immortality took root in Lemuria.) I’m going to leave the last element
of this story until another appropriate moment, because a certain under-
standing needs to come first. But notice that Osiris was first alive, walking
around in a body in the first level of consciousness. Then he was killed and
his body was cut into pieces. He was separated from himself — this was con-
sciousness level two, our level. Then his pieces were brought back together
and he was made whole again, which put him into the third level of con-
sciousness, which is immortality.

He went through three levels of consciousness. The first one was whole,
the second one was separated from itself, and in the third level all the com-
ponents were brought back together. This made him whole again and also
made him immortal; he would no longer die. When Osiris finally got
through all this, he came back as an immortal being, the first resurrected
master of Atlantis. So they used Osiris’s understanding of how he became
immortal as the template for how other people could reach the same state
of consciousness. This became the religion of Atlantis and later on the reli-
gion of Egypt.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness $ I 3

The Transpersonal Holographic Memory of the
First Level of Consciousness

Atlanteans, because of the way their brains functioned, had complete
memory. They remembered everything that had ever happened to them.
And their memory was transpersonal, which means that anything one per-
son remembered, the others in their race could remember. The Aborigines
in Australia have this type of memory right now. When anything happens
to one Aborigine, any other can reexperience it anytime he or she wants. If
an Aborigine were to walk into this room right now, he or she would in ef-
fect be giving the experience to all of their race anywhere on the planet.

You see, they re on the first level of consciousness where they’re not sep-
arated from themselves. We re on the second level and are very separated
from ourselves. Like the Atlanteans, Aborigines don’t have memory like
our vague kind of recollection; they have full-tilt 3D holographic memory.
They could reconstruct this room moment by moment through the entire
workshop, and all the rest of them could walk around in here and look at it.
They could walk up to your table and look into your eyes. It wouldn’t he
real time; it s what they call Dreamtime, like in a dream, but it’s an absolute
replica of the Reality. Their memory is perfect; they don’t have any mis-
takes or flaws. Obviously, in that kind of culture the Atlanteans had no
reason to write anything down. Why try to describe something with words
when you’ve got the real thing?

They didn’t need it; however, the Martian aspect did need it, so they
had a written language. Even after the Fall, the Egyptians (and others) had
an amazing ability to remember. At that point they had lost their holo-
graphic and transpersonal memory, but they still had photographic memory.
When the mystery school students were doing the complicated kind of
training we’ll be doing soon, they could do it all in their head. With our less
efficient memory, we cannot do this in the same way they did; we have to
struggle just to remember someone’s name. The complexity will increase as
we progress, making it difficult to remember from photo to photo, but the
ancient ones could do this completely in their head. There is something
about doing this in your head that’s important, so later I’m going to show
you some illustrations that will assist you to do this yourself.

This experience holds a primary key for understanding the nature of
creation. Re-create the illustrations that follow as if you were actually in
the Void moving through the geometrical movements. Experiencing it
gives you the understanding that the circles on the page represent actual
movements, and that these geometrical movements of spirit in the Void are
the beginning and end of creation.

The Introduction of Writing, Which Created
the Second Level of Consciousness

The Forty-Two Books of Thoth record that after the Fall, when the
Atlanteans got into Egypt and were no longer experiencing full memory,

writing was introduced. In fact, it’s written right in the Egyptian records
that it was Thoth who introduced writing to the world. This one act com-
pleted the “fall” and threw us out of the first level of consciousness and fully
into the second, because it changed the way we accessed memory. It sealed
our fate.

This act of learning how to write caused us to grow the top half of our
skull from our eyebrows up. The simple act of introducing writing changed
many factors in the way we perceive our Reality. To get at our memory
now, we have to go in and pull out the desired information with a code. We
go in with a word or a concept to bring back the memory of whatever it is.
In fact, we can’t even remember something without having certain eye
movements. Our eyes have to move in certain ways in order for the memo-
ries to flow out. The Egyptian memory system was vastly different from the
way it was before the Fall. Comparing this change of memory to the Osiris
saga, the Egyptians had entered the stage where they were in separate
pieces, where they were inside their bodies, thinking they were separate
from the rest of Reality. This feeling of being separate was, of course, des-
tined to change many aspects of how human beings live.

The Roadblock of Polytheism: Chromosomes and Neters

Now the plot thickens. Things were going well with the stair-step evo-
lution plan. After a while Upper and Lower Egypt combined into one coun-
try under King Menes and the First Dynasty began. But as time went on, a
serious problem developed which, if it had not been solved, would have
caused major catastrophes for us in the twentieth century — in fact, we
would not have survived as a planet. We wouldn’t have had a chance. It
seems like a not-so-important thing, but it was very important for some who
watch over this planet. It had to do with the religious beliefs of the Egyp-
tians.

As I said, the Egyptians no longer had full holographic transpersonal
memory anymore, so they had to write down what their religion was. This
writing is called The Forty-Two Books of Thoth. Donald Beaman, who lives
in Boston, is the man who reconstructed this book. There were 42 books,
with two more books set aside from the main body. Forty-two plus two rep-
resents the number of chromosomes of the first level of consciousness.
Your chromosomes, as you are about to see, are geometric images and pat-
terns that describe the entire Reality — not just your body, but everything in
the Reality, from the most distant planet to the smallest plant and every
single atom.

Inside his book you’ll see what are called neters. Neters are gods, with a
small g. This is one of the neters- — Anubis [Fig. 5-6]. They are mythical
human beings with animal heads, and each one represents a different chro-
mosome, a different aspect and characteristic of life. Neters represent the
pathway of how to go from the first to the second level of consciousness.
The ascended masters used Osiris’ particular genetic coding to help other

Fig. 5-6. The neter Anubis.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness O 133

people learn how to ascend. In other words, Osiris had lived the experience
of ascension, and now the pathway was in his DNA, specifically the chro-
mosomes. The genetic keys were then opened to the initiate through the
neters, who represented Osiris’ chromosomes.

But a problem developed from this way of representing their religion, es-
pecially as Upper and Lower Egypt again became more separated. Both
Lower and Upper Egypt had 42 + 2 gods, or neters, representing these stages.
But Upper Egypt had images slightly different from those of Lower Egypt; the
images had changed over time when the two countries were separate. When
Menes put the two countries together as a single country called Egypt, in or-
der to be politically correct he adopted all these images. So now they had 84
+ 4 gods representing the same religious ideas. That was probably a big mis-
take, because it got very confusing. For instance, in one area they would take
one of the neters like Anubis and say, “This is God,” with a big G. Another
area would say, “Isis is God,” and another area would claim Sekhmet to be
their God.

So then there were 88 different ideas of God in the country. They would
say, My God is the God, and your gods are wrong.” It became very sepa-
rated and occult, and after a while no one had any idea that there really was
only one God. They didn’t understand what the Tat Brotherhood was try-
ing to tell them. From our American point of view, this would be like a
chromosome breakage; it was a mutation, and it was not correct. Even with
all the help from the Tat Brotherhood, they just couldn’t get it right, and it
got worse and worse.

All the evidence I’ve seen indicates that the Christian religion came di-
rectly out of the Egyptian religion. If you study both of them, they’re paral-
lel in every single way except for the Egyptians’ understanding of God. The
Christian religion came back later and totally discounted the Egyptian reli-
gion, even though Egypt is the probable source of the origins of Christian-
ity. The Christians saw the Egyptians as being occult. And they were, but it
was because their religious belief had become corrupted, with the clear ex-
ception of 17 Vi years during the Eighteenth Dynasty.

The Rescue of Human Consciousness

Akhenaten’s Life: A Brilliant Flash of Light

For a very short period of 17 Vi years, a brilliant flash of light appeared,
then disappeared again. And that brilliant flash of white light is what saved
our spiritual lives. It began in approximately 1500 B.C., when the worship-
ing and arguing over so many gods was prevalent. The ascended masters fi-
nally decided that something must be done. Finally they chose a plan.
Thoth told me the following story.

As the first step, they decided to bring in an actual Christ-conscious be-
ing in an actual Christ-conscious body so we could put back into the

akashic records the memory of what Christ consciousness was all about. It
had been lost in the Fall. This Christ-conscious body would be much taller
than those on the planet at the time. This would be an example for the
Earth people to see. That was the first part of the plan. It was a very bold
step, and they did it.

The ascended masters had decided that the Christ-conscious person
should become king of Egypt. In order to do this, they had to break all the
rules, and I mean all of them. What they did was approach the king of that
period, Amenhotep II, and ask him for a favor. Thoth simply walked into
the room physically, went right up to him and said, “Look, I’m Thoth,”
which I’m sure was difficult for the king to believe. By that time the Egyp-
tians probably thought that all those neters in their stories were mythical.
Yet here’s a real person standing there who was one of the neters. Thoth
said, “We have a serious problem here in Egypt, and I need your help.”

Thoth somehow got Amenhotep II to do something that no Egyptian
king would ever do. Amenhotep’s son was about to become king, and
Thoth said, “I want your son to not become king; I want to put an outside
lineage onto the Egyptian throne.” Amenhotep II agreed to it. It must
have been a pretty profound experience. I don’t know what Thoth did — he
probably came in glowing or levitating or something like that. But he did
something to convince the king that it was necessary. Once they received
the king’s permission, they had to actually create the living body, which was
not easy.

Creating the Bodies of Akhenaten, then Nefertiti

So how did they do this? They went to Ay and Tiya — who were very,
very old, no matter how you look at it — and said, “We would like you to
have a baby.” They had to go to someone who was immortal to get the im-
mortal genes, because they have a different chromosome count — 46 + 2
instead of 44 + 2. Ay and Tiya agreed, and they had a little baby. The baby
was given to Amenhotep II to become the next king.

So the little baby grew up and became king. He became Amenhotep III,
who then mated; I am not sure if it was physically or interdimensionally,
and I don’t know who it was, but he would almost have had to mate with
someone who had the higher chromosome levels. Anyway, their baby boy
became known as Amenhotep IV, and that baby was the one they had spe-
cial plans for. That baby, Amenhotep IV, has a more popular name, which
you know as Akhenaten.

Meanwhile Ay and Tiya waited a generation and then had another
baby. That baby was a little girl whose name was Nefertiti. Nefertiti grew
up with Akhenaten, and then they married. They were really brother and
sister because they had the same bloodline. The Osiris story is simi-
lar-brother and sister marrying and becoming a new possibility in life. So
these two people grew up and became the king and queen of Egypt.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness O 135

The New Rulership and the One God

Fig. 5-7. Akhenaten teaching about
God, a copy of the carving in Fig. 5-8.

For a while Amenhotep III and his son Akhenaten ruled the country to-
gether — two kings at the same time, again breaking the rules. Meanwhile
they built a brand new city called Tel el Amarna in the exact center of
Egypt. We still don’t know how they got it in the exact center. Akhenaten
put a stone there that says, “This is the center of the country.” Today we
could not have done it better from a satellite. It makes you wonder who
these people were who could locate right down to the square inch the cen-
ter of a country hundreds of miles
long. It’s pretty amazing. They built
an entire city out of white stones. It
was beautiful — it was space-age.

Akhenaten and his father ruled
the country simultaneously from
two places for a while — from Thebes
and from Tel el Amarna. The father
resigned the throne while he was
still alive — which again breaks the
rules — and gave the country to
Akhenaten, who then became the
first pharaoh of Egypt. There were
no pharaohs before Akhenaten,
only kings. Pharaoh means that
which you will become. In other
words, they were showing the people
what they would literally become in
the future. Akhenaten, Nefertiti
and their children were not exactly
human.

This tall figure [Fig. 5-7] is
Akhenaten. I’m going to talk about
this picture for a moment.
Akhenaten’s main purpose was to
break up all the occult religions and
bring the country back to a single re-
ligion where they believed that there
was simply one God. At that time all
the people were worshiping statues,
so they were used to believing in
things. Akhenaten had to give them
something to see to believe in, so he
gave them the image of the Sun as
God, because this image was some-
thing they couldn’t stick on their al-
tars again.

136 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Fig. 5-9. Truth in ducks.

There was another reason he gave them the image of the
Sun. He told them that the breath of life, the prana field,
came from the Sun. This is true in terms of third-
dimensional thinking, though prana is really anywhere and
everywhere — there are infinite amounts of it at any point.
Since prana also comes from the Sun, this image shows the
Sun’s rays coming down; and on two of the rays are little
ankhs, which the rays are holding up to the nose, to the
breath, showing that eternal life is through the breath.

In this same picture you also see the lotus, the national
flower of Atlantis. It was the Naacals who brought the lotus
to India. The Naacals are written about in Indian Sanskrit
writings and are talked about even in modern times. They
came long before Buddha and were there during Buddhist
times. In Egypt the lotus flower represented Atlantis, and in
this picture you see them out of the vases. Everyone knew
that Atlantis was dead, but they were still paying homage to
it by having the lotuses out of the vase. Figure 5-8 is the orig-
inal wall carving.

Notice that Akhenaten, the main figure, has a long,
skinny neck, skinny hands, a high waist, wide thighs and
skinny legs. The usual Egyptian explanation is that he had a
disease and was deformed — of course, so was Nefertiti and all
their daughters. (Evidently they all had the same disease.) I
believe something very different.

The Reign of Truth, Which Depicts a
Different Genetics

Besides making the religions monotheistic
again, Akhenaten also said, “In this new reli-
gion we’re not going to have any more lying,
no more untruthfulness. And we’re going to
change our art so that it reflects the total
truth.” So during the Eighteenth Dynasty —
never before nor after — there was a totally
unique art form. The artists were instructed
to sculpt or paint things just as their eyes saw
it, like a photograph. So began an art that
looked realistic instead of stylized, as it had
been before. You see ducks that look like
ducks [Fig. 5-9], just like we see in modern
art. This is important to remember when
you’re looking at art of the Eighteenth Dy-
nasty, because that means that whatever you
see is exactly what the artist saw. They were
not allowed to lie.

Fig. 5-8.
Akhenaten
teaching
about God,
original
carving.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness Q 137

Fig. 5- 10. Maat, the neter of truthful-

ness - This is a statue of

Akhenaten in the Cairo
Museum [Fig. 5-11], Akhe-
naten was W/i feet tall, not
counting his headdress.
When I stood next to this,
the top of my head came up
to the widest part of his hips.
Nefertiti was ten feet-
something. She was actually
small for her race. The
daughters were also very tall.
This is according to Thoth.
Hard evidence of this has re-
cently come into official
hands, and they don’t know
what to think about it. They
found two caskets in Tel el
Amarna, Akhenaten’s city.

This issue about truth was taken to such
an extreme that they were not even al-
lowed to wear clothes, because wearing
clothes was hiding, and that was a form of
lying. No one was allowed to wear clothes
during the Eighteenth Dynasty except for
ceremonial and other special purposes.

This neter’s name is Maat [Fig. 5-10].
That’s a feather on top of her head. She be-
came one of the most important neters in
this new religion because of her name,
which translates as truth or truthfulness.
She was the important issue in everything.
Everything was to be absolutely truthful,
and there were to be no distortions, no lies,
so that everything could get back into fo-
cus. This was an important part of
Akhenaten’s teachings.

1 38 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Fig. 5-11. Statue of Akhenaten
in the Egyptian Museum, Cairo.

One of the caskets had the Flower of Life etched
directly over the head of the mummy inside, and
the second casket held the bones of a seven-year-
old boy — but he was eight feet tall! That casket is
sitting in the basement of the Cairo Museum at
this moment — at least it probably is. It’s the only
real proof so far of what these bodies looked like.
From Thoth’s teachings, this statue of Akhenaten
is exactly what he looked like, just as if you took a
photograph of him.

This is a bust of Nefertiti [Fig. 5-12] that was
found in Tel el Amarna. There is almost nothing
left of that city. At one point the city was disman-
tled brick by brick and spread all over the world.
The Egyptians did not want you to know that
Akhenaten and Nefertiti had ever lived. The only
reason we do know is because they had buried
some things in rooms deep underneath the ground
that earlier people didn’t find. This bust was
found there. Many people think of Nefertiti as a
very beautiful woman, but they don’t realize that
she was extremely tall and that her body was very
unusual in certain ways.

Figure 5-13 is a little-
known statue of Nefertiti
found in the same room
as the bust. She’s not
wearing clothes because
they didn’t believe in that
at the time. She had a
huge head, large ears, a
long, skinny neck and a
high waist. She also has a
kind of bulging tummy.
And if you could see the
rest of her, she has skinny
legs and wide thighs.

Fig. 5-12. Bust of Nefertiti, State Mu-
seum, Berlin.

Fig. 5-13. Nefertiti in the
nude.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness $ 139

Fig. 5-14. Two of Nefertiti’s and Akhenaten’s daughters.

These are two of their daughters [Fig. 5-14]. Their
skulls are enormous and they have high waists, skinny
calves and huge ears.

This is another one of the daughters [Fig. 5-15]. I
feel certain that it is exactly what she looked like. If you
could see that head from the back, you would see its size.
It was big. It’s hard to see the size of these ears until you
actually get right next to it.

Fig. 5-15. Another daughter.

140 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

[Fig. 547].

Fig. 5-17. Teenager of one of the daughters.

Figure 5-16 is another daughter,
younger than the last one — little neck,
huge skull extending back.

This is an image of one of the daugh-
ters as a teenager [Fig. 5-17].

This is another [Fig. 548]. You can

see how big the head is relative to the
, i Fig. 5- 18. Another

ouu ' ' young daughter.

Fig. 5-16. A younger daughter.

FIVE — Egypt’s Role in the Evolution of Consciousness 0 141

—

Fig. 5-20. Bust of King Tut.

Fig. 5-19. A baby in Akhenaten’s family.

they were members of the 32 beings who were sitting
around the original flame — and their bodies are from
the star Sirius. The Sirian star system has two stars,
Sirius A and Sirius B. It’s a binary system, as are a vast
majority of the star systems. And in those systems life
forms have two hearts. If there’s only one sun, life
forms have one heart. (If there are more stars than two
in the system, there will still be two hearts.)

King Tut — and Other Elongated Skulls

This is King Tut [Fig. 5-20] , who took over directly
after Akhenaten was disposed of. King Tut was only
eighteen years old when he became king. Nobody
knows for certain where he came from. The slide says
he was a son-in-law of Nefertiti and Akhenaten, mar-
ried to their daughter. He was obviously part of this lin-
eage, though his skull doesn’t appear as big. But he
does have the big ears. According to Thoth, King Tut
was allowed to take over for only one year. He ruled
during the transition between Akhenaten and the next
phase. King Tut was in telepathic communication with
Nefertiti while she ran the country through him for
that one year. She was in hiding.

This is a baby [Fig. 5-
19]. Again, the skull goes
way up and around. The
ears are about half the size
of the head.

Physiologically these
bodies are vastly different
from human bodies. There
are all kinds of differ-
ences — brain differences
and other unusual things.
For example, they have two
hearts. The only reason we
have one heart is because
we have one sun. But these
are Sirian beings — actually,

1 42 & The Ancient Secret of the Flower of life

Fig. 5-22. Skulls found in Peru.

Fig. 5-23. Kalu Rinpoche.

This is the museum at Lima, Peru [Fig. 5-21]. I just want to note that they
also have some pretty amazing skulls there. Peru is another of the places Thoth
went to. They found these skulls [Fig. 5-22] in Peru, just like those in Egypt.
These large skulls are found in three areas of the world: in and around Egypt,
Peru and Tibet — nowhere else, at least that I know of. Remember, these are
the primary areas where these beings went.

This was one of my teachers, who is now dead. His
name was Kalu Rinpoche, a Tibetan lama. I’ve had
many teachers, but I feel especially close to this one; I
really love him a lot. Notice the shape of his skull.

Memory: The Key to Immortality

You might wonder, If Akhenaten and others were
immortal, then why are they dead? I’ll give you the
definition of immortality from a Melchizedek point of
view, which hopefully will help. Somebody else may
have a different definition, but this is what we feel.
Immortality has nothing to do with living in the same
body forever. You’re going to live forever anyway;
you have always been alive and you always will be,
but you might not be conscious during all that time.
The definition from our point of view has to do with
memory. When you become immortal, you reach the
point where your memory remains intact from then
on. In other words, you’re conscious from then on,
with no unconsciousness coming in. It means you
stay in the body as long as you want to, and when you

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness O I 43

want to leave it, you leave. To have to stay in a single body forever would
be a jail or a trap, because it means you couldn’t leave. There might be a
reason for leaving that body, and you will eventually find that you want to
go beyond wherever you are. This is the definition of eternal life: Simply
put, you have continuous, unbroken memory.

Back now to what happened after Akhenaten was dethroned. In order
to let things get back to the old ways, which they wanted to do, the country
went into a transitional state. The people who became king and queen di-
rectly after him are almost comical — they let Ay and Tiya take over the
country. We have a long time lag here, then they became king and queen.
It’s written right in the records. They took over for around thirty years, and
then they gave it to Seti I, who became the first king of the Nineteenth Dy-
nasty. He immediately changed everything back to the old way, erased ev-
erything and called Akhenaten the same name they called jesus — “the
criminal.” He called him the worst king who ever lived because of his
teaching that there was only one God.

What Really Happened to Akhenaten?

Most of Egypt hated Akhenaten, except for a small group. The priest-
hood hated him most of all because Egyptian religious beliefs were centered
on the priests. They controlled the people, their way of life and the econ-
omy. They became rich and were more powerful than anybody else. Then
Akhenaten came along and said, “You don’t need priests; God is within
you. There is only one God, and you can access God from within your own
self.” The priests reacted to protect themselves and their vested interests.
Also, Egypt had the most powerful military in the world, and when
Akhenaten became pharaoh, they were chomping at the bit, ready to go out
and take over the world. Akhenaten said no. He was a complete pacifist
and said, “Come back onto our soil. Do not attack anyone unless you’re at-
tacked.” He made the military come back and sit by idly, and they didn’t
like that.

So he had not only the priesthood, but the military against him. On top
of that, the people themselves were into their little religions, and they loved
worshiping their little gods. This wouldn’t ultimately do them any good — it
wouldn’t get them where they needed to go according to the DNA plan of
the universe — which was back home to God, to the one God — but never-
theless they were really into what they were doing.

When the people were forcefully told that they could no longer do cer-
tain religious acts, this caused great animosity toward Akhenaten. It would
be like our president saying, “Okay, there are no more religions in the
United States; there’s just the president’s religion.” And if the president
brought all the military back onto American soil with an isolationist point
of view, he wouldn’t be very popular. Neither was Akhenaten. But he
knew that he had to do it no matter what, even if it meant his own death.
He had to do it to correct the pathway that our collective DNA had en-
coded into the Reality. In addition, he needed to put into the akashic re-

cords the memory of the sacred purpose that Christ consciousness held.

So what happened then? According to the accepted history, the priest-
hood and the military got together and gave Akhenaten a poison that killed
him. According to Thoth, that is not exactly what happened, because they
couldn’t kill him. He could drink the poison, but it wouldn’t hurt him. They
did something much more exotic. Thoth says that the priesthood hired
three black Nubian sorcerers, who made a concoction similar to what is
used in Haiti today to make someone look dead. It was given to Akhenaten
at a public meeting called by the priesthood and the military. After
Akhenaten drank the liquid, all life signs appeared to stop. As soon as the
royal doctor pronounced him dead, they rushed him off to a special room
where they had a sarcophagus waiting. They placed him in the sarcopha-
gus, put on the lid with a magical seal and buried it in a hidden place.
Thoth said that Akhenaten had to wait inside the sarcophagus for almost
2000 years before a piece of the seal broke away and the magic was broken.
He then returned to the Halls of Amenti. This was not a problem for
Akhenaten. Thoth said that to an immortal being like Akhenaten, it was
more like a nap. My question is, did he really allow this to happen to him?

Akhenaten’s Mystery School

What’s important here is one fact: Akhenaten developed a mystery
school. The school was called the Egyptian Mystery School of Akhenaten,
the Law of One. As it turned out, he had only 17'/2 years to produce results.
He brought students from the Left Eye of Horus (the feminine side) Mys-
tery School, which I’ll talk about later — graduates who were at least 45
years old — into the Right Eye of Horus Mystery School. This right-eye in-
formation had never been taught before in Egypt. He taught them for
twelve years, after which he had only five and a half years to see if he could
get them to live immortality. And he did it! He got about 300 people into
immortality. I believe they were all, or almost all, women.

Someone once asked, “Why didn’t Akhenaten work with the popula-
tion in a different way so as to not get himself into such a dangerous situa-
tion?” But can you think of a way to change a whole population in such a
short time without causing strife? Could you do that in the United States
right now — in one year bring all religions into one? I don’t think there is a
way except to just do it, even if it means getting “killed.” Besides, the only
thing he really needed to do was simply live his life. It would get into the
akashic records and be a memory that we all have in our DNA. One day
alone would get it encoded, then afterward they could do whatever they
wanted with him. He wasn’t really concerned about it. He knew that the
country, the society and the customs would all go back to the old way. But
he did have these 300 immortal people who would go on beyond him and
Egypt.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness Q 145

The Essene Brotherhood and Jesus, Mary and Joseph

After Akhenaten was gone, the 300 immortal Egyptians joined the Tat
Brotherhood and waited from roughly 1350 B.C. to about 500 B.C. — about
850 years or so. Then they migrated to a place called Masada, Israel, and
formed the Essene Brotherhood. Even today Masada is known as a capital
of the Essene Brotherhood. These 300 people became the inner circle, and
mostly ordinary people formed an outer circle, which became very large.

Mary, the mother of Jesus, was one of the members of the inner circle of
the Essene Brotherhood. She was immortal even before Jesus became im-
mortal. Joseph came from the outer circle. This is according to Thoth; it’s
not written in the records. It was part of the Egyptian plan that the next
step would be to bring in someone who would demonstrate exactly how to
become immortal when starting as an ordinary human, put the experience
into the akashic records and make it real. Somebody had to do it. Accord-
ing to Thoth, Mary and Joseph came together and mated interdimen-
sionally (which we’ll talk about later) to create the body for Jesus, which
would allow his consciousness to come in from a very, very high level.
When Jesus first came in, he began life on Earth as human as any of us. He
was totally human. And through his own work he transformed himself to
the immortal state through resurrection, not through ascension, and put
into the akashic records the process of exactly how to do it. This is accord-
ing to Thoth, and it was planned a long, long time before it ever took place.

The Two Mystery Schools and the 48 Chromosomal Images

We re now changing direction again and beginning a new system of
knowledge that will continue for a while until you see this symbol again a
long way down the line. This was the symbol for the Egyptian Mystery
School of Akhenaten, the Law of One [Fig. 5-24]. It’s the Right Eye of
Horus. The right eye is controlled by the left brain; it’s male knowledge.
Although the right eye “sees” directly to the right brain, this is not what the
Egyptians were communicating. It is not the “seeing” but rather the inter-
rupting of the “seeing” information that was important here. It is the left
brain that makes this interruption of what is seen; it controls the right side
of the body, and vice versa. In the same manner, the Left Eye of Horus,
controlled by the right brain, is female knowledge, which was taught in the
twelve primary Egyptian temples along the Nile. The thirteenth temple
was the Great Pyramid itself. It took twelve years of initiation, spending a
year, one cycle, in each of these temples learning all the feminine compo-
nents of consciousness.

But the male component, the Right Eye of Horus, was taught only once,
and it was not written down anywhere. It was purely an oral tradition,
though its primary components are etched on a single wall under the Great
Pyramid that leads into the Hall of Records. As you go down that hall, you
get almost to the bottom, and just before it makes a 90-degree turn, high up
on the wall you see an image about four feet in diameter, which is the

Flower of Life. Beside it you would see 47 other images, one after another,
which are the images of the chromosomes of Christ consciousness, the level
of consciousness we’re moving into now. After these two volumes are pub-
lished, we may publish a book of these images.

These images will be given throughout this book, mixed up and in
slightly different form. This is what the Great Pyramid is all about. Its pri-
mary purpose, beyond anything else, is to take someone from our level of
consciousness into the next level. There are lots of other reasons why it’s in
existence, but ascension and resurrection are the absolute purpose.

Genesis, the Creation Story

Egyptian and Christian Versions

We’re going to begin with a realization that the Christian and the Egyp-
tian understandings of Reality are almost identical. The Christian under-
standing is derived from the Egyptian. Here are the first three sentences of
the Christian Bible: “In the beginning God created the heaven and the
earth. And the earth was without form and void, and darkness was upon
the face of the deep, and the spirit of God moved upon the face of the wa-
ters. And God said, ‘Let there be light,’ and there was light.”

To begin with, this statement that the Earth was without form until it
came out of the Void, out of nothing, is exactly what the Egyptians be-
lieved. It’s also what many other religions believe. Both Egyptian and
Christian religions believe that all that’s needed to start the process of cre-
ation is nothing and spirit, and when those two concepts are brought to-
gether, then all things can be created. They believe that creation begins by
the movement of spirit. In the second sentence it says, “The earth was with-
out form and void” and that the spirit of God moved upon the face of the
waters. Then in the very next sentence, God says, “Let there be light.” The
movement happened first, then the light happened immediately after.

According to the Egyptian belief, one tiny detail was left out of the cur-
rent Christian Bibles. It isn’t necessarily wrong in the older Bibles, though.
There are 900 versions of the Bible in the world, and in many of the older
ones the first sentence says, “In the beginning there were six.” It starts out
in other ways too; it’s been changed many times over the years.

The ancient Egyptians would say that the way our modern Bibles begin
creation is impossible, especially if you think about it from a physics point of
view. Imagine a dark, infinite space that goes on forever and ever in all di-
rections. There’s nothing in it — just infinite space with nothing in it.
Imagine yourself — not your body, but your consciousness — being in the
middle of that. You’re just floating there with nothing. You can’t really fall,
because where would you fall to? You wouldn’t know if you’re falling down
or going up or off to the side; in fact, there’s no way to experience any mo-
tion at all.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness 147

Fig. 5-25. Spirit of God in the Great
Void.

From a purely physics or mathematical point of view, motion itself, or
kinetic energy, is absolutely impossible in a void. You can’t even rotate, be-
cause motion cannot become real until there’s at least one other object in
the space around you. There has to be something to move relative to. If you
don’t have something relative to move to, how would you know you’re
moving? I mean, if you went up thirty feet, how would you know that?
There’s no change. With no change, there’s no movement. So the ancient
Egyptians would say that before God “moved upon the face of the waters,”
He/She had to first create something to move relative to.

How God and the Mystery Schools Did It

Now, think of yourself standing in a dark room, near the door to a sec-
ond room. You are ready to go into the second room, which is very, very
dark. You can barely see the door leading into it. You go into the second
room, close the door behind you, and it’s pitch black.

When you’re faced with that situation, you have the ability to project a
sensing beam from your third-eye area, and you can also sense from your
hands. (You can actually sense from any chakra, but people usually do it
from their third eye or their hands.) You can project a beam of conscious-
ness into that dark room for a certain distance. It might go only an inch, or
maybe you can feel outward a foot or two, and you just know that nothing
(or something) is in that space. Your consciousness goes out this distance
and then it stops. Your knowingness quits, and you don’t know what’s be-
yond that. You probably all know what I’m talking about, though a lot of us
have allowed that sense to retreat because we rely on our eyes so much.

But some people, especially the ancient Egyptians, were really good at
this. They could go into a dark room and feel all around and know if any-
thing was there even though they couldn’t see a thing with their eyes.
There are blind people who can also demonstrate this ability.

We actually have six of these sensing rays — not just one, but six. They
all come from the center of our heads, the pineal gland. One ray comes out
the front of our head at the third eye and another goes out the back; one
goes out of the left and another out of the right side of our brain; and an-
other goes straight up through the crown chakra and the sixth straight
down through our neck — the six directions. These are the same directions
of the x-y-z axes of geometry. The Egyptians believed that this innate as-
pect of consciousness is what allows creation to begin. They believed that if
we didn’t have this ability, creation would never have happened.

In order to understand this process of creation on the deepest level,
Egyptian students were told to imagine and enact the process we are about
to go through. The following description is how they explained and prac-
ticed it in their mystery schools. The way they learned isn’t the only way it
could have been done, but this is how they were trained.

The dark background in this picture represents the Great Void, and the
little eye represents the spirit of God [Fig. 5-25] . So here’s the spirit of God

148 $ the Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

existing in the Void, out in nothing. Imagine that you’re that little spirit in
the middle of the Void. (When you’re in the Great Void, by the way, you
will realize that you and God are one, that there is no difference at all.) Af-
ter hanging out in the Void for a long time, you probably would get bored or
curious or lonely, and you would want to try something new, to have some
new adventure in your life.

First Create a Space

So spirit, the single Eye, shoots a beam of consciousness out into the
Void. It shoots this beam first to the front, then to the back, then to the
left, then the right, then straight up and straight down [Fig. 5-26] . Realize
that whatever distance you project out front, you project the same distance
out back, also to the left, the right and up and down. The consciousness
beam projects the same distance in all six directions for any one individual.
Even though each one of us is different in how far we can project this beam
(one of us might project an inch, another two feet and another fifty feet),
there is equality in all six directions. So spirit projects those beams outward
in those six directions, defining space: north, south, east, west, up and
down.

This might be why the American Indians and native people all around
the world find the six directions so important. Have you ever noticed this
in their ceremonies, how important it is that they define the directions/ It’s
also important in the Kabala, in some of the meditations they do.

Next, Enclose the Space

In the mystery schools, after they’ve projected these six beams in the six
directions, the next thing they do is connect the ends of these projections.
This forms a diamond, or square, around them [Fig. 5-27]. Of course,
when it's at the angle shown in this diagram, it looks like a rectangle, but
you can see that it would actually be a square. So they make a little square
around their point of consciousness. Then from the square they send a
beam up to the top, forming a pyramid around the base of the square
[Fig. 5-28],

After they create the pyramid on top, they then send a beam down to
the bottom point, forming a pyramid below [Fig. 5-29]. If you look at this

in actual 3D space, the two
back-to-back pyramids form an octa-
hedron. Here’s another rendition of
the octahedron [Fig. 5-30].

Remember that this is just spirit.
You don’t have a body in the Great
Void; you’re just spirit. So you’re in the
Great Void, and you’ve created this
field around you. Now, once you’ve
defined the space by mapping out the
Fig. 5-30. Octahedron around spirit. octahedron with two back-to-back

Fig. 5-26. Spirit projecting conscious-
ness into the six directions.

Fig. 5-27. Spirit in its first created dia-
mond.

Fig. 5-28. Projecting a pyramid above.

Fig. 5-29. Projecting a pyramid below.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness O I 49

Fig. 5-31. Spirit in the middle of its
first creation.

150 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

pyramids, you have an object. Kinetic energy or movement is now possible;
something is now possible that was not possible before. Spirit can move
outside the shape and move around it. It can go in any direction for miles
and miles, then come back and have a center place for everything. The
other thing spirit can do is remain stationary in the middle of the shape, let-
ting the shape move instead. The shape can rotate or wobble or move in all
possible ways. So relative movements are now possible.

Then Spin the Shape to Create a Sphere

The octahedron the students created this way had three axes — front to
back, left to right, and up and down. They were told to spin the shape
around one of the axes — it didn’t matter which, and it didn’t matter which
direction. They would spin it one way or the other, then they would spin
the shape once around another axis, and once around the third axis. With
just one spin around each of the three axes, they traced the parameters of a
perfect sphere. Before the students were allowed to move their own point
of consciousness, they were taught to spin this octahedral form and create a
sphere around themselves.

It has been agreed upon by everyone involved in sacred geometry that I
know of, that a straight line is male and any curved line is female. Thus one
of the most male forms is a square or a cube, and one of the most female
forms is a circle or a sphere. Since the octahedron that spirit projected is
made up of only straight lines, it’s a male shape; and since the sphere is
made of only curved lines, it’s a female shape. What the Egyptians did was
to create a male form and then convert it to a female form. They went from
maleness to femaleness.

This same story is related through the Bible where Adam was created
first, and then from Adam, or out of Adam’s rib, was created the female. Of
course, the image of spirit inside the sphere is also the image of the school.

Sacred geometry started when spirit made its first projection into the
Void and created the first octahedron around itself. The Void is infi-
nite — nothing in it — and these forms being created are also nothing.
They’re just imaginary lines created out of consciousness. This gives you an
indication of what Reality is — nothing. The Hindus call Reality maya ,
which means illusion.

Spirit can sit in the middle of its first creation for a long time
[Fig. 5-31], but eventually it’ll make a decision to do something. To
re-create this process, mystery school students were given instructions to
reenact the same motions that spirit took. Two simple instructions are all
that’s required to create and complete everything in the entire universe.

The First Motion in Genesis

Remember that spirit is now sitting in a sphere. The instructions are to
move to that which is newly created, then project another sphere exactly like
the first. That does something very special and unique. This is an absolutely

foolproof system for creating Reality. You cannot make a mistake no mat-
ter what you do. All you do is move to what is newly created and project
another sphere the same size as the first one. In this system, since nothing
exists except this bubble in the Void, and the inside of the bubble is the
same as the outside, the only thing that’s new or different is the membrane
itself, the surface of the sphere.

So consciousness decides to go to the surface. It makes no difference
where it goes on the surface; it can go anywhere. It doesn’t make any differ-
ence how it gets there either, whether it goes in a straight line or curves or
spirals out or explores every speck of space in between. It can be really cre-
ative; it doesn’t make any difference. But somehow or another it will end
up somewhere on the surface of the sphere.

For purposes of this example we’ll say spirit went up to the top (just to be
symmetrical and easier to deal with). Anyway, spirit, this little single eye,
lands on the surface [Fig. 5-32]. It has just made the first motion in Gene-
sis: “And the spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters.” And the
very next thing was: “God said, ‘Let there be light,’ and there was light.”

At this point spirit knows how to do only one thing — actually, it knows

how to do two things, but the end result is one. It knows (1) how to project
, , , , , . i i i > Fig. 5-32. Spirit s first motion,

the little octahedron and create a sphere and (Z) how to move to what s

newly created. That’s it, a very simple Reality. So once it arrives on the

surface, it makes another octahedron, spins it through the three axes and

forms another sphere identical in size to the first one. It’s identical in size

because its ability to project into the Void is the same. Nothing has

changed in that respect. So it creates a second sphere exactly the same size

as the first.

The Vesica Piscis, through Which Light Is Created

When it does that, it has done something that, in terms of sacred geom-
etry, is very special. It has formed a vesica piscis at the intersection of the
two spheres [Fig. 5-33]. Have you ever seen two soap bubbles together?
When two soap bubbles intersect, a line or a circle goes around their link-
age. If you were looking at the two bubbles from the side, the newly formed
section would look like a line, but if you were looking down at the two bub-
bles from the top, you would see the
newly created form’s circumference
inside the larger spheres.

The vesica piscis circumference
is symmetrical to, and smaller than,
the circumference of the larger
spheres. In other words, it would
appear from the side like a straight
line [Fig. 5-34, center], and from
the top like a circle [right]. Even
though the vesica piscis is usually
two-dimensional like a coin, its

Fig. 5-34. First
motion/day. The
first two spheres
of creation (left) ;
section view
(center); and
plan or overhead
view (right).

Fig. 5-33. First motion/day; the first
two spheres of creation make a vesica
piscis.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness 0 151

Fig. 5-35 . A 3D vesica piscis, a
three-dimensional solid shape taken out
from the two spheres that made it.

Fig. 5-36. Third sphere, second mo-
tion/day of Genesis. When sitting in
the center of the uppermost cir-
cle/sphere and looking down, the hori-
zontal line is seen as a circle.

Fig. 5-37. Small and large tetrahe-
drons in three spheres.

three-dimensional aspect is just as valid. If you were to take it out of the
middle of the two spheres, it would look similar to a football, like Figure
5-35.

I cannot prove this to you now, but later in this book I’ll he able to prove
that this image is light. It’s the geometric image through which light was
created. It’s also the geometric image through which your eyes were cre-
ated, which receive light. Besides light, it’s also the image of the patterns
that are connected to your emotions and many, many other aspects of life.
This is the basic geometry of the electromagnetic field. It’s too simple to
understand here. I have to wait until things get more complex; then I can
explain it. I’ll show you that the first motion of Genesis creates the pattern
that is life. That’s the reason why God said, “Let there be light.” He
couldn’t say that until He had projected the second sphere and made the
vesica piscis.

The Second Motion Creates the Star Tetrahedron

When spirit is in the center of its second sphere and looking down at the
vesica piscis, it’s looking upon a newly formed circle, the circle of the vesica
piscis. This circle is the only thing that’s new, and spirit’s instructions are to
go to what’s newly created. It doesn’t make any difference where it goes on
the new circle. It cannot make a mistake; it just moves to somewhere on
that circle and projects a new sphere as in Figure 5-36.

No matter where spirit lands, we can rotate the spheres to look like this
drawing. So I’m going to say that it moved on the circle to point A, on the
left. At that moment a huge amount of information was created (in every
motion of Genesis, vast amounts of knowledge come out) . The first creation
produced the sphere. The first motion/day produced the vesica piscis, which
is the basis of light. The second motion/day produced, in the interpenetrat-
ing relationship between the three spheres, the basic geometries of the star
tetrahedron [Fig. 5-37], which you will soon see is one of the most impor-
tant shapes for life.

We’re not going to get into all the information that was formed at this
time, but each time a new sphere is formed, more and more information un-
folds and more and more creative patterns become visible. After the first
and second motions have taken place — from anywhere on the sphere to
anywhere on the circle (no matter how spirit moved, no matter where it
went on the circle/sphere, it will always be perfect) — it will begin to move
exactly on the equator of the original sphere. There are an infinite number
of equators on that sphere, but it will choose a perfect one.

“Move to That Which is Newly Created” until Completion

After that pattern is created, there’s only one instruction left to fol-
low-forever. The only other action to be taken until the end of time is al-
ways to move to the innermost circle point(s) and project another sphere.

For the sake of clarity, let’s define what we mean by “innermost circle

152 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

point.” Look at Figure 5-36. In this case there are three innermost circle
points. If your eye were to trace the outside perimeter of this pattern, it
would come to three places that are the closest places to center. It is these
“closest places to center” that we are calling the innermost circle points. In
the case of the Genesis pattern that this movement of spirit is creating,
there are six innermost circle points.

So with this in mind, spirit starts moving exactly around the equator of
the original or central sphere. When it has traversed the full 360 degrees
and reaches the point at which it started (which will be six points or move-
ments) , it begins to follow its second impulse (or instruction, for the mys-
tery school students): Move to the innermost circle points, which are now lo-
cated on the circumference of the original sphere where two vesica pisces
intersect. Simply put, they are the points as close as possible to the outside
of the pattern. That continual movement begins to form a vortex. This
vortex motion creates different types of three-dimensional forms, one after
another, which are the building blocks or blueprints of the entire Reality.

Once spirit has created the third sphere, it now moves to the innermost
circle point and projects another sphere [Fig. 5-38]. There is information
here, but it is too complex to discuss at this time.

This is very interesting; it is the fourth motion/day [Fig. 5-39] . It says in
many Bibles in the world that on the fourth day of Genesis exactly one half
of creation was completed. Starting from the first motion, exactly one half
of the circle was formed [Fig. 5 -39a]. We have moved exactly 180 degrees
from the point of the first motion.

Figure 5-40 is the fifth day of Genesis — more information.

And then on the sixth day [Fig. 5-41] a geometric miracle takes place:
the last circle forms a complete six-petaled flower. This is what many of the
earlier Bibles meant when they said, “In the beginning there were six.” Our
Bible now says that creation was formed in six days, and this fits exactly.
This is the pattern of Genesis, so we refer to it as the Genesis pattern. It’s
the beginning of the creation of this universe we live in.

Fig. 5-41a. Showing a 3D
view of this.

Fig. 5-41. Sixth sphere, fifth day
of Genesis.

Fig. 5-38. Fourth sphere, third day of
Genesis.

Fig. 5-39. Fifth sphere, fourth day of
Genesis.

Fig. 5-40. Sixth sphere, fifth day of
Genesis.

FIVE — Egypt's Role in the Evolution of Consciousness 0 1 53

These original movements of spirit are really important. This is why I
spend so much time going through this near the beginning of this course.
Later on we’ll get more complex, but for now this is just the beginning of
how the manifestation of Reality is created.

We’ll pull these 3D shapes off the page in a minute, one by one. If they
could be made solid, you could look at them and hold them in your hands.
We will begin to ground this abstract information into Reality for you.
Then we’re going to take them further to show you how they actually create
the Reality we live in. If you study this on your own, you’ll be seeing some
extremely elaborate aspects of creation come from this explanation of the
Reality. If you were constructing these geometries yourself, you would draw
a line somewhere in the sacred geometry that spirit makes as it moves
through the Void, and it’ll mean something amazing; then another line will
mean something else even more amazing. Life began simply, then created
the complex world we live in.

This is not just mathematics, and it’s not just circles or geometries. This
is the living map of the creation of all Reality. You must understand this or
you’ll get lost and won’t understand what this book is leading to. The rea-
son we’re doing all this is so that your left brain can understand the unity of
all creation so that polarity consciousness can be transcended.

54 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

S I X

The Significance of Shape and
Structure

Developing the Genesis Pattern

The Torus, the First Shape

L et’s look at the first object that comes off the page — the Genesis pat-
tern itself (see Fig. 5-41). If you look at a math book, this Genesis
pattern has the minimal amount of lines that can be drawn on a flat
surface to delineate the three-dimensional form called a torus. A torus is
formed when you rotate the Genesis pattern around its central axis, creat-
ing a shape that looks like a doughnut, but the hole in the middle is infi-
nitely small.

A torus, here called a tube torus because this particular one is shaped like
an inner tube [Fig. 6-1], is unique in that it’s able to fold in on itself, turning
either inward or outward. No other shape in existence can do this or any-
thing similar. A torus is the first shape that comes out of the completed
Genesis pattern and is absolutely unique among all forms in existence.

It was Arthur Young who discovered that there are seven regions on this
shape, which are collectively called the seven-color map. You can pick up al-
most any mathematics book, and if you go to the torus, it’ll talk about the
seven-color map. There are seven regions, all the same size, that will ex-
actly fit in the tube torus with nothing left over. Just like on the Genesis

pattern, six circles going around the sev-
enth, central one take up the entire
surface. It’s perfect, flawless.

In sacred geometry there’s
something called ratcheting.
You take a circle or a line and
ratchet it, like when you take
a ratchet tool in car mechan-
ics and use it to rotate
something a certain dis-
tance. For instance, imagine
two Genesis patterns super-
imposed on each other. One
pattern is fixed; if you rotate
Fig. 6-1. The colorful tube torus. the other pattern 30 degrees,

umi

telsi

SIX— & 155

you would have twelve spheres around the central one. It
would look like this [Fig. 6-2] in two dimensions. In
three dimensions it would look like a tube torus.
Then if you connect all possible lines in the
middle, you get this pattern [Fig. 6-3].

Ratcheting the twelve spheres once
more, this time 15 degrees, so that there are
24 spheres, you would get this pattern
[Fig. 6-4]. This pattern has what is
called a transcendental pattern associ-
ated with it. What is a transcendental
pattern/ A transcendental number in
mathematics, from my way of looking at
it, is a number that comes from another
dimension. In that dimension it is proba-
bly whole, but when it gets here it does not
completely translate into this world. We
have a lot of those. One of them, for example,
is the phi ratio, which I’m going to talk about later.
It’s a mathematical proportion that starts out with
1.6180339 and continues forever, meaning you never
know what the next digit is going to be, and it never ends:
people have let computers run for months without coming to an end.
As a simple explanation, that’s what a transcendental number is.

The shape of the torus is what governs many aspects of our lives. For ex-
ample, the human heart has seven muscles that form a torus, and it pumps
in the seven regions shown in the map of the torus. We have embodied all
knowledge. The torus is literally around all life forms, all atoms, and all cos-
mic bodies such as planets, stars,
galaxies and so on. It is the pri-
mary shape in existence.

“In the beginning was the
Word.” I believe that time will re-
veal that language/conscious
sound/the word will all be re-
vealed in the torus. There are
those who believe this to be true
now, but only time will tell.

Fig. 6-2. Genesis pattern ratcheted
once.

Fig. 6-3. Ratcheted Genesis pattern
with all possible connected lines.

The Labyrinth As a Movement
of Life-Force Energy

Figure 6-5 is a sevenfold laby-
rinth. This is found all over the
world — everywhere from China
to Tibet to England to Ireland to
Peru to the American Indians.

156 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

One was just found in Egypt. You’ll find this
labyrinth on the floors of many of the churches
in Europe. The same form is on stone walls ev-
erywhere. It must have been of great impor-
tance to ancient mankind. There are seven re-
gions in it, which relates to the torus and to the
beating of the human heart. Later on I’ll be
talking about the ancient Druid mystery
school on the Island of Avalon in England. To
get to the top of the hill there, you have to walk
through this same labyrinth, going back and
forth through this motion.

While I was in England, I spoke to Richard
Feather Anderson, who is an author and an ex-
pert on labyrinths, and I learned something.

As part of his research, he has people walk

through the labyrinth. He’s discovered that when you walk through it, you
are forced to move through different states of consciousness, giving you a
very specific experience. It causes the life-force energy to move through
the chakras in the following pattern: three, two, one, four, seven, six, five.
The energy starts in the third chakra, then goes to the second, then to the
first; then it jumps up to the heart (fourth), then into the center of the head
to the pineal gland (seventh) , then to the front of the head to the pituitary
gland (sixth) , and then down into the throat (fifth) .

When you walk this labyrinth, unless you block the experience, you will
automatically move through these changes. Even if you don’t know about
these things, you will go through the experiences anyway. People all over
the world have found this to be true. Mr. Anderson believes that if you
draw lines (the number of lines indicating which of the seven paths it is) in
the order you walk the path — three, two, one, four, seven, six, five — it
forms what looks like a cup [Fig. 6-6]. He feels that this particular laby-
rinth is related to the shape of the Holy Grail and to its secret knowledge.
From my experience, this feels right, but I am keeping an open mind. I
don’t know about this yet; it may be true.

I experimented with this labyrinth on myself, and it is true that those
changes did happen for me. However, I was also able to experience these
same changes in a different way. I was

able to walk a straight line toward the , . 5

center of the labyrinth and simply / \ <5

make the changes within myself as I { ; 7

reached each place where the turn ______ 4

would be in the labyrinth. I was able (' ]

to reach the same state without walk- / __ \ 2

ing through the whole pattern. Re- '> 3

member the labyrinth; I’ll come back

rig. 6-6. I he labyrinth sequence
to it after a while. creates a cup.

Fig. 6-4. Twice-ratcheted Genesis pat-
tern with all possible connected lines.

Update: I have just seen a pic-
ture from Europe [1998, see
below] of the biblical
Melchizedek, in which he is
holding the key to the laby-
rinth inside a bowl.

PATRl

ARCH

MELCH!

SEWX

Fig. 6-5. A sevenfold labyrinth.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure 0 157

Fig. 6-8. 3D spheres/balls.

Fig. 6-8a. Connecting centers to form
a cube.

Fig. 6-8b. A different view.

Fig. 6-7. Vortex beyond the Genesis pattern.

The Egg of Life, the Second Shape beyond Genesis

The dark innermost circles show the six days of Genesis [Fig. 6-1 } . Once
the consciousness projects the first seven spheres and completes this Genesis
pattern, it then continues moving in a rotational pattern from each consecu-
tive innermost place until it completes its second vortex motion as seen by
the light outermost circles. That motion in turn completes a three-dimen-
sional shape you can hold in your hand, which looks like Figure 6-8. If you
were to take Figure 6-1 and erase all the lines in the middle and certain other
lines, you would see this pattern. The pattern of spheres is like what spirit
would have seen had it moved outside its creation and said, “Aha, I see this
thing! It looks like that” [Fig. 6-8].

The eighth sphere is actually behind these visible spheres. If you were to
connect their centers, you would see a cube [Figs. 6-8a and 6-8b],

So what? Who cares? Well, the ancients did, because they were con-
cerned with creation, life and death. They called this cluster of spheres the
Egg of Life. I’ll soon show you how the Egg of Life is the morphogenetic
structure that created your body. Your entire physical existence is depend-
ent on the Egg of Life structure. Everything about you was created through
the Egg of Life form, right down to the color of your eyes, the shape of your
nose, how long your fingers are and everything else. It’s all based on this one
form.

I 58 $ the Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

The Third Rotation/Shape: The Fruit of Life

The next vortex is the third rotation [Fig. 6-9] . The spheres
in this vortex are centered at the innermost places in the perime-
ter of the previous round, as shown by the six arrows here. So
when spirit rotates in this third vortex, you get the gray rings
shown here. Then you notice a new relationship where the six cir-
cles touch the center one and each other. If you took seven pen-
nies and pushed them together on a table, they would look like
that. This third rotation is an extremely important relationship in
the creation of our Reality. When you look carefully at the Flower
of Life, you see these seven circles that touch each other.

There are nineteen circles in the Flower of Life [Fig. 6-10],
and they’re surrounded by two concentric circles. For some rea-
son, that image is found all over the world. The question is, why
did they do that all over the world and stop at nineteen circles?

It’s an infinite grid and could have been stopped anywhere. The
only place on the whole planet where I’ve seen them go out be-
yond those nineteen circles was in China, where they made room-divider
screens [Fig. 6-11]. One of the most famous patterns they used on those
screens was the Flower of Life. They made it in a rectangular shape, carry-
ing it all the way out to the edge.

But in all others that were found, you would usually see just the Flower
of Life pattern. This is because when the ancient beings realized what the
other component was and how important it was, they decided to make it se-
cret. They didn’t want people to see this relationship I’m about to show
you. It was so sacred and important that they just could not allow it to be-
come common knowledge. It was appropriate at that time; however, now
we either use the information or fall further into the darkness.

Notice that in the Flower of Life pattern you see many incomplete circles,
which, of course, can also be spheres. Look all around the outer edge of Fig-
ure 6-10. If all you did was complete all of these circles, then the secret would
unfold. This was the ancient’s way of coding the information.

illii

Fig. 6-11. Chinese
screen, stylized
Flower of Life.

Fig. 6-9. The third rotation.

Fig. 6-10. Flower of Life.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure 0 159

Fig. 6-12. Completing the incomplete
circles.

The additional circles/spheres that extend beyond the original Flower of
Life pattern inside the large gray ring in Figure 6-12 complete all the incom-
plete circles at the edge of that pattern.

As soon as you complete these spheres, with one more step you’ll have the
secret: Go to the innermost places of the perimeter, shown by the arrows,
and rotate the next vortex. When you do, you get the pattern of thirteen cir-
cles, shown here by the smaller gray circles, including the center. When it’s
extracted from the rest of the pattern, it looks like Figure 6-13.

This pattern of thirteen circles is one of the holiest, most sacred forms in
existence. On Earth it’s called the Fruit of Life. It is called the fruit because
it is the result, the fruit, from which the fabric of the details of the Reality
were created.

Combining Male and Female to Create Metatron’s Cube,
the First Informational System

Now, all the circles in this pattern are female. And there are thirteen
ways, with these thirteen circles, that you can superimpose male energy — in
other words, straight lines. If you superimpose straight lines over this in all
thirteen ways, you’ll come up with thirteen patterns that, along with the Egg
of Life and the torus, create everything in existence. The Egg of Life, the tor-
us, and this Fruit of Life, a total of three patterns, create everything in exis-
tence without exception — at least I have not been able to find an exception.
I’ll give you what I’ve learned; obviously I cannot show you everything, but
I’ll show you enough to convince you this is true. I’m going to call these infor-
mational systems. There are thirteen informational systems associated with
the Fruit of Life pattern. Each system produces a vast and diversified amount
of knowledge. I’m going to show you only four of those. I think that’s
enough.

The simplest system comes forth by simply connecting all the centers of
the circles with straight lines. If you decided to put straight lines on this
pattern, probably about 90 percent of you
would think first of connecting all the cen
ters. If you do that, you end up with
this pattern [Fig. 6-14],
which is known throughout
the universe — everywhere
— as Metatron’s Cube. It
is one of the most impor-
tant informational sys-
tems in the universe, one
of the basic creation pat-
terns of existence.

Fig. 6-14- Metatron’s Cube.

160 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

The Platonic Solids

Anyone who has studied sacred geometry or even regular geometry
knows that there are five unique shapes, and they are crucial to under-
standing both sacred and regular geometry. They’re called the Platonic sol -
ids [Fig. 6-15].

A Platonic solid has certain characteristics by definition. First of all, its
faces are all the same size. For instance, a cube, the most well-known of the
Platonic solids, has a square on every face, so all its faces are the same size.
Second, the edges of a Platonic solid are all the same length; all edges of a
cube are the same length. Third, it has only one size of interior angles be-
tween faces. In the case of a cube, this angle is 90 degrees. And fourth, if a
Platonic solid is put inside a sphere (of the right size), all the points will
touch the surface of the sphere. With that definition, there are only four
shapes besides the cube (A) that have all of those characteristics. Second
(B) is the tetrahedron (tetra means four) , a polyhedron that has four faces,
all equilateral triangles, one edge length and one angle, and all points touch
the surface of a sphere. The other simple one is (C) an octahedron (octa
means eight), whose eight faces are equilateral triangles of the same size,
edge length and angle, and all points touch the surface of a sphere.

The other two Platonic solids are a little more complicated. One (D) is
called an icosahedron, which means it has 20 faces, made of equilateral tri-
angles with the same edge length and angle, and all points touch the surface
of a sphere. The last one (E) is called a pentagonal dodecahedron (dodeca is
1 2) , whose faces are 1 2 pentagons (five sides) , with the same edge length
and angle, and whose points all touch the surface of a sphere.

If you’re an engineer or an architect, you have studied these five shapes
in college, at least cursorily, because they’re the basis of structures.

Fig. 6-15. The five Platonic solids.

Their Source: Metatron’s Cube

If you study sacred geometry, no matter what book you pick up, it shows
the five Platonic solids, because they are the ABCs of sacred geometry. But
when you read all these books — and I’ve read almost all of them — and ask
the experts, “Where do the Platonic solids come from? What is their
source?” almost everyone says they don’t know. Well, the five Platonic solids
come from the first informational system of the Fruit of Life. Flidden within
the lines of Metatron’s Cube [see Fig. 6-14] are all five of these shapes.
When you look at Metatron’s Cube, you’re looking at all five Platonic solids
at once. In order to see each one better, you have to do that trick again
where you erase some of the lines. If you erase all the lines except certain
ones, you get this cube [Fig. 6-16].

Can you see the cube? It’s actually a cube within a cube. Some of the
lines are dotted because they would be behind the front faces. They are in-
visible when the cube becomes solid. Flere's the solid form of the larger
cube [Fig. 6- 16a] . (Make sure you see this one, because they get harder
and harder to see as we go.)

Fig. 6-16. Here are the two cubes ex
tracted from Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 6- 16a. Solid larger cube from previ-
ous figure.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure O 161

Fig. 6-17. The star tetrahedrons ex-
tracted from Metatron's Cube.

Fig. 6-18. Two octahedrons extracted
from Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 6-19. Two icosahedrons extracted
from Metatron’s Cube.

By erasing certain lines and connecting other centers [Fig. 6-17], you get
two superimposed tetrahedrons, which form a star tetrahedron. Like the
cube, you actually get two star tetrahedrons, one inside the other. Here’s the
solid form of the larger star tetrahedron [Fig. 6- 1 7a] .

Figure 6-18 is an octahedron inside another octahedron, though you’re
looking at them from a special angle. Figure 6- 18a is the solid version of the
larger octahedron.

Figure 6-19 is one icosahedron inside another, and Figure 6-19a is the
solid version of the larger one. It somehow becomes easier if you see it this
way.

These are three-dimensional objects coming out of the thirteen circles
of the Fruit of Life.

1 62 O The Ancient Secret of the flower of life

Fig. 6-20. Sulamith Wulfing’s painting of the Christ Child.

Fig. 6-2 1 . Pentagonal dodecahedron
in Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 6-21a. Solid dodecahedron.

This is Sulamith Wulfing’s painting of the Christ Child inside an icosa-
hedron [Fig. 6-20], which is very appropriate, because the icosahedron
represents water, as you will see in a moment, and the Christ was baptized
in water, the beginning of the new consciousness.

This is the fifth and last shape — two pentagonal dodecahedrons, one in-
side the other [Fig. 6-21] (here showing only the inner dodecahedron for
simplicity).

Figure 21a is the solid version.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure 0 163

As we have seen, all five of the Platonic solids can be found in
Metatron’s Cube [Fig. 6-22].

The Missing Lines

When I was looking for the final Platonic solid in Metatron’s Cube, the
dodecahedron, it took me over twenty years. After the angels had said,
“They’re all in there,” I started to look, but I could never find the dodecahe-
dron. Finally one day a student said, “Hey, Drunvalo, you forgot some of
the lines in Metatron’s Cube.” When he pointed them out, I looked and
said, “You’re right, I did!” I thought I had connected all the centers to-
gether, but I had forgotten some of them. No wonder I couldn’t find that
dodecahedron, because those missing lines defined it! For over twenty
years I’d assumed that I had all the lines when I hadn’t.

This is one of the great problems in science, believing you have solved a
problem, then moving on and using that information to build on. Science is
now having to deal with the same kind of problem around falling bodies in a
vacuum, for example. It has always been assumed that they fell at the same
rate, and much of our higher science is based on this fundamental “law.” It
has been proven wrong, yet science continues using it. A spinning ball falls
much faster than a nonspinning one. Someday there will be a scientific day
of reckoning.

When I was married to Macki, she was also deeply involved in sacred ge-
ometry. Her work is very interesting to me because it’s female — right-
brained pentagonal energies. She shows how emotions and colors and
shapes are all interrelated. Actually, she found the dodecahedron in
Metatron’s Cube before I did. She took it and did something I never would
have thought of doing. Metatron’s cube, you know, is usually drawn on a
flat surface, but it’s really a three-dimensional shape. So one day I was hold-
ing the three-dimensional shape and trying to find the dodecahedron in
there, and Macki said, “Let me look at that thing.” She took the three-
dimensional shape and rotated it by the phi ratio. (Something we’ve not
talked about yet is that the Golden Mean ratio, also called the phi ratio, is
approximately 1.618.) Rotating the shape like that was something I would
never have thought of doing. After she did that, she cast a shadow through
it and got this image [Fig. 6-23].

Macki originally created this, then gave it to me. It has a center at pen-
tagon A. Then if you take the five pentagons coming off of A (pentagons
B) and one more pentagon coming off of each of those five (pentagons C) ,
you have an unfolded dodecahedron. I thought, Wow, this is the first time
I’ve ever found any kind of dodecahedron in there. She did that in three
days. I’d never found it in twenty years.

We once spent almost a whole day looking at this drawing. It was excit-
ing, because every single line in this drawing is in a Golden Mean ratio. And
there are three-dimensional Golden Mean rectangles all over. There’s one
at point E, where the two diamonds above and below are the top and bot-

164 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Fig. 6-23. Macki’s pentagon design
from Metatron’s Cube. When cut
out and folded, it makes a three-
dimensional pentagonal dodecahe-
dron.

tom of a three-dimensional Golden Mean rectangle, and the dotted lines
are the sides. It’s amazing stuff. I said, “1 don’t know what this is, but it’s
probably important.” So we put it aside to consider at another time.

Quasi Crystals

Later I found out about a brand-new science. This new science is going
to change the technological world dramatically. Using this new technol-
ogy, metallurgists believe they will be able to make metal ten times harder
than diamonds, if you can imagine that. That would be incredibly hard.

For a long time when they looked into metals, they were using what’s
called x-ray diffraction to see where the atoms were. I’ll show an x-ray dif-
fraction photograph of this shortly. Certain specific patterns came up that
revealed there were only certain kinds of atomic structures. They thought
it was all there was to learn because that was all they could find. This lim-
ited their ability to make metals.

Then there was a game going on in Scientific American which was based
on Penrose patterns. Roger Penrose was a British mathematician and
relativist who wanted to figure out how to lay pentagon-shaped tiles and
fully cover a flat surface. You cannot lay only pentagon-shaped tiles on a
flat surface — there’s no way to make it work. So he came up with two dia-
mond shapes that are derivatives of a pentagon, and with those two shapes
he was able to form lots of different patterns that would fit on a flat surface.
It became a game in Scientific American back in the eighties to put these pat-
terns together in new forms, which then led some metallurgical scientists
who were watching this game to suspect something new in physics.

Update: According to David
Adair, NASA has just made a
metal in space that is 500
times stronger than titanium,
as light as foam and as clear as
glass. Is it based on these
principles?

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure 0 165

UPDATE: In 1998 we are
beginning to open up another
new science: nanotechnology.
We have created microscopic
“machines” that can go into a
metal or crystal matrix and
rearrange the atoms. In 1996
or 1997 in Europe a diamond
was created out of graphite
using nanotechnology. This
diamond was about three feet
across, and it is real. As the
science of quasi crystals
and nanotechnology merge,
our experience of life will also
change. Look at the late
1800s compared to now.

Ultimately they discovered a new kind of atomic grid pattern. It was al-
ways there; they merely discovered it. These grid patterns are now called
quasi crystals; it’s a new thing (1991). They’re unraveling what shapes and
patterns are possible through metals. Scientists are finding ways to use
these shapes and patterns to produce new metal products. And I’ll bet that
the pattern Macki got out of Metatron’s Cube is the grand master of all, and
that any Penrose pattern in existence is derived from it. Why? Because it’s
all Golden Mean, it’s basic — it came straight out of the basic pattern in
Metatron’s Cube. Though it’s not my business, at one point I will probably
determine if it’s really true. I see that instead of using the two Penrose pat-
terns and the pentagon, it uses only one of them and a pentagon. (I just
thought I’d offer that.) What’s happening in this new science right now is
interesting.

As this book begins to unfold, you’ll discover that sacred geometry can
describe in detail any subject whatsoever. There is not one thing you can
pronounce with your mouth that cannot be completely, utterly and totally de-
scribed, with all possible knowledge, by sacred geometry. (And we are making
the distinction between knowledge and wisdom: Wisdom needs experi-
ence.) Yet a more important purpose of this work is to remind you that you
have the potential of a living Mer-Ka-Ba field around your body and to
teach you how to use it. I’ll continually come to places where I digress into
all kinds of roots and branches and talk about every subject you can think
of. But I’m going to keep coming back on track, because I’m heading in one
particular direction, toward the Mer-Ka-Ba, the human lightbody.

I’ve spent many years studying sacred geometry, and I believe you can
know everything there is to be known about any subject whatsoever just by
focusing on the geometries behind it. All you need is a compass and a
ruler — you don’t even need a computer, though it does help. You have all
knowledge in you already, and all you have to do is unfold it. You simply
learn the map of how spirit moves in the Great Void, and that’s it. You can
unravel the mystery of any subject.

To summarize, the first informational system comes out of the Fruit of
Life through Metatron’s Cube. By connecting the centers of all the spheres,
you have five shapes — really six, because you have the central sphere,
which started the whole thing. So you have six primal shapes — the tetrahe-
dron, the cube, octahedron, icosahedron, dodecahedron and the sphere.

The Platonic Solids and the Elements

These six shapes were considered by the ancient alchemists and great
souls like Pythagoras, the father of Greece, to have had an element aspect to
them [Fig. 6-24].

The tetrahedron was considered fire, the cube was earth, the octahe-
dron was air, the icosahedron was water and the dodecahedron was ether.
(Ether, prana and tachyon energy are the same thing; they extend every-
where and are accessible at any point in space/time/dimension. This is the

166 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Tetrahedron i
(Fire)

Hexahedron

(Earth)

great secret of zero-point technology.)

And the sphere is voidness. These six ele-
ments are the building blocks of the uni-
verse. They create the qualities of the
universe.

In alchemy, they usually talk only
about fire, earth, air and water; they sel-
dom discuss ether or prana because it’s so
sacred. In the Pythagorean school, if you
even uttered the word “dodecahedron”
outside the school, they would kill you on
the spot. That was how sacred the shape
was. They wouldn’t even discuss it. Two
hundred years later when Plato was alive,
he would discuss it, but only very care-
fully.

Why? Because the dodecahedron is
near the outer edge in your energy field
and is the highest form of consciousness.

When you get to the 5 5 -foot limit of your
energy field, it’s a sphere. But the very
next shape inside the sphere is the dodec-
ahedron (actually, the dodecahedron/
icosahedral relationship). In addition, we

live in a big dodecahedron that contains the universe. When your mind
reaches out to the end of space — and there is an end — there’s a dodecahe-
dron enclosed in a sphere. I can say this because the human body is a holo-
gram of the universe and contains the same principles. The twelve constel-
lations of the zodiac fit inside it. The dodecahedron is the terminating
point of the geometries, and it’s very important. On a microscopic level,
the dodecahedron and the icosahedron are the relational parameters of the
DNA, the blueprint of all life.

You can relate the three columns in this figure to the Tree of Life and to
the three primary energies of the universe: male (on the left), female (right)
and child (center) . Or if you go right down to the fabric of the universe, you
have the proton on the left, electron on the right and neutron in the center.
This central column, which is the creating one, is the child. Remember, we
went from an octahedron to a sphere to begin the process out of the Void.
It is the beginning process of creation, and it is found in the child, or central
column.

The left column, holding the tetrahedron and the cube, is the male
component of consciousness, the left side of the brain. The faces of these
polygons are triangles or squares. The center column is the corpus callo-
sum, which links the left and the right sides. The right column, holding
the dodecahedron and the icosahedron, is the female component of con-
sciousness, the right side of the brain, and the polygon faces are made up

Sphere

(Void)

Dodecahedron
(Ether or Prana)

Icosahedron

(Water)

Y\ | Octahedron | VS

1/ (Air) \ /

MALE

CHILD

FEMALE

Fig. 6-24. Relating the six elements to the six primal shapes, shown in three
columns that depict the trinity of polarity. The left (male) column represents the
left brain and the proton and includes 3- and 4-sided faces; the center (child)
column represents the corpus callosum and the neutron. The right (female)
column represents the right brain and the electron and includes 3- and 5 -sided
faces. The ether is the basic form of the Christ consciousness grid.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure 167

of triangles and pentagons. Thus the polygons on the left have three- and
four-sided faces and the shapes on the right have three- and five-sided
faces.

In terms of the Earth s consciousness, the right column is the missing
component. We have created the male (left) side of Earth’s consciousness,
and what we are doing now is completing the female component for whole-
ness and balance. The right side is also associated with Christ or unity con-
sciousness. The dodecahedron is the basic form of the Christ consciousness
grid around the Earth. The two shapes in the right column are what are
called duals of each other, meaning if you connect the centers of the faces
of a dodecahedron with straight lines, you get an icosahedron; and if you
connect the centers of an icosahedron, you again get a dodecahedron.
Many polyhedrons have duals.

Fig. 6-25. Cube and star tetrahedron
sitting next to each other so you can
see the squareness of the star tetrahe-
dron.

Fig. 6-26 An icosahedral cap.

168 $ The ancient Secret of the flower of Life

The Sacred 72

In Dan Winter’s book, Heartmath, the DNA molecule is shown to be
constructed by the dual relationship of dodecahedrons and icosahedrons.
One can also see the DNA molecule as a rotating cube. When you rotate a
cube through 72 degrees in a particular pattern, it makes an icosahedron,
which is in turn a dual with the dodecahedron. So there’s a reciprocal pat-
tern going up the DNA strands: the icosahedron, then the dodecahedron,
the icosahedron, continuing back and forth. This rotation through the
cube creates the DNA molecule. It has been determined that this is the ex-
act sacred geometry behind the DNA, although there may be further hid-
den relationships.

This 72-degree angle rotating in our DNA connects with the blueprint/
purpose of the Great White Brotherhood. As you may know, 72 orders are
associated with the Great White Brotherhood. Many people speak of the
72 orders of angels and the Hebrews speak of the 72 names of God. The
reason for 72 has to do with the way the Platonic solids are constructed,
which is also related to the Christ consciousness grid around the Earth.

If you take two tetrahedrons and superimpose them (though in different
positions), you get a star tetrahedron, which, from a different view, is noth-
ing but a cube [Fig. 6-25]. You can see how they’re interrelated. In a simi-
lar manner, you can also put five tetrahedrons together and make an
icosahedral cap [Fig. 6-26].

If you make twelve icosahedral caps and put one on each face of the do-
decahedron (it would require 5 x 12, or 60 tetrahedrons to create a dodeca-
hedron), it would be a stellated dodecahedron because a point comes out of
the center of each face. Its dual is the 12 points in the center of each face of
the dodecahedron, which forms an icosahedron. The 60 tetrahedrons plus
the 12 points of the centers equal 72 — again, the number of orders associ-
ated with the Great White Brotherhood. The Brotherhood actually func-
tions through the physical relationships of this stellated dodecahedron/ico-
sahedron form, which is the basis of the Christ consciousness grid around

the world. In other words, the Brotherhood is attempting to bring out the
consciousness of the planet’s right brain.

The original order was the Alpha and Omega Order of Melchizedek,
which was formed by Machiventa Melchizedek about 200,200 years ago.
Since then 71 other orders have been created. The youngest one is the
Brotherhood of the Seven Rays in Peru/Bolivia, the seventy-second order.

Each of the 72 orders has a life pattern like a sine-wave curve, where
some of them come into existence for a certain length of time and then dis-
appear for a while. They have biorhythms just as a human body does. The
Rosicrucians, for example, are on a hundred-year cycle. They come out for
a hundred years and then disappear totally for a hundred years — they liter-
ally disappear off the face of the Earth. Then a hundred years later they’re
back in the world and functioning for another hundred years.

They’re all on different cycles, and they’re all functioning together
for one purpose — to return Christ consciousness back to this planet, to
set up this lost feminine aspect of consciousness and bring balance be-
tween the left and the right side of the planet’s brain. There’s another
way to look at this that is really extraordinary. When we talk about Eng-
land, I will get to it.

Using Bombs, and Understanding the Basic Pattern of Creation

Question: When they detonate an atomic bomb, what happens to the ele-
ments?

As far as the elements are concerned, they are converted into energy
and other elements. But there is more to the picture. You have two kinds
of bombs: fission and fusion. Fission is splitting matter apart and fusion is
putting it together. It’s okay to put it together— nobody complains about
that. All the known suns in the universe are fusion reactors. I realize what I
am about to say is not accepted by science yet, but when you rip matter
apart through fission, there’s a corresponding outer-space location associ-
ated with it that is affected — as above, so below. In other words, inner
space (the microcosm) and outer space (the macrocosm) are connected.
This is the reason that fission is illegal throughout the universe.

Detonating atomic bombs also creates an enormous imbalance on
Earth. For example, when you consider that creation balances earth, air,
fire, water and ether, an atomic bomb causes a massive amount of fire in
one place. That’s an out-of-balance sequence and the Earth must respond.

If you dumped 80 zillion tons of water on a city, that would also be an
out-of-balance situation. Anywhere you have too much air, too much wa-
ter, too much of anything, it’s out of balance. Alchemy is the knowledge of
how to keep all these things in balance. If you understand these geometries
and know what their relationships are, you can create what you want. The
whole idea is to understand the map underneath it all. Remember, the map
is the way spirit moves in the Void. If you know the underlying map, then
you have the knowledge and understanding to cocreate with God.

Figure 6-27 shows the interrelation-
ship of all these shapes. Each point con-
nects to the next one, and they all have
certain mathematical relationships re-
lated to phi ratios. The more you study
this, the more these five shapes become
one. We’ve only recently begun to re-
member this ancient science, though
they fully understood everything in
Egypt, Tibet and India a long time ago.
They understood it in Greece, then they
forgot for a long time. They remembered
it again during the Italian Renaissance,
then forgot again. The modern world has
almost completely forgotten what shape
really means, and we are just now
remembering.

Crystals

V* ' *

• .*> v. S : ;■ •: .

• .* \ '•'V’rffT’ T . *

Fig. 6-28. Atomic pattern of a beryl
crystal.

Grounding Our Learning

Now we’re going to take this abstract
information that doesn’t really seem to
apply to us in our everyday lives, and
we’re going to tie it to our everyday ex-
perience. Some of this is not in every-
day experience, but we can more or less
understand and connect with the sub-
jects.

First I’m going to ground this infor-
mation to crystals. There are lots of
other areas of nature I could use, but it’s
so obvious in crystals that anybody can see it. I could use viruses or
diatomaceous earth. I could show it in a lot of things, but crystals are good
because people like them.

To begin looking at these crystals, let’s first examine this x-ray diffraction
pattern [Fig. 6-28] . When you shoot x-rays down the C axis of the atomic
matrix of a crystal or metal, you’ll get these little dots showing you exactly
where the atoms are located. In this case, this is a beryl crystal that actually
displays the Flower of Life pattern. The beryl crystal uses the pattern to ar-
range its atoms and form this specific crystal. It’s really amazing that these lit-
tle atoms simply line themselves up in space, often with enormous distances
between them. These microscopic spaces are relatively vast, like between
the stars in the night sky. The atoms perfectly align themselves in cubes and
tetrahedrons and all kinds of geometric shapes. Why?

I 70 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

This is an x-ray diffraction pattern of a crystal [Fig. 6-
29]. You can see how the atoms have arranged themselves
in a cubical design. It’s interesting that in all the various
forms manifested in the Reality, the atoms themselves are
spheres. This simple fact has been overlooked by most re-
searchers, but the sphere is the main form that everything
came from in the beginning. It is important in understand-
ing creation.

The entire fabric of everything in our existence is made
up of “marbles” — all different sizes of spheres. We’re sitting
on a sphere, the Earth, and spheres are rotating around us.

The Moon, Sun and stars are all spheres. The whole uni-
verse, from macrocosm to microcosm, is made up of little
spheres in one way or the other. The light waves moving
through space are all spheres. We think of a light wave as
making waves through space, but it’s much more complex.

An electrical field spins one way around it and a magnetic
field rotates at 90 degrees to the electrical field, and they ex-
pand in spherical patterns.

Imagine a cube in deep space, and see a bright light flashing from it, go-
ing out in all directions, 360 degrees. What do you have? Do you have a
cubical light-wave energy field moving away from it? At first thought you
might say it would be an expanding cube, getting bigger and bigger and big-
ger. But that’s not what happens. Light waves move radially away from
their source at 186,200 miles a second, so when a light wave moves from
the surface of a cube I hold in my hand, in one second the light from the
face of the cube is already 186,200 miles away. And the wave that moved
off a comer of the cube, which is a little farther away from the center than
the face, is, in one second, 186,200 miles away from the center plus maybe a
fraction of an inch. If you could see a fraction of an inch at 186,200 miles,
you’d have super vision. And that’s only in one second; two seconds later
the form has expanded twice that far, and a minute later it’s enormous.

So you have a sphere moving away from something that originated as a
cube. If the object happens to be really big, then the light wave first tends to
take the shape of the object, but it slowly turns into a sphere as it moves
away and the object becomes smaller and smaller relative to that light field.
So what you have out there is a bunch of light spheres, moving away in all
directions and interconnecting with each other.

When you see light coming directly toward you, it’s white. But if it’s not
moving directly toward you, it’s black. In fact, the entire night sky is filled
with brilliant white light, but we see the light only when it’s coming toward
us. We don’t see the light waves that move sideways from us; we just see
black. If we could see it all, it would be blinding. Light is everywhere, and
there is noplace in space where it is not, as far as I know. The sphere is liter-
ally everywhere.

Fig. 6-29. Atomic pattern of a crystal matrix.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure $ 171

Electron Clouds and Molecules

Atoms are also made up of spheres. If you look at the hydrogen atom,
the proton is compacted in the center and the electron is way out there or-
biting the proton. If the proton were the size of a golf ball, the electron
would be about a football field away — and that electron is moving real fast!
I remember that when I was studying physics, I could not believe that the
little electron, which is a pinpoint you cannot even see, is moving around and
around in some microscopic space at nine-tenths the speed of light. This
means that the electron travels around the proton about 1 70,000 miles ev-
ery second, around something you can’t even see! My mind was totally bog-
gled! I went home and lay on the bed and stared at the ceiling for a long
time. That was just inconceivable to me.

The little electron moves around so fast that it appears as a cloud. In
fact, they call it an electron cloud. There’s only one electron, but it’s mov-
ing so fast that it appears to make a sphere around the central proton. It’s
like a television screen, where there’s only one electron beam moving
across that screen at any one moment, moving carefully and intentionally
Fig. 6-30. Sizes and charges of ions. down the screen, zigzagging back and forth until it gets all the way down to

the bottom, then starts all over again.
It’s doing this so fast that you see a very
believable image.

So spheres are the primary compo-
nent of the Reality we’re experiencing.
Although an electron orbit describes a
sphere, it can also describe other pat-
terns, such as a figure eight. Physicists
have been able to calculate this only for
hydrogen, and so far they’re just guess-
ing about the rest. An atom is called an
ion if it has too many or too few elec-
trons and has either a positive or a nega-
tive charge. So the primary
characteristics of an atom are how big it
is and what its charge is [Fig. 6-30],
These two main factors determine
whether or not different atoms will fit
together into molecules. There are
other subtle factors involved, but size
and charge are primary.

Figure 6-31 shows how atoms com-
bine. These were the primary patterns
known for a long time, until they figured
out about quasi crystals. The atoms on
this chart have several varieties. A
shows a linear pattern with a smaller
atom in the middle. B shows a triangular

172 $ the Ancient Secret of the flower of Life

ATOM PATTERNS IN CRYSTALS

A O*

A *so«. & r 1»d

*>■&*% qt woi»l(i rtwji

t*!AN<>UiA»

o~—

?Af*« « >!?"!. 'Va” wn'St' J o re •

VWI** ***?*<»: **#**• < 0 * ’.St-iV*#

?*e r 9*

TC TWA KC

•p

G£ TAH£.D»4L

Fig. 6-32. Simple lattice formation of atoms.

CUBiC

Fig. 6-31.
Atom patterns
in crystals.

pattern of three with a little atom in the middle. The little atom can liter-
ally either be there or not be there. C shows a tetrahedral pattern, with one
atom in the middle, or not. D shows an octahedral pattern, and E shows a
cubical pattern. Now, because of new scientific information, we can add
icosahedral and dodecahedral patterns.

Atoms always line up in specific ways when they crystallize [Fig. 6-32] ,
They form into, say, a cube, and then that cube puts another cube next to
itself and another cube next to it, and soon you get one cube connected to
another, connected in turn to another cube and so on, forming what is
called a lattice. There are all kinds of ways that atoms can join. The result-
ing molecules are always associated with sacred geometry and the five Pla-
tonic solids. It makes you wonder how those little atoms know to go only
into those certain places, especially when they get very, very complex!

Even when you get into this complicated molecule [Fig. 6-33] and break
it down, you see the shapes in it, and they always revert to one of the five Pla-
tonic solids — it doesn’t matter what the structure is. No matter what you call
it — metal, crystal, anything else — it will always come down to one of these
original five shapes, i’ll show you more examples as we get further into this.

‘V

rig. 6-33. Complex molecular formation.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure 0 173

The Six Categories of Crystals

Now we’ll get into crystals. There are at
least a hundred thousand different kinds of
crystals. If you’ve ever been to the Tucson
Gem and Mineral Show, you know exactly
what I’m talking about. This show takes
over eight or ten hotels, with every room in
the multistory hotels filled with crystals. In
the auditorium you’ll see all the gems.
There are lots and lots and lots of different
kinds of crystals. And more are being
found; almost every year there are eight,
nine, ten brand-new crystals never known
before. But no matter how many crystals
there are, they can all be put into six cate-
gories: isometric, tetragonal, hexagonal,
orthorhombic, monoclinic and triclimc
[Fig. 6-34]- And all six of those systems
used for organizing all known crystals are
derived from the cube, one of the Platonic
solids. It’s a matter of which angle you are
viewing the cube from — the square, hexag-
onal or rectangular view as opposed to the
normal 90° cubic angle. Now, this is where
it starts to get interesting, at least for me —
hopefully, for you, too.

These are fluorite crystals [Fig. 6-35a
and b]. Fluorite is found in just about any
conceivable color you can think of, including clear. There are two primary
fluorite mines in the world: one is in the United States and the other in

Thf pomi to> systems

is the cube ctit By distorting ?ne ceii
other ceils, can be derived as shown '
below

THE CRYSTAL SYSTEMS
A

Ail edfje* a«- esjwol

Ail loces ate squares
and e<juoi <t> sue

Ail angle* nght angles

ISOMETRIC SYSTEM

9 Q*a

0 Tube stretched at compressed along
one direction onty.

mjo-ne cress ->«clmn

tetragonal system

(* Tube compressed upon >60“

opposite edges / \

\ A

•juries shown OHs wd/ tie t-*i* y.

MONOCLINIC SYSTEM

Orflswhotnfctt cell a>$i art ad
fey sau««jin<} opposite

eoft g-"

TfilCUNIC SYSTEM

HOI U| Min 4 3 sl

A ■ Z ceil bos no right oodles

"v, Onl i opposite laces ate >be

^ ^ —-y some sue and shape.

/ y /

J X A \

Ctm* sections o*« often ; A

sharp edged and thift ;

Fig. 6-34. Crystal systems.

Fig. 6-35a. Fluorite crystal with a cubical structure.
174 & The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Fig. 6-35b. Fluorite crystal with an octahedral structure.

China. Fluorite is found with two totally different atomic structures: one is
octahedral and the other cubical. This purple fluorite crystal is made up of
tiny cubes all clumped together. They were not cut that way, they grew
that way. The clear fluorite crystal is an actual octahedron. It was not cut
that way, but in this case it didn’t grow that way, either. It usually comes in
sheets, and if you drop it or strike it, it breaks along the weakest bonds,
which happen to be octahedral, because the atoms are in an octahedral lat-
tice. If I were to drop it onto a hard surface, it would break into a whole
bunch of baby octahedrons.

But what’s especially interesting is that it’s been discovered that fluorite
will grow from one shape to the other — from cubical to octahedral and
back again. In its natural state, given enough time, a cubical crystal will
someday become octahedral. And given enough time, an octahedral fluor-
ite crystal will become cubical. They oscillate over time, first becoming
one, then the other, back and forth over very long periods of time. Geolo-
gists have found some fluorite crystals in the process of change, but they
could not understand how they oscillated like that.

Truncating Polyhedrons

One geology book tried to explain how fluorite changes like this [Fig. 6-
36] . At the bottom right you see a cube. If you were to cut off its corners by
the same amount, it’s called truncating. You can
truncate any polyhedron, meaning any of these many-
sided shapes. When you do that (in this case a cube),
you can cut off either the comers, the edges or the
faces, as long as you cut th^jn all the same.

If you truncate this cube by cutting the corners at
45 degrees all the way around, you get the next shape
to its left. If you truncate it again in exactly the same
way, you come up with the next shape to the left. If you
do it once more, you get an octahedron (on the far
left). You can go back the other way, truncating the
comers of the octahedron, and come back through the
whole procedure until it turns back into a cube. This
was the geology book’s attempt to explain how in the
heck fluorite changes shapes like that. The book actu-
ally explains only how this change could take place geo-
metrically. But in truth, something far more amazing
takes place when fluorite changes. The ions actually
rotate and expand or contract to become a different lat-
tice! It’s much more complex than the book shows.

This is another fluorite crystal [Fig. 6-37], one of
my own. It’s very big, about four inches on a side. You
don’t often see them this big anymore. In case you
can’t quite see it, it comes up to a point in the center.

no* m •cr*i«oi

Fig. 6-36. A fluorite crystal.

CHANGES m GROWTH RATE

MO. !»

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure 175

Fig. 6-37. My own fluorite crystal.

Fig. 6-38. Different truncating possibilities. Top line: truncating edges; bottom line: truncat-
ing points.

Fig. 6-39. Pyrites: a cube (top) and a
cluster of pentagonal dodecahedrons
(bottom) .

Somebody put this in a window where the sunlight hit it, and because the
bonds in fluorite are so weak, when the sunlight struck it, it cracked along
the octahedral atomic lines, of course.

In the upper right corner of Figure 6-38 is a cube. The cube to its left is
truncated along its edges. Truncated twice more, the darn thing turned into
a dodecahedron. This is an example of the cube/dodecahedron in crystals.

In Figure 6-39 the upper crystal is a pyrite cube. It grew that way, no one
cut it. There’s a huge one like this in Silverado, Colorado, about six feet
square, I believe. They simply took it out of the earth as a perfect cube.
This little pyrite is square on two ends, rectangular on the sides. The lower
crystal is a tiny pyrite dodecahedron cluster. Some of them are almost per-
feet — and it grew this way in Peru. If this little slab had been left in the
earth long enough, those little dodecahedrons would turn into cubes; and
over enough time after that, they would turn back into dodecahedrons. If
you take the dodecahedron [bottom left in Fig. 6-38] and truncate its
points, it turns into an icosahedron [next to it on the right] . If you keep
truncating the points, it turns into an octahedron. I could go on with this
truncating business for a long time. There are thousands of ways to do it.
Each pattern and crystal, no matter how complex it gets, will turn into one
of the five Platonic solids if you truncate it just right, showing the innate na-
ture of the five Platonic solids in crystal structure.

A little side note: If you look inside a point-truncated tetrahedron made
of glass or crystal or even mirrors, it will reflect the light. The mirrored re-
flection inside it is a perfect icosahedron. Check it out.

You can go on and on with this. You’ll see some that look really strange,
like they couldn’t possibly be based on anything logical, but all you have to
do is a little geometry, and every time you will find out that it’s derived from
one of the five Platonic solids. There are no known exceptions. No matter

176 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

what the crystal pattern is, it’s always based on a Platonic solid. Crystal
structures are a function of the five Platonic solids that came out of the
Fruit of Life, out of Metatron’s Cube. If you want to see more of these crys-
tals, you can find plenty in the Rocks and Minerals book by Charles A.
Sorrell.

There’s one more set I want to talk about that refers back to Figure 6-38,
“Different truncating possibilities.” When you truncate an octahedron by
cutting off all the corners so that they are 90° to each other (shown at A on
the figure) , it makes the shape on its left. If you were to draw it on a flat sur-
face, it would be a square with a diamond in the middle [Fig. 6-40]. This
pattern happens to be related to our consciousness, to the very nature of
who we are.

Buckminster Fuller’s Cube Equilibrium

This is what that shape looks like three-dimensionally [Fig. 6-41]. It’s
called a cuboctahedron or vector equilibrium. You can see that it’s originally
a cube, but if the angle at point A were continued upward, it would form an
octahedron. It’s both at once, an octahedron and a cube. It doesn’t know
which one it is; it’s somewhere in the middle. When Buckminster Fuller
found this polyhedron, he became almost preoccupied with it. He thought
that the cuboctahedron was paramount, the greatest shape that ever was in
creation, because it does something that no other known shape does. It was
so important to him that he gave it a brand-new name: the vector equilib-
rium. He discovered that this shape, through different rotational patterns,
turns into all five of the Platonic solids! This one shape seems to have them
all contained within itself [Fig. 6-42].

If you find this interesting, buy this toy [see the reference section] and
play with it. It will answer all your questions if you let it.

Deep inside a Sesame Seed

Other people have also studied the cuboctahedron. Is anybody familiar
with a man named Deraid Langham? Not too many people know of him.
He has been pretty quiet during his life. His work is called Genesa, if you
want to study it. I really respect him. First of all, he was a botanist who sin-
gle-handedly saved South America during World War II. They were starv-
ing to death, and he created a corn that grew like a weed. You just threw it
on the ground, and it grew almost without water. It was a great service to
the South American continent. Later he studied the sesame seed, and
when he explored deep inside it, he found a cube. In fact, when you get in-
side any seed, you’ll find little geometrical shapes that are associated with
the Platonic solids, primarily the cube.

Deraid Langham found thirteen rays that came out of the sesame seed’s
cube. Carrying those studies further, he discovered that the same energy
fields that are in plant seeds also exist around the human body — which is
what we will eventually talk about. But he focused on the cuboctahedron,

Fig. 6-40. Looking at the face (right)
created by truncating all 6 points of an
octahedron (left, shown with only one
point truncated and another at 90°).

Fig. 6-41. Views of a vector equilib-
rium (cuboctahedron).

Fig 6-42. Vector or cube equilibrium
toy called a Vector Flexor.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure $ 177

Fig. 6-43. A variety of polyhedrons. A
is a cuboctahedron and B is a rhombic
dodecahedron.

Fig. 6-44. Comparing atoms and crys-
tals, hexagonal (beryl) and orthorhom-
bic (topaz) systems.

which is interconnected with the
fields around the body. We will be
discussing that, though my instruc-
tions are to focus on another shape:
the star tetrahedron. We have a star
tetrahedral field around our bodies,
which is also around seeds, but which
makes a series of geometrical pro-
gressions that are different from the
cuboctahedron/vector equilibrium.
Langham made a series of what you
might call sacred dances (in Sufi
talk) in which you move and connect
with all the points in your field in
such a way that you become aware of
them. It’s really good information.

Figure 6-43 shows some of the
three-dimensional forms of the poly-
hedrons we have been talking about.
The one at A is the cuboctahedron we just discussed; the one at B is
the rhombic dodecahedron. The latter is important because it’s the
dual of the cuboctahedron. If you connect the centers of the
cuboctahedron, you get the rhombic dodecahedron, and vice versa.
Figure 6-44 shows how the internal geometries of the atoms are re-
flected in the angles of these crystals. We’ve seen that already, in
terms of the crystals being cubes, octahedrons and other forms.

The 26 Shapes

From my way of thinking, the first five Platonic solids are the
first five notes of the pentatonic scale. The octave has seven
notes, the last two corresponding to the cuboctahedron (A) and
the rhombic dodecahedron (B) shown in Figure 6-43. Five addi-
tional shapes form the chromatic scale, and there’s a thirteenth
one, the return. Thus there are 13 polyhedrons that form the
chromatic scale of music. From those 13,13 more are formed that
are the same, only stellated, to total 26 shapes — two octaves within each
other. In terms of form, those 26 shapes are the key to all the harmonics of
the Reality. We don’t need to get into such complexity here, but it just goes
on and on and on.

Some of you may know of Royal Rife, the man who was trying to cure
cancer through electromagnetic fields (EMF) such as light, which I believe
is absolutely possible and has been done. Rife knew of 7 of the 13 (or possi-
bly 26) frequencies. The ones he published were incorrect, but he pur-
posely did that. Those he published cause cancer, though if they’re shifted
slightly in a certain mathematical way, they return to the original frequen-
cies, and each frequency destroys most or all of a specific virus or bacterium.

178 4* The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Blow them up

The Periodic Table

However, Rife only knew part of the equation. If he had known the sa-
cred geometry we now know, he could have come up with all 26 forms and
eliminated any virus in existence. It doesn’t matter how many AIDS vi-
ruses there are, there’s nothing to finding a solution. There are a maximum
of 26 templates, and the right frequencies will eliminate every single virus
(or bacterium). Because every virus is a polyhedron — structurally, they
look just like the polyhedrons in Figure 6-43 — there are various ways you
can deal with them. You can either blow them up through certain harmon-
ics of EMF, or you can match them [Fig. 6-45]. If you can match them, you
can couple with them, much like an antivirus does. Or you can simply
make them nonexistent by creating a waveform that’s a mirror image of
what they are. There are lots of ways to work with AIDS, but one primary
key is understanding that there are a maximum of
26 geometries associated with it.

Crystallized water — ice crystals — form these
hexagonal patterns we call snowflakes [Fig. 6-46].

You can see the relationship to the Flower of Life.

Over and over and over again you will find this rela-
tionship of 3D patterns to the geometries that come
out of this one central Flower of Life pattern.

W»lO€»C TAfttf OF TH{ til MINIS

This is an interesting version of the Periodic Ta-
ble of the Elements [Fig. 6-47], because it shows
that every element, with a few exceptions that can-
not be determined because they will not crystallize,
is related to the cube. One of these few exceptions
is fluorine, because fluorine reacts with almost
nothing. It’s one of the most
inert gases. But on almost all
the other elements we find
this cubical relationship, ex-
cept the fourth-dimensional
atoms that fall outside the
natural Table of Elements
and those that are synthetic
or man-made. They don’t
happen naturally in nature.

Each atomic element has
an associated crystalline
structure. In every single
case scientists have found

Fig. 6-46. Ice crystals, or snowflakes.

Fig. 6-47. A periodic table showing
that all elements known to crystallize
are a function of the cube.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure $ 179

Fig. 6-48. Icosahedron and dodecahe-
dron fitting exactly into a cube.

that the different crystalline structures associated with atoms can be re-
duced to the structure of a cube. You might have noticed that the cube
seems to be more important than the other polygons. For example, crystals
are divided into six different categories, hut the cube is the basis of all of
them. In the Bible it says that the throne of God is so many cubits in differ-
ent directions. When you make one, it’s a cube. The pharaohs in Egypt sat
on a cube. What the heck is it about the cube/

The Key: The Cube and the Sphere

Well, the cube is different from the other Platonic solids because it has
one characteristic the others do not — except for the sphere, which also has
the same characteristic. Both the sphere and the cube can perfectly con-
tain the other four Platonic solids and each other symmetrically, by their
surface, assuming you have the right sizes. The cube is the only Platonic
solid with this special characteristic: You can take a sphere, slip it inside a
cube, and it will touch the six faces perfectly and symmetrically. And a tet-
rahedron will slide right down one of the axes and become the diagonals of
the cube, fitting perfectly and symmetrically. A star tetrahedron will also fit
perfectly inside a cube. The octahedron is actually the dual of the cube; if
you connect the centers of the adjacent cube faces, you get an octahedron.
That one is easy.

When you get to the last two Platonic solids, it doesn’t look like they
could fit symmetrically into the cube and the sphere,
but they do. It is a little difficult to show here, but you
can see for yourself. Using a real model, just find where
both the icosahedron and the dodecahedron have six
edges in the planes of the cube, and you have it. You
will see how they slide into the faces of the cube
[Fig. 6-48].

You can see how the other four Platonic solids fit
symmetrically into the cube and the sphere. What is
important here is that only the sphere and the cube
have this capability. The cube is the father, the most
important male form. The sphere is the mother, the most important female
form. So in the entire Reality, the sphere and the cube are the two most im-
portant forms and will almost always dominate when it comes to primary re-
lationships in creation.

It was for this reason that a man named Walter Russell did some work
long ago that was absolutely phenomenal. I don’t believe he knew anything
about sacred geometry — he was sacred-geometry illiterate, to my knowl-
edge. Yet he intuitively grasped it in his mind. And when the images were
happening in his mind, he chose the cube and the sphere as the main geom-
etries to talk about what he understood. And because he chose those two
forms and not others, he was able to go far. If he had selected any others, he
would have made a big mistake and would have been unable to do the work
he did.

! 80 O The. Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Crystals Are Alive!

This amplifies my thoughts about crystals being alive. Before I taught
this course I used to give courses on crystals, back in the early or mid ’80s, I
guess. And I discovered — not through giving the courses, but through my
actual interaction with the crystals themselves — that these crystals are alive.
They are living and conscious. I was able to communicate with them, and
they communicated with me. Through these interchanges I found out all
kinds of things. 1 he more I lived with them and learned how to connect
with them, the more I discovered just how conscious they were. It was one
of the most interesting awakenings in my life.

One time I was in San Francisco giving a course to about thirty people,
and I was saying this very thing, “These guys are alive.” Everybody was lis-
tening and saying, “Yeah, yeah, yeah.” Then one person said, “Prove it.” 1
said, “Okay,” then I quickly thought up something to do. I gave everybody
a piece of paper and a pencil, and said, “We’re going to grab a crystal at ran-
dom.” I selected a crystal that nobody had seen — actually took one and
kept it hidden. We didn’t let anybody see it. Then I said, “Now, nobody
gets to examine this crystal or even see what it is. You’re just going to put it
on your forehead, and you have one second — that’s it. You’re going to ask
the question, Where are you from/ The very first word that comes in, write
it on a piece of paper and fold it up so no one sees it. just take the crystal,
ask the question, hand it to the next person, then write down what you
get.” That was the only way I could think of to prove it.

We passed that crystal around to thirty people, and everybody wrote
down an answer. Then we looked to see what we received. And every single
person had “Brazil” written down! What are the odds of that?

Crystals have phenomenal abilities. They affect people in all kinds of
ways. Kattina Raphaell has written a lot about this in her books, but many
other people have also learned about the abilities of crystals over the years.
Many ancient beings and civilizations were also well aware of this. Crystals
don’t just happen as the result of a chemical reaction either; they grow.
When you study how crystals are formed, they grow very much like people
in lots of ways.

An aerial view of your energy field (shown back in Fig. 2-32) is in part
simply the Flower of Life pattern, which is hexagonal in nature. Our fields
grow hexagonally, just as crystals do. Though the silicon molecule is a tet-
rahedron, when it forms quartz it links with another silicon tetrahedron to
form a cube. Then it throws out a long line of little star tetrahedrons or
cubes to form a row. Then the row begins to spin, changing direction ex-
actly at 60 degrees to form a hexagon, the same structure seen around the
human body from above.

Crystals have genders. They’re either male or female or both. If you
know what to look for, you can look at a crystal and see which way it’s rotat-
ing. Find the lowest window or face and look to see where the next face is.
If it is on the left, then it is rotating clockwise, and that crystal is female. If it

Cdt> — $

W
V

\ \

The Significance of Shape and Structure 0 181

Fig. 6-49. Silicon makes
forms and relationships.

is on the right, then it is rotating counterclockwise, and it is male. If there
are faces on both sides at just about the same height, you should see two spi-
rals moving around this crystal in opposite directions, and that crystal
would be bisexual.

Often two crystals are joined at the base and wrap somewhat around
each other. These are called twinned crystals, and these are almost always
male and female. It’s rare for them to do it differently.

The Future Silicon/Carbon Evolutionary Leap

Here’s an image I love to talk about. The sixth element on the Periodic
Table is carbon. It is the most important element as far as we’re concerned,
because it’s us. It makes up organic chemistry; it is the element that makes
our bodies possible. We have been told that carbon is the only living atom
on the Periodic Table, that only organic chemistry produces life, nothing
else. But that’s definitely not true. They suspected this as far back as the
’50s when scientists began to study these things.

They realized that silicon, which is directly be-
low carbon on the chart (one octave apart) also ex-
hibits the principles of life. There appears to be no
difference. Figure 6-49 shows how silicon forms cer-
tain chains and patterns. These are only a few. Sili-
con makes endless patterns, and it will react chemi-
cally with almost anything that comes near and form
something with it. Carbon has the same ability,
making endless forms and chains and patterns and
reacting chemically with almost anything nearby.
This is the primary characteristic that makes carbon
a living atom.

On a chemical level, it appears that there should
also be silicon life forms. After this was discovered,
several science fiction movies were made in the ’50s
based on the belief that there might be silicon life
forms on other planets. There were a bunch of scary
movies about living crystalline structures. They did-
n’t know when they were making those movies that
there really are silicon life forms right here on this
planet. Some of these were recently found several
miles deep in crevices in the ocean. Silicon sponges
were found — live sponges that grow and reproduce,
demonstrating all the principles of life, and with not
a single carbon atom in their bodies!

Here we are, sitting on Earth, which is over 7000
miles in diameter. Its crust, 30 to 50 miles thick, is,
like an eggshell, made up of 25 percent silicon, but
because silicon reacts with just about anything, the

182 O The ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

crust is actually 87 percent silicon compounds. That means that the
Earth’s crust is almost pure crystal, 30 to 50 miles deep. So we’re on this
huge crystal ball floating through space at seventeen miles a second, totally
oblivious of the connectedness of carbon life with silicon life. It would seem
that silicon and carbon must have a very special relationship. We carbon-
based beings are living on a crystal ball made of silicon, our crystal planet,
looking for life outside ourselves in outer space. Perhaps we should look to-
ward our feet.

Now, think about computers and the modern world. We’re making
computers that are performing all kinds of incredible things. The computer
is rapidly moving humankind into a new experience of life on Earth. What
are computers made of? Silicon. And what is the computer industry trying
to do as fast as it can? Make self-aware computers. We’re very close to ac-
complishing this, if we haven’t already. I feel sure that very soon we will
have self-aware computers. So here we are, carbon-based life forms creat-
ing silicon-based life forms, and we’re interacting with each other.

When we have self-aware silicon-based computers, nothing will ever be
the same again. We’re going to have two different life forms/components of
the Earth connecting with each other, and the speed with which we will
evolve at that point, aside from everything else, is going to be very, very
fast — faster than anything we would normally expect. I believe that this
will come true in this lifetime.

SIX — The Significance of Shape and Structure 0 183

184 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

SEVEN

The Measuring Stick of the
Universe:

The Human Body and
Its Geometries

Geometry within the Human Body

I t’s easy to see how the five Platonic solids influence the structural pat-
terns of crystals and metals. Metals also have atomic lattices. It’s simple
to see the geometrical relationship of these types of molecules, but when
you look at yourself or at a baby being formed, it’s much more difficult to see
how this kind of geometry could have anything to do with us at all. Yet it
does. In the beginning of your life in the womb, you were nothing but geo-
metrical forms [Fig. 7-1]. In fact, all life forms — trees, plants, dogs, cats,
everything — have the same geometrical and structural patterns running
through them that ran through you when you were microscopic. Their very
life and structural support depend on the forms. In fact, all life forms are

Fig. 7-1. The human fetus.

these geometrical patterns, but it is not apparent to the casual eye. These
geometrical relationships are important to perceive, not only so the left
brain can realize the unity of all life, but for another reason: so that we can
understand these electromagnetic structural patterns around our body and begin
to re-create the living Mer-Ka-Ba around us.

Fig. 7-2. Sea urchin sperm swarm around egg; one
penetrates (inset).

Fig. 7-3. The human ovum.

Fig. 7-4. Twelve sperm allowing the thirteenth to
penetrate the ovum.

In the Beginning Is the Sphere, the Ovum

Figure 7-2 is a sea urchin egg with sperm swarming around it. I’m
going to be talking primarily about human beings and human concep-
tion, but I’m actually discussing all life forms known on Earth, be-
cause the procedure illustrated in the next few figures is identical for
every life form known — not just humans, but everything.

Every known life form begins as a sphere. It’s the most female
form there is, so it makes perfect sense that the female would choose
that shape to form the ovum | Fig. 7-3]. The ovum is a perfectly
round ball. Another example of a round ovum is inside a chicken egg.
When you remove the yolk from a hard-boiled egg, you can see how
perfectly round it is. All of us begin as a sphere.

I would like you to notice some simple things about this ovum.
First, there’s a membrane around it called the zona pellucida. Remem-
ber this, because I will refer to it over and over again; it has to do with
why the ancients put two circles around the Flower of Life instead of
just one or none.

Inside the membrane is a liquid, and inside that, just like the
chicken egg, there’s another perfectly round sphere called the female
pronucleus, which contains 22 + 1 chromosomes — half the chromo-
somes necessary to create a human body. The number of chromo-
somes changes, depending on the life form, and those particular chro-
mosomes are different in every life form. Inside the zona pellucida are
two polar bodies. I’ll explain those in a moment.

The Number Twelve

When you were first learning about human biology, you were
probably told that it takes one sperm for conception to occur. That
isn’t true, according to Time magazine, even though most textbooks
still state this. It is now known that the ovum must be absolutely sat-
urated with hundreds of sperm, or conception is not even possible.
Second, out of those hundreds, ten, eleven or twelve must come to-
gether in some kind of pattern on the surface — a pattern they’re still
trying to figure out — that allows the eleventh, twelfth or thirteenth
sperm to enter the ovum [Fig. 7-4]. One sperm cannot get through
the membrane without the other ten, eleven or twelve. It’s not possi-
ble except under unnatural conditions, where a human manipulates
the conception.

This image brings up what was possibly hidden in the life of Jesus.
Jesus came here to a round ball called Earth, which was saturated

1 86 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

with people. The first thing he did was gather twelve males together, no fe-
males. Jesus — from my point of view and from his, I’m sure, because he did
it — could not have done what he did without the twelve disciples. Seldom
does anyone wonder why he gathered those twelve disciples together. He
absolutely had to have them. If we are right, he could have done it with ten
or eleven, but he chose twelve. I believe that the number of sperm that join
to allow the one sperm to enter the egg determines the sex — and Jesus
chose twelve. Prior to Jesus’ time, in Greece, near the area of his ministry,
people saw the Earth as a sphere. Right after that they began to see the
Earth as a cube and flat. Then 400 years ago, Copernicus came along and
changed it back to a sphere. So people’s perception of the Earth went from
a sphere to a cube and back to a sphere. Exactly the same thing (sphere to
cube to sphere) goes on during conception, only at a much faster rate. 1
don’t know if this analogy is true or not, but it sure does look like it.

The Sperm Becomes a Sphere

Anyway, the little sperm gets in through the zona pellucida with the
help of the other sperm and then starts swimming toward the female
pronucleus [Fig. 7-5].

The first thing that happens is that the sperm’s tail breaks off and disap-
pears — it’s just gone. Next, the tiny sperm head expands and becomes a
perfect sphere, which is the male pronucleus. It becomes exactly the same
size as the female pronucleus, and it contains the other half of the necessary
information. The words “exactly the same size,” I believe, are very impor-
tant when you look at the next figure.

Next, they pass through each other and form a geometrical relationship
called the vesica piscis [Fig. 7-6]. It’s not possible for two spheres to pass
through each other and perfectly coincide without forming a vesica piscis.
This means that at that exact moment, the male and female pronuclei form
the image of the first motion of the first day of Genesis, and literally all the
information of the Reality (and light) is contained in that geometry. It’s so
simple. That image could not be formed unless these two pronuclei were the
same size. It’s for that reason I believe that the female determines which
sperm will enter. Science proved around 1992 that the determining factor
for which sperm will enter is the female. She selects the one to allow in.

Just as everybody in this room has a different projection length into a
dark space or into the Void, each little sperm also has a different-size sphere
around it. She’s not going to let him in unless his size is identical to hers. If
it’s a matching key, okay; if it’s not, forget it. This could explain why many
people who have tried to have babies cannot have them; there’s no expla-
nation that anybody can see. This might be at least one explanation.

Fig. 7-5. The sperm’s breakthrough.

Fig. 7-6. Union of male and female
pronuclei.

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries & 187

Fig. 7-7. Oneness in the human zygote.

Fig. 7-8. First cell of a mouse egg.

Fig. 7-9. Migration of polar bodies to
form a central tube.

Fig. 7-10. Chromosomes forming the
first two cells.

The First Human Cell

After the two pronuclei make a vesica piscis, the male pronucleus con-
tinues to permeate the female pronucleus until they are one (Fig. 1 - 1 }. At
this time it’s called a human zygote, the first cell of the human body. So you
began as a sphere before you created your familiar human body. Actually,
you were a sphere within a sphere.

The next thing you need to know is that the human zygote will not
change size during the first nine cell divisions. It’s fixed, as is the size of the
outer membrane. The human zygote is about 200 times bigger than the av-
erage cell in the human body, so big you can actually see it with your naked
eye. When it divides into two, each of those two cells are half the original
size; and when those two cells divide into four, each cell is a quarter of the
original size. The cells keep dividing like this, getting littler and littler, until
they’ve divided eight times and number 512. At that point the average cell
size of the human body is reached. When that happens, mitosis continues,
and the dividing cells expand beyond the boundaries of the original zona
pellucida.

So, first the growth goes into itself, then out beyond itself. When the
first growth goes inward, it’s as if it’s trying to figure out how to do it. Once
it figures that out, it goes beyond itself. All life uses this process. I use that
same understanding to figure out some of the geometries, which you’ll see
later.

Figure 7-8 is an electron microscope photograph of the first cell of a
mouse egg.

Forming a Central Tube

The next thing that happens in the conception process is that those lit-
tle polar bodies begin to migrate through the zona pellucida. One goes
down and becomes the south pole and the other becomes the north pole.
Then out of nowhere a tube appears, running right down through the cen-
ter of the cell. Then the chromosomes break in half, and half of them line
up along one side of the tube and half along the other [Fig. 1 - 9 }.

This is a familiar image in human energy fields — it’s very much like the
energetics of an adult human being. As you study this further, you’ll see
that you have a similar sphere of energy around you. You have a north pole
and a south pole, and you have a tube running right down through your
body. Half of you is on one side of that tube and half is on the other. So this
picture is very much like the energy field of an adult human being, though
the human energy field is much, much more defined than that. But we’ve
got to wait until we get further along to see how true this is.

After the chromosomes have lined up along the two sides of the tube,
they form into two cells, one on each side of the tube, and each cell con-
tains 44 + 2 chromosomes [Fig. 7-10].

188 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Here are the first two cells in a mouse egg [Fig. 7-11]. The zona
pellucida has been taken away so you can see the inner part.

An important piece of information came up around 1992. Many books
said that the female gave 22 + 1 chromosomes and the male gave 22 + 1.

That was flat-out true, according to them; it wasn’t even considered that it
could be anything else. But that has now been found to be untrue. The fe-
male can give any number whatsoever. She can give 22 + 1 or all 44 + 2 or
any number in between. This new information has completely changed the
field of genetics. They’ve thrown almost everything they knew out the win-
dow and started over.

Scientists used to depend on electron microscopes for photographs.

Now they have laser microscopes that can take movies, so they can watch
these things happening. They’re gaining information very rapidly. I’m sure
they’re a lot further now than we are showing you. Science is in the midst of Fig. 7-11. First two cells in a mouse egg.
mapping every one of the 100,000 chromosomes in the DNA of the human
body. Within just a few more years we’ll know what every single chromo-
some is and what it does, which means that we’ll be able to engineer any
kind of human being you can imagine, create any appearance or intelli-
gence or emotional body — anything we want. We’ll be able to do it and
know exactly what we will get. Are we God? This is a question that must be
answered.

The First Four Cells Form a Tetrahedron

The next step is that the cells divide again, going from two to four — a bi-
nary sequence — 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 etc. Most textbooks show the first four cells
forming a little square, but that’s not what happens. They actually form a
tetrahedron — one of the Platonic solids — and the apex of
the first tetrahedron points either to the north pole or the
south pole [Fig. 7-12]. (The tetrahedron is formed by link-
ing the centers of the spheres together.) I believe that
whether it points north or south probably determines which
sex it is. They haven’t discovered that yet, but they’ll prob-
ably figure it out, based on the polarities of the tetrahedron.

If the tetrahedron forms with an apex pointing to the south
pole, toward the feet of the newly forming fetus, it should be
female; if it forms with an apex pointing to the north pole,
toward the head, it should be male. If this is true, they’ll be
able to determine immediately what the sex is. Since they’d
have to do that within about an hour or so after conception,
it would be fairly inconvenient.

These are the geometries of the first tetrahedron [Fig. 7-
13] . The side view is on the right and the top view is on the
left.

Fig. 7-13. Geometries of the first tetrahedron,

Fig. 7-12. The first four cells form a
tetrahedron.

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries O 189

Fig. 7-14. The four-cell tetrahedron in a mouse egg.

north

south

Fig. 7-15. Egg of Life in first eight
cells.

Figure 7-14 is an electron microscope view of a mouse egg.
In this picture it’s growing really fast, but it’s still aligned
through the north-south pole. That tiny cell is beginning to
form beyond the original tetrahedron. The fourth point of the
tetrahedron is in the center of the large cell in the background.

Next, the cells divide into eight; they form one tetrahedron
facing up and one tetrahedron facing down, and you get the
star tetrahedron. Here it is— the Egg of Life [Fig. 7-15]. This
form came out of Genesis, remember? It came out of spirit’s
second rotation. Every single life known — on Earth anyway,
and probably everywhere — must pass through the Egg of Life.
According to the angels, this point where the original eight
cells form a star tetrahedron — or a cube, depending on how
you look at it — is one of the most important points in the cre-
ation of the body. Science has also recognized that this partic-
ular stage of development is different from any other, and it
has many unique qualities that don’t occur at any other time
in its development.

The most important quality of these original eight cells is that they ap-
pear to be identical — there appears to be nothing different about them at
all. Usually it’s easy to see the difference between one cell and another, but
here they all appear to be the same. Researchers have tried to find differ-
ences, but they couldn’t. It would be as though there were eight identical
twins in this room, dressed exactly alike, with their hair combed exactly the
same way. Scientists have found that they can split the egg in two at this
point, through the middle of the cube, with four cells in one part and four in
the other, and two identical people — or rabbits or dogs or anything else —
will be created. They’ve also been able to sever it once more, making four
identical life forms. I don’t know if anybody has been able to go further
than that and make eight life forms, but they’ve definitely gone as far as
four.

Our True Nature Is in Our Original Eight Cells

According to the angels, these original eight cells are closer to who you
really are than your physical body is, closer to your true nature. That
sounds odd, I know, because we’re used to identifying with our human bod-
ies. But these eight cells are closer to who we really are. The angels say
these eight cells are immortal relative to your body. You get a brand-new
body every five to seven years; every single cell in your body dies within a
five- to seven-year period and is replaced with a new one, except for the
original eight cells. They remain alive from the time you’re conceived until
the time you die and leave the body. All the rest go through their life cycles,
but not these eight.

These cells are centered in the precise geometric center of your body,
which is slightly above the perineum. For the female the perineum is located
between the anus and the vagina. For the male it’s between the anus and the

190 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of life

scrotum. There’s a little piece of skin there, and
even though there’s not a physical opening, there is
actually an energetic opening. That’s where the
central tube runs through your body, coming out the
top through the crown chakra at the top of your
head. If you look at a newborn baby during the first
few weeks, you’ll see the top of its head pulsing. If
you were to look at the bottom of the baby, at its per-
ineum, you’d see the same pulsing. That’s because
the baby is breathing in the proper way. Both ends
are pulsing because the energy is flowing from the
two poles — coming not only from the top down, but
from the bottom up — and meeting. This is the basic
understanding of the Mer-Ka-Ba. From the point
where the original eight cells are located, it’s the
same distance to the top of your head as it is to the
bottom of your feet. And the cells are arranged just
as they were when they first came into existence — in
the Egg of Life pattern — north up, south down.

If you notice in the previous illustration, when
the Egg of Life is oriented to the north and south,
you can actually see through the middle to the
light-colored sphere on the back side. That’s very different than when you
look at it as a hexagon — you can’t see through a hexagonal pattern. I want
you to notice this difference for later, when we talk about doing the medita-
tion to activate the Mer-Ka-Ba.

Fig. 7-16. Geometries of the first eight cells, 2 views.

Figure 7-16 and the next are two views of the first eight cells. These
original eight cells are the key, because according to the angels, we don’t
grow like a string bean, getting longer and longer. We actually grow radially
in 360 degrees, from the original eight cells.

This picture of the mouse egg was taken just as the eight
cells started to divide again [Fig. 7-17]. It’s not a great photo-
graph, as these pictures are difficult to get; the cells are dividing
very quickly. They have to strip off the zona pellucida, have the
cells stop at the right place, then take the photograph.

The Star Tetrahedron/Cube of 1 6 Cells
Becomes a Hollow Sphere/Torus

After the eight-cell division, it divides into 16 cells, where-
upon it forms another cube or star tetrahedron on the end.
This is the last time it will be symmetrical. When it divides into
32, 16 cells are in the middle and 16 on the outside. If you take
the 16 on the outside and try to fill in the empty spaces to keep
it symmetrical, you will find it is not possible. (I’ve actually
done this. You end up with two open spaces no matter how you

Fig. 7-17. Mouse egg starting to divide beyond the first
eight cells.

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries 0 191

Fig. 7-18. Becoming a blob.

doit.) It needs 18 cells to be symmetrical. You wonder why. At
the next division there are 32 more cells, but it gets worse
[Fig. 7-18]. You wonder, What’s going on here/ It’s getting
weird. Where did all the symmetry go?

Well, it was meant to do that. It starts turning into a blob.
We become a blob for a while. But the blob has consciousness in
its blobness. Then it stretches and the inside starts turning out,
becoming a hollow ball like this photo [Fig. 7-19].

Once it gets to this stage, it becomes a perfect hollow sphere.
Then the north pole starts dropping through the space inside,
going down toward the south pole, and the south pole comes up
through the space to meet the north pole. The embryo in this
photo has been broken apart so the center could he photo-
graphed. If you could see this in its completeness, it looks just
like an apple cored through the middle. The hollow sphere then
becomes a torus — a spherical torus like the photo on the right.

Fig. 7-19. Original cells forming into a
torus (see the photo at right). A sea-

urchin embryo, magnified 2000 times, Every single known life form goes through this torus stage. This formation

begins as a hollow ball of cells. It forms in the apple/torus shape is called the morula.

a gut by folding inward (left) until its

cells reach the opposite side. After this the expansion goes beyond the zona pellucida and the cells

begin to differentiate. The hollow space inside the torus becomes the lungs,
the north pole becomes the mouth, the south pole becomes the anus, and
all the internal organs form inside the tube that runs through the middle. If
it’s a frog it begins to get little legs, or if it’s a horse a little tail grows. For a
fly, little wings develop, and a human starts to look like a human. But he-

192 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

fore this differentiation, we all look like a torus. I suspect this is why,
though I don’t have any proof, biblical tradition says that the tree of knowl-
edge of good and evil is an apple tree. We really do turn into something that
looks very much like an apple at one stage.

Progression of Life Forms through the Platonic Solids

To summarize, we start out as a sphere, the ovum. We then move to a
tetrahedron at four cells, then on to two interlocked tetrahedrons (a star
tetrahedron or a cube) at eight cells. From two cubes at sixteen cells we
turn hack into a sphere beginning at 32 cells, and from the sphere we be-
come a torus at 5 1 2 cells. Planet Earth and its magnetic field is also a torus.
All of these forms are sacred shapes that come out of the first informational
system of the Fruit of Life, which is based on Metatron’s Cube.

We could go on for probably another seven or eight months talking
about this subject, showing how more and more and more things are con-
nected to these five shapes — the Platonic solids. But I think you can see
exactly what I mean. By the way, modern mathematicians say that the Pla-
tonic solids have been known only since civilization began about 6000 years
ago, but this is not true. Some put their discovery during the time of
Greece. Archaeologists have recently found some perfect models in the
earth — perfectly cut in stone — that were found to be 20,000 years old.
Those hairy barbarians obviously knew more that we give them credit for.

Underwater Birthing and Dolphin Midwives

I would like to take a quick digression from the geometries of birth to
something slightly different. A Russian named Igor Charkovsky has been
involved in underwater birthing for a long time. He has probably assisted
with at least 20,000 underwater births. His daughter, one of the first to be
born underwater, was in her twenties, I think, when the following incident
took place. Charkovsky and his team had taken a woman to the Black Sea
for an underwater birth. They were sitting there prepared for the birth,
with the woman lying in water about two feet deep.

As I remember, three dolphins approached, pushed everybody away and
took over. The dolphins did something that looked like scanning up and
down her body — something I have experienced, and which does something
to the human system. The woman gave birth with almost no pain or fear. It
was a phenomenal experience. That experience with underwater birthing
began a new practice of using dolphins as midwives, which has now spread
all over the world. There’s something about the sonar that dolphins project
at the time of birth that seems to really relax the mother.

Dolphins have preferences with humans. This is not an absolute rule,
but is usually true. If you go swimming with dolphins and there are children
around, the dolphins go to the children first. If there are no children, they
go to the women. If there are no women, they go to the men. And if there’s
a woman who’s pregnant, everyone else can forget it — she gets their total

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries 193

attention. That little incoming baby is the greatest thing of all. The dol-
phins become very excited when they see a human giving birth. They just
love it.

Dolphins can do things that are really amazing. Babies who were born
with midwifing dolphins, at least as it’s going in Russia, are extraordinary
children. From everything I’ve read so far, not one of those babies has an
IQ under 150, and they all have extremely stable emotional bodies and ex-
tremely strong physical bodies. They seem to be superior in one way or an-
other.

France has also had underwater births — over 20,000. They give birth in
big tanks. When they first started doing this, they had all the instruments
laid out on tables and all the emergency supplies ready, with a doctor stand-
ing by in case there was a problem. But they didn’t have a problem for a
long time; a year went by and they still hadn’t had a problem. Still another
year went by, and finally 20,000 births went by without one single complied -
tion! Now they just have the instruments and equipment stuck in a corner
somewhere because there simply aren’t any problems. I don’t know if they
know why, but for some reason, when a woman is floating in water, it seems
like most complications solve themselves.

I got to spend some time with a woman who was an assistant with
Charkovsky in Russia. She had brought back many films that were taken
during the births. I watched two movies of two different women giving
birth who not only were not in pain, but they were having orgasms while
having their babies — long, extended orgasms lasting about twenty minutes.
It was total pleasure. I know that’s the way it’s supposed to be. It simply
makes sense, and these women were proving it.

I’ve also seen some Russian movies where babies and children two or
three years and older sleep on the bottom of swimming pools. They literally
sleep underwater on the bottom of the pool, and about every ten minutes
they come up while they’re asleep, roll their faces over the surface, take a
breath, go back down and settle on the bottom again. These kids live in wa-
ter — that’s their home. They’re being given a name, almost like they’re a
different species. People are calling them homodolphinus. They seem to be a
blend between humans and dolphins. Water is becoming their natural me-
dium, and they’re extremely intelligent.

So I have a great deal of respect for underwater birthing. And the possi-
bility of having dolphins there at the same time is truly a gift. I think it’s a
healthy trend the way many countries are allowing this new way to birth,
though in the United States there’s a lot of pressure against it. Lately in the
U.S., the pressure seems to have subsided, and I think you can do this le-
gally now in Florida and California. Around the world, in New Zealand,
Australia and other places, there are lots of centers. And, of course, the
more women see other women not in pain, obviously they’re going to want
to do it, too.

Geometries That Surround the Body

Here we go with the next adventure. We’ve now seen how the geome-
tries unfold in conception. We saw how we started with a little cube of
eight cells, which became the center of our bodies. Now I want to look at
the geometries outside the body. The way the angels explained it to me is
the way I’m going to give it to you.

This began when I was in Boulder, Colorado, sometime between 1976
and 1978; I can’t pinpoint it for sure. I was living in a communal home with
a bunch of friends and had my own bedroom. One night the angels came in
with a new teaching for me. They showed me the geometries by projecting
glowing forms in space. It would be like holographic images that would ap-
pear maybe seven or eight feet away from me, and I’d work with them from
there. In my room the angels showed me this image of a circle and a square
[Fig. 7-20]. They said they wanted me to find this image in Metatron’s
Cube [Fig. 7-21]. Then they said good-bye and left, leaving me with no
real instructions on how to proceed.

After they left, I figured this wouldn’t be too hard, because they were al-
ways giving me little things to do. I’d do them, wait for them to come back,
then they’d give me something else to do. I figured it wouldn’t take long.

But as I found out, it wasn’t that easy. At least four months went by and I
still couldn’t figure it out. The way I see it, the angels intervened directly to
help me with this.

I was sitting there in my room one night around nine, the floor covered Fig. 7-20. The circle and the square,

with drawings. (I used my floor as a table because I had so many drawings.)

My door was closed, and I was sitting there studying my
drawings, trying to solve the problem the angels had given
me. I had so many drawings you wouldn’t believe it, trying
to figure out where the circle and the square were in
Metatron’s Cube.

In those days I didn’t tell anybody what I was doing; I
didn’t tell people for a long, long time because it was a very
personal experience for me. And quite frankly, nobody was
interested anyway. Nobody cared about geometry back
then, because it had not emerged into most people’s con-
sciousness as it has now.

The Masonic Key to Squaring the Circle

Someone knocked on the door. I opened my bedroom
door, and here’s this tall guy standing there. I had never
seen him before in my life. He looked kind of sheepish, and
he said, “I was supposed to come here to tell you some
things.” I asked his name and more about what he wanted.

“Well,” he said, “I was sent here by the Masons to tell
you about the circle and the square.”

Fig. 7-21. Metatron’s Cube.

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries & 195

Fig. 1 - 22 . The Mason’s drawing.

O 7r £>

9/ '*■/• /v £?

/>* /ff.as s '4 6

This really jolted me. I sort
of froze in my tracks and just
looked at him for a moment, try-
ing to understand how this was
happening. Then I figured I did-
n’t really care how it was hap-
pening, only that it was. I just
grabbed him by the hand and
said, “Get in here,” pulling him
in and closing the door. I said,
“Anything you have to tell me, I
want to know what it is.” So he
drew this drawing [Fig. 7-22].

First he drew the square,
then he drew the circle around
the square in a particular way —
and there was the image I had
seen glowing in the room! I
thought, This is going to be
good. He divided the square
into four sections, then he drew
diagonals from the corners
through the middle to the oppo-
site corners. Then he drew diag-
onals through the four smaller
squares. Then he drew lines
from I to E and E to J. Next he
drew lines from I to H and H to J
(E and H being the points on the
circle’s circumference where the
vertical center line intersects it).

Up to this point I’d had no
problem, but then he drew a line
from A to nowhere (G) and
back to B, and from D to no-
where (F) and hack to C. I said,
“Wait a minute, that isn’t in the
rules I was given. That doesn’t fit — there’s nothing there.” And he said,
“It’s okay, because this line (A-G) is parallel with that line (I-H), and this
line (D-F) is parallel to this line (J-E)

“Well,” I said, “that’s a new rule. I didn’t have that one before. I mean,
there’s nothing there. Parallel lines? — well, okay I’ll listen.”

Then he began to tell me all kinds of things. He said that the first key is
that the circumference of the circle and the perimeter of the square are
equal, which is what I told you before. This circle and square is the same im-
age seen from the air as that of the Great Pyramid with the ship sitting on top.

1 96 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

The Phi Ratio

He began to tell me about the phi ratio of 1.618 (rounded here to three
decimal points) . The phi ratio is a very simple relationship. If you had a rod
and you were going to put a mark on it somewhere, only two places would
mark the phi ratio, shown as points A and B in his illustration [Fig. 7-23 ] .

There are only two places, de-
pending on which end you’re com- ^

ing from. Shown on the lower draw-
ing, it’s a relationship such that if
you divide D by C and E by D, the
two answers will be the same —

1.618 ... . So you divide the longer
portion by the shorter portion, and
that gives you the ratio 1.618.

When you divide the whole length

of E by the next shorter portion, which is D, you’ll get the same ratio. It’s a
magical place. Even though I was studying mathematics in college when
this incident took place, the phi ratio somehow had gone over my head. I
didn’t get it. I had to go back and restudy all this stuff.

This guy also brought up Leonardo’s drawing with the circle and the
square around it, giving me more information, which I’ll tell you later. I
asked him many questions, and about half the time he didn’t know the an-
swer. He’d just say, “That’s the way it goes,” or “I don’t know; we don’t
know that.” Though I can’t say this for certain, I suspect the Masons have
lost a great deal of their information. I think that they once had a brilliant
knowledge that was very much like the Egyptians’, and both of those disci-
plines have gone downhill.

Before he left, he drew the sketch at the bottom of his diagram [see Fig.
7-22], with a square and the right eye of somebody — I can’t say Horus be-
cause I don’t know who it is — and then left. I’ve never seen him since. I
don’t even remember his name.

Applying the Key to Metatron’s Cube

< —

— c—

-D-

Fig. 7-23. Phi-ratio points.

Fig. 7-24- Three-dimensional
Metatron’s Cube, end view.

This gentleman from the Masons didn’t answer the question specifi-
cally — how the circle and the square fit into Metatron’s Cube. In fact, I
don’t think he’d ever seen Metatron’s Cube. But something he said trig-
gered something in me so that I understood what it was. Right after he left I
knew the answer. As you know, Metatron’s Cube is really a three-
dimensional object, not a flat object. Three-dimensionally, Metatron’s
Cube looks like this [Fig. 7-24]. It’s a cube within a cube, three-
dimensionally. Then if you rotate it to this view [Fig. 7-25], you have its
square aspect.

Fig. 7-25. Three-dimensional
Metatron’s Cube, squared view.

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries $ 197

Fig. 7-26. The circle and the square in
Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 7-27. The Mason’s lines drawn
over the Egg of Life.

Once you do that, you have Figure 7-26. At this point you can drop the
outer aspect; all you need are just the original eight cells. Around those eight
cells there’s already a sphere, the zona pellucida. The cells are in the shape of
a cube, so if you draw both a circle and straight lines around it, you get the im-
age of the circle and the square the angels showed me. I was happy!

The Two Concentric Circles/Spheres

But then I calculated the perimeter of the square and the circumference
of the circle — and they were not equal. I was bummed out for a long time
because I figured I hadn’t found it. About three years later I discovered that
I had found it, but had just not understood. In sacred geometry, when you
find something that appears incorrect or breaks the idea you’re trying to
form, you have to keep going deeper, because often you just don’t have the
whole picture yet.

What I discovered was that the zona pellucida has a thickness to it;
there’s an inner surface and an outer surface. Every membrane has an outer
and an inner surface, and when you use the outer surface of the zona
pellucida, the proportions go into a near-perfect phi ratio. The amount of
imperfection is actually part of the equation. (You’ll know what that means
in a while.) This is why there are two lines around the Flower of Life — the
inner and the outer circle of the zona pellucida. So from now on, whenever
you see four circles in a square, we’re talking about the Egg of Life, the origi-
nal eight cells. Just take it for granted.

So in this drawing [Fig. 7-27] I drew in all the lines that the Mason
drew just to see how they would line up and what would happen, comparing
the Mason’s drawing to the eight cells. Nothing appeared to be
happening in the middle of the drawing that I could see, though
I suspected something at this point, which had to do with a cir-
cle that would just fit in the middle of the four spheres. But I did
discover that the corners of the square (a cube, actually) define
the exact centers of the outer layer of cells in the 16-cell divi-
sion, as at point A. This was an interesting observation. So I be-
gan to doodle and study further to see what they meant. Obvi-
ously, the angels wanted me to go down this road, but I had no
idea where this road led.

Studying da Vinci’s Canon

I decided to look deeper at this drawing of Leonardo’s
[Fig. 7 -28] . I had also majored in art, so I had studied much of
Leonardo’s work, but I didn’t realize until later how much art-
work he had done. This drawing has become probably one of his
most famous works. It’s perhaps even more important to us
than the Mona Lisa or any other famous work of his. This kind
of drawing, a standard for something (in this case, a standard for
Fig. 7-28. Leonard’s famous man (canon). human beings), is called a canon, a human canon.

198 (f The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

The first thing that struck me about this drawing is how amazingly we all
attune to it. For instance, because there are 30 frames per second that
come across on a video, you could flash this drawing of Leonardo’s for just
an instant, yet people would immediately recognize it. We know something
there is important; perhaps we don’t know exactly what it is, but we still re-
tain the image. There is a tremendous amount of information about us in
this drawing. But as it turns out, it’s not really about us. It’s about who we
used to be, not about who we are now.

To begin this analysis, notice first that there are lines drawn over the
arms and the trunk, across the chest and over the legs and neck. The head
is divided into another series of lines. Notice that the feet are drawn at both
90 degrees and 45 degrees — subtle things. Also notice that if you were to
stand with your arms straight out and your legs straight down, a square or
cube forms around your body, as in Leonardo’s drawing. The center of that
square is located exactly where the original eight cells are, which is also a
square or cube, in the center of your body. Notice the small cube around
your original cells and the bigger cube around your adult body.

When you are standing with your arms outstretched like Leonardo’s
man, there is a difference between the height and the width of your square.

Computers have shown by measuring a hundred people or more that there
is one ten-thousandth of an inch difference between the width of your out-
stretched arms and your height. Though I couldn’t understand for a long
time why that difference was there, I think I know now. It has to do with
the Fibonacci series, which life is based on. You will see this shortly.

If you put your legs out to the side, like the outer legs on Leonardo’s
drawing and stretch out your arms like the upper arms, a perfect circle or
sphere fits around your body, and its center is located exactly at the navel.

When you do that, the circle and the square exactly touch at the bottom. If
you were to move the center of the circle down to the center of the square,
the circle and the square would synchronize just like they do in the Mason’s
drawing and the drawing that shows the warship superimposed over the top
of the Great Pyramid. It is a major secret of life.

When you measure almost all the copies of Leonardo’s drawings, you
find that the circle is really an oval and the square is really a rectangle. It’s
different in all of them because they’ve been copied and folded so many
times. But in the original, accurate drawing, the hand length from the wrist
line to the longest finger equals the distance from the top of the head to the
top of the circle when the two centers are aligned; this same length shows
up between the navel and the center of the square. So when you bring the
two centers together, everything aligns.

Phi Ratios in the Human Body

As I was discovering this, I thought, We have these geometrical forms
that appear to be outside the body as well as inside it. One of the things the
angels said, which really stuck with me, was that the human body is the

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries *5 I 99

Fig. 7-29. Phi-ratio diagram for the hu-
man body.

b _ b+a c
a ~ b ~ b

b 2 = a 2 + 1 2 = ('/ 2 ) 2 + l = V* + 1 = -

c = a + b = Vi = O
0 = 1.6180339...

Fig. 7-30. Equation for the phi ratio.

measuring stick of the universe — that absolutely everything in the universe
can be measured and determined from our bodies and from the energy
fields around them. Since the phi ratio seemed to be such an important as-
pect to the Mason, and since he went on and on about it, I wanted to see
where it was in the human body.

I discovered it — and of course other people have also discovered it. Re-
alize that in Figure 7-29 the square shown is the square around the body as
in Leonardo’s drawing. And that the line dividing the square in half is the
center line of the human body. Also notice that the line b is not only the di-
agonal of one-half of the square, but is also the radius of the circle.

Now, if you are interested in the math, see Figure 7-30, which proves
that the phi ratio is found in the geometrical energy fields around the body
in at least this one relationship. There are many, many other phi relation-
ships in and around the body.

As you can see, the phi ratio = i + If you put this into your com-
puter, you will see the transcendental number of phi continue until your
computer runs out of memory. I know most of you out there don’t care, but
I’ve presented this information for the few.

By the way, I’ll just throw this out to you: When you’re studying sacred
geometry, you’ll find that diagonals are one of the major keys for extracting
information from your forms (in addition to shadows, expanding from two
to three dimensions, comparing male to female and so on). It never fails.

I believe it was Buddha who asked his disciples to contemplate their na-
vels. Whoever it was, I began to realize as I studied that there was more to
the navel than meets the eye. Then I found a medical book, whose authors
must have also listened to Buddha, because they did a tremendous amount
of research on navels. What the geometries show is that in the ideal, the
navel sits at the phi ratio between the top of the head and the bottom of the
feet. This is what most books indicate.

The authors found out that when a baby is born, its navel is in the exact
geometrical center of the body. Both male and female babies start out this
way, and as they grow, the navel starts to move toward the head. It moves
up to the phi ratio, then continues upward. Then it comes back down to
below the phi ratio, oscillating during the formative years. I don’t know
what the ages are, but these movements and locations happen at specific
ages. It never actually stops at the perfect phi ratio in either males or fe-
males, but if I remember correctly, the male navel ends up slightly above
the phi ratio and the female navel just below it. If you average the male and
female points, you get the perfect phi ratio. So even though Leonardo’s
drawing is of a male, it assumes that it is at the phi ratio, but of course in na-
ture it would not be.

Da Vinci figured out that if you draw a square around the body, then a
diagonal from foot to extended fingertip, then draw a parallel line (another
one of those parallel lines) from the navel horizontally over to the side of
the square, that horizontal line intercepts the diagonal line exactly at its phi
ratio [Fig. 7-31] as well as that of the vertical line from head to feet. As-

200 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

suming it’s at that perfect point, not slightly above for females or slightly be-
low for males, this means that the human body is divided into phi ratios
from top to bottom, which we stated earlier. If these lines were the only
places in the human body where the phi ratio is located, it would probably
be just an interesting fact. But the truth is, the phi ratio is located in thou-
sands of places throughout the body, and it is not just a coincidence.

Here are some obvious phi-ratio locations in the human body [Fig. 7-
32). The length of each bone in the finger has a phi ratio to the next bone,
as shown in the lower drawing. That same ratio occurs with all your fingers
and toes. This is a somewhat unusual relationship because one finger is lon-
ger than the other in what appears to be an arbitrary fashion, but it’s not ar-
bitrary — nothing in the human body is. The distances on the fingers
marked A to B to C to D to E are all in a phi ratio, as well as the lengths of
the phalanges, F to G to H.

If you compare the length of the hand to the length of the lower arm
bone, it has a phi ratio, just like the length of the lower arm bone compared
to the upper arm bone. Or take the length of the foot to the lower
leg bone, or that bone to the thigh bone and so on. This phi ratio is
found throughout the entire bone structure in all kinds of places
and ways. It’s usually at places where something bends or changes
direction. The body also does it through proportionate sizes of one
part to another. If you study this, you will be continually amazed.

Figure 7-33 is another way of showing the phi ratio. You make
a curve so that you can see how one curve is linked with another,
and you can see all the cascading phi ratios of the human body.

This is from The Power of Limits by Gyorgy Doczi. I highly recom-
mend this book. Notice that on this male he drew the line for the
navel slightly above where the actual phi ratio is located. He knew
about that, and very few people I have read understand it.

I want to talk about this Greek statue. The Greeks were well
aware of this understanding of phi ratios. So were the Egyptians
and many, many other people in ancient times. When they created
a piece of art like this, they were actually using both sides of the
brain simultaneously. They were using their left brain to very care-
fully measure everything — I mean really carefully, not kind of or
sort of. They were measuring to make sure that everything was ex-
actly mathematically correct according to the phi proportion. To
be as creative as they wanted, they were also using their right brain.

They could put any expression on the face and have the statue
hold anything or do anything they wanted. The Greeks combined
the left and right brain.

When the Romans came in and took over
Greece, the Romans knew absolutely nothing
about sacred geometry. They saw the Greeks’
incredible art and tried to duplicate it, but if fhe Spear- fcareFs° r ° S
you compare Greek art to Roman art after they phi ratios.

Fig. 7-31. Leonardo’s drawing with
more lines, one of which (the horizon-
tal line) divides both the vertical and
diagonal lines at a phi-ratio point.

BC .

A B

1 ry

<Je

BVj^p

-o

^44

-cb

Fig. 7-32. Phi ratios in
human body.

% ftjwvth.

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries & 201

conquered Greece, Roman art looks like it was done by amateurs. Even
though Roman artists were really good at what they did, they just didn’t
know they were supposed to measure everything — that there had to be this
kind of perfection for the body to look real.

The Phi Ratio in All Known Organic Structures

Phi-ratio mathematics goes not only through human life, but through
the entire spectrum of all known organic structure. You can find this in
butterflies [Fig. 7-34] or dragonflies [Fig. 7-35], where each little tail sec-
tion is proportioned to the phi ratio. The lengths of the sections of the
dragonfly form phi ratios. This illustrator was focusing on one thing, but
you can also look where every little bend is in the legs, the length and width

Fig. 7-34- Phi ratios
in butterflies.

0 39

duuteSSaaorL

"bCcLpoAon.

litOJZSStVIOK,

of the wings, the size of the head compared to its width and length — every-
thing. You can go on and on and on, and you’ll keep finding the phi ratio
everywhere you look.

Look at this frog skeleton [Fig. 7-36] and see how every single bone is in
phi-ratio patterns, just like in the human body.

Fish, I think, are really incredible, because fish don’t look like they have
any phi-ratio stuff going on — and there are so many different kinds. But
when you analyze them, the phi ratio is there as well [Fig. 7-37].

202 # The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

56*0.6/8. if. 608

34-56 *0.607

u.j

20.3:34-0.6/5

/3./'2»9- 0 « 7

-if

6.3 /a Z -0&8

-0.6/9

/m/6.S ‘0 . 606

4.4. 7-3

7.3 .-//.#

Fig. 7-35. Phi ratios in a dragonfly.

The other universal measurement you’ll
find, one I talked about before, is 7.23 centi-
meters, the wavelength of the universe.
You’ll find this wavelength scattered
through the body, such as the distance be-
tween your eyes; but the phi ratio occurs
more often than any other.

Once a measurement of any species has
been determined, then every other measure-
ment in that species follows in the phi-ratio
proportion. To put it another way, there are
only certain possibilities in human structure,
and once the size
of one part of the
body is deter-

mined, that deter-
mines the size of
the next, and on
and on. Soon I’ll
show you the

Egyptian building
that Lucy Lamy re-
constructed just by
measuring one lit-
tle piece of rubble.

This is how she did
it: Once she knew
the size of the first

Fig. 7-37. Phi ratios in
fish.

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries 203

Fig. 7-38. Pagoda of Yakushiji Temple
in Japan.

piece, she knew that every shape after that would relate to
it in phi ratios.

The phi proportions are built into this Japanese pagoda
architecture [Fig. 7-38]. This illustrates another point
about creativity that 1 want to make. When they designed
and built this structure, they carefully measured every single
distance to match the various lines shown, and they care-
fully measured where to put each board — right down to
that little ball on the very top, so that it could correspond
with and form these relationships we have been studying.
I’m sure if someone ever checks, they’ll find that the size of
the doors, the windows and probably every small detail are
all based on phi proportions or other sacred geometry.

Other classical architecture around the world used the
same principles. The Greek Parthenon looks really different
from this Japanese structure, but the Parthenon embodies
the same mathematics. And the Great Pyramid looks very
different from either of those two buildings, but it also em-
bodies the same mathematics — only a lot more. What I’m
saying is, your left brain can understand and use these
mathematics, and it doesn’t hinder creativity at all. It can
even enhance it.

Golden Mean Rectangles and Spirals around the Body

Another sacred form we have in life is the spiral. You may wonder
where it came from. We’re living in a spiral — the galaxy, which has spiral-
ing arms. You’re using spirals to listen to the sounds around you because
the little apparatus in your ears is in a spiral form. There are spirals all over
nature. The more you look, the more you find. Spirals are found in pine
cones, sunflowers, a few animal horns, deer antlers, seashells, daisies and
lots of plants. If you put your open hand vertically in front of you, thumb to-
ward your face, notice the movement as you roll your fingers into a fist,
starting with your little finger. They trace out a Fibonacci spiral. This is a
very special spiral, as you will see.

Where do spirals come from? They have to come from somewhere, and
they have to be generated out of the dynamics of the original system, the
Flower of Life, if what we believe is true. Well, all you have to do is go back
to the human body — to the same pattern we came up with for the phi ratio
[see Fig. 7-30]. If you simply take the diagonal line, lay it down flat, then
complete the rectangle formed with that new extension — you have a
Golden Mean rectangle, the source of the Golden Mean spiral.

The outer rectangle of this drawing [Fig. 7-39] is called a Golden Mean
rectangle, the same as above. To get another Golden Mean rectangle, all
you have to do is measure the rectangle’s shorter edge (side A) and plot
that distance along the longer side (side B) , which makes a square (with

204 0 The ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

equal sides; A = C). The area that’s left over
(D) is another Golden Mean rectangle. Then
you can take the shorter edge again and plot
that distance along the longer edge to make an-
other square, and what’s left over is still another
Golden Mean rectangle. This can continue for-
ever. Notice that each newly formed rectangle
is turned 90 degrees. If you run diagonals across
each rectangle, their crossing locates the exact
center of the spiral they form. You can see how
the diagonals become a key for more informa-
tion: Line F has a Golden Mean ratio to line E,
continuing inward. We can say that F is to E
what G is to F and FI is to G and I is to H and so
on. There are other kinds of spirals, but the
Golden Mean spiral is paramount in creation.

Male and Female Spirals

Fig. 7-39. The Golden Mean rectangle
and male and female spirals.

There are two kinds of energies that move through Golden Mean rec-
tangles. One energy is the diagonals that cross the squares, moving at 90-
degree turns, shown in black. That’s the male energy. The female energy is
the line that keeps curving in toward the center, shown in gray. So you
have a female Golden Mean logarithmic spiral, along with a male spiral that
uses straight lines with 90-degree turns at the phi ratio. In much of the
work I will show you, we’ll be looking only at the male as-
pect, but you must remember that the female aspect is al-
ways there.

Some books say that if you draw a horizontal line
through the navel in da Vinci’s man [Fig. 7-40], what’s
left over in the lower portion is a Golden Mean rectangle;
and that if you draw a line from the top corner of the large
square to the middle point at his feet (the center of the
opposite side of the square) , that semi-diagonal will pass
through the exact center of a Golden Mean spiral as
shown in the figure. You can create a spiral if you draw in
the consecutively smaller Golden Mean rectangles like
we did in Figure 7-39. I’ve read several books about this,
and I believe it’s almost true. But something else is actu-
ally happening that is important to understand if one re-
ally wants to know about Mother Nature.

In fact, I’m convinced that there are no Golden Mean
rectangles or spirals in existence unless they’re syntheti-
cally made. Nature does not use Golden Mean rectangles
or spirals — it doesn’t know how. The reason nature
doesn’t know how is because a Golden Mean spiral will
literally go inward forever — maybe not with a pencil and

Fig. 7-40. Leonardo’s canon and spiral.

SEVEN — The Human Body and Its Geometries O 205

Fig. 7-41. Diagonal lines made by connect-
ing each comer to the center of the opposite
side of the square.

Fig. 7-42. Spirals and the original eight
squares.

Fig. 7-43. Leonardo’s surrounding grid.

paper, but technically it will go on forever and ever. It will also go outward
forever too, because you can take the longest line of any Golden Mean rect-
angle, make a square to get a larger Golden Mean rectangle and continue to
do this forever. So a Golden Mean rectangle has no beginning and no end.
It will go inward and outward forever.

This is a problem for Mother Nature. Life doesn’t know how to deal
with something that has no beginning and no end. We can sort of deal with
something that has no end, but if you think about it, it’s difficult to think of
something having no beginning. Just try to get that in your mind — some-
thing that has no beginning. This is hard for us because we are geometric
beings, and geometry has centers, beginnings.

Since life doesn’t know how to deal with this, it has found a way to
cheat. It has found another spiral to create with. Life figured out a system
of mathematics that approximates this so well that you can hardly tell the
difference. The books say that this spiral on Leonardo’s drawing in Figure
7-40 is a Golden Mean spiral, which I say can’t be true. Also, there is not
just one little spiral here; there are eight spirals rotating around the body —
one for each Golden Mean rectangle, connected to the eight possible semi-
diagonals around the human body [Fig. 7-41]. This drawing shows the
eight that intersect the human body.

Figure 7-42 shows the eight spirals with their eight centers located
around the center of the body, in the same pattern and with the same cen-
ter as the original eight cells inside the body— right?

Leonardo drew these little lines that make a grid over and around the
body [Fig. 7-43]: There are four squares in the center (A, B, C and D,
clockwise) and eight squares surrounding them (E through L). Those outer
eight squares happen to be where the eight semi-diagonals of Figure 7-41
intersect the body and where the eight spirals of Figure 7-42 begin. So we
have eight places around the body and a central pattern of four squares in
the middle, centered exactly around the original eight cells. Life is amaz-
ing, is it not?

When I noticed this about Leonardo’s drawing, I figured there must be
something important about this relationship. But when I realized that
there s no such thing as a Golden Mean rectangle or spiral in nature, I be-
gan to suspect that these spirals were probably something slightly different.
And that’s what they turned out to be — slightly different.

It turns out that these spirals are Fibonacci in nature, which we will ex-
plore in the next chapter. Understanding the difference between the
Golden Mean and Fibonacci spirals may seem simple and unimportant, un-
til the bigger picture of nature unfolds to reveal something astonishing
about this relationship. No one can ever understand why the 83,000 sacred
sites on the Earth were built or what their purpose was without knowing
this difference.

206 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Reconciling the Fibonacci-
Binary Polarity

Leonardo Fibonacci
&

Plant Growth

The Fibonacci Sequence and Spiral

n order to understand why those eight spirals around da Vinci’s canon
are not Golden Mean spirals and to find out what they are, we have to
go to another person — not Leonardo da Vinci, but Leonardo Fibonacci.

Fibonacci preceded da Vinci by over 250 years. From what I’ve read about
him, he was a monastic, often in a meditative state. He loved to walk
through wooded forests and meditate as he was walking. But evidently his
left brain was simultaneously active, because he started to notice that
plants and flowers had number associations [Fig. 8-1].

Flower petals and leaf and seed patterns correspond to
definite numbers, and the flowers on this list are the ones I
think he saw, if I’ve got it right. He noticed that lilies and
irises have three petals and that buttercups, larkspurs and
columbines (the flower at the top right in Fig. 8-1) have
five. Some delphiniums have 8 petals, corn marigolds
have 13 and some asters have 21. Daisies almost always
have either 34, 55 or 89 petals. He began to see these
same numbers over and over again throughout nature.

This little plant [Fig. 8-2] doesn’t actually exist; we
created it with computer graphics, shuffling it around like
a deck of cards. The original plant on which this illustra-
tion is based is called the sneezewort; we simply made the
computer graphics fit that plant.

Fibonacci noticed that when the sneezewort plant first came out of
the ground, it grew only one leaf, just one little leaf. As it grew taller,
farther up on its stem it grew one more leaf; then a little bit farther it
grew two leaves, then three, then five, then eight; then it had thirteen
flowers. He probably said, “Gee, those are the same numbers I keep
seeing in the petals of other flowers — 3, 5, 8, 13.”

Eventually this sequence of 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89 and so
on became known as the Fibonacci sequence. If you are given any three
consecutive numbers in this sequence, you can recognize the pattern:
you simply add two consecutive numbers to get the next number. See Fig. 8-2. The computerized sneezewort.

Number
of Petals

Samples

lilies & irises •

buttercups, larkspurs & columbines

some delphiniums

corn marigolds

some asters

34, 55 & 89

daisies

Fig. 8-1. Fibonacci sequence in plant growth.

EIGHT— $ 207

how it works? This is a very special sequence. It’s crucial in life. Why is it
important? This is perhaps my interpretation of why, but I’ll do my best to
show you.

This is a hibiscus flower with five petals (Fig. 8-3] . The
stamen inside has five terminating buds, and the direction
of those two geometric forms are reversed to each other,
one set pointing up and one pointing down. When most
people look at this flower, they don’t think, “Let’s see, it has
five petals.” They simply look at it, notice it’s beautiful,
smell it and experience it from their right brain. They’re
not thinking about the geometry or mathematics going on
in the other side of the brain.

Life’s Solution to the Infinite Golden Mean (Phi) Spiral

Remember that I said how the Golden Mean spiral has
Fig. 8-3. Hibiscus flower. no beginning and no end, and that life has a hard time with

that? It can cope with no end, but it has a difficult time grokking something
that has no beginning. I have a really hard time doing it, and 1 think we all
wrestle with that situation.

What nature did was create the Fibonacci sequence to get around the
problem. It’s like God said, “Okay, go out there and create with the Golden
Mean spiral,” and we said, “We don’t know how.” So we made up some-
thing that is not the Golden Mean spiral, but it rapidly comes so close that
you can hardly tell the difference [Fig. 8-4] .

For example, the phi ratio associated with the
Golden Mean is approximated by 1.6180339.
Look what happens when you divide each num-
ber in the Fibonacci sequence into the next
higher number. Here’s the sequence in the left
column: 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89. In the sec-
ond column I’ve shifted the sequence by one so
we can divide the number in the first column by
the number in the second column (see column 3) .
Notice what happens when you divide a column-
two number into the one in column one. When
we divide 1 into 1, we get 1.0. Now, 1.0 is a lot less
than the phi ratio. But when we go to the next
line and divide 1 into 2, we get 2, which is greater
than phi, but closer than 1 is. When we divide 2
into 3 we get 1.5, which is a lot closer to phi than
either of the previous two answers, but it’s under.
Three into 5 is 1.6666, which is over, but a lot closer. Five into 8 is 1.60, and
it’s under. Eight into 13 is 1.625, which is over. Thirteen into 21 is 1.615,
under. Twenty-one into 34 is 1.619, over. Thirty-four into 55, 1.617, under.
Fifty-five into 89, 1.6181, over. The next one goes under, then over, each
time getting closer and closer to the actual phi ratio. This is called asymptoti-

0 = 1 . 6180339 ...
(Fibonacci Sequence)

Current Term

Previous Term

Division

Ratio

i / i

1.0

2 / 1

2.0

3 / 2

1.5

5 / 3

1.6666

8 / 5

1.600

13 / 8

1.625

21 / 13

1.615384

34/21

1.619048

55 / 34

1.617647

89 / 55

1.618182

144

144 / 89

1.617978

233

144

233 M 4

1.618056

Fig. 8-4. Fibonacci

sequence.

208 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

cally reaching a limit. It can never ever reach the ac-
tual number, but practically speaking, you wouldn’t be
able to tell the difference after a few divisions. You can
see this graphically in Figure 8-5.

The light gray squares are the four central squares of
the human body where the original eight cells are lo-
cated. The eight dark gray squares around these
central squares are where the spirals begin. Does
everybody get that?

Rather than having them spiraling in forever and
ever, we’re going to do something different — because
this is what life does, I believe. I’m going to use one of
the outer squares as my starting point, and this will be
true for all eight. I’m choosing one of them as an ex-
ample.

Using a diagonal across just one of the tiny back-
ground squares as our measure, we’ll call this diagonal
line one unit. Then we move according to the
Fibonacci numbers: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 89, with
a 90-degree turn after each number. In our first step
we go one length, then turn 90 degrees and go one
again. Then we turn 90 degrees and go two lengths,
turn another 90 degrees and go three lengths. Be-
tween each step we take a 90-degree turn. The next
step is 5 units long, then 8. So we have 1,1,2, 3, 5, 8,
13.

Then we diagonally cross 21 squares, then 34
[Fig. 8-6]. Then 55, then 89 [Fig. 8-7]. As we do
this, the spiral unfolds and gets closer and closer to
phi, the Golden Mean spiral, until very rapidly there’s
no way to tell the difference in life, at least visually.

Comparing the two spirals must have been a very
important feature if one studied life, because the an-
cient Egyptians displayed both the Fibonacci and the
Golden Mean spirals at the Great Pyramid. Even
though the spirals have two different origins, by the
time they get out to steps 55 and 89, the two lines are
practically identical. When people who studied Egypt
saw the three pyramids lined up on the spiral, they
thought it was the Golden Mean, not the Fibonacci
spiral. Then they came back and found one of the
holes (refer to page 109). Several years later they real-
ized that just a little ways away, maybe a hundred yards
or so, was another marker. They hadn’t realized there
were two spirals. I don’t know whether the people
working with this understand its significance even yet.

Fig. 8-5. Fibonacci female (curved) and male (angled) spirals on an
expanded grid.

Fig. 8-6. A view of the Fibonacci spiral, both male (straight line) and
female (curved).

Spirals in Nature

Fig. 8-8. Slice of a nautilus shell.

Fig. 8-9. Pine cone.

Here is sacred geometry in nature [Fig. 8-8], the real thing. It’s a nauti-
lus shell cut in half. It’s an unwritten rule that every good sacred geometry
book has to have a nautilus shell in it. Many books say this is a Golden
Mean spiral, but it’s not — it’s a Fibonacci spiral.

You can see the perfection of the arms of the spiral,
but if you look at the center or beginning, it doesn’t look
so perfect. You can’t really see this detail here. I suggest
that you look at a real one. This innermost end actually
hits the other side and bends, because its value is 1.0,
which is a long ways from phi. The second and third ones
bend also, but not as much because they are coming
closer to phi. Then they start fitting better and better,
until you see this perfectly graceful form developing. You
could think that the little nautilus made a mistake in the
beginning; it looks like he didn’t know what he was doing.
But he’s doing it perfectly, it’s not a mistake. He’s simply
following exactly the mathematics of the Fibonacci se-
quence.

On this pine cone [Fig. 8-9] you see a double spiral,
one going one way and one going the other. If you were to
count the number of spirals rotating one direction '■nd those going the
other direction, you’d find that they’re always two consecutive Fibonacci
numbers. There are perhaps 8 going one way and 13 the other, or 13 going
one way and 2 1 the other. The many other double-spiral patterns found
throughout nature correspond to this in all cases that I know. For instance,
the sunflower spirals are always related to the Fibonacci sequence.

Figure 8-10 shows the difference between the two. The Golden Mean
spiral is the ideal. It’s like God, the Source. As you can see, the top four
squares on both drawings are the same size. The difference is in the areas
where they originate (the bottom sections of the two diagrams) . The bot-
tom of the Fibonacci spiral has an area half the size (0.5) of the area above;
the Golden Mean spiral
has an area 0.618 the Fibonacci

size of the area above.

The Fibonacci spiral
shown at near right is
constructed using six
equal squares, whereas
the Golden Mean spiral

Golden Mean

Fig. 8-10. Comparing
Fibonacci and Golden Mean spirals.

Life/Nature

Ideal/God

210 O The ancient Secret of the flower of life

starts deeper inside (actually, it never starts — it has been going on forever
like God) . Even though the originating point is different, they very quickly
approximate each other.

Another example: Many books state that the King’s Chamber is a
Golden Mean rectangle, but it’s not. It’s also tied to Fibonacci.

The Human Grid and Zero-Point Technology

This basic sacred geometry of a 64-square grid around hu-
mans is becoming understood in science. In fact, there’s an en-
tirely new science happening around it, though it’s having a hard
time getting out because of politics. This new science is called
zero-point technology. This grid is, I believe, the geometry of

When we draw a 64-square grid and incorporate this spiral pattern, we
get Figure 8-11. Superimposing da Vinci’s canon over this 8-by-8 grid
[Fig. 8-12], the eight squares (shaded) seem to have a unique attribute.
There are four possible ways to move a Fibonacci spiral out of one of the
four double squares. Returning to Figure 8-11, let’s use the upper double
square as an example. One way to start is from the upper right corner, as
shown by the darker line. It crosses one square (1), turns right to cross one
more square (1), turns right again to cross two squares (2) — interestingly
enough, it reaches the top of the grid at this point. Continuing to turn
right, it crosses 3 (the next number in the sequence)— and, son-of-a-gun, it
has now reached the right side of the grid! The next number is 5, which
takes the line to the bottom of the grid. The following number, 8, takes the
line across three squares before it leaves the grid. There’s a perfect reflec-
tive quality as this spiral moves out from the beginning square.

Another way you could start in this double square is from the lower right
corner, as shown by the lighter line (this forms a little pyramid in the top
two squares. In this case your 90-degree turns will be to the left. So you
cross one square (1), then one again (1), then 2 — this time passing through
the center four squares of the grid (where the original eight cells reside) .
After turning left again to cross 3 squares, the line touches the
right side of the grid. The next number, 5, will leave the grid af-
ter crossing two squares. It’s a perfect synchronicity of move-
ment. Whenever you see this kind of perfection, you know
you’re almost surely hitting on really basic geometries.

All this is crucial to understand, if you care to know, how the
Egyptians achieved resurrection. They were doing it scientifi-
cally, you might say. They were using science to create a syn-
thetic state of awareness that would lead to immortality. We’re
not going to achieve our awareness synthetically; we’re going to
do it naturally, but you might find it useful to understand how an
ancient civilization was attempting to achieve this.

Fig. 8-11. Grid without canon, show-
ing two mirroring Fibonacci spirals,
male (dark line) and female (light line).

Fig. 8-12. Grid with da Vinci canon.

EIGHT — Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity 0 211

Fig. 8- 13. Waveform showing 5 zero points.

UPDATE: Since the time of
Tesla, governments have not
allowed the knowledge of zero
point to come forth. Why?

Tesla wanted to give free,
unlimited energy to the world,
which he knew would come
from zero-point technology.

But J.P. Morgan, who owned
many copper mines, did not
want electricity to be free.

Instead, he wanted to force
electricity to pass through
copper wires so he could meter
it, charge the public and make
money. Tesla was stopped,
and the world has been
controlled ever since.

Since that time in the 1940s,
any person who researched
zero-point technology and
talked publicly about it was
killed or disappeared — until
just recently. In 1997 a video
company called Lightworks
secretly brought together a few
of these scientists and filmed
their works.

They gave the history of what
had happened since the 1940s
and showed clear working
models of the inventions.

They showed machines that,
once running, give off more
electricity than it takes to run
them. They showed batteries

zero-point technology, though most scientists see it in a different way.

Most people involved in zero-point technology think of it in terms of
waveforms or energy. They talk about the five places in a waveform, as
shown here [Fig. 8-13]. Or they think of zero point as the amount of en-
ergy that matter has when (and if) it reaches zero degrees Kelvin, or abso-
lute zero. To me, both of these ways are valid, but the way based on sacred
geometry will eventually become the cornerstone of this new science be-
cause it is so fundamental.

These points associated with the waveform are also related to breathing.
These points are where the zero point is accessed. They are like doorways
into another world. Yogic pranayama is usually talked about in terms of
two or three places (depending on whether you count the beginning of the
next cycle), which are between the inbreath and the outbreath. That’s also
zero-point technology if you focus it on human breathing.

This new zero-point understanding has a geometry behind it, and that
geometry is around the human body. The human body is always the mea-
suring stick of creation.

Male- and Female-Originating Spirals

To begin with we must understand that there are two kinds of spirals,
depending on whether they are straight lines (male) or curved lines (fe-
male). We talked about this before. However, now we are going to intro-
duce a new concept. The originating point of the spiral in this geometric pat-
tern will further determine if it is male or female in a different way. In a
double square there are four corners where a spiral can originate: top left,
top right, bottom left and bottom right [see Fig. 8-14]. The two top posi-
tions produce male spirals, the two bottom positions, female spirals. The
male spiral lines never pass through the center four squares; the female
lines always do.

Figure 8-15 shows the two kinds of
male and female spirals and how they
move through this geometric pattern.

male

originating
points

XT'

£ \

./ \

female

originating

points

Fig. 8-14. The originating points.

212 # The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

To make it clear, we will give an example. If the spiral begins at the top
right point, it will be a male spiral relative to this geometrical pattern. In
addition, the curved aspect of this male spiral would be female, and the
straight-line aspect would be male. Every polarity always has another
polarity within it, and within that new polarity there is always still another
polarity. This division process will continue theoretically forever.

Figure 8-16 is an ex-
ample of the male-
originating spirals that
begin at the top (meaning
the greatest distance from
center) , but showing only
their female (curved) as-
pect. This drawing shows
all eight possible male-
originating spirals that
exist around the body,
from a Fibonacci perspec-
tive, in their female
(curved) form. They
carry the Fibonacci
sequence only as far as 5
(1-1-2-3-5). In this lim-
ited arrangement it’s in-
Fig. 8-16. The male-originating spirals with female teresting to note how the
curved lines curved spirals do a sort of

loop-to-loop. The energy could actually be-
come each other and recirculate. This
Fibonacci move-
ment is what I be-
lieve is really going
on around the hu-
man body, not the
Golden Mean that
most books claim.

In Figure 8-17
we see male-
originating spirals
around the human
body. Here we
show the male
(straight-line) as-
pect but only two
with female curved
lines.

Fig. 8-17. The male-
originating spirals with male
straight lines.

that never need charging.

They showed how an ordinary
gasoline motor can be
converted to run on ordinary
water with more power than
gas. They showed panels that
will produce boiling water
forever as long as the outside
temperature is above 40
degrees below zero Fahrenheit.
They showed many other
scientific inventions
considered impossible by
today’s standards. When
Lightworks was done, on a sin-
gle day the video was released
and the information put on a
Web site [“Free Energy: The
Race to Zero Point,” 105-
minute video by Lightworks
(800) 795-8273, $40.45 ppd;
www.lightworks.com] . This
has forced the world to change
direction. Two weeks later
both Japan and England
announced that they are very
close to solving the cold-fusion
problem. The world began to
change.

On February 13, 1998,
Germany issued a world patent
on a free-energy machine
based on carbon, a thin sheet
of material that will produce
400 watts of electricity forever.
This means that all small
appliances such as computers,
hair dryers, blenders,
flashlights etc. will not need to
be plugged into the system. It
is the end of the old way and
the birth of unlimited free
energy.

EIGHT — Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity <>213

Fig. 8-18. The female-originating spi-
rals with male straight lines.

BINARY SEQUENCE

I, 2. 4, 8. 16, 32, 64, 128,
256, 512,... (first 10
mitotic cell divisions)

1 . There are I0 14
(100,000,000,000,000)
cells in the average human
body.

2. When the human body
is complete (adult), it must
replace 2'A million red
blood cells every second of
its life.

Fig. 8-19. The binary sequence
in mitotic cell division.

In Figure 8-18 we see the female spirals around the human
body, which originate at the bottom, or closest points to cen-
ter. Here we show primarily the male (straight-line) aspect of
these female spirals. The female (curved) aspect of only two
female spirals are shown (not all eight), which form a heart.
Notice the pattern they create. One heart faces one way, and
after it has been extended 180 degrees, a bigger heart faces the
other way. Every one of these curved female lines passes
through zero point at the exact center of the human body.
This zero point is the creation point, or what we would call the
womb. It is for this reason that females have the womb in their
bodies and males do not. Males never pass through zero point.
Later you’ll see these heart-shaped relationships tied to many
other natural phenomena such as light, eyes and emotions, to
mention a few, so keep them in mind.

Now, with that understanding we’re going to look at an-
other sequence. There are thousands of mathematical se-
quences; I suppose on one level you could even say an infinite number. But
in useful terms, there are many. A sequence can simply be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8. In every one of the thousands and thousands of sequences known to
man, three numbers are required to identify the pattern, the whole se-
quence — with the exception of the Golden Mean logarithmic sequence, in
which case you need only two. This implies that it is probably the source of
all other sequences.

According to my guidance, two sequences besides the Golden Mean are
of major importance to nature and life. They are the Fibonacci sequence,
which we just looked at, and the binary sequence we are about to look at.
Here we will see the Fibonacci as female and the binary as male. They are
really more than just female and male; they act more as mother and father.
They are both primary, coming straight from the Golden Mean, just as the
two primary colors that come from white light are red and blue.

Binary Sequencing in Cell Division and Computers

The binary sequence [Fig. 8-19] is a mitosis that simply doubles each
time, such as from 1 to 2 to 4 to 8 to 16 to 32. Instead of adding to the last
number like we do in the Fibonacci sequence, we double it.

Let’s look at the binary sequence for a moment. It goes 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
doubling at each jump. In order to determine the characteristic of the se-
quence, all you need to do is take any three consecutive numbers in the se-
quence — like 2, 4 and 8. You double the 2 and get 4, and double the 4 to
get 8. It takes three consecutive numbers to positively identify the doubling
process.

In terms of a pronucleus’s mitotic cell division, by the time the first cells
form into the apple shape, there have been nine cell divisions, totaling 512
cells. Holding that in mind, look at these two facts:

214 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Fact one (shown in Fig. 8-19): There are 10 14 cells in the average hu-
man body. That’s 100 trillion cells in the average person. That’s a lot of ze-
roes. Fact two (in the same figure): An adult human body has to replace
two and a half million red blood cells in every second of life. That definitely
sounds like a lot. It would take you about two and a half months just to
count to two and a half million if you were doing it day and night, 24 hours a
day, seven days a week. Yet if we are to stay alive, our bodies have to create
millions of new red blood cells every second to replace the dead ones. And
the only way this can be achieved is through mitotic cell division.

You look at it and say, “Well, it’s become 512 with only nine divisions,
so it’s going to have to really go for it to get up to this 100 trillion.” But
there’s something almost magical that happens. Anyone who has studied
mathematics knows this, but if you have never studied this before, it feels
almost like magic. This is what happens [Fig. 8-20]: After the next ten di-
visions, cells have multiplied to over half a million. When it divides ten
more times, there are 536 million.

According to Anna C. Pai and Helen Marcus Roberts in their book,

Genetics, Its Concepts and Implications, it takes exactly 46 mitotic cell divi-
sions to reach the 10 14 cells of the human body. It takes only 46 divisions! It’s
magical to me that this number — 46— happens to be the number of chro-
mosomes we have in the average cell. Chance or coincidence?

These numbers are amazing. It’s not
amazing if you’ve studied it, because by
then you’re often immune to it. But it
still amazes me.

I would like to talk about how com-
puters work. I started to mention how
we’ve got carbon and silicon arcing
back and forth between each other.

And who’s making the silicon comput-
ers? We are — carbon-based beings.

Out of all the various mathematical
possibilities, we chose the binary se-
quence as the basis of how the computer
works. It’s the basis of the whole com-
puter system, and it’s also one of the pri-
mary bases of life itself. I feel sure it was
not an accident that we chose the bi-
nary sequence, because we are life, and
deep inside we know the importance of
this sequence.

I know most of you probably know this, but nevertheless I want to show
how a computer works. Imagine little light switches called computer chips,
and when you turn on one of these lights, you see the number designated
for that chip. If you turn on the 1 chip, you see 1. If you have five computer
chips in your computer, they’re designated 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16. You can turn

EIGHT — Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity O 215

Next 10 mitotic cell divisions

1024

1,048,576

2048

2,097,152

4096

4,194,304

8192

8,388,608

16.384

16,777,216

32,768

33,554,432

65.536

67,108,864

131,072

134,217.728

262,144

268,435,456

524,288

536,870,912

(From 5 1 2 cells in the first 1 0

(From a half-million cells to a

mitotic divisions to over a half-

half-billion cells at the end of

million in the second 10
divisions)

30 mitotic divisions)

Fig. 8-20. Next 20 mitotic cell divisions.

these five chips on or off to get any number between 1 and 31. If you turn
on just the 1 chip, you see the number 1. If you turn on the second chip,
designated as 2, you see the number 2. The same for chip 4, chip 8 and chip
16.

By turning on every combination of those five chips and adding them up,
you can come up with any number between 1 and 3 1 . In other words, if you
turn on the first chip, you get 1. Turn the second one on and get 2. And if
you turn the first two on at the same time, you get 3. The next one you turn
on is 4; 4 and 1 is 5; 4 and 2 is 6; 4 and 2 and 1 is 7. Then for 8, you turn on
the 8 chip. Eight and 1 is 9; 8 and 2 is 10; 8 and 2 and 1 is 1 1 ; 8 and 4 is 12; 8
and 4 and 1 is 13; 8 and 4 and 2 is 14; and 8 and 4 and 2 and 1 is 15. Then
for 16, you turn on the 16 chip. Adding the fifth chip gives you all numbers
through 3 1 when they are combined in every possible way.

If you add just one more chip and call it 32, now you can get every num-
ber between 1 and 63. If you add another chip and call it 64, you can get ev-
ery number between 1 and 127 and so on. If you have a computer that has
46 chips, you can get every single number between l and 100 trillion— just by
turning 46 little chips on and off! This is what has enabled the unfoldment
of knowledge that’s happening so rapidly on the planet right now. And
your body has been using this technology for millions of years!

Searching for the Form behind Polarity

I studied the Fibonacci and binary sequences with the guidance of the
angels, who were constantly leading me through it. The more I studied
them, the more I personally believed that there must be geometry behind
them, a secret form that created these number sequences. Since the angels
said that the human body and geometry fields are the measuring stick of the
universe, I suspected strongly that if these two sequences were like two
mother/father, male/female components, then there must be a single geo-
metric form hidden behind them, a form that generated both. I searched
for a way to wed them.

I looked for this secret for years. For a long time I was very serious about
it, then I gave up because I couldn’t figure out what it was. But I always
kept one eye open for an answer, always looking for a little clue that would
maybe do it. And one day I got it.

The Polar-Graph Solution

A Sixth-Grade Math Book

A little boy I was taking care of was in the sixth grade, and he wanted to
know about a particular mathematical problem. It was a relatively simple
problem, but I didn’t remember how to do it. I looked through his book to
remember how it went so I could explain it. As I was going through his
book, I saw the geometry I needed — in a sixth-grade math book! The

author of the book didn’t understand what I was seeing, because he was
thinking along a totally different line. But I saw in the mathematics of it
something I’d been looking for, and it was the key that tied these two pri-
mary sequences together.

I’m sorry that I don’t remember the name of the book or the author — it
was a long time ago — but it showed a polar graph and its relationship to a
Golden Mean spiral. Figure 8-21 is a map of the South Pole on a polar
graph. Notice the cross through the center, one line following the x axis
and the other the y. Every circle

does in fact have these lines
crossing it. We demonstrated
this by taking a flat disk about
half an inch thick, randomly
scattering sand all over it. We
held it by a handle underneath
and hit it with a wooden mallet.

The sand would rearrange itself
into a perfectly square cross like
you see in this illustration. If we
used a sound generator on the
disk, the sand would change
into many other geometrical
patterns. But the very first pat-
tern that emerges by striking a
round disk at a low rate will be a
perfectly square cross.

When you have a circle with
a square cross over it, you take
the radius of the circle as your
measuring stick and call it 1

(that makes the calculations very easy). Drawing concentric circles the
same distance outward from that first radius gives you a polar graph.

Fig. 8-21. Polar graph and map [from
World Adas of Geomorphic Features by
Rodman E. Snead].

Spirals on a Polar Graph

This is how a polar graph usually looks [Fig. 8-22], with 36 radial lines
including the vertical and horizontal lines. These lines indicate 360 de-
grees in 10-degree increments. Then concentric circles are drawn, each
one the same distance as the one before, creating eight equal demarcations
along each radius, counting the inside circle as one. There’s a great deal of
reasoning behind a polar graph. Think first about what it represents. It is a
two-dimensional drawing that attempts to show a three-dimensional
sphere, one of the sacred forms, by projecting it onto a flat surface. It is the
shadow form. Casting shadows is one of the sacred ways of obtaining infor-
mation. Also, a polar graph has both straight lines (male) and circular lines
(female) superimposed over each other — both male and female energies at
once.

Fig. 8-22. Polar graph.

EIGHT — Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity $217

Fig. 8-23. Golden Mean spiral plotted
on a polar graph.

Think of the small central circle as a planet in space. From the surface
of the planet, the author of the math book plotted a Golden Mean spiral —
not Fibonacci, but Golden Mean. It starts at the zero radius on the
circumference of the little “planet” in the center, and it is plotted one time
around, from zero to 360°, or back to zero [Fig. 8-23] .

Now, to figure out the value of any point, you would use the middle
circle as a value of one (since it represents the distance from the center to
the first circle, which we are calling the “planet”), then count outward to
wherever the spiral crosses a radius. Thus on the radius at 260° (between
the fourth and fifth rings) you would have counted outward to roughly 4.5.
(Of course, on a computer you could be more accurate.) On the radial line
at 210°, the spiral would have reached about 3.3. Does everybody under-
stand that?

Radial

increment

from

Angle center

Radial

increment

from

Angle center

Radial

increment

from

Angle center

Radial

increment

from

Angle center

0° ik 1.0 ★
10° 1.1

100°

1.8

190°

3.0 ★

280°

5.0 ik

20° 1.1

110°

1.9

200°

3.2

290°

5.3

30° 1.2

120° iK 2.o ik

210°

3.4

300°

5.6

40° 1.3

130°

2.1

220°

3.6

310°

6.0

50° 1.3

140°

2.2

230°

3.8

320°

6.3

60° 1.4

150°

2.4

240° iK 4.0

330°

6.7

70° 1.5

160°

2.5

250°

4.2

340°

7.1

80° 1.6

170°

2.7

260°

4.5

350°

7.5

90° 1.7

180°

2.8

270°

4.7

360° lit 8.0 ★

Angle

0°

120°

240°

360°

Distance
from pole

1.0

2.0

4.0

8.0

Angle

0°

120°

190°

280°

Distance

1.0

2.0

3.0

5.0

from pole

Fig. 8-24. Table showing distance of
spiral from pole, measured in radial
increments.

Update: Other people have de-
coded the other pattern, and it
is Fibonacci, as I suspected.
What it really means to con-
sciousness I have not re-
searched.

Now, look what happens to the actual data from zero to 360°. At zero de-
grees the spiral is exactly one circle (radial increment) away from center, be-
cause it’s on the surface of that little sphere or planet. Then it goes around
through different changes until it gets to 120°, where the spiral crosses the
second circle. The spiral continues outward to the fourth circle, exactly

where the 240° radial line sits.
And it reaches the eighth (outer)
circle precisely at the 360° (also
0°) radius. The radial incre-
ments have doubled (a binary se-
quence of 1, 2, 4, 8) at exactly 0°.
120°, 240° and 360°.

Notice Figure 8-24, which
shows the crossing points of the
spiral. The white stars to the left
of the radial-increment column
show where the binary sequence
crosses a radius. The black stars
show how the spiral advances,
in a Fibonacci sequence (1, 2, 3,
5, 8), crossing radials at 120°,
190°, 280° and 360°. Both se-
quences simultaneously reach full
circle (360°), though in differing
increments, following this
Golden Mean spiral. This spiral, shown on a polar graph, has integrated the
binary and Fibonacci sequences!

I was so excited, I was doing cartwheels for a few days. I knew I had
found something really extraordinary, even though I didn’t fully know what
it was. (This is another one of my weaknesses I have to admit to here.
Once I saw it, I knew that if I decoded one of the patterns, it would be true
for the other one, and I’ve never gone back even to look at the other pat-
tern, which is probably equally as interesting.)

a binary sequence!

360°

8.0

a Fibonacci sequence!

218 $ The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

But I did analyze what a binary sequence does. The spiral crosses at 0,
1 20, 240 and 360 degrees. As you can see, that forms an equilateral triangle
[Fig. 8-25] . If this binary spiral kept going outward, it would cross radii at
further increments of 16, 32, 64 and so on, yet always hit those three 120-,
240-, and 360-degree radial lines as they too are extended.

You not only have a triangle, but you’re actually looking at a three-
dimensional tetrahedron, because the 120-, 240- and 360-degree radii
extend to the center forming the top view of a tetrahedron as well as a side
view.

Keith Critchlow’s Triangles and Their Musical Significance

Another image on this drawing is an equilateral triangle with the hori-
zontal line running straight through the middle from 0 to 180 degrees. This
is the side view of the tetrahedron. Now, you might not think that’s impor-
tant, and I probably would have never picked up on it, but another person
did — Keith Critchlow. We don’t know what he was thinking or how he ar-
rived at this. He didn’t know what you know right now when he did it. (He
may know it now after he’s seen this work, but he didn’t when he wrote his
book.)

Figure 8-26 is Critchlow’s work. He drew an equilateral triangle with a
line through the middle; then he measured to the middle of the center line
(see black dot) and drew a line down to the corner and up to the top edge
and then vertically down to the center line, as shown. Who knows why?
Where that first diagonal line crossed the center line, he then drew a verti-
cal line to the upper edge, then down to the same lower corner. Using the
point where it crossed the center line, he repeated what he had done be-
fore, then did it once more to the left. You could keep going in both direc-
tions from your first line. By drawing this funny little form, he discovered
something of great importance.

He says, “Continuing in this way” (in that pattern of construction),
“each successive proportion will be the harmonic mean between the previ-
ous proportion and the total length, and all these proportions will be musi-
cally significant, Vi being the octave, 2 A being the fifth, 4 A being the major
third, 8 A being the major tone [step] and 16 /n being the half tone [half
step]. In other words, he’s comparing the measurement of these lines to
musical tones.

He then tried measuring it in a different way, starting at a different point
[Fig. 8-27] of the center line, at three-fourths (see black dot), and found
that the measurements were */?, ‘A, 2 A, 4 A , 8 /n and 16 /i9 — and all these num-
bers are musically significant.

This is very, very interesting. It means that the harmonics of music are
somehow related to the proportions of this central line moving through a
tetrahedron. But he had to measure first to begin, and if you have to use a
measuring stick, you’re not at the core of sacred geometry; something’s
missing. If you’re right in sacred geometry, you never have to use anything

240 '‘"-•--....J. 300

250 260 270 280 250

Fig. 8-25. Binary spiral forming a tet-
rahedron on polar graph.

Fig. 8-26. Keith Critchlow’s triangles.

Fig. 8-27. Keith’s work.

EIGHT — Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity $219

to measure. The measuring apparatus is built in so that you can calculate
everything without having any kind of calculus or ruler or anything else.
It’s always built right into the system.

I experimented with his drawings and discovered that if I put the polar
graph behind his pattern, I could reproduce his first pattern, which showed
the octave — -the halfway mark — without any measuring [Fig. 8-28].

All I had to do was draw over a line that was al-
ready there from the lowest apex of the triangle
through the center of the sphere to the opposite side
of the triangle; when I dropped the line straight
down, it divided the center line exactly in half,
which was the octave point Critchlow had found.
Then the other three lines could automatically be
drawn.

I then discovered that the outermost circle of
the polar graph, which circumscribes the equilateral
triangle, was also harmonic to the central line: the
vertical line at 60 degrees (line A) exactly overlies
line B. There is a correspondence between the male
(straight lines) and the female (curved lines) com-
ponents inside and outside the triangle, and these
proportions were all musically significant. And I did-
n't have to measure anything!

We have now taken this light-years beyond the above. A research team
has found that you can draw these lines not only from the center, but from
any of the nodal points inside the upper half of the triangle, and you will
come up with all known harmonics in existence. In other words, if you
draw a line from any of the points where the straight and curved lines cross
from 0 to 120 degrees, then down to the corner of the primary triangle and
start making your patterns, you’ll come up with all the harmonic systems,
not only the Western keyboard, but the Eastern systems as well — in fact, all
known harmonic systems and many unknown ones that have never been
used.

People who have done this research now believe that all the laws of
physics can be derived from musical harmonics, now that the full system of
harmonics has been revealed. I personally believe that the harmonics of
music and the laws of physics are interrelated, and we now believe we’ve
proven this mathematically and geometrically, though it is not fully shown
here.

I was very excited at the time I was gathering this information, because
the implications are incredible. It means that the harmonics of music are
located inside a tetrahedron, and that these harmonics are now determina-
ble. Since then we’ve discovered another geometric pattern behind the
one shown in this illustration that reveals all the keys, and it has opened up
all the inner meanings of what Egypt was about.

0 S 00 90 so

Fig. 8-28. Critchlow’s triangles on the polar graph.

220 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

The Egyptians reduced their entire philosophy to the square roots of 2,
3, and 5 and the 3-4-5 triangle. Many people have given explanations for it,
but there’s another explanation hidden behind the geometry of the tetrahe-
dron. That idea probably went over almost everybody’s head, including
mine, in a way. But it’s there and we’re working on it now.

Black- and White-Light Spirals

While I was working on the harmonics of music, I got a postcard in the
mail. The postcard was a polar graph with reflective surfaces [Fig. 8-29].
It had little reflectors in each compo-
nent. I want you to see how light re-
flects off a polar graph. It reflects off
what appears to be a Golden Mean or
Fibonacci spiral.

There are two arms of the spiral,
one opposite the other, exactly 180
degrees apart. Notice that between
the reflecting arms the light goes very
dark. The black-light spirals are ro-
tating at 180 degrees to each other
and 90 degrees to the white light.

(We’ve seen that before in the swirl-
ing galaxy.) If you look right in the
center, you can see that the two op-
posite arms are exactly 180 degrees to
each other.

This is where we’ve seen it before
[Fig. 8-30] . Here a white-light spiral
comes out in one direction, and 180
degrees from it another white-light
spiral goes out in the opposite direc-
tion. The dark arms — the feminine
ones— come out between the light
ones. That explains why the black
light between the light arms of the
spiral is different from the blackness
in the rest of space [see Fig. 2-35], as
scientists have discovered, because
the black light within a spiral is the
feminine energy, and the darkness
out in space is Void, not the same.

The scientists couldn’t quite under-
stand why it was different.

Fig. 8-29. Postcard with spiral.

Fig. 8-30. Swirling galaxy.

EIGHT — Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity O 221

Maps for the Left Brain and Their Emotional Component

There’s one more simple teaching I would like to give here. Drawing the
tetrahedron over the polar graph geometrically represents the harmonics of
music. That drawing and the information I’ve given you on this subject
comes into your understanding through your left brain. But do you remem'
her how we went through those visualizations, where I was saying that every
line on a page is not a line on a page, but a map of how spirit moves through
the Void? So these drawings are maps — for the left brain.

But there’s another component that’s equally important to understand:
Besides being a map of how Spirit moves in the Void, the lines on any sa-
cred-geometry drawing also represent something else. For every line in sa-
cred geometry, there is always an associated emotional and experiential aspect.
There is not only a mental component, but an emotional component that
can also be experienced. A sacred-geometry drawing can enter human
consciousness through the left brain, but there is a way that it can also enter
experientially through the right brain. Sometimes this emotional/experien-
tial component is not obvious.

What does this mean? Let’s use music as an example. Music can come
into human experience as sound and be heard and felt inside us, or it can be
understood by the left brain as proportion and mathematics. As you study
sacred geometry, remember that both sides of the brain use the same infor-
mation differently.

[ Here Drunvalo played a Sioux Lakota flute to give students a direct experi-
ence. He asked them to close their eyes and experience the music instead of men-
tally studying or thinking about it.]

Form and the sacred geometry associated with it are the source, but
the way this information enters the human experience is different. It’s
usually a lot easier to take in information experientially through the right
brain than through the logical left brain, but they’re equivalent. It’s hard
to see that they’re equivalent, but they are. Throughout all this geometry,
as you look at these triangles and squares around the body and the relat-
ing spheres and shapes, some kind of experience is associated with each
geometry. Maybe you don’t know what the particular experience is. It
might take a whole lifetime to figure out what it relates to, but it’s my be-
lief that there is always an experiential aspect associated with every sacred
geometrical form.

Arriving Back at the Fruit of Life
through the Second Informational
System

Now I’m going to give a kind of bottom line for all this. Remember that
we plotted this triangle, and its apexes hit at 0, 120 and 240 degrees, then
we added these lines [see Fig. 8-28 on p. 224] ? But in nature, like in the
galaxy, there’s not just one spiral, but two, going out from the center in op-
posite ways (see Figs. 8-29 and 8-30). So if you copy nature, you would

have to plot two spirals, which will produce two opposing trian-
gles on the polar graph [Fig. 8-3 1 ] . If you look carefully, it actu-
ally produces two tetrahedrons — more specifically, it’s a star tet-
rahedron inscribed inside the sphere.

If you’ve seen Richard Hoagland’s work, do you remember
what the message on Mars at Cydonia was? It was a star tetrahe-
dron inside a sphere. If you haven’t seen Richard Hoagland’s
work, I suggest you look at what he showed the United Nations.

Though science is just beginning to understand what this is
about, what Mr. Hoagland showed them will probably make a lot
of sense to you now.

Inside the star tetrahedron in the sphere, there’s another star
tetrahedron [Fig. 8-32]. And inside the smaller tetrahedron a
sphere fits perfectly . If you take that size sphere and center it on
each one of the points of the tetrahedrons, you end up with the
Fruit of Life. If I rotate this drawing 30 degrees and get rid of
some of the lines, you can see the result more clearly [Fig. 8-33] .

What you just saw, only in reverse image, was the second in-
formational system of the Fruit of Life. All the information
above with the star tetrahedron, Golden Mean spirals, light,
sound and the harmonics of music and so on came from this sec-
ond information system.

I could have started with the Fruit of Life and gone back the
other way, but it isn’t how it happened to me. I wanted to show
you that the second information system is accessed by connect-
ing the concentric circles of the Fruit of Life with radial lines
coming out from the center , rather than connecting all the centers
together as we did to find the Platonic solids and the information
on crystals. It is just a different way to superimpose male lines
over the female lines of the Fruit of Life.

In the first system of information — Metatron’s Cube — we
came up with the structural patterns of the universe based on the
five Platonic solids. These appear in lattice structures of metals
and crystals and in many other patterns in nature that we didn’t
talk about. The diatoms that make up diatomaceous earth were

one of the first life forms in the world, and
diatoms are nothing but little geometric
patterns, or functions of the patterns.
What you have just been shown is how
light, sound and the harmonics of music
are interrelated through a star tetrahedral
field inscribed inside a sphere that came
directly out of the Fruit of Life, the third
rotational pattern of Genesis [Fig. 8-34].

I 10

100 90 go

120

Fig. 8-31. Two spirals forming a star tetrahedron on a po-
lar graph.

100 90 go

Fig. 8-32. A star in a star.

Fig. 8-34. Fruit of Life.

Fig. 8-33. Fruit over stars and sphere.

EIGHT — Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity $ 223

224 O THE ANCIENT SECRET OF THE Flower OF Life

AFTERWORD

It is now becoming clear that geometry — and thereby proportion — is
the hidden law of nature. It is even more fundamental than mathematics,
for all the laws of nature can be derived directly from sacred geometry.

In the second part of this work we will show you more of nature’s secrets.
We believe it will begin to change the way you see the world you live in. It
will become clear that your body is the measuring stick or the holographic
image of the universe, and that you, the spirit, play a more important role in
life than society has taught us.

Finally (and this will be paramount in this work) , you will begin to see
how the geometries are located in the electromagnetic fields around your
body that are about 55 feet in diameter. Remembering these fields is the be-
ginning of human awakening, like a baby bird breaking into the light and
out of the darkness inside its eggshell. The sacred and holy human
lightbody, called the Mer-Ka-Ba by the ancients, becomes a reality. This
Mer-Ka-Ba is the “wheels within wheels” of Ezekiel in the Bible. The path-
way home through the stars becomes evident as the blueprint of creation
emerges.

We are intimately connected to the Source of all life. In the remember-
ing of this information will come an awakening that will dispel the myth of
separation and bring you into the very presence of God. This is my prayer.

Until we meet again in volume two,

In love and service, Drunvalo

EIGHT

O 225

226 O The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

REFERENCES

Chapter I

Liberman, Jacob, Light, the Medicine of the Future, Bear & Co., Santa Fe,
NM, 1992.

Temple, Robert K.G., The Sirius Mystery, Destiny Books, Rochester, VT
(www.gotoit.com) .

Satinover, Jeffrey, M.D., Cracking the Bible Code, William Morrow, New
York, 1997.

West, John Anthony, Serpent in the Sky, Julian Press, New York, 1979,
1987.

Cayce, Edgar: many books have been written about him; the Association
for Research and Enlightenment in Virginia Beach, VA, is a source of an
enormous amount of material. Perhaps the most well-known book is
The Sleeping Prophet by Jess Steam.

Chapter 2

Lawlor, Robert, Sacred Geometry: Phibsophy and Practice, Thames & Hud-
son, London, 1982.

Hoagland, Richard C.; see www.enterprisemission.com/ .

White, John, Pole Shift, 3rd ed., ARE Press, Virginia Beach, VA, 1988.

Hapgood, Charles, Earth’s Shifting Crust and The Path of the Pole (out of
print) .

Braden, Gregg, Awakening to Zero Point: The Collective Initiation, Sacred
Spaces/Ancient Wisdom Pub., Questa, NM; also on video tape (Lee
Productions, Bellevue, WA).

Chapter 3

Hamaker, John and Donald A. Weaver, The Survival of Civilization,
Hamaker-Weaver Pub., 1982.

Sitchin, Zecharia, The 1 2th Planet (1978), The Lost Realms (1996), Genesis
Revisited (1990), Avon Books.

Begich, Nick and Jeanne Manning, Angels Don’t Play This HAARP,
Earthpulse Press, Anchorage, AK, 1995.

Chapter 4

Keyes, Ken, Jr., The Hundredth Monkey, out of print.

Watson, Lyall, Lifetide, Simon and Schuster, New York, 1979.

Strecker, Robert, M.D., “The Strecker Memorandum” (video), The
Strecker Group, 1501 Colorado Blvd., Eagle Rock, CA 90041 (203)
344-8039.

The Emerald Tablets of Thoth the At lantean, translated by Doreal, Brother-
hood of the White Temple, Castle Rock, CO , 1939. Obtainable from
Light Technology Publishing.

Chapter 6

Anderson, Richard Feather (labyrinths); see www.gracecom.org/veriditas/.

Penrose, Roger; see http://galaxy.cau.edu/tsmith/KW/goldenpenrose.html
http://turing.mathcs.carleton.edu/penroseindex.html ;
www.nr.infi.net/~drmatrix/progchal.htm .

Adair, David; see www.flyingsaucers.com/adairl.htm .

Winter, Dan, Heartmath; see www.danwinter.com .

Sorrell, Charles A., Rocks and Minerals: A Guide to Field Identification,
Golden Press, 1973.

Vector Flexor toy, available from Source Books (see below).

Langham, Deraid, Circle Gardening: Producing Food by Genesa Principles,
Devin- Adair Pub., 1978.

Chapter 7

Charkovsky, Igor; see www.earthportals.com ; www.voI.it/ ; www.well.com.

Doczi, Gyorgy, The Power of Limits: Proportional Harmonies in Nature, Art
and Architecture, Shambhala, Boston, MA, 1981, 1994.

Chapter 8

“Free Energy: The Race to Zero Point" (video), available from Lightworks,
(800) 795-8273, $40.45 ppd., www.lightworks.com .

Pai, Anna C. and Helen Marcus Roberts, Genetics, Its Concepts and Implica-
tions, Prentice Hall, 1981.

Critchlow, Keith, Order in Space: A Design Source Book, Viking Press, 1965,
1969 and other books are out of print; see www.wwnorton.com/thames/
aut.ttl/at03940.htm .

Most of the books and sacred geometry tools, in addition to posters, kits,

videos, tapes and CDs recommended in this workshop, are available from

Source Books, P.O. Box 292231, Nashville, TN 37229-2231, (800) 637-

5222 (in U.S.) or (615) 773-7652. Catalog available.

228 0 The Ancient Secret of the Flower of Life

Light Technology Publishing

the ANCIENT SECRET of the FLOWER OF LIFE

VOLUME 1

nee, all lite in the uni-

verse knew the Flower of
Life as the creation pattern
— the geometrical design
leading us into and out of
physical existence. Then
from a very high state of con-
sciousness we fell into dark-
ness and forgot who we
were. For thousands of years
the secret was held in ancient
artifacts and carvings around
the world, and encoded in
the cells of all life.

Now we are rising up from that sleep, shaking old, stale
beliefs from our minds and glimpsing the golden tight of
this new dawn streaming through the windows of percep-
tion. This book is one of those windows.

Here, Drunvalo Melchizedek presents in text and graph-
ics the first half of the Flower of Life Workshop, illuminat-
ing the mysteries of how we came to be, why the world is
the way it is and the subtle energies that allow our awareness
to blossom into its true beauty.

Sacred Geometry is the form beneath our being and
points to a divine order in our reality. We can follow that
order from the invisible atom to the infinite stars, finding
ourselves at each step. The information here is one path,
but between the lines and drawings lie the feminine gems of
intuitive understanding. You may see them sparkle around
some of these provocative ideas:

ISBN- 1-891 824-17- 1

228pp. $25.00

-v-rot only is Drunvalo’s
IN mind exceptional, but
his heart, his warm person-
ality, his love for all life
everywhere, is immediately
understood and felt by any-
one who meets him. For
some time now he has been
bringing his vast vision to
the world through the
Flower of Life program and
the Mer-Ka-Ba meditation.
This teaching encompasses
every area orhuman under-
standing, explores the
development of mankind
from ancient civilizations
to the present time and
offers clarity regarding the
world’s state of conscious-
ness and what is needed for
a smooth and easy transi-
tion into the 21st century.

Drunvalo Melchizedek

Embrace the expanded
vision and under-
standing that
Drunvalo offers to the
world. Coincidences
abound, miracles
flourish and amazing
stories of
mysteries unveiled
arise as the author
probes the Ancient
Secrets of
the Flower of Life.

VOLUME 2

T he sacred Flower of
Life pattern, the pri-
mary geometric generator
of all physical form, is
explored in even more
depth in this second vol-
ume. The proportions of
the human body, the nu-
ances of human conscious-
ness, the sizes and distances
of the stars, planets and
moons, even the creations
of humankind, are all
shown to reflect their origins in this beautiful and divine
image. Through an intricate and detailed geometrical
mapping, Drunvalo Melchizedek shows how the seeming-
ly simple design of the Flower of Life contains the genesis
of our entire third-dimensional existence.

From the pyramids and mysteries of Egypt to the new
race of Indigo children, Drunvalo presents the sacred
geometries of the Reality and the subtle energies that shape
our world. Finally, for the first time in print, he shares the
instructions for the Mer-Ka-Ba meditation, step-by-step
techniques for the re-creation of the energy field of the
evolved human, which is the key to ascension and the next
dimensional world. If done from love, this ancient process
of breathing prana opens up for us a world of tantalizing
possibility in this dimension, from protective powers to the
healing of oneself, of others and even of the planet.

ISBN- 1 -89 1 824-2 1 -X 252pp. $25.00

ler by Fox
1 ) 714-1132

"Light

Techndo ay

publishing *" 7

Book by

Includes A CD with Heart meditation by
Drunvalo Melchizedek

$25 with CD

ISBN 1-891824-43-0

“Long ago we humans used a form of communication and sensing that did not involve the brain in any way; ratherA
lit came from a sacred place within our heart. “What good would it do to find this place again in a world where the great-1
lest religion is science and the logic of the mind? Don’t I know this world where emotions and feelings are second-class cit-1
lizens? Yes, I do. But my teachers have asked me to remind you who you really are. You are more than a human being,!
■much more. For within your heart is a place, a sacred place where the world can literally be remade through conscious!
Icocreation. If you give me permission, I will show what has been shown to me.” 1

•Beginning with the Mind
•Seeing in the Darkness
•Learning from Indigenous Tribes
•The Sacred Space of the Heart
•The Unity of Heaven and Earth

•Leaving the Mind and Entering the Heart

•The Sacred Space of the Heart Meditation

•The Mer-Ka-Ba and the Sacred Space of
the Heart

•Conscious Cocreation from the Heart
Connected to the Mind

Drunvalo Melchizedek has been studying pure consciousness and human potential for almost forty years. His focus on
the rediscovery of the human lightbody, the Mer-Ka-Ba, and the way Sacred Geometry is inherent within the lightbody
and all of creation was shared through workshops and books as he brought his vision of the Flower of Life and the Mer-
Ka-Ba to the world.

Now his new work, Living in the Heart, with the techniques that lead you into the Sacred Space
of the Heart, goes even deeper into the possibilities of human potential and the creation process itself.
Within these pages Drunvalo shares his knowledge and tells you exactly how to achieve this ancient
state of consciousness, so that, finally, what you dream in your heart, you can make real in your every-
day life— a beautiful abundant life and ascension' into the higher worlds becomes a natural sequence of I
living in your heart. Join Drunvalo and be part of the large group of people who have found the joy
of living in the space where you and God are one.

iASYMDiR

24 HOURS

Order ONUNE!

www.light

technology.com

Order by Phone
800-45018985
( 928 ) 526-1345

Visit our on-line bookstore: www.lighttechnology.com

f £i(j/rt ffildimlogf PUBLISHING PRESENTS

ET Visitors Speak Vol. 2

through Robert Slutpiro

For those of you who’ve always wanted to meet somebody completely
different, here’s your opportunity. This book contains the continuing
adventures of visitors to planet Earth. In a strange sense, you might
include yourself as one of those, as the human race, does not really claim
the title of full-time and permanent Earth citizen. So when you're reading
this book, think about it as if you were visiting another planet. What
would you say in reaction to the local population, their habits, and so on?
Put yourself in the picture so this isn't just a meaningless travel log from
various beings that you don’t know and may never meet. Make it personal
this time because the time is coming, maybe even in some of your lifetimes,
when you might just be one of those extraterrestrials on another planet. So
you might as well practice now and get your lines down right.

ET from a Future Version of Saturn
Tuwass, a Visitor to Future Earth
Xzhetah, ET Hybrid
Visitor from Planet Odin
The Sound of Breath

ET Visitor from Orion
Tsong Ti from the Pleiades
Time-Loop Traveler
Antiquarian, Pleiadian Teacher
. and many many moi c!

r ET

Visitors

Spc<xk

Vol 2

Robert Shapiro

500 P. SOFTCOVER
ISBN 978-1-891824-78-4

www.LightTechnology.com • 928-526-1345 or 1-800-450-0985 • Fax 928-714-1132

Animal Souls Speak

Robert Shapiro is largely known as a professional trance chan-
nel, with several series of published books such as The Explorer
Race Series, of which this is book #13; Shining the Light Series
(8); Shamanic Secrets Series (3); Benevolent Magic, and the Ulti-
mate UFO Series.

But, as he is now, he is a mystical man with shamanic capabili-
ties well and thoroughly infused into him. He also has many un-
usual skills that he is teaching through blogs, the Sedona Journal of
Emergence and these books. It is his intention to bring about the
most benevolent change available on the planet through sharing
his personal inspirations as well as his channeling, which in this
book is of these wonderful beings humans call animals.

Chapters Include:

Eel

Tortoise

Frog

Skunk

Snail

Deer

Elephant
Rabbit
Polar Bear

Earthworm

Phoenix

Chickadee

Koala Bear

Spider

Cat

Robert Shapiro

$29. 95

ISBN 1-891824-50-3
Softcover, 640 p.

Dog

Whale

Shark

To order call 1-800-450-0985 or 928-526-1345 or use our online bookstore at www.lighttechnology.com
Read more about the Explorer Race online at www.ExplorerRace.coml

SHING

THE EXPLORER RACE SERIES

through Robert Shapiro

Humans — creators-in-training — have a purpose and destiny so heartwarmingly, profoundly
glorious that it is almost unbelievable from our present dimensional perspective. Humans are
great lightbeings from beyond this creation, gaining experience in dense physicality. This truth
about the great human genetic experiment of the Explorer Race and the mechanics of creation is
being revealed for the first time by Zoosh and his friends through superchannel Robert Shapiro.
These books read like adventure stories as we follow the clues from this creation that we live in
out to the Council of Creators and beyond.

Origins »*«>•*
i Next SO Years

EXPLORER RACE:
ORIGINS AHbtRe
NEXT*) YEARS

This volume has so much I
information about who we are
and where we came from— the
source of male and female beings,
the war of the sexes, the beginning of the linear mind,
feelings, the origin of souls— it is a treasure trove.

In addition, there is a section that relates to our near I
future— how the rise of global corporations and politic
affects our future, how to use benevolent magic as a force
of creation and how we will go out to the stars and affect |
| other civilizations.

352 p. $14.95 ISBN 0-929385-95-0

EXPLORER RACE:
CREATORS and
FRIENDS

Now that you have a greater
understanding of who you are in
the larger sense, it is necessary
to remind you of where you
came from, the true magnificence of your being. You
I must understand that you are creators-in-training, and
I yet you were once a portion of Creator. You are still a
I portion of Creator, yet you are training for the individual
] responsibility of being a creator, to give your Creator a
| coffee break.

435 p. $19.95 ISBN 1-891824-01-5

THE EXPLORER
RACE

You individuals reading
this are truly a result of the
genetic experiment on Earth.
You are beings who uphold

the principles of the Explorer

, Race, The information in this book is designed to

, H show you who you are and give you an evolutionary
understanding of your past that will help you now.
The key to empowerment in these days is to not know
i everything about your past, hut to know what will

help you now.

584 k 525.00 ISBN 0-929385-38-1

EXPLORER
RACE: PARTICLE
PERSONALITIES

All around you in every moment I
you are surrounded by the most |
magical and mystical beings.
They are too small for you to see |
as single individuals, but in groups you know them
as physical matter. Particles who might be considered I
either atoms or portions of atoms consciously view the
, vast spectrum of reality yet also have a sense of personal
memory like your own linear memory. These particles I
remember where they have been and what they have
§g done in their infinitely long lives.

“ 246 p. $14.95 ISBN 0-929385-97-7

the

i mm

ETs Anb the
EXPLORER RACE

In this book, Robert Shapiro
channels Joopah, a Zeta Reticulan
KACt now in the ninth dimension who
continues the story of the great
experiment— the Explorer

Race— from the perspective of his civilization.

I The Zetas would have been humanity's future selves I
had humanity not re-created the past and changed
the future, and Joopah's point of view greatly expands
and enhances our understanding of the mechanics
| of creation.

237 p. $14.95 ISBN 0-929385-79-9

EXPLORER RACE
ANb BEYOND

With a better idea of how I
| creation works, we go back
iYOWD I to the Creator's advisers and
receive deeper, richer and more
profound explanations of the
roots of the Explorer Race. The liquid Domain and
I the Double Diamond portal share lessons that were
given to the roots on their way to meet the Creator of
this universe, and finally the roots speak of their origins,
how they came to be and their incomprehensibly long I
journey here.

360 p. $14.95 ISBN 1-891824-06-6

COVNCIL of
CREATORS

The thirteen core members of
the Council of Creators discuss
their adventures in coming to
I awareness of themselves and their journeys on the way
I to the Council on this level. They discuss the advice and ,
oversight they offer to all creators, including the Creator
I of this local universe. These beings are wise, witty and
I joyous, and their stories of Love's Creation help us realize
] that we live in an expanded, multiple-level reality.

273 p. $14.95 ISBN 1-891824-13-9

“EXPLORER R AC* ~ | s j s j $ ^ p rotot y pa | | 0 yj n g /

II | nurturing, guiding feminine being,

1 1 / I kJ the focus of feminine energy. She jjl

has the ability to expand limited
thinking without making people j
with limited beliefs feel uncomfortable. She is a |

I fantastic storyteller, and all of her stories are teaching j
stories. If you care about who you are, why you are here,
where you are going and what life is all about— pick up I
this book. You won't lay it down until you are through,

| and then you will want more.

304 p. $14.95 ISBN 1-891824-11-2

The core personality of that
being known on the Earth as |
Jesus, along with his students and
friends, describes with clarity and
love his life and teaching 2,000 I
years ago. He states that his
j teaching is for all people of all races in all countries. Jesus |
announces here for the first time that he and two others,
Buddha and Mohammed, will return to Earth from their I
places of being in the near future, and a fourth being, a
child already bom now on Earth, will become a teacher |
| and prepare humanity for their return.

354 p. $16.95 ISBN 1-891824-14-7

EXPLORER
RACE: EArtTi
Historvj ah& Lost
CivilizAtiows

Earth is a home and school for
humanity whose recorded history
goes back only a few thousand
I years; its archaeological history, a few thousand more.
1 In this book, we see the incredible panorama of brave
I souls coming from other planets to settle on Earth. We
I watch the origins of tribal groups and the rise and fall of
I civilizations, and we can begin to understand the source
I of the wondrous diversity that we enjoy here on beautiful
| Mother Earth.

310 p. $14.95 ISBN 1-891824-20-1

EXPLORER
RACE: ET
VISITORS SPEAK

Even as you are searching the
sky for extraterrestrials and
I their spaceships, ETs are here
on planet Earth— they are |
I stranded, visiting, exploring, studying the culture,
healing the Earth of trauma brought on by irresponsible I
mining or researching the history of Christianity over the
last 2,000 years. Some are in human guise; some are in '
spirit form. Some look like what we call animals that we j
have labeled cats or cows or elephants.

340 p. $14.95 ISBN 1-891824-28-7

EXPLORER
RACE:

Techniques for
GENERATING
SAFETY

We all want to be safe, but |
we don't always feel that way.

I Wouldn't you like to generate safety so you could go I
wherever you need to go, do whatever you need to
do, in a benevolent, safe and loving way for yourself?
Leam safety as a radiated environment that will allow
you to gently take the step into the new timeline, into a |
benevolent future and away from a negative past.

177 p. $9.95 ISBN 1-891824-26-0

EXPLORER
RACE: ANIMAL
SOVLS SPEAK

Each animal brings a wonderous
gift to share with humanity.
Welcome to the footsteps of the
loving beings who support you,
I who wish to reveal more about themselves to you and who
welcome you not only to planet Earth but to the pathway of
self-discovery. Use this book to support you along your path
toward inevitable self-discovery and ultimately to support
the self-discovery in others that results in revealing the true
and most benevolent heart of all beings.

570 p. $29.95 ISBN 1-891824-50-3

ploreu ,

RACE ^ EXPLORERRACE:

ET Visitors SpeAk
Vol. II

For those of you who've always I
wanted to meet somebody
completely different, here's your
1 opportunity. This book contains
| the continuing adventures of visitors to planet Earth. In a
strange sense, you might indude yourself as one of those,
as the human race does not really daim the title of full-time I
and permanent Earth citizen. So when you're reading this
book, think about it as if you were visiting another planet.
What would you say in reaction to the local population, their |
habits, and so on?

480 p. $19.95 ISBN 978-1-891824-78-4

plus four new Explorer Racc books coming soon:

The Zetas: History, Hybrids and Human Contact * Astrology: Planet Personalities and Signs Speak * Plant Souls Speak * The Totality and Beyond

3 £igJit fllchmlagf PUBLISHING Proudly Presents 2 New Books. . .

Plus Shipping

The Zetas Speak About:

• Betty Andreasson, the Hills and
the Ceremony of Renewal

• Children of Isis: Path of the Zeta

• Describing the Zetas

• The Zetas in Human History

• The Truth of Travis Walton's Case,
Among Others, and the Planet of Cats

• Gifted Spacecraft, Crashed Spacecraft
and the Test of Technology

• Roswell and the Case of Billy Meier

• The Effects of Time Travel

• Parent Race of Zeta

• Creation of the Zetas

• Earth's Work with Quantum Mastery
and the Loop of Time

• Joao and the Andromedans

• The Pascagoula Affair

ASCROLoqy:

Planet Personalities

Speak Through Robert Shapiro

12 Planets 12 Signs

PLUS , The Thirteenth Sian and A Planet to Balance Mother Earth

The Planets and Signs of Astrology speak to us through superchannel Robert
Shapiro — sharing not only LONG-LOST INFORMATION but also
NEW WAYS OF BEING for an awakening humanity.

As the Planets and Signs speak through Robert, their , ,

traits and interests, many of which have been unknown since ancient
times, can be clearly heard and felt. In addition, you— humanity
made such progress that
and Signs are expressed
Q and

becomina
your

^ ,

Ultimate UFO Series

IfiKiiE ’Tjetasz

History, Hybrids
and Human Contacts

5 ; ■ :

Through Robert Shapiro

$24

95 ISBN 978-1-891824-36-4
500 P. Est. Softcover
6X9 Perfect Bound

ARRIVING SPRING 2010
PRE-ORDER AND RESERVE
YOUR COPY TODAY!

"The beings on Zeta Reticuli are the future selves — granted,
several million years into the future — of the beings on Earth
right now. On the soul line, this has to do with your evolution to
become more, to be more established benevolently on a creative
level. By the time your souls become those Zeta Reticulian beings
several million years into the future, you will be able to interact
with all life in the most benevolent way while being strongly
intellectual and scientific.

In this way, your science will have a complete balance with
heart and soul. This is one of the greatest aspects of significance
between you and the Zeta Reticulian beings as of this time. So to
them you are their past lives — that's why they're so fascinated
with you — but for you, when you interact with these beings, you
are truly meeting, in many senses, your future."

— Zoosh through Robert Shapiro

AScROloqy:

I’l ANI 1 I’l rsonai i nrs

SBN 978-1-891824-81-4

500 P. Est. Softcover
8 '/ 2 X 10 Perfect Bound

EASY ORDER: Call 1-800-450-0985 or 928-526-1345 or Useouronlinebookstoreatwww.LightTechnology.com

♦ BOOK MARKET ORDER FORM ♦

BOOKS PUBLISHED BY LIGHT TECHNOLOGY PUBLISHING

No. copies Total

Aiello

This World and the Next One $9.95 $

Arquellas, Jose
Author of The Mayan Factor

The Arcturus Probe 14.95 $

Avery, Frankie Z

Handbook for Healers 25.00 $

Bacon, Sommer

This School Called Planet Earth 16.95 $

Bain, Qabriel

Auras 101 6.95 $

Living Rainbows 14-95 $

Ball, Linda

Dimensional Journey 19.95 $

Bateman, Wesley H.

Through Alien Eyes 19.95 $

Dragons & Chariots 9.95 $

Knowledge from the Stars 1 1.95 $

Beaconsfield, Hannah

Welcome to Planet Earth 14.95 $

Bruce, Edith

Keys to the Kingdom 14.95 $

Buess, Lynn

Children of Light, Children 8.95 $

Forever Numerology 17.95 $

Numerology: Nuances 13.75 $

Numerology for the New Age 1 1.00 $

Chapman, Cathy

Change Your DNA, Your Life! 16.95 $

Clark, Qladys Iris

Forever Young 9.95 $

Cohen, Mark

Ratho Shenzi (book) 19.95 $

Ratho Shenzi (CD) 15 .95 $

Cooper, William

Behold a Pale Horse 25.00 $

deAnqelis, Angela/Continuity of Life Series

Embracing Eternity 16.95 $

Endings Are Beginnings 16.95 $

Transition and Survival Technologies 16.95 $

Healing Earth in All Her Dimensions 16.95 $

Deerinq, Hallie

Light from the Angels 15.00 $

Do-It-Yourself Power Tools 25.00 $

Donqo, Tom

Mysterious Sedona 9.95 $

Mysteries of Sedona — Book 1 6.95 $

Alien Tide — Book II 7.95 $

Quest — Book III 9.95 $

Merging Dimensions $14.95 $

Sedona in a Nutshell 4.95 $

Unseen Beings, Unseen Worlds 9.95 $

Fallon, Nancy

Acupressure for the Soul 1 1.95 $

Fanninq, Arthur

Soul Evolution Father 12.95 $

Simon 9.95 $

Fanning, Arthur/Meditation Tapes

Black Hole Meditation 10.00 $

On Becoming 10.00 $

The Art of Shutting Up 10.00 $

Qaudette, Rene & McQuffin, Maqqie

The Wonders 14.95 $

Qeorqe, Tamar

Guardians of the Flame 14.95 $

Qolden Star Alliance

I’m OK, I’m Just Mutating 6.00 $

Qoldman, Jonathan

Shifting Frequencies 14.95 $

Q rattan, Brian

Mahatma I & II 19.95 $

Jasmuheen

Ambassador of Light 16.95 $

In Resonance 24.95 $

Harmonious Healing 16.95 $

Jasmuheen/Meditation & Healing Tapes
Living on Light & Meditation 10.00 $

No. copies Total

Prana Breathing & Meditation 10.00 $

Angel Meditation & Self Healing.... 10.00 $

Keller, Mary Lou

Echoes of Sedona Past $14.95 $

Kjnqdon, Kathlyn

The Matter of Mind 16.95 $

Klarer, Elizabeth

Beyond the Light Barrier 15.95 $

Klotsche, Charles

Color Medicine 1 1.95 $

Lamb, Barbara/Moore, Judith

Crop Circles Revealed 25.00 $

Lewis, Pepper: Qaia Speaks

1. Sacred Earth Wisdom 19.95 $

2. Awakening Humanity 19.95 $

Mann, Nicholas R.

SEDONA: Sacred Earth 14.95 $

McClure, Janet

AHA! The Realization Book 1 1.95 $

Light Techniques 1 1 .95 $

Sanat Kumara 11.95 $

Scopes of Dimensions 1 1 .95 $

The Source Adventure 1 1.95 $

Prelude to Ascension 29.95 $

McIntosh, John

Millennium Tablets 14-95 $

Melchizedek, Drunvalo

Anc. Secret of the Flower of Life I .. 25.00 $

Anc. Secret of the Hower of Life II ..25.00 $

Living in the Heart, w/CD 25.00 $

Serpent of Light: Beyond 2012 19.95 $

Miller, David K.

New Spiritual Technology/5D Earth 19.95 $

Connecting with the Arcturians 17.00 $

Teachings from the Sacred Triangle .22.00 $

Moore, Judith

Song of Freedom 19.95 $

New Formula for Creation 16.95 $

Moore, Tom

The Gentle Way 14.95 $

The Gentle Way #2 16.95 $

Nauman, Eileen/Liqht Technology Publishing

Homeopathy for Epidemics 25.00 $

Path of the Mystic 1 1.95 $

Phillips, Qlenn

New Age Primer 11.95 $

Putnam, William,

Tale of Two Passes 29.95 $

Roeder, Dorothy

Crystal Co-Creators 14.95 $

Next Dimension Is Love 1 1.95 $

Reach for Us 14.95 $

Rota, Eileen Miriandra

Story of the People 1 1.95 $

Pathways & Parables 19.95 $

Ryden, Ruth

The Golden Path 1 1 .95 $

Living the Golden Path 1 1.95 $

Shapiro, Robert/Shining the Light Series

I: The Battle Begins 12.95 $

II: The Battle Continues 14.95 $

III: Humanity Gets a Second Chance 14. 95 $

IV: Humanity’s Greatest Challenge.. 14.95 $

V: Humanity Is Going to Make It! ... 14.95 $

VI: The End of What Was 14.95 $

VII: The First Alignment 24-95 $

Shapiro, Robert/Explorer Race Series

1. The Explorer Race 25.00 $

2. ETs and the Explorer Race 14.95 $

3. Origins and the Next 50 Years 14.95 $

4. Creators and Friends 19.95 $

5. Particle Personalities 14.95 $

6. Explorer Race and Beyond 14.95 $

7. Council of Creators 14.95 $

8. Explorer Race and Isis 14.95 $

9. Explorer Race and Jesus 16.95 $

10. Earth History & Lost Civilizations 14.95 $

No. copies Total

1 1. ET Visitors Speak 14.95 $

1 2. Techniques for Generating Safety.... 9.95 $

13. Animal Souls Speak 29.95 $

14. Astrology: Planet Personalities... 29.95 $

15. ET Visitors Speak #2 19.95 $

Shapiro, Robert/Material Mastery Series

A. Shamanic Secrets/Material 19.95 $

B. Shamanic Secrets/Physical 25.00 $

C. Shamanic Secrets/Spiritual 29.95 $

Shapiro, Robert/Shirt Pocket Books

Feeling Sedona’s ET Energies 9.95 $

Touching Sedona 9.95 $

Shapiro, Robert/Secrets of Feminine Science

Benevolent Magic & Living Prayer..,. 9.95 $

Shapiro, Robert/Ultimate UFO Series

Andromeda 16.95 $

The Zetas: History, Hybrids &. 24.95 $

Starre, Violet

The Diamond Light 14.95 $

The Amethyst Light 14.95 $

Starr, Aloa

I Want To Know 7.00 $

Prisoners of Earth 1 1 .95 $

Stone, Joshua David, Ph.D./Ascension Series

1. Complete Ascension Manual 14.95 $

2. Soul Psychology 14.95 $

3. Beyond Ascension 14.95 $

4- Hidden Mysteries 14-95 $

5. Ascended Masters 14.95 $

6. Cosmic Ascension 14.95 $

7. A Beginner’s Guide to Ascension. 14.95 $

8. Golden Keys to Ascension 14.95 $

9. Manual for Planetary Leadership.. 14.95 $

10. Your Ascension Mission 14.95 $

11. Revelations of a Melchizedek 14-95 $

12. How to Teach Ascension Classes.... 14.95 $

13. Ascension and Romantic 14.95 $

14. Ascension Index 14-95 $

15. Be Financially Successful 14-95 $

Special Offer — All 15 Stone Books ... 1 79.00 $

Salter, Dan as told to Nancy Red Star

Life with a Cosmos Clearance 19.95 $

Van Etten, Jaap

Crystal Skulls 19.95 $

Various

Sedona Vortex Guide Book 14.95 $

Vywamus

Channelling: Evolutionary Exercises 9.95 $

Warter, Carlos, M.D.

The Soul Remembers 14.95 $

Welk, Angela

Silent Self 9.95 $

Starchild Press

Qold, Brian

The Legend of Cactus Eddie full color 1 1 .95 $

Bader, Lou

Shadow of San Francisco Peaks 9.95 $

Great Kachina full color 1 1.95 $

Stinnett, Leia — Angel Books

A Circle of Angels 18.95 $

The Twelve Universal Laws 18.95 $

All My Angel Friends 10.95 $

Animal Tales 7.95 $

Where Is God? 6.95 $

Just Lighten Up! 9.95 $

Happy Feet 6.95 $

When the Earth Was New 6.95 $

The Angel Told Me 6.95 $

One Red Rose 6.95 $

Exploring the Chakras 6.95 $

Crystals R for kids 6.95 $

Who’s Afraid of the Dark 6.95 $

Bridge Between Two Worlds 6.95 $

Color Me One 6.95 $

Special Offer — All 15 Angel Books.. $99.00 $_

BOOK MARKET ORDER FORM

BOOKS PUBLISHED BY LIGHT TECHNOLOGY PUBLISHING

♦

No. copies Total

Arquellas, Jose

The Mayan Factor $16.00 $

Armstrong, Virqil

The Armstrong Report 1 1 .95 $

Babbitt, Elwood

The God Within 12.95 $

Voices of Spirit 13.00 $

Bentov, Itzhak

Brief Tour of Higher Conciousness 12.95 $

Stalking the Wild Pendulum 12.95 $

B reese, Christine

Reclaiming the Shadow Self. 15.95 $

Carroll, Lee

An Indigo Celebration 13.95 $

The Indigo Children 13.95 $

Indigo Children: Ten Years Later 15.95 $

Kryon-Book I, The End Times 12.00 $

Kryon-Book II, Don’t Think Like 12.00 $

Kryon-Book III, Alchemy 14.00 $

Kryon-Book IVThe Parables of Kryon.. 17.00 $

Kryon-Book V The Journey Home 14.95 $

Kryon-Book VI, Partnering with God .. 14.00 $

Kryon-Book VII, Letters From Home... 14.00 $

Kryon-Book VIII, Passing The Marker. 14.00 $

Kryon-Book IX, The New Beginning... 14.98 $

Kryon-Book X, A New Dispensation ... 14 98 $

Kryon-Book XI, Lifting the Veil 14.98 $

Carroll, Lee (DVDs)

Kryon and Kirael in Austria 18.00 $

Kryon in Argentina 20.00 $

Kryon in Austria 18.00 $

Kryon in Chile 20.00 $

Kryon in Mexico 18.00 $

Kryon in Moscow 18.00 $

Kryon Summer Light Conference 1 18.00 $

Kryon: The Whole Story 18.00 $

Prayer for Earth Meditation 18.00 $

Chatelain, Maurice

Our Cosmic Ancestors 14.95 $

Christine, Nicole

Temple of the Living Earth 16.00 $

Dannelley, Richard

Sedona: Beyond the Vortex 14.95 $

Sedona Vortex 2K 12.00 $

Davenport, Anina

Reflections on Ascension 12.95 $

Doreal

The Emerald Tablets of Thoth 15.95 $

Falzon, Albert/Hornbaker, Jeff (DVD)

Globus: The Meaning of Light 30.00 $

Emoto, Dr. Masaru

Messages from Water 39.95 $

Messages from Water Vol.2 39.95 $

The Messages from Water III 39.95 $

The Hidden Messages in Water 16.95 $

Fischer, Cher i Jamieson

Love, Forgiveness &. Hope 14.95 $

Ford, Lana J.

Miracles & Other Ordinary 19.95 $

Free, Scott

Look Within 9.95 $

Free, Winn

Reincarnation of Edgar Cayce $18.95 $

3 *-

No. copies Total

Qlattauer, Marqaret

Don’t Worry Be Happy 4.95 $

Qreer, Steven M., M.D.

Contact: Countdown to Transformation 24.95 $

Disclosure 24.95 $

Extraterrestrial Contact 24.95 $

Hidden Truth Forbidden Knowledge 24.95 $

Qustafson, Eric

The Ringing Sound 19.95 $

Kenyon, Tom

Mind Thieves 18.95 $

Kenyon, Tom (Audio Cassette/CD)

Angel Codes (CD) 26.95 $

Ghandarva Experience (CD) 16.95 $

Imaginarium (CD) 16.95 $

Immunity (CD) 16.95 $

Infinite Pool (CD) 16.95 $

Lightship (CD) 16.95 $

Nuns of Gyantse (CD) 26.95 $

Sacred Chants (cassette) 13.95 $

Sacred Chants (CD) 16.95 $

Songs of Magdalen (CD) 16.95 $

Sound Transformations (cassette) 13.95 $

Sound Transformations (CD) 16.95 $

Voices from Other Worlds (CD) 16.95 $

City of Hymns (cassette) 13.95 $

City of Hymns (CD) 16.95 $

Forbidden Songs (cassette) 13.95 $

Forbidden Songs (CD) 16.95 $

Kinq, Jani

P’taah-The Gift (he) 23.95 $

P’taah-An Act of Faith 23.95 $

P’taah-Transformation 19.95 $

Kniqht, JZ

A Beginner’s Guide to Creating Reality 19.95 $

A State of Mind: My Story 24.95 $

Crossing the River 8.95 $

Forgotten Gods Waking Up 8.95 $

From Sexual Revolution to God Revolution .8.95 $

Parellel Lifetimes 8.95 $

Prophets of Our Own Destine 8.95 $

When Fairy Tales Do Come True 8.95 $

The White Book (he) 19.95 $

Who Are We Really? 8.95 _$

Kniqht, JZ (Video)

Ramtha World Tour VHS 19.95 $

Koppa, Mary Fran

Mayan Calendar Coloring Book 8.95 $

Mayan Calendar Birthday Book 12.95 $

Lewis, Pepper (DVDs)

Spiritual Leadership 20.00 $

The 5th Dimension: Akash & Ether 20.00 $

Lewis, Pepper (CDs)

2009 & Beyond (4 CDs) 40.00 $

A New You (8 CDs) 99.00 _$ _

Global Warming (2 CDs) 20.00 $

Moving Toward Spiritual Economy 40.00 $

Releasing Judgement (2 CDs) 20.00 $

Science & Metaphysics (3 CDs) 35.00 $

Maile

Principles to Remember 1 1 .95 $

Marecek, Mary

A View From the Other Side 14.95 $

No. copies Total

McManus, Dorothy

Song of Sirius 8.00 $

Touched by Love 9.95 $

MSI

Second Thunder 17.95 $

Nauman, Eileen/Blue Turtle Publishing

Medical Astrology 29.95 $

Soul Recovery and Extraction 1 1.95 $

Norquist, Ellwood

We Are One 14.95 $

Pettit, Robert

You Can Avoid Physical Death 23.95 $

Rachele, Sal

Life on the Cutting Edge 14.95 $

Rother, Steve

Greetings from Home 17.95 $

Living in the 5th Dimension (DVD) .... 45.00 $

Re-member 14.95 $

So I'm God . . . Now What? 17.95 $

Spiritual Psychology 14.95 $

Welcome Home 14.95 $

Royal, Lyssa/Priest, Keith

Visitors from Within 14.95 $

Sanders Jr, Pete A.

Access Your Brain’s Joy Center 14.95 $

Scientific Vortex Information 9.95 $

Access Your Brain’s Joy Center (cassette) 10.00 $

Seti, D. Nathan

Life is the Father Within 19.75 $

Stecklinq, Fred

Alien Bases on the Moon II 19.95 $

Sterling, Fred

Guide to the Unseen Self 14.95 $

Kirael: The 10 Principles

of Consciously Creating 19.95 $

Kirael: The Genesis Matrix 14.95 $

Kirael the Great Shift 14.95 $

Kirael: Lemurian Legacy 18.00 $

Taka (audio cassette)

Magical Sedona through the Didgeridoo 12.00 $

Tober, Jan (Meditation CDs)

Guided Meditations 15.00 $

Color & Sound 15.00 $

Toten, Ed and Stacy

M.A.S.S. 101 9.95 _$

Tyberonn, James

Metatron Speaks 27.00 $

The Energy &. Geometry of Sacred Sites . 39.99 $

Vosacek, Maria

Dedicated to the Soul/Sole 9.95 $

Work, Rich

Awaken to the Healer Within 16.50 $

Veils of Illusion 25.00 $

Posters

“The Mother Ship” 20 x 24 poster 12.50 $

“Blessings from Sanada” 8x10 poster 7.50 $

Bumper Sticker (free with all orders over $30)

“Peace to All Beings” 1 1 1/2 x 3 $2.50 $

Quantity of 3 6.00 $

BOOKSTORE DISCOUNTS HONORED— PLUS SHIPPING

□ CHECK # □ M.O.

□ VISA □ MASTERCARD

□ DISCOVER □ AMEX

CARD NO.

EXPIRATION DATE

SIGNATURE

(U.S. FUNDS ONLY) PAYABLE TO:

Name/Company

Address

City State Zip

Phone Fax Email

SIDEl: $

SIDE 2: $

SUBTOTAL: $

SALES TAX: $

(8.5% - AZ residents only)
SHIPPING/HANDLING: $

Ship to (if different from above)

Address

City State Zip

PO BOX 3540 • FLAGSTAFF • AZ 86003 Phone: 928-526-1345 1-800-450-0985
Fax: 928-714-1132 www.sedonajournal.com

($5.50 for 1 book, $1 for each additional book)

CANADA S/H: $

(30% of order)

TOTAL AMOUNT

ENCLOSED: $

CRYSKXS R
FOR WDS

fed

r i

I ]

fc.il

■■

SSI

Exploring the Chakras

Ways to balance energy and feel healthy.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-86-1
One Red Rose

Explores discrimination, judgment and the unity of
love.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-83-7
The Bridge Between TWo Worlds
Comfort for the “Star Children”
on Earth.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-85-3

Who’s Afraid of the Dark

Fearful Freddie learns to overcome fear with love.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-89-6

When the Earth Was New

Teaches ways to protect and care

for our Earth.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-91-8

The Angel Told Me to Tell You Good-Bye

A near-death experience heals this childs fear.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-84-5
A Circle of Angels

An in-depth workbook and teaching tool with exercis-
es and illustrations throughout.

$18.95 ISBN 0-929385-87-X
The 12 Universal Laws

A workbook for all ages about learning to live the
Universal

Laws. Exercises and illustrations throughout.

$18.95 ISBN 0-929385-81-0
Color Me One

Lessons in competition, sharing
and separateness.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-82-9
Crystals R for Kids
A workbook to teach the care
and properties of stones.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-92-6
Where Is God?

The story of a child who finds God
in himself and teaches others.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-90-X
Happy Feet

A child’s guide to foot reflexology, with pictures to
guide.

$6.95 ISBN 0-929385-88-8
Animal Tales

Learn about unconditional

love, community, patience and change from nature’s
best teachers — the animals.

$7.95 ISBN 0-929385-96 -9
All My Angel Friends

A coloring book and illustrative learning tool about
the angels who lovingly watch over us.

$10.95 ISBN 0-929385-80-2

The Little Angel Books

by Leia Stinnett

Delightful titles from StarChild Press.

Prices range from
$6.95 to $18.95.

P R

LIGHT*

1 - 800 - 450-0985 www.liglitteclinology.com

U.S.A

Printed Snbscriptien Along with
■cotronic Subscription • USA only

yr. . . . $59 □ 2 yr. . . . $109

Canada & Mexico

fj Email _

Gift Recipient Name

i Address,

t Cit y

Slate:

Get an Airmail Printed Subscription Along with j
an Electronic Subscription for only ■

, METHOD 0F PAYMENT:

CHECK # CJ M.O.

NOTE: The US Postal Service has changed postal rates, eliminating I “1
Canadian 2nd Class Surface and increasing all airmail rates. | — '

All Countries

Except USA, Canada & Mexico

Get an Airmail Printed Subscription Along with
an Electronic Subscription for only

0 1 yr. . . . $152 O 2 yr. . . . $285

NOTE: The US Postal Service has changed postal rates, eliminating global
2nd Class Surface and increasing ail airmail rates.

I MASTERCARD

CARD NO.

EXPIRATION DATE
SIGNATURE

Phone: 1-800-450-0985 • Fax:928-714-1132 .. . or visit www.sedonajournaI.com

Journal subscription

We are now making

ELECTRONIC

SUBSCRIPTIONS

available for the
Seoona Journal of Emergence!

We have now added content that will
not fit into the printed magazine!

• Get the entire Journal online by
subscription — and get it 2 weeks
before it goes on the newstand!

• Save on expensive freight or postage
on your Sedona Journal subscription!

Electronic Subscriptions

□ 1 yr. $29 a 2 yr. $55

All Electronic Subscriptions
must be purchased online at:
www.sedonaj oumal.com
to obtain username and password

Get the Best of Both Worlds!

Soecial Combo Offers!

Journal of EMERGENCE!

RDER NOW!

RECEIVE SPECTACULAR
SAVIN OS!

yes!

Send Me:

Printed and Mailed Subcrlptlens

Priority 1 st Class 2r Class

□ 2yrs (24 issues). . .$169 O 2yrs. . . $129 O 2yis. . . $79
C3 lyr (12 issues). . . $86 lyr. . . . $65 CJ lyr. . . .$43

AIR

^ d 2yrs (24 issues) $149

C3 1 yr (12 issues) $79

U.S. dollars only

NOTE: The US Postal Service has changed postal rates, eliminating
Canadian 2nd Class Surface and increasing all airmail rates.

AIR

□ 2yrs (24 issues) $255

O 1 yr (12 issues) $136

U.S. dollars only

NOTE: The US Postal Service has changed postal rates, eliminating
global 2nd Class Surface and increasing all airmail rates.

My Name

Address

City State: Zip:

Phone

TTTF, 1 ' ' ~ ' »

ANCIENT,, SECRET

TTTT

FLOI

OF/FHE v

ER QF $IFE

volS^t

nee, all life in the universe knew the! Flower of Life as the creation pattern

ft FT Mi.
runni i

minim
hi 1 hi n 1 1
. \{w m»i

inn

Mill

in,

the geometrical design leading Us into and out of physical existence
Then from a very high state of consciousness, we fell into darkness and
forgot who we were. For tl|pusands of years the secret was held in ancient arti-
facts and carvings around tl|e worlds and encoded in the cells of all life.

Now we are rising up from that sleep, shaking old, stale beliefs from our minds
and glimpsing the golden lidjjht of this new dawn streaming through the windows
Thisibook is one of those windows.

presents in text and graphics the first half of the
mutating the mysteries of how we came to be, why
the subtle energies that allow our awarenesses to

of perception

Here, Drunvaio Mejchizedel
Flower of Life Workshop, il
the world is the way it is an
blossom into its true beam

Sacred Geometry is the ford

benca
it ordi

from the

our reality. We can follow tl
finding purs elves at (each stei. The information
lines and drawings fie the feminine gems of

our being and points to a divine order in

he uwi:
tion he
intditiv

them sparkle arouitd some of these provocative ideas:

isible atom to the infinite stars,
re is one path, but between the
ive understanding. You may see

LbERWG OUBjj^NCIENT PAS]| I
owthe VdU of Atlrintis Changed Cfyir Reality

LOWER UnFOLOTc

The Secret oe th

Sacred Grtmictry, th
Jpe Hhi' eform Univ*

■ iTtkddARKEK Side
Our Endangered E,

l Seed of Life, the Star Tetrahedron ,
he, the Shifting of Earth’s Pedes

Our Present and Pastu

fih

’it'

How the Lemuriansi

th. Ice Age, the History ofmhc World

Consciousness,

When Evolution JJrashed and the ChrixtJ^rid Amlse

Evolved Human
the Martians’ E ate fml Decision, the PM He tar y Grid

t of Genes \

kf Shap

J ’t’s Role in t

% Rcsurrectio^gnd Asce:
Akhenatcn, the Star

i TtiE SIGNIFICANCE

The Torus, the Labyrinth, th
the Platonic Solids, the Livir,

Geometries (

(LeonardoWa Vi
>rawing 0 he Goldc%

Evolutii ’of Consciousness

Explore

geometry,

>tpc

iefi

on, the Brilliance of

d Struct

Igg of Life,
Crystals

jes cm the fff .MAN Body ^

inci^Canonfthc Mystery of thySlIason ’s
roldcfy Mean, Spirals, the Fibonacci Sequence,

■H

he Divirk Phi Ratio

tele of oiirpxistenqg by meandering l(hrough the wonderland of

visicfi of Dr
the Mer-R
knowledge

;|ence, ancient listory And new discoveryyseen througli the widened
valo ind the^Flower jof Life. Volume® Swill explore ip great detail

la, the 55-foot-diameter energy field
;ads to ascensifm and fie next dimens

the human lighjtbodv. This
ngl world.

Drunvaio Melchizedek’s life
experience reads like an ency-
clopedia of breakthroughs in
human endeavor. He studied
physics and art at the University
of California at Berkeley, but he
personally feels that his most
important education came after
college. In the last 25 years he
has studied with over 70 teach-
ers from all belief systems and
religious understandings, pro-
viding him with a wide breadth
of knowledge, compassion ^nd
acceptance. ^

Not only is Drunvalo’s mind
exceptional, but his heart, his
warm personality, his love for
all life everywhere, is immedi-
ately understood and felt by
anyone who meets him. For
some time now he has been
bringing his vast vision to the
world through the Flower of
Life program and the Mer-Ka-
Ba meditation. This teaching
encompasses every area of hu-
man understanding, explores
the development of mankind
from ancient civilizations to the
present time and offers clarity
regarding the world’s state of
consciousness and what is need-
ed for a smooth and easy t
tion into the 21st century.

EAN-978-189182417:

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The ancient secret of the Flower of Life Volume 1 : an edited transcript of the Flower of Life Workshop presented live to Mother Earth from 1985 to 1994"

See other formats